#li yongqin x reader | Explore Tumblr Posts and Blogs

jungwooisms · 2 years

Text

hwarang | kun

ACT III - THE END

pairing: qian kun x female!reader genre: historical au, fluff, angst, supernatural members: moon taeil, lee taeyong, nakamoto yuta, li yongqin (ten), jeong jaehyun, wong yukhei (lucas), xiao dejun (xiaojun), wong kunhang (hendery), huang renjun, na jaemin, lee donghyuck (haechan), osaki shotaro, warnings: crass humor and language, blood, violence, injuries, alcohol, major character death, minor character death, war, historical inaccuracies for the sake of plot progression word count: 43.2k it is important to read the prologue & act i & act ii first to understand the context of this! i can’t link it here but it’s on my masterlist!

June 7, 665 – Seonggwa Inn, Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla By the time that the Hwarang finish following King Munmu of Silla to Ungjin, they find themselves holed up in Seonggwa Inn, a relatively spacious lodging, as their king speaks of a treaty between his kingdom and the Tang. With each day, the Hwarang hope that the potential of invading Goguryeo due to their aiding and abetting with the now quelled Baekje forces becomes a reality.

Silla hadn’t lost the conflict with Baekje, without the aid of the Tang the story would be entirely different though. Yet, with their aid, it had begun to expose several rifts in both the Crown and the Hwarang in favor for or against the additional help.

The recent attack on Taeil’s life, as well as Yongqin’s illness, has confined both of them to staying with Doctor Namekawa Yasuo to treat them. So, while they don’t remain at the newest Hwarang headquarters, they still reside within Ungjin. Although present in spirit, some of the men have begun to notice their rather large absences…

“He’s probably just run off to not have to deal with this shit,” one of the warriors guffaws at the thought of Taeil not returning. A few others around him return the sentiment.

“He’d never do that,” a serious voice responds, you turn to see Jeno looking angrily at the group, “All of you are complaining instead of focusing on the work we have ahead of us.”

Normally such insubordination from a lower wang-do was met with harsh consequences, yet things had changed since coming to Ungjin.

“You all have too much to talk about, go sharpen your swords or train,” Yukhei adds to Jeno’s proclamation.

With grumbled acceptance, several of the Hwarang run off.

“I can see where they’re coming from… They’re tired, I suppose,” Jaehyun huffs out, shaking his head as he watches the other scurry away. “We’ve been sitting here without orders for weeks.”

“True, but I mean… What else are we going to do while Munmu’s off kissing up to the Tang?” Yukhei frowns, moving his head from side to side to crack his joints.

“Don’t give me that bullshit,” Jaehyun retorts, “These men were ready to die for him not too long ago, I’m pretty sure they just want to run out the loyalists and Goguryeo soldiers just like we do.”

“So…” Jeno murmurs, “What’s going to happen now?

“Taeil’s stuck in bed. Even if we wanted to run after the traitors, we’re not going to be able to touch them if we leave too late,” Yukhei sighs, his shoulders slumping. “Future’s looking pretty dark if we’re looking north… Maybe we oughta head to Jinro-dong again…”

“Jinro-dong?” Jaehyun’s brow furrows at the mention of the nightlife district, “Really? In a time like this?”

“Of course you idiot,” Yukhei scoffs, “Times like this are when we need to party hard! Gotta lift our spirits somehow!”

“Huh,” Sungchan, who’d been standing in the courtyard along you all quietly, asks, “Does anyone know where Yuta is? I haven’t seen him around lately…”

“He’s off helping Namekawa,” Jaehyun explains, “We still have a lot of injured men after the last fight.”

You frown, not saying anything. Memories of the peaceful times back in Seorabeol are like a candle flickering in the wind, one breath away from turning it all into smoke. Sometimes you have to ask yourself if they really had happened at all.

June 18, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla When you hear footsteps walking up the entranceway of the inn, you think it’s just another Hwarang returning from town until…

“Hello,” a soft voice greets, “It’s been a while.”

“Oh,” Your eyes widen upon looking up from your work and finding Kim Jungwoo standing before you. “Jungwoo… What brings you here?”

“I've come to discuss a few important matters with Kun, would you mind taking me to him?” He asks as his shoe slowly taps at the gravelly rocks underfoot.

Sometime after you lead him to the Commander’s quarters, murmurs of conversation suddenly become exclamation.

“Are you sure?!” Kun says angrily as you peer into the room.

“Yes,” Jungwoo nods solemnly, eyes trained on the floor, “Supposedly, an urgent matter has arisen, meaning he cannot meet with us.”

“… No.” Kun frowns as he shakes his head, “We need to talk to him. I don’t care how. If we don’t, we’re stuck here. I’ll go.” And with that, he storms towards you, toward the exit. He doesn’t acknowledge you as he goes, only looking as pensive as ever as he leaves the compound.

“Did something happen?” You ask Jungwoo, who’s gaze had risen to watch the Hwarang leave.

“Kun had planned to meet with a member of the king’s council today, but I’d been informed that the man hadn’t planned on showing up, so I came to notify him.” Jungwoo explains quickly.

The Commander has been attempting to gather council support to try and speed up the process of invasion, however their unwillingness to try and sway the king’s favor has led to them not entertaining Kun’s initiative means.

“Do you think they’re just waiting until Tang makes a call?” You question timidly.

“Whatever the case, the King has instructed me to not make any rash decisions,” Jungwoo hums, “Honestly, in times like these, I am a little envious of Kun as he can do as he pleases… Anyway, I will be leaving now. Please send my regards to everyone.”

“Oh, of course!” You say as you begin to walk with him towards the entrance. “I’m sorry that I couldn’t offer you more courtesy while you were here.”

Shortly after Jungwoo leaves the inn, a familiar figure approaches you to ask a question.

“Is the Commander inside?” Shotaro says as you stop outside the front door.

“Ah,” you shake your head, “You’ve just missed him, he’s stepped out for the time being… Did you have business with him?”

Shotaro’s eyebrows raise in surprise, “Wow, ever since we’ve gotten here, he’s been working non-stop.

“I know… I seriously wonder how he finds the time to sleep, if at all.” As far as you know, Kun should be suffering in agonizing pain during the daytime due to his condition as a Fury. However, seeing him work as tirelessly as he does, one would have no clue of his affliction at all.

“Are you okay, Shotaro? You look a bit more gaunt than usual…”

“Ah… Well… Ever since Minhyung passed away, I’ve had a lot more work to do.” Shotaro smiles sadly, “But he left it to me, and I’ll be damned if I dishonor his memory by messing it up. And seeing how far the Commander’s pushing himself for us, it wouldn’t feel right if I just sat around here all day, you know?”

“I see…” You know exactly how he feels, yet he’s actually in a position to contribute. Unlike Shotaro, there is nothing you can do for Kun, even though you yearn to be involved and do whatever you can to help.

“Well,” Shotaro nods briefly, “I’ve got plenty more to do, so I’ll be on my way.”

“Of course, please be careful.”

“By the way,” he’d begun walking before stopping himself, “There’s been a lot of killers on the street recently, looking to test their swords on a living body. Don’t travel alone, okay?”

Later that night, you’re waiting in the empty common room for the captains to return, sitting idly as your fingers tap atop the table you’re seated at when Na Jaemin comes strolling into the room.

“Evening!” He greets cheerily, moving to come over and sit beside you.

“Hey Jaemin,” you say politely, peering around him to see if anyone else has followed in behind him. “Where’s everyone else?”

“Yukhei and Jaehyun took the men to Jinro-dong, and, if you can believe it, they left me behind to house-sit.” He sighs out, resting his head on his chin, “I’m not their maid, you know. They can’t keep giving me this kind of bitch work… Well, I guess it’s nice that they’re acting like usual. To me, I mean. Like nothing ever changed.” His laugh sounds small in the empty hall.

“That reminds me, do you know where Taeyong is?” You tilt your head inquisitively as you ask. “Did he go out somewhere?”

“Yeah,” Jaemin sits up, nodding his head, “He went out on patrol.”

“Patrol?” You furrow your brow, “But we’re not in Seorabeol any more… No one’s asked us to keep peace in Ungjin…”

His face grows solemn, as if he’s quietly searching for words. “… He’s been acting weird lately. Like, today, soon as the sun went down, he said he was going on patrol. I asked if he wanted me to go with him but he said he’d be just fine on his own.”

“I’ve heard that there’s been a lot of killings at night recently, maybe he’s going out to try to learn about who or what’s causing it?” Taeyong may not have the same authority here that they had in Seorabeol, but they do still work for the Crown. Perhaps Taeyong’s just trying to protect Ungjin, regardless if he was asked to or not.

“…Well, if that’s the deal, then good.” Jaemin doesn’t sound fully convinced.

Just then, the door opens once more and Kun comes inside quietly.

“Good evening, Commander,” you greet him with a small smile.

“You’re still up?” His face is pale, but his tone is sharp. As you watch him, you can see that it looks as if he’s struggling to stand. He shakes slightly as he moves, and you get the feeling that if he were to let his concentration slip, he’d just simply collapse on the floor in front of you.

“Is there anything I can do to help?” You already know his answer, but you can’t help but to ask.

“No,” he shakes his head, “Just stay put, and stop thinking about that.”

Even though everyone else is working themselves thin, barely sleeping or eating, all you can do is sit around, useless.

“Hey… Don’t give me that look,” he says, noting your expression.

“I’m sorry!” You say quickly, only realizing after you’d spoken that you’ve only made things worse. And apologizing makes you sound all the more miserable.

Kun nearly chuckles, “You don’t need to worry about us. Just… go make some tea, alright? Your tea isn’t that bad, I guess.”

“Okay!” You rise to your feet, “I’ll be right back.” Your feet carry you to the kitchen, a slight smile curving along your lips.

You return to the common room some minutes later, a tray with three cups atop it, along with the hot teapot steaming into the night.

“I couldn’t find any yakgwa to go with it… but I was able to sneak a few of Taeil’s old snacks…” You say as you set the tray atop the table.

“It’s alright,” Kun sighs, now sitting down at the table. “I have to get back to work as soon as I drink this anyway.”

“Are you sure you’re going to be alright?” Jaemin frowns worriedly, “You’re a Fury now. You should be sleeping during the day and working at night.”

Kun doesn’t answer, just chooses to sip at his tea for a long drawn-out moment. “When we were leaving Daegaya, Taeil said something to me. He said that if he were the King, even if he only had two hundred men, he would continue to push forward for the legacy of our Kingdom, and if he failed? Gut himself like an honorable warrior.” He huffs out a short laugh, “Now he’s stuck in bed, shot in the shoulder. He’d die for any one of us, and we all know it. Sure, I feel like shit, but that doesn’t mean I get to rest.”

The prospect of handing over a fully-functioning Hwarang back to his friend brings a gleam to his eyes. If the rest of the men are worried because their leader has been wounded by a coward's arrow… Kun is buoyed by the fact that Taeil is still alive, and that he has the courage to do what other leaders will not. He finishes his tea quickly, returning to his room with only perfunctory thanks.

Yesterday, his light had stayed on late into the night. Today, you’re sure, will likely be no different.

“I’ve got an anxious feeling about what’s ahead…” Jaemin says after Kun’s left, “He’s a Fury, but it doesn’t look as if he’s started to feel the bloodlust yet.”

“Bloodlust?”

“When you become a Fury… Something happens to you and, well, sometimes you really, really want to drink blood. Like, you need to,” he explains slowly, “It hurts, and not like how it hurts when Jeong shoves a practice sword into your gut. You want to die, just because that’ll make the pain stop.”

Your mouth hangs open. Kun already looks terrible, if unbearable pain is suddenly added to his already long list of burdens… “Is there any way to do anything about it?”

“Well, if you drink some blood, then it goes away almost immediately, but… only for a while.” Jaemin sighs out, “And the longer you go, the more painful it gets. At first you only need a little blood to feel better, but after a while you need more. And pretty soon you’ll need a whole lot before you feel better again.”

You sit there at a loss for words. Furies truly do seem like the monsters from legends.

“What about you, Jaemin? Are you…?”

“Come on,” he closes his eyes, unable to look at you, “You can’t ask me that.” After this, he makes some manner of excuse and shoots up. He departs from the common room quietly, leaving you alone with your thoughts of the commander. Is he really okay?

Lost in thoughts, you stumble upon something—your father had done research on the Furies. Perhaps he’d left something useful behind at your home… or the one that used to be yours. It’s already too late to visit… And finding an escort will be troublesome enough…

June 25, 665 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla The following day, you leave a neatly written note behind at the inn for anyone who may be curious as to where you’re headed. It had only taken you a week, maybe less, to return to your home on the main roads… And it should take about that time to return.

It seems as if no one’s visited the home in several years, everything covered in a thick layer of dust. You hum to yourself, perusing the shelves and drawers for anything denoting your father’s research on the Furies. Hands brushing off a few books, you scan their contents only for them to reveal some barely legible scribbles that would take you forever to decipher.

‘No…’ You shake your head, this is the least you can do for the Hwarang.

After searching through several more books, you sit on the floor, sighing heavily as your eyes fall to the unkempt floor. Have you been foolish enough to think that this would work? That waltzing in, finding these secret documents and solving the Hwarang’s plague would be easy?

You frown, needing to rid these thoughts. So, you continue to flip through all the books and papers you can lay your hands on. As you skim through a large sheaf of papers a small stak falls onto the floor, dust flying upwards as it lands. It appears to be… some kind of formula?

“Huh?” You murmur, moving to place down the stack in your hands, reaching for the papers at your feet. Studying it, you realize what you’ve found. It details a mismade concoction your father had made after working with the Hwarang that could stop Furies’ bloodlust for a time. Maybe you’ve found something useful after all?

July 1st, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla You arrive in Ungjin just as the sun settles beyond the western horizon, and as you enter the Hwarang’s compound, you’re met with Jaemin and Taeyong. Their backs turned to you, you call out to them to make sure they can hear you.

“You’re back?” His brow raises inquisitively, as if he’d not known if you were coming back. “It’s dangerous out there, you know. You shouldn’t be out at night all by yourself.”

“I meant to come back earlier… The roads were… I lost track of time, is all,” You say quickly, trying to change the subject. “Anyway! I have something for you!”

You reach into your bag, procuring the medicine you were able to make from your father’s old supplies.

“What’s this?” Taeyong questions as he looks over the powdery substance.

“It’s medicine to suppress bloodlust! I went back home and found instructions on how to make it,” you nod enthusiastically, “It should make the pain go away, at least for a little while.

His gaze looks from the medicine to you, biting his lip coyly before looking into your eyes, “Thank you, but no. Your gesture is certainly appreciated, but it isn’t needed.”

“Huh?” You say, unable to stop the exclamation from leaving you, “Wait, but… without it…”

“You are not one of us, so to you the bloodlust may seem odd, or wrong.” He gingerly hands the powder back to you, “However, the more one tries to suppress it, the greater the pain becomes. This medicine would be a minor reprieve… nothing more.” Before you can say anything else, he nods to you, “Excuse me. I must leave for patrol. Good night.”

You wonder what he’s to do about his bloodlust without the medicine as you watch him walk briskly into the night. To not only acknowledge but accept this insatiable craving as a part of one’s life seems… beyond you. It’s now that you remember Seulgi’s warning of the Hwarang’s Furies murdering people on the streets to test their strength… Had they been feeding off of innocent lives?

“I’ll take that,” Jaemin says, looking down at the medicine.

“Oh!” You nod, handing it to him, “Of course.” He stuffs it into his pocket before staring at where Taeyong had just disappeared. “I’m going on patrol with him. If he… does anything weird, I’ll stop him. So don’t worry, alright?”

“Alright,” you nod quickly, “I’m counting on you, Jaemin… Is the Commander inside?”

“Yeah,” the Hwarang nods, “he came back earlier this evening, but he locked himself in his room. Not a peep from him since.”

“Oh…” You hum, “I’m going to check on him then.”

Jaemin and you say your quick goodbyes, and you make your way inside of the inn towards Kun’s room. You hope the wave of anxiety you feel is a needless one, but you have a very bad feeling as you call out to him from behind the door of his room.

A knock, “Are you in there? I have something for you…”

Nothing. “You’re about to turn away, assuming that he’s asleep when—

Kun cries out in pain, sounding as if he’s struggling for air.

“Commander—I’m coming in!” You blurt out, opening the door and running inside quickly.

Kun lays bent over his desk at the back of the room, sweat pouring down his face as his teeth squeak horribly as he grits them. His hair lay a stark white, his eyes, when he opens them to look at you, are a harsh crimson.

“Are you okay?!” You say as you rush to his side.

“You idiot.” He groans, “Just shut up.”

“But—”

“This’ll pass… any time now… Don’t get all worked up over nothing! Leave it.” He wraps his arms around his shoulders and squeezes until his knuckles turn white as he glances up at you. His breath comes out in pants as he shivers violently.

It’s Kun’s personality to refuse any show of pain, or any emotion at all—or at least to show as little as possible. For him to be like this…The pain must be unimaginable. Is this the bloodlust that Jaemin spoke of?

You pause, knowing that he needs blood but that’s… A frown as you think of the medicine, but again, Taeyong had said it was a temporary solution. Should you give him your blood, then?

There isn’t any time to think of this any longer. It’s not the best plan, perhaps, but you cannot bear to see him in pain any longer. Besides, this is one way that you can help.

Kun shakes fiercely as you gaze upon him in horror. Saying nothing, you draw the blade at your waist.

“What the hell are you—?!” Kun’s eyes go wide as you slide your finger along the edge of the blade, a bead of thick blood forming over the cut.

“Please drink my blood,” you offer your hand to him, “It’ll make you feel better, right?”

“I can’t do that!” He refutes, his clothes drenched in sweat as he shakes like a leaf in the wind. If he had the strength you’re sure he’d try to knock your hand away.

“Don’t worry about me,” you insist, unable to watch him suffer any longer, “Please…”

Though he’s trying to resist, his eyes are locked on your finger, to the blood dripping to the floor. He balls his fist tightly, but he cannot resist.

“You’re an idiot,” he murmurs, reaching out for your hand, “A girl shouldn’t hurt herself for a man’s sake…” Then, he brings your fingers to his lips, you wince slightly as you feel the soft caress of his tongue on your cut. Then, the gentle pressure of his teeth and lips as he sucks, drawing a few more drops out and into his mouth.

“I’ll be fine,” you promise, “I’m a Demon. I heal quickly.”

“Doesn’t matter,” he frowns, “Demon or not, you’re still a girl.” By now, his breathing has already begun to calm itself; through his hand on your wrist, you can feel him stop shaking as well. A few moments later, his grasp on your wrist loosens and he slips his hand away.

The cut on your finger has already healed. The split in the flesh heals before your very eyes as you stand there quietly, Kun wincing.

“I’m sorry for being so forward…” You apologize, returning your hand to your side.

Kun takes a quiet breath and shakes his head, a sense of calm seems to emerge from him, “This isn’t the time to be pretending that I’m fine. I know that. If I want to make sure that Taeil succeeds, then I don’t have a choice. I have to become a monster.”

Absently, you move your fingers to the wrist he’d taken when he drank your blood. A peculiar feeling lingers on the surface of your skin, almost as if you can still feel his warmth there.

September 10th, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla Even after the events of that fateful night, Kun had pushed himself just as hard as he had before; he still continues to visit the council members whenever he can find the time. Eventually, that work does pay off, and he’s found himself in several meetings with the King’s closest men.

Between his demanding schedule and Fury-related difficulties, you know he must be miserable, but you know that he’s determined to give Taeil his fight. This alone seems to drive him forward.

It’s a cool evening when the doors of the compound open and Moon Taeil walks confidently into the Hwarang’s main hall.

“I apologize for worrying you all,” he smiles, scratching the back of his head.

“Welcome back!” Both Sungchan and Jeno say excitedly, “We’re happy you’re back with us.”

“You flatter me,” Taeil laughs, “But in all seriousness… Thank you. I am truly grateful that I am able to join you all again.” His eyes scan the room of men, nodding as he does, “I’m sure you’re all wondering what’s next. First, we’ll head to Hanseong. We’ve been ordered to take the city.”

Prior to this, you’d heard that Taeil has almost been promoted to a position outside of the Hwarang, while Kun has basically taken over Taeil's old role as Chief.

It’s a momentous honor to have been bestowed, although you can see that some of the men are hesitant to find cause for celebration.

“Hey, Moon,” Yukhei says from his seated position, “Who came up with the idea of us sieging Hanseong?”

“Kim Yong, why?” Taeil looks at him quizzically, “Is that a problem?”

“This guy is rumored to be a pacifist,” Yukhei pushes, “Why does he want us to go to war?”

“Besides,” Jaehyun adds, “I’ve heard that the King is perfectly willing to just go along with whatever the Tang forces want. You don’t think Kim feels the same way?”

Taeil crosses his arms before he speaks, “Wong, Jeong, these are direct orders from the King’s council. It’s true that the King is following the influence of the Tang, but to be fair, he owes them a great amount of debt. However, if we can take Hanseong, then perhaps he’ll see that he won’t need to rely on their aid as much as we drive out Goguryeo. This isn’t just a matter of winning and losing; the men in charge are saying that we are a force skilled and dedicated enough to capture Hanseong.” His voice sharp, domineering, “Isn’t our duty as warriors, then, to give all we can to this fight? Don’t you agree, Yukhei?”

“You’re going to gloss over it like that?” Yukhei scoffs, “I’m a captain of the Hwarang, but I’m not your retainer.”

Looking upset, Taeil moves to speak before Jaehyun interjects, “Yuta… what’s your take on all of this?”

“I will do whatever is commanded of me.” He says simply.

All eyes turn to Kun, who’s been observing the amicable commotion before him quietly, “We should round up more men if we’re to go to war. If we do well in Hanseong, I’m sure the Crown will send us even more men. As far as Kim goes… Doesn’t matter how much he hates war, I’m sure he knows that you cannot avoid it.” His head shakes as he sighs out, “I mean, if he refuses Tang influence at this point, what’s the point of staking out Goguryeo? What’s the point in seeking out revenge?”

“I guess you have a point,” when Kun had put it that way, it seems like Yukhei has nothing more to oppose.

“Shall we head out for the mountains near Hanseong and prepare for night raids?” Taeyong asks.

“The Fury Corps aren’t going this time,” Kun states, “You’re staying here.”

“Why?” Taeyong frowns.

“If the King does send us reinforcements, I can’t afford to let them see you.” Kun adamantly shakes his head, “There’s going to be significantly more men in Hanseong, you’ll get spotted. Then what’ll be the point of having a secret division?”

“But—!” Taeyong begins to retort until Jaemin stops him.

“The war’s only just begun… We shouldn’t be in a rush.”

You see Kun and Jaemin exchange a quick look. They must have realized how Taeyong would react and spoke of this beforehand. To you, at least, there seems to be a silent agreement.

“Alright then, everyone return to your rooms. We have some time before we leave so make sure you get your affairs in order,” Taeil stands as he addresses the room.

And that’s that. The captains soon leave for their stations, seeking to brief their men and prepare for battle. Only Kun remains behind, mumbling something to himself as he sifts through the massive stacks of paper and maps before him.

“Are you sure it’ll be okay?” You ask timidly as you approach him.

“Hm?” He glances up to you, “What will be okay?”

“This war… It’s not going to just be one battle, is it?” You frown, “Wouldn’t it have been better to take the Fury Corps along?”

“Oh.” He sighs, “That.” The map in hand set down, he glances at it before looking back to you, “Remember what that Sooyoung girl, or whatever her name was, warned us about the Furies killing people?”

“Yes…”

“Well. I think it might’ve been Taeyong.” He says shortly as your mouth flies open.

“What?!”

“The Fury Corps is our ace in the hole,” he continues, ignoring your short outburst, “but I can’t have them murdering people in the streets to satisfy their bloodlust. During the fight in Seorabeol they used silver arrowheads on the Furies, which made them essentially useless. Until we can figure out how to counteract the silver problem, I need to have Taeyong stay here. Jaemin will… keep an eye on him. We also may need them to collect arms for a counterattack.”

A counterattack… Does that mean Kun is planning for a possible loss in Hanseong?

“This next fight is going to be a big one. We probably shouldn’t take you, but… If I leave you here, Donghyuck might decide to try and steal you away again. So, I’m taking you with us, but you need to watch yourself and stay out of trouble.”

With the nervous knot slowly forming in your stomach, you nod, “Okay…”

October 31st, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla Today, the Hwarang leave for Hanseong. And as you enter the common room, you take note of the different outfits the men have donned.

“You’re up early,” Yukhei muses, beckoning you over.

“Your clothes…” Your brow furrows at him, “Are you really Yukhei?! What are you wearing?”

“The Commander ordered us to dress in Tang clothing when going into battle from now on,” Yuta explains as you look over his new uniform as well.

You look at the Commander, dressed predominately in black, his new outfit giving him an elegant look. It suits him well, he looks almost as handsome as an actor. You can’t help but stand there and admire him for a moment.

“Something wrong?” Kun asks as he notes your prolonged gaze, “…Do you think I’m wearing it wrong?”

“Hm? Oh. No. No, definitely not.”

He laughs, “You’re strange.”

“Hm,” you shake your head and your eyes fall on Taeil, “Why aren’t you wearing Tang clothes?”

“They’re just so… heavy.” Taeil explains, “I can’t stand how the shoes are made either. I wouldn’t feel like a real warrior dressed like that. I suppose I’m being childish, but that’s my right.”

“You’re fine,” Kun smiles, “It’s not like you’ll be out on the front lines. You just have to act dignified in front of the men. Your presence alone is enough to inspire everyone.”

“You’re going to make me blush,” Taeil sounds flustered before speaking to the men, “Well, let’s go then! To Hanseong!”

November 11th, 665 – The Road North, Kingdom of Silla/Goguryeo And so, the Hwarang are headed north. During the journey, Taeil splits from the main group to visit his hometown somewhere east of the border. And after several days of his absence, the men begin to worry.

“Where is he?” Yukhei notes as the men stop along a rocky path, his eyes looking up the walkway and behind to where they’d come.

“It seems as if the Chief hasn’t caught up with us yet…” Jeno trails off, a frown of worry present on his lips.

“Still? How long is he going to sit around that inn getting drunk?” Yukhei says impatiently.

“Well, he probably hasn’t been home in a while,” Jaehyun snorts, “Probably wants to show off how successful he’s been. Not to mention he probably wants to visit his wife and daughter. He hasn’t seen them in a long time.”

“Show off, huh?” Yukhei shakes his head, “We’re marching to war. You really think this is the time for that shit?”

“He’s gone to see if the rumors of people wanting to join us were true, if they are, he needs to assess their abilities,” Kun interjects. “What better way to get to know new soldiers than by sharing a drink with them?”

“You have a point… but…”

Kun’s eyes narrow and Yukhei looks unsatisfied as the commander mutters to himself, “If we had gotten enough men before we left, then Taeil wouldn’t be out there right now.” His words cut the air like a knife.

The Hwarang had made a name for themselves in Seorabeol, but their notoriety can only carry them so far. You no longer have the luxury of interviewing potential recruits and taking the best ones; now, you need to offer incentives of alcohol and money to attract them. You know Kun would have rather cut off his own arm than stoop this low, but he has no choice.

From down the path, you can see Yuta rearing towards the group atop his horse, stopping shortly before you and leaping off, “Commander, I have something to report—The enemy has called reinforcements to Hanseong.”

“What? How did they know we were coming…” Kun frowns, “We’ve got to relay this to Taeil as soon as possible.”

November 14th, 665 – Outside of Hanseong, Kingdom of Goguryeo It’s some time before the Chief receives the message and returns to the main group of Hwarang. Long enough for the news of the enemy threat to spread and causation for some to panic. Nearly fifteen hundred of the men you’d left Ungjin with desert, reducing your forces to a mere two thousand. Jaehyun and Yukhei seem only more cautious at this, both advising retreat. But Taeil decides that the Hwarang will form up for battle and fight until the bitter end.

Now that the Crown had given him direct orders, he said that there cannot be any hesitance.

“I’ll call in reinforcements from Ungjin,” Kun frowns, “One thing for sure is… We cannot afford to lose this. Make that damn clear to the reinforcements, we can’t afford to have any more deserters.”

“Of course,” Yuta nods, turning and jogging off to join the rest of the men.

After giving his directions to the last of his men, Kun looks to you.

“Go back to Ungjin with someone. This place will turn into a battlefield soon enough, and you should be somewhere safe.” The tone in his voice shows no room for you to question his call.

“I’ll stay here…” You eventually conclude, “I can’t run away to somewhere safe while everyone else is off fighting. I’ll stay here to watch over the Chief until you get back.”

Kun grimaces, “How? You can’t swing a sword to save your life, and I don’t think you’ve got the guts to kill a man. You’re not a soldier.” You’d expected him to say as much, but you’re not going to back down easily.

“It’s true that I’m not very good with a sword, but… I can still be his shield. Any small wounds I sustain will heal quickly enough.”

“Why are you doing this? No one’s asked you to,” Kun stares at you, seeing that your resolve isn’t shaken.

“I know I may be out of line when I say this, but I know that we can’t lose him. Not now.” You insist, “I’m sick and tired of always being protected, I want to help!” You’ve been with them long enough now to see how much Taeil means to Kun and the rest of the Hwarang. If you go back to Ungjin and Taeil dies… Just thinking of it makes a cold chill crawl up your spine.

Kun chews his lip thoughtfully for a moment, and his hard, piercing gaze never seems to drift away from your face. Refusing to break his concentration for a long moment, he sighs.

“If you’re really that serious about this, then I’ve got an order for you,” he crosses his arms, “As a member of the Hwarang.”

“What…?” Your eyebrows shoot up.

“You’re going to guard Taeil personally. Stay by his side and give him anything he asks for.” After awaiting your baffled response he continues, “…And?”

“Yes! Sir!” Without thinking, you straighten up and nod vigorously.

“I will protect him even if it means my li—” Before you can finish, Kum cuts you off with a sharp expression.

“There’s one condition. You can’t die.” That isn’t the sort of thing you’d expect him to say. ‘Be careful’, maybe, but not ‘You can’t die’. “And don’t do anything stupid, like being his shield, or whatever bullshit you were saying. I am not ordering you to die.” He gives you one last pointed look before turning to gaze bitterly at the walls of Hanseong in the distance.

“If our enemy this time turns out to be a bunch of amateurs who’re just hoping to kiss some ass with their king, we might have a chance,” he muses. “If it’s not… That’ll be a different story. I’ll try and get back as fast as I can, but if something happens before I do, I’m counting on you and Yuta to make sure Taeil gets away clean.” Kun then looks back to you, “And none of this shield shit. You escape with him. Die, and I’ll make sure you regret it. Understood?”

You feel a cold sweat on your back as his words sink their way into your skin. You’d seen others fight for their lives in battle many times, but this is the first that you’d actually be joining. Will you really be able to protect Taeil? Will it even be possible to evade your enemies, let Taeil escape and survive?

Perhaps Kun notices your sudden fear as he lets out a short, bitter laugh, “Hey. Take out your sword.”

“Huh?” You ask, stunned for a moment by the strangeness of his request before complying and unsheathing your blade from its scabbard.

Kun then moves to swiftly remove his from his hip, taking his steel and tapping it against your own. The clear tone they make draws goosebumps from your arms.

“The third rule of O Gye is to trust your friends and treat them sincerely…”

“O- Oh…” You furrow your brow. The O Gye is the set of principles that the Hwarang have followed since their inception, why is he…

“You’re a Hwarang now… Well,” he chuckles, “I suppose you’d be a Wonhwa, wouldn’t you? Regardless, this is proof.”

“Proof of what?” You ask as he smiles gently at you.

“That I’ll come back, that you can trust that I will return and that I can trust that you’ll survive too.” He lowers his blade, slipping it back into its sheath, “So you believe me, and you wait. And don’t die.” His words are confident, and listening to him, you feel as if they somehow have bolstered your spirit tenfold.

As someone who prides himself on being a Hwarang, you know these words, the O Gye, mean a great deal to him. You have to follow through, you can’t break this newly formed promise with him.

“I understand,” you nod, “I will protect the Chief and I will survive.”

November 27th, 665 – Outside of Hanseong, Kingdom of Goguryeo Slowly, the Hwarang find themselves driven into a stalemate. Taeil had done his best to try and tell the men they were to slowly siege the city, to draw them out and have them surrender on their own terms to protect the area around Hanseong from becoming bloodied with battle. Unfortunately, one of the new recruits had cried out that he was a Hwarang and slain a Goguryeo soldier.

That was the spark that set the pile ablaze. The bulk of the opponent’s forces turned out to be men who’d come from the hardened battle lines of Goguyeo’s northern fronts, meaning they’d been in near constant battle with the Tang for years. It quickly becomes stalemated as the days progress. Taeil has no choice now but to retreat until forces from Ungjin arrive.

“We have to go!” You cry out as Taeil emerges from his tent, “If we don’t, you’ll be killed if Goguryeo breaks through our lines!”

“My men are still fighting out there!” He states firmly, “I cannot run away and leave them, I will not leave them behind!”

“Even if we lose this battle now, we have reinforcements coming later, and as long as you’re safe, there’s still hope for the Hwarang—” You insist as you walk with him, “We can regroup and fight back later!” You reach for his hand, pulling him as hard as you can toward the path away from the city.

Taeil looks across the battlefield at his men, hopelessly entrenched in lines that will never break or push through. The smell of death from both allied and enemy corpses stings your noses. Looking at him, you can see tears well up in the corners of his eyes. He lowers his gaze, murmuring something as Yuta returns from the front lines.

Yuta’s steely expression is colored by streaks of mud and grit from the battlefield, “Are you prepared to leave?” He notes the bags around your and Taeil’s backs, “Good. Let’s go.”

“Let’s go quickly…” You say, urging Taeil forward.

“Right…” He sighs out and begins to walk once more.

Running into the nearby forest, you escape into it under the cover of the quickly encroaching night.

“We’ll be in Silla territory soo,” you say as you look at Taeil, “Hang in there.”

“Right…” He sighs once more.

Perhaps it’s because you’ve never seen him lose before, but this is the first time you’ve seen Taeil so… drained.

“I’m sorry for being so, um, forward…” He eventually says, “I let so many of my men die…”

“You can’t beat yourself up over that now.” You say, trying to rid him of the thought, “Like the Commander said, we just don’t have what it takes to beat them right now.” Your words don’t seem to reach him as he continues to stare numbly beyond you.

“Perhaps if someone else were Chief… they might still be alive…”

“Taeil…” You let his name slip from your lips, forgetting the last time you’d referred to him by his name, not his family’s.

“Who’s there?” Before you’re able to console him any more, you hear a voice coming from the brush that sounds unfamiliar to you. Peeking out, you catch the sight of a Goguryeo soldier and freeze immediately. “I know you heard me.”

Yuta, who’d been staring intently out to where the soldier stands, murmurs, “I’ll buy you some time. Take the Chief and escape.”

Nodding quickly, you and Taeil tiptoe away through the brush, trying your best not to make any noise. Just as soon as you’re able to get Taeil moving at a decent pace, a shadow leaps out before you, barring your way forward.

“I had a feeling you might be here…” The figure of Xiao Dejun murmurs before you. Instinctively, you step backwards, unease writhing in your stomach as you wonder if Lee Donghyuck is nearby.

“Wasn’t he with the Goguryeo army in Seorabeol?” Taeil asks as you slowly nod your head. “Then we can no longer escape… I need to take responsibility for the men I’ve lost. Will you go on without me?”

“What…?” You look at him puzzled, “I can’t do that!”

Dejun had remained silent for the short exchange, but now he speaks up, “Yes, I do work with their forces. But I have been given no orders regarding the Hwarang.” His eyes shift to you, “My only business here is with her.”

“Me?” Your brow furrows as he crosses his arms.

“Donghyuck is… vexed by you, and that commander of yours. He disregards the kingdom’s wishes and does as he pleases, not as he is ordered. Yeon Gaesomun is troubled, to say the least. And for now, we don’t wish to cut our ties with Goguryeo quite yet.” The light in his eyes promises violence, and his body tightens as his hand rests on the hilt of his sword, ready to make good on whatever promise he’d made. With a swift flourish, he relinquishes his blade from its sheath and narrows his eyes at you, “And for that, you must die here.”

With shaky hands, you reach for your blade, already knowing you’re no match for the Demon.

“He’s after me,” you look frantically to Taeil, “Only me. You need to escape!”

“But—!” Taeil says, panic riddling his expression.

“I’ll be fine,” you try to reassure him with a small smile. “The Hwarang need you now more than ever, you can’t abandon them.”

His mouth hangs slack for a moment, speechless. Then he shuts his jaw and draws his sword,“No matter the reason, an honorable warrior cannot run away and leave a woman to fight alone.” Despite your protest, he gets into a fighting stance, slowly closing the distance between Dejun and himself. His face calm and serene, you don’t see any hesitation in his eyes, “My recklessness has seen many of my men to their death, I don’t want it to lead another away.”

You’d seen this same expression on Jisung’s face just before he’d died on Donghyuck’s blade. Taeil’s mind has already been made.

“I am Moon Taeil, Chief of the Hwarang!” With his sword held high, he charges Dejun.

The intense force of their clash sends a shockwave rippling through the air. The clangor of metal rings out and the two part.

“You challenge me knowing that you cannot win, for the sake of someone who cannot defend themselves…” Dejun almost lets a smile creep onto the corner of his lips, “Your actions are worthy of respect.”

Taeil swings at his last word, Dejun sliding away as if he’s made of water. His hand outstretches and grabs the metal of Taeil’s blade, pushing the hilt of it into the Chief’s stomach.

As Taeil groans out, falling towards the ground, Dejun flips him around so that he slams directly onto his back.

“I’ve knocked most of the air out of him. He won’t be able to move for quite some time,” Dejun glances at Taeil writhing on the ground and then looks at you. “You’re next. Do not blame me for what I have to do.”

Raising his blade, he charges at you, kicking you in the stomach as you have no time to dodge his attack. Feeling like your whole body is about to shatter, you endure the pain just a bit more and struggle to your feet.

“You just saw the difference in our power… Are you sure you still want to put up a fight?” He asks, looking at the blade locked tightly in your grip. Noticing that you’re not budging, he nods, “Very well. I’ll humor you, then.”

Giving a huff, you readjust your grip on your sword and rush at Dejun. However, he evades your attack with no effort. You murmur to yourself how you need to change your movements, and begin to swing rapidly at him. Yet, once again, his elegant technique moves him out of the path of your blade. No matter how many times you charge and slash at him, there’s no way you’ll even scathe him. It’s not until his leg moves and kicks your arm with the force of a falling boulder that you move again.

The pain is so immediately overwhelming, you drop your blade to the forest floor, crying out in pain as you fall to the ground. Your knees skim across the dirt, digging into the earth and scraping your skin. Your brain screams at you to move, to fight, but the roar of your surely broken arm drowns it out almost entirely.

“This fight is done,” Dejun says quietly, “Don’t worry, I’ll make it quick.”

Your eyes close as you hear him approach, and a myriad of thoughts runs through you. An apology to Kun, first and foremost, he’d told you to survive and now you’re doing everything but. A tear carves its way down the side of your cheek as you wait for the blow to hit you.

“Giving up so soon?” A voice says calmly, “The Hwarang don’t stop fighting until they’re dead. The only thing on your mind right now should be how you’re going to out-think this idiot.”

That voice…

Your head raises and eyes shoot open just in time to see Kun leap through the air and land a strike with his sword on Dejun’s arm.

“You!” Dejun says as he recoils.

“I thought I’d only be fighting soldiers out here… Guess I’ll be taking care of a Demon, too,” Kun huffs, his white hair glimmering in the moonlight.

“Have you learned nothing since your fight with Donghyuck?” Dejun huffs, “A Fury is a mere echo of a true Demon. No matter how powerful you may think yourself, you cannot defeat us.”

Kun lets out a short laugh, “Never know until you try…”

“Only bloodshed will satisfy you… Very well.” Dejun raises his sword, “I’ll be your opponent.” Giving him a short nod, Dejun once again falls easily into a ready stance.

Kun’s blade flickers through the air, a little more than a glint of silver in the moonlight. Dejun blocks it with his own sword, dodging away from the attack. With his brow furrowed, Kun braces himself for the pushback that Dejun does, using the momentum against the commander to shove him back.

Kun’s face twists as his feet slide back into the dirt. Be it his Fury-born strength or his adrenaline- he surges forward after a split second, charging toward Dejun. His blade leaps forward, burying itself into the Demon’s chest. Blood flies from the gash, splashing across Kun’s face.

A startled noise falls from his mouth and he jerks back, pulling his sword from the wound. No sooner had it been out does the wound begin to close.

“Right…” Kun shakes his head, “You heal quickly, don’t you? It’s straight through the heart or not at all, huh?” His sword shines with the sheen of fresh blood, “I’ve got you figured out, though. I know how you move. You’re tough, but you’re not impossible.”

Drenched in blood, Kun looks more monster than human, his eyes wide and hungry. There’s something terrifying and inhuman about his expression as he whips his sword through the air.

Dejun leaps back, Kun’s sword almost catching his hand as he does so. Jabs and parries, feints and counter-feints… The battle flows between them like a living thing; it changes, moving too fast for any mortal eye to track. Neither of the two men show any sign of tiring as they dodge and attack in ways that would be unthinkable for any human.

Even in the maelstrom of death and violence, you can see Kun smiling.

The smell of blood hangs heavy in the air, and his grin speaks of a Fury’s lust for death.

“I never imagined a Fury could match me in battle…” Dejun murmurs as the two part, “You are unexpected. This power, though, what will you do with it?”

“What?” Kun says, confused. “Protect those I care for. What other reason could there be for wanting power?”

“Those you care for… Would you count Silla among that number?”

“No… This is bigger than the Kingdom. They can’t compare.”

Dejun closes his eyes and stays silent for a moment. What’s gotten into him? Why had he stopped fighting?

This would be a perfect time to strike, right?

Just as you think to pick up your blade and move toward him, you feel a hand on your shoulder, “Stay back.” Yuta, who you hadn’t heard return, stops you despite your protest. “That Demon no longer thirsts for blood. This battle is over.”

“Demons are not meant to involve themselves in the world of humans,” Dejun states as he opens his eyes to stare at Kun, who’d lowered his sword. “Now that you’ve become a Fury, you belong in the shadows as well.”

“Yeah.” Kun says shortly, “I’m not interested in my name being written in the annals.”

“If you understand that, I shall leave the rest to you.” Dejun shakes his head, “Donghyuck is proud, even for a Demon. If you have indeed humiliated him, I doubt he will ever forgive you. It is unlikely that you will defeat him… However, if there is something you wish to protect, then please… use the powers you’ve been granted to do so.”

In his own stoic way, Kun looks as confused as you feel. Can Dejun be trusted?

“There is one more thing I must tell you…” Dejun warns, “The power of the Furies is not magic, or a gift from the gods. Great strength, lightning speed, and mortal wounds that close themselves… This power was already within you, but had you stayed human you would have spent it in decades, not minutes. You are only borrowing these things.”

Your fingernails dig into your palms at the realization. By ‘borrowing’, does he mean that when Kun taps into the speed and strength of a Fury, he’s picking away at his future—his life?

“So you’re saying that every time I use that stuff, my life gets a little shorter?” Kun asks and Dejun nods. The commander lets out a short laugh, “Makes sense. Seemed too good to be true. Guess it’s only natural that I’d have to trade something for this kind of power.”

“Then I will be on my way…”

“Hold on. I want to ask you something.” Kun stops him before he can run off, “You sure you want to let us get away? If you don’t kill me now, I’m pretty sure I’ll end up killing your friend.”

“If you defeat him, then that was all he amounted to.” Dejun states plainly, “We Demons are not sentimental.” Then, with a last polite nod, he disappears into the night,

With his enemy gone, Kun slumps and takes a long, deep breath.

“Are you alright?” Your voice comes out quietly as you look at him.

“Fine. Where’s Taeil?”

“Over there,” Yuta gestures as Kun runs off toward the Chief.

“Are you okay?” Kun asks as Taeil looks at him wide-eyed, “Are you hurt?”

“Kun… you…” With Kun standing before him, his white hair and red eyes bright in the moonlight, he looks as if he’s seen a ghost. A Fury.

“Oh…” Kun begins but looks away, almost guiltily.

Staring at him a moment before speaking again, Taeil notes in a soft, stunned voice, “Are you… a Fury?”

“Uh, yeah.” Kun admits, “I didn’t have a choice, alright? It was for the Hwarang,”

For a moment, he sounds composed, but as you look closer you can see that he’s desperately avoiding Taeil’s gaze. Not being able to bear looking him in the eye.

Everyone is silent for a moment before the first raindrop hits you, taking you by surprise.

“…It’s starting to rain…” Kun sighs, “We need to get back to Ungjin and reorganize. We need to discuss our next move.”

“Right,” you nod, reaching out to tug at Taeil’s sleeve, “Come on, we need to hurry.” Taeil simply stands there, almost as if he’s forgotten how to walk. “Is something wrong?” It begins to rain harder yet he doesn’t budge.

Rain runs down his cheeks to his chin, or are they tears?

“What…” He murmurs, “What have I been doing…? Today I sent men—men who trusted me—into battle. They died. And I’ve made you,” his gaze flickers to Kun, “a man I’ve known for years, into a Fury. A monster…”

“Taeil…” Kun’s brow furrows at him, “What is this? No one blames you. We were able to take the city because Wen Junhui’s forces showed up— No matter how good of a tactician you are, we couldn’t have taken Hanseong alone.” He shakes his head, “I made bad calls too, and it got Jisung and Minhyung killed. We cannot change the past. What we can do is turn this around and keep fighting with our all. Besides, I don’t regret becoming a Fury.”

He laughs shortly, “Hell, I’m stronger and faster than I ever was, and I can use that to help you out. Nothing could make me happier.”

Rain pours onto their faces. Surely it’s in your imagination, but for a moment, it almost looks as if Kun is crying. Taeil stares at him for a long moment, then finally draws himself together.

“I’m sorry,” Taeil shakes his head with a small smile, “I was being foolish. Forget what I said.” Something in his voice tells you that even he doesn’t quite believe that.

December 2nd, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla The Hwarang had returned to Ungjin. Rejoining with your friends and the rest of the men who had stayed behind feels bittersweet. Your mind often turns to Taeil, who expectedly remains disconsolate after his first defeat on the battlefield.

Even after the attempts to rouse him, he spends most of his time in his quarters, moping. The man who had come in only hours after the Hwarang had given up their position in Hanseong, Wen Junhui, would be arriving in Ungjin any day now. His victory over the Goguryeo forces had been a swift undertaking, something of a thorn in the Chief’s side.

You think of this future meeting as someone brushes past you just as you’re about to begin lighting the lanterns outside of the headquarters.

“Oh– Yuta? Are you off to work?”

The man gives you a curt nod, “When you have a moment, could you make some tea and bring it to Kun?” Without waiting for a response, he gives you a small smile and scurries off.

Yuta had never been a talkative man in your presence, or anyone’s, really. Yet he’d lately taken on a taciturn demeanor. Is he still upset by the events from Hanseong…? Or maybe…

The day after the large posse had returned to Ungjin, you awoke the next morning to Yukhei and JAehyun loitering around the main hall, their gear and belongings tucked away into haphazardly made bags.

‘We’ve made up our minds’ you recall Yukhei saying, a dimness in his voice that you would have never attributed to him prior to that meeting. ‘Our path isn’t Taeil’s. I don’t think we can follow him anymore.’

It was a blurry goodbye after that, and you suspect that you’re not fully over their departure, either. Of course, you’ve only known them for a few years, not the lifetime it seems that they’ve had with the other men.

Along with their departure, Yongqin had been moved to Sabi, a southern town known for its medicinal practices. Finding his room empty left you feeling bereft as well.

One by one, the group that you’d come to find as a second family is slowly falling apart.

As you light the last lantern you sigh to yourself and decide to go make tea, as requested by Yuta.

The tray remains sturdy in your grasp, even if you can hear the ceramic clinking against itself as you approach the Commander’s door, “Good evening, I’ve brought you tea…” As you speak, you open the door, stopping almost immediately as the gazes of Kun, Jaemin and Taeyong fall onto you.

Their conversation must’ve been important judging by the hardset lines carved into their expressions.

“I’m sorry!” You say quickly, “I hadn’t realized that you were in the middle of a meeting.” Feet trailing backwards, you’re almost out of the room when Kun speaks up.

“You can stay.”

His words halt your movement and Taeyong piques your interest as he looks back to Kun, glaring, “You cannot possibly be serious about this! Why would you halt the augmentation of the Fury Corps?!”

“I am serious,” Kun’s attention turns from you and once back to his comrade. “I will not have any more men being turned into Furies. Make do with what you have.”

“I apologize but I cannot support your decision. The Hwarang’s power is at an all time low, even if Silla is standing against Goguryeo and winning– I think that expanding the Fury Corps to keep this fight pushing forward is our only option.” Taeyong’s voice is a strained composure as he grits his teeth and continues, “Jaemin told me that Yukhei and Jaehyun have left. That is a serious blow to us, Kun.”

“You saw what happened in Hanseong– Even if we recruit more, they’ll run off on us. Wasting our effort on pitiful men like that is foolish. Would it not be better to focus on those who have abided by our code? Who understands what it means to be a Hwarang?”

Jaemin looks to the floor, his shoe gently tapping the boards underneath. He’s been silent since you arrived, but you can clearly see that he isn’t agreeing with Taeyong fully.

“You make several good points, Taeyong.” Kun frowns, his arms crossing, “If we want increased strength, the best way to attain that is through the Fury Corps.”

“Then why–!” Taeyong begins.

“There’s a problem with the Furies. A big one. We only just found out about it and our source is,” Kun glances at you briefly, “reliable.” With your eyes widening at what’s to come, you can only look at Jaemin's and Taeyong’s faces as he divulges what Dejun had told you.

“The power of a Fury comes from your… potential. The more you use it, the shorter your life becomes.”

Taeyong’s gaze, usually cool and calculating, goes awry as he processes. From his standing position he falls to his knees, hitting the wood with a thud. A surge of realization of his powerlessness registers within him.

“Yeah,” Kun’s voice falls into a somber lull, “We shouldn’t be using the Furies unless we really have to.”

After several long moments of silence, Taeyong raises his head to speak, “Then that is yet another reason why the research must continue.” He pushes himself from the floor, brushing off his knees and looking at Kun, “It is a flaw, yes, and a serious one. But with more research… We may find a way to circumvent, or even counteract, it entirely. As a Fury, you should understand.”

“This is not a request, Taeyong. This is an order.” Kun’s arms uncross and seems ready to impose his status over the other, “As your Commander, I am telling you that research on Furies will stop. There will be no more.”

Taeyong says nothing, he just glares at Kun until seconds once again turn into minutes.

“Let’s go, Taeyong…” Jaemin tries to urge him. When Taeyong turns to him, you can see lines in his face, perhaps proof that his life is already steadily leaving him.

You step aside to let them leave, and as they open the door, the figure of Taeil is seen passing by in the hall.

“Oh, Chief,” Jaemin stops, “Were you coming in?”

“No…Uh… No, I’m just out for a walk,” Taeil chuckles, “Just passing by. Don’t mind me.” A few more pleasantries were exchanged and then the sound of three sets of footsteps trail away down the hall.

You’re reminded of Kun’s presence when he sighs behind you, you spin on your heels and note that he’s looking forlornly out of the small window in his room.

“I’m sure the tea’s cold by now,” you look at the tray in your hands, “Let me get you a fresh pot.”

“No,” he stops you, gaze broken from the window and now linked to you, “I’m thirsty, cold tea’s perfect.” His hand gingerly reaches out to the tray as you approach and swiftly grabs one of the cups atop it. Kun brings his lips to the porcelain and he sighs, a distant look twinkles in his eyes.

“He’s right, you know.” Kun says as he sets his empty cup down. “Taeyong’s right. Jaehyun and Yukhei leaving… It hurt us bad.” His voice shakes almost imperceptibly, his lips curling into a bitter smile, “I had a feeling this might happen someday. It’s our fault for falling short of what they wanted. But damn, we sure have lost a lot of people. Things are undeniably different now.”

You can’t even begin to imagine what’s going through his head. He’s been working from dusk to dawn, has he even had time to grieve anyone properly? Even with the strength that his newfound Fury powers had given him, you can see the horrible toll it’s taken on his body.

“Kun…” you say softly, “you have to stop.”

“What?” His voice is much rougher than you though, giving you momentary pause.

“I’m only telling you to do what you told Taeyong to do a few moments ago. Don’t use your Fury abilities unless it’s an emergency.”

“Why should I listen to you?” His expression questioning.

“Well… You turned into a Fury to save me from Donghyuck, you wouldn’t have had to unl–”

“This again?” He sighs, “Look, I said I chose to do it. I wasn’t forced.”

A pang reverberates around your ribcage, “When you say things like that, it only makes it worse. If you’re in pain, just say so. Don’t you wish you’d never become a Fury?”

For a moment, the room is quiet, and then Kun begins to laugh. “I just can’t win with you, can I? You really are from the countryside.” Another chortle before he continues, “I can’t remember if I’ve told you this before– Anyway, I am the adopted son of a sixth rank noble, I hardly knew my birth parents. I was raised with the noble’s son and daughter, Hoseok and Joohyun. You kind of sound like Joohyun. Yongqin’s sister Cheng sounds the same way too. When you go off, it’s like I’m being scolded by my family. Makes me feel like I have to listen to you.”

You’d never heard him speak of his childhood like this before. It’s surreal in a way.

“If what Dejun told us is true, then as long as I don’t use my Fury powers, I’ll be alright, right?” His lightheartedness flees slightly as he huffs out a puff of air, “If it gets bad I’ll let you know. Stop worrying about me.”

He’ll likely keep most of his pain to himself– that’s just who he is, but if he really means what he’d said…

“I understand,” you say with a nod, another thought beginning to bubble to the surface. “So… What will happen to the Hwarang now?”

“Well, we need to get Taeil to snap out of it, but after that, we’re heading north.”

“North? You mean back to…”

“Yeah, back to Hanseong.” Kun cedes with a sigh, “The Tang forces may have saved our asses up there but it doesn’t mean that they don’t want every man they can take fighting alongside them. Some of Namekawa’s men are stationed there too, hoping to round up some men and head to Bakjak. We’ll try to pincer Pyongyang and take those–” Suddenly, Kun’s body contorts and hunches, his hand grasping at his now heaving chest. His eyes wide in pain, sweat begins to pour from his head and he mutters out through clenched teeth, “Fuck, fuck–!”

“Kun?” Your mouth lays agape as the hair on his head turns an alabaster white. It’s bloodlust, you’re sure of it. “You need blood…” The sentence isn’t a question, and you react almost instinctively, recalling what you’d done for him before.

With unsteady hands you reach for the blade at your hip, laying its cool edge on the palm of your hand before his hand grasps around your wrist. Trying to pull away, you're met with a fervent shaking of his head.

“I’ll do it,” he murmurs, straightening himself to the best of his ability. Kun moves around you, standing behind you as he loosens your collar as the night air hits your neck followed by his fingertips. Seconds later you feel the kiss of a cold blade against your neck before feeling it slide against your skin. You try your best not to wince but the air makes the cut sting.

The cold is eventually replaced by the warmth of his face as his lips fall onto the cut. Heat raids your body, never before had you been this close to a man before. Nerves make your body twist to try and look at him until Kun’s hands grab your shoulders.

“Don’t look,” his voice low, husky. And you nod, not particularly sure that you want to see him in his Fury state. Those few words– a last, strained defense of his wounded pride– tear at your heart, and a knot gets stuck in your throat. For his sake you try and calm your nerves, although you can still feel your heart racing.

“I’m sorry… I can’t afford to lose it right now.” You’re unsure if he’s saying that to calm himself or calm you.

“Of course…” Your voice leaves you quietly, “You don’t need to hold back, I want to help in whatever way I can.”

In the days you watched both Minhyung and Jisung die, you’d find yourself inundated with near tortuous regret. There had been nothing in your power you could do for them. Ever since those fateful days it has been your resolve to help the Hwarang after they’d aided and sheltered you for so long.

Kun’s grip tightens on your shoulder, and a wave of emotions washes over you– guilt, disappointment, anger, regret– and you soon realize that they are not your own. They’re his.

Eventually he lets go and steps away from you.

“I’m sorry for doing that…” His hair back to its darkened state, he can’t seem to meet your gaze.

“It’s nothing,” you insist, adjusting the collar of your outfit that he’d shifted aside, “See? The cut’s already closed up.” Seeing his still-stolid demeanor, you continue, “I’ll be staying here for a while longer so please, if you need anything, just let me know.”

“So I can just drink your blood whenever?”

You nod, “You can.”

Kun cracks an eye open and gives you a small chuckle as he shakes his head, “Shouldn’t say things like that. Someone’s gonna use you up and throw you away.”

You know he’s joking, but there’s a part of you that feels if it were he that used you up then it wouldn’t be that bad.

April 7th, 666 - Hanseong, Kingdom of Silla Sometime after the incident between Kun and you, you begin to move northward, back to Hanseong. Nearly a month after its liberation from the Goguryeo forces, the Hwarang settled on a private estate just outside of the city’s walls. Taeil had been reluctant to return to the battlefields, but after several conversations with Kun, he’d become convinced otherwise.

Until the preparations to siege Pyongyang were in place, you would be set up in Hanseong to train. Yuta had gone to a town some ways south to train in Tang weaponry with one of Wen Junhui’s assistants, Hao Chujun. Taeyong and Jaemin had left with the Fury Corps along the naval route to Bakjak as they were not permitted to travel to Hanseong.

“Do you know where the Chief is?” A voice calls out to you, and you turn to see Jeong Sungchan standing there, his eyes wide.

“I think he’s reading in his room,” you have to think of when you last saw him. Weight shifting from foot to foot you try not to look concerned, “Is something the matter?”

“It’s nothing in particular, but…” There’s a peculiar expression on his face you can’t quite grasp. “I can’t shake this worrying feeling like he’s lost the will for us to fight again since the last time we were here…”

“Hmm…” You purse your lips, “I don’t think that’s the case. I can’t say that he’s completely lost his will to fight.”

Sungchan is hesitant to respond as he stays quiet, eventually speaking again, “You’re probably right, huh? I mean, Commander Qian is still giving his all for him. I’m sure he’ll return to his old self soon enough.” With that, Sungchan quickly scurries off, racing back into the depths of the manor.

As you watch him, you can’t help but let his words sting you a little. Taeil certainly had lost some of that ambitious fire he’d always had in his eyes as of late. If he wasn’t holed up reading in his room, he’d spend time in solitude out in the garden. Yet, you hold on hope that his confidence had deflated only a little after the battle in Hanseong.

Prompted by the meeting with Sungchan, you decide to pay the Chief a visit a few hours later.

“I’ve brought you some tea,” You say quietly as you slide open the door. Taeil sits behind his desk, nose buried in a bound novel, and he greets you with a smile. “What are you reading?”

“Oh, this is Jemangmaega,” he lowers the book, closing it but saving his place with a scrap piece of parchment. A collection of poems but more critical than that if one reads further into the text. I practically know them by heart now, but with each time I reread them I find I learn something new.”

“When I was younger I wanted to be just like Kim Yushin– he fought for others, more so than just himself,” his grin lasts for a moment before fading, “But I suppose dreaming about being a great commander doesn’t just make you one… I wish I realized that a bit sooner.”

“What are you talking about?” You tilt your head, “You’ve only just begun.”

“... How’s Kun?” He asks, not seeming to have heard your prior statement.

“I think he’s in his room writing something.” You state, “Probably writing orders for Yuta, he’s off with Hao Chujun in Kyeju, you know.”

“Ah…” Taeil sighs, “I keep giving Kun so much to do.”

“I don’t think he’s pushing himself too hard,” you say quickly, “And nothing makes him happier than being able to help you. That’s just the kind of guy he is.”

Taeil chuckles at that, “You’ve turned out to be quite a page to him, haven’t you? I think you know him quite well by now.”

“You think so?” You feel your cheeks warm at his certainty. “That’s right… I was supposed to be his page, wasn’t I?”

“To be truthful, I never thought that you’d be with us for this long…” Before you knew it, the two of you had begun to reminisce about your time in Seorabeol. Back then, you never could have guessed where fate would take you. There have been constant challenges, but you thought that’d you’d eventually return to your lives in the capital.

“I know things will work out. The Commander will get us through this.”

Taeil responds with a melancholy laugh, “Don’t you think you’re asking quite a bit of him?”

“... What do you mean?”

Before Taeil has any time to answer, the door opens with a snap, Shotaro and Kun briskly walking inside, their faces tense and drawn.

“We have to go. Now.” Kun says sharply, “The place’s surrounded.”

“There’s two, maybe three hundred of them out there. We came in through the back so they wouldn’t see us,” Shotaro says solemnly.

“If it were only twenty or thirty then we could take them… But we don’t have time to call Yuta and his men. Guess we’ll have to come up with something here. You two take Taeil and go on ahead,” Kun says quickly.

“What?!” You speak up, “Not even you can take on that many people. And it’s still daytime…”

“A majority of the soldiers out there are archers,” Shotaro says as both you and he move toward the door in an effort to block it should Kun try and get out.

Taeil, having been in quiet contemplation since their arrival, speaks out, “You needn't do that, Kun. I’ll go and have them take me to their headquarters.”

“What the hell?!” Kun shouts out incredulously, “You might as well just paint a target on your chest!”

“I won’t introduce myself as Moon Taeil of the Hwarang, of course,” Taeil sighs as he rises to his feet, “I’ll tell them that we’re soldiers here to just secure the location. At any rate, it should buy you enough time to get away.”

While you and Shotaro lay shocked into silence, Kun doesn’t relent, “Listen to yourself! You really think they’ll let you waltz in and fuck with them like that?! You know how they work! There’s no way in hell that those bastards don’t hate our guts! They won’t believe that shit about us being soldiers for a second!”

“Well, even if I do get captured, I have the status of a Lord. They can’t just kill me.”

“You have got to be kidding me.” Kun’s face is a near vibrant red at the moment, “You think they’ll give a shit about a title you have from the Kingdom they’re against?! You go out there, you’re signing your death warrant. You really think I’ll just let you do that?!”

No matter what the Commander yells at him, Taeil’s expression doesn’t change.

“I’ve made my decision. Nothing you say can convince me otherwise.”

Kuns fists begin to shake by his sides. In all your time with the Hwarang, you’ve never seen either of them act like this before.

“No! No! What the hell are the Hwarang going to do without their Chief?!” Kun shouts, “You’re coming with me even if I have to knock you out and drag you along! You have a responsibility to the Hwarang! You don’t get to die and run away from that!” He’s screaming at Taeil, his white knuckled fists now gripping the front of the other man’s robes and his eyes red with held-back tears.

Yet his fury and pleas break across Taeil’s impassable calm like wind against a mountain.

“This is a direct order!” Taeil says sternly as Kun’s hands drop from his robes, “You will go to Kyeju to meet with the rest of our men. The two of you will accompany him as well.” Kun stumbles back a step or two at the force of Taeil’s voice.

“You’re going to tell me what to do…? What the hell is this?!” Kun asks near incredulously.

“Aren’t your Chief’s orders absolute?” Taeil asks with a tilt of his head, “You’ve ordered men to kill themselves, or to become Furies from disobeying that rule. Are you somehow an exception? Is that the sort of warrior you want to be?”

Kun says nothing.

As long as he’d been commander, Kun strove to lead by example. He lived by the O Gye and demanded that others do likewise to groom the Hwarang into true warriors. There’s no doubt Taeil had counted on that fact. He meant to do it to keep Kun alive.

Taeil looks to you and Shotaro, stepping a few paces in your direction, “I want you to leave with Kun. If you take too long, they’ll attack and my surrender will mean nothing.” He gives you two a small shove to get you moving, Shotaro turns to look at Kun.

“Commander… Let’s go.”

He only stands, chewing his lip, until Taeil lays his hands on his friend’s shoulders, giving him a warm smile.

“Hey, Kun… Let it go. Let me go.” Taeil says softly, “You’ve run yourself ragged trying to earn me the status and fame that I wanted. You even turned yourself into a Fury… It kills me to see you do all of these things for me… I’m not worth it.”

Kun doesn’t meet his friend’s gaze, he instead blinks rapidly, trying to hold back tears, and stares desperately at the floor. Then he swallows the lump in his throat, his voice tight and strained when he speaks, “I– If I do this, then what have I been fighting for all these years? I became a warrior, served our Kingdom… I won numerous battles and killed men… All because I thought you’d be there at the end with all of us…”

“I’m sorry,” Taeil’s voice reflects the softness of the other’s, “I brought you here, I did this to you. Thinking back on it, it was all sort of a dream. We weren’t real warriors yet but we strapped on our swords and went to work.” His voice is warm, but that seems to make it even more difficult for Kun to let go.

The room is still before the commander speaks, “Osaki… Send a message to our remaining men. We need to secure an escape route.” His gaze then falls to you, “Stay here. Once we’re ready, I’ll come get you.”

“Okay,” you nod quickly. And with that, Shotaro and Kun leave, and Taeil and you are alone once more.

“Take this with you,” Taeil says as he begins to reach for something in his robes. After a moment, he hands you a small cloth bag, it clinks as it rests in your palm.

“What is it?”

“Money. To help you escape. I wasn’t able to do anything for you. This is a token of my appreciation, for all you’ve done for us. Please, take it.” His warmth still lingers on the fabric of the bag, you feel a lump rise in your throat. “You still have time. I’ll tell Kun. Once you get away, go somewhere safe and look for Doctor Namekawa… Just forget you had anything to do with us. Marry someone you love and live a peaceful life. Find happiness.”

While you appreciate his kind gestures you cannot find it within yourself to follow his guidance, “No, I won’t run. I want to go with Kun. I’m… I’m his page…” Your teeth catch your lip, afraid that if you say any more you may cry. Instead, you look up to Taeil and do your best to smile.

His eyes are warm as he looks to you, “Our Commander’s been blessed with some great friends. I’ll be counting on you, then. Take care of him for me.”

Eventually, Kun and Shotaro return. They gather you and the rest of the men in an outer courtyard on the premises, including Jeno and Sungchan.

“What?!” Jeno shouts, “We’re going to leave Chief behind? Is that true Commander?!”

“Chief’s orders,” Kun says sternly, “You’re all going to escape this place and I’ll be right behind you.”

“If he just surrenders, then his cover will be blown immediately!” Jeno insists, “At least here, I could remain by his si–”

“I said, ‘Chief’s orders’! Or do you have shit in your ears?!” Kun snaps, “Don’t you dare put Taeil’s efforts in vain with your stupid suggestions!”

Jeno looks as if he wants to respond, but instead he looks down as he tightens his fists and shakes.

Just then, Sungchan says, “I’m going to stay. I understand they’re the Chief’s orders. However, as a warrior of the Hwarang, I cannot abandon the Chief.”

“Jeong Sungchan!” Shotaro raises his voice, only to be interjected.

“Sungchan you bastard…” Kun frowns, “You really want this steel in your gut right now?”

“No! It’s not like that,” Sungchan’s eyes burn with intense vigor as he glares back at Kun. “I understand you, more than anyone else, want to remain here. But the Chief entrusted the Hwarang to you, which is why you can’t… So that’s why I want to protect him in your stead, Commander!”

Kun curls his lip, staring at him for a long moment before unsheathing his blade at his hip.

“Commander!” As the exclamation leaves Shotaro’s mouth, Kun points the tip of the sword toward Sungchan’s throat.

“You said you’ll protect the Chief, right?”

Sweat trickles down Sungchan’s reddened cheeks, “...Yes, I will.”

“Then you’d better keep your goddamn word. No matter what, your eyes don’t leave Moon, got it?”

Sungchan’s eyes grow wide, trembling for a moment but soon after brim with a fiery determination, “Yes, sir! I, Jeong Sungchan, promise to protect the Chief's life, no matter the cost!”

It seems as if he’s convinced Kun, as the latter returns his blade to its sheath. “Let’s go.” His words are curt as he nods quikly before leaving the residence behind.

In a short while, Taeil and Sungchan will hand their terms of surrender to the Goguryeo army. You find yourself looking back over your shoulder many times as you run. Soon, Taeil will surrender to his enemies. Perhaps, you think time and time again, if you turn around now, you can rescue him,

Shotaro seems to feel the same way, but Kun never once turns back.

April 7th, 666 – The Road South, Kingdom of Silla You run and run through the forest to Kyeju. It doesn’t matter how quickly you get there– it’s not soon enough to bring back an army to save Taeil.

“Are you alright?” Shotaro asks as he falls in step by your side, “We can rest if you’re tired.”

“I’m alright,” you shake your head, “I can keep going.”

Kun, with his back to you, says nothing, but you can feel each pained step he takes away from his friend.

The sun begins to dip towards the western horizon and night starts to fall when your party is stopped by a group of Goguryeo soldiers.

“You there! Stop!” One of them commands, his hand already hovering over the hilt of his sword, “Where are you headed?”

Kun only frowns and makes his way to walk past the soldier.

“He said to stop!” Another soldier yells out, “Goddamn it, are you more of those Silla guys?”

“Hold,” the first man pauses, “I’ve seen him before. You’re that bastard from the Hwarang, aren’t you?”

“You mean those guys that offed Suh?” The soldiers around them begin to scramble for their weapons.

Unfortunately, they aren’t fast enough for Kun. His hair snaps white and he shoots forward, toward the soldiers, sword in hand. His strikes are so fast and elegant that the eye barely even has time to perceive what happened before the two men fall dead.

“Wrong day to fuck with me, boys.”

A volley of soldiers rush forward, as well as a few arrows loosened in his direction. One of the arrows pierces his shoulder and Kun cries out, swiftly pulling it from the wound. It immediately begins to close as he smirks at them, “That’s how it feels getting shot, huh? Not as bad as I thought.” His gaze sharpens on those left before him, “This is nothing! This doesn’t even come close to what Taeil’s going through!”

Kun launches himself at the nearest of the soldiers, his sword already in motion and his face twisted by grief and anger. Even without Fury powers, Kun and Shotaro could have made easy work of this small troop of men… But rage and frustration boiling over since you’d left Taeil had erupted in a torrent of violence.

“You can’t use your powers–!” You call out to Kun, trying to stop his relentless assault.

“Shut up!” He snarls at you, “Stay out of this!”

He knows what he’s doing, but he’s far past caring. Kun leaps from tree to tree, his sword flashing like lightning. Every time it moves, a life ends. Rage, anguish and an unrestrained thirst for blood radiates from him like heat from a blaze from a fire. Blood soaks his face and hands. Still, he cuts and cuts, never satisfied.

You see Shotaro and Jeno sweating as they stand silently, watching Kun fight as a Fury. They’re mesmerized and you can hardly blame them. Every swing of his sword spills a man to the dirt. He looks like a monster. At last, the only man left alive is Kun himself.

Silence falls over the forest once more, save for the birds that have restarted their chatter,

“Shotaro… Jeno… Go see if there’s any more of them.” Desperate to distance themselves from the bloodshed, the two depart quickly after Kun’s orders. “You. Go with them.”

Normally you would do as he’d asked and followed after them but now…

“What?” Kun turns to you, noticing your hesitation, “I gave you an order.” His words cut like a knife but you don’t move.

“I’m sorry, but I can’t do that.”

“I am your commanding officer. I am giving you an order.” He sounds angry, as he oft does, but just behind that there's a deep, miserable sadness. If he doesn’t stay angry, you feel, he’d probably be crying.

“I promise I won’t get in your way, but please, just let me stay here with you.” There’s nothing you can do for him, but you cannot bear to leave him alone.

He turns his back to you– to everything, his face hidden. You have no idea what expression he’s wearing.

You search yourself for something to say, something to ease him, but you find nothing within yourself to better him. And, after a few moments, he speaks.

“What the hell did I do… all of this for?”

How can this be the fate dealt by the god for two men so honest and determined? It just doesn’t seem fair…

“Was it just so I could give Taeil to those bastards? I busted my ass to give my friend to the enemy?” His voice trembles with every word, the weight of it all still resting heavily on him, “I was going to make him important. Help him carry himself to his family’s standards. I wanted to see him fight in the kind of battles they wrote about. Like a true warrior… I wanted to see just how far the owner of a school in the sticks could go.”

You’re not even sure if he knows that you’re still here. If he does, it seems as if he no longer cares.

“I thought we were shooting for the same dream. Long as it was for him, I felt like I could do anything. So what the hell am I doing here, alive, while he’s… he’s god knows where?! After all that self-righteous preaching, what did I do?! I turned around and left him to the wolves! He… I’m just like the king. Soon as things get dangerous, I turn tail and leave better men to deal with the mess! God damn it! Why am I alive?!”

It tears you apart to hear him lament his inner machinations aloud. You find yourself stepping forward, wrapping your arms around him, pressing your face against his uniform.

“Taeil said… I mean, after you’d left, I told him that you’d figure it out,” you say softly, “and he said that I was asking too much of you.” Tears run hot down your cheeks, “It’s not your fault, you can’t blame yourself… He didn’t want you to die. That’s why you’re still alive. Just… Please don’t blame yourself.”

Kun listens, saying nothing. Or perhaps he didn’t even hear you. Why do words feel so powerless when you need them the most? What good are they if you cannot comfort someone at their lowest?

“He did this to save me… but what the hell am I supposed to do without Moon Taeil of the Hwarang? The dream of helping him is what brought me here in the first place.” Kun’s shoulders shake, “Now that dream has left me… I don’t have anything left. I’m nothing.” He gives a short bark of humorless laughter, “Seriously Moon… Stop giving me all the shitty jobs.” His voice chokes on a sob and falls silent.

April 10, 666 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla The days that followed were somber, and eventually your group returned to Ungjin before regrouping with Yuta in Kyeju. When you arrived in the city, Jeno mentioned he was going to visit a friend of his, and left. However, you think Jeno’s just trying to be considerate and give Kun some space.

Arriving back at the compound, you’re shocked to see none other than Li Yongqin waiting for you.

“Evening,” he says as you walk inside, “Who would’ve thought you guys would ever come to visit me?”

“Nevermind that you should be in Sabi– why are you up this late? Just look at you,” Kun frowns, crossing his arms.

“I’m a bit tired of sleeping alone, you know?” Yongqin muses, “At this rate, I’ll never get a chance to shine again… Seems to me it’s time to join you guys.”

“The hell you won’t! What makes you think you can hold a sword with that body?” Kuns words cut through the air.

“Come on, cut me some slack.” Yongqin snorts, “I’ve been feeling great lately. So…” As he begins his next statement, he turns to cough into his fist. The fit doesn’t relent until he crouches on the floor, coughing painfully with strained breaths.

“Are you alright, Yongqin?” You ask, rubbing his back as he tries to catch his breath. Under your palm, you can feel the bones of his back. At first glance, he may look to be improving but he’s lost a lot of weight and it’s almost painful to look at.

“See?” Kun turns to look down at him, “What’d I tell you? Why don’t you admit you’re sick for once, and take it easy?”

Yongqin bites his lips out of frustration, grimacing at the thought of admitting his weakness, he sighs deeply and rises to his feet, “So, how’s Moon doing? Too busy to visit me again?”

You flinch at the mention of Taeil, which causes your body to jolt unexpectedly. Kun, however, is unfazed by the question.

“He’s a little preoccupied at the moment.”

“How’s his shoulder doing? Isn’t it tough for him to be up and about?”

“That was a while ago. He’s fine.” Kun says, “He may not be able to wield his sword but, well, with his promotion, it’s not like he’s charging from the front lines anyway.”

“Spare me,” Yongqin waves his hand, “You’re bragging about his promotion like it’s you out there and not him. But… that’s good to hear. Taeil’s okay then.” The Hwarang seems to have eased down. It looks as if Taeil’s well-being is the only thing keeping Yongqin invested in his own health.

“Look,” Kun states, “I promise I’ll bring him next time. Just sit tight, okay?”

“Sure, I’ll wait. But I’m not holding my breath. You’ve always been a bad liar, Kun.”

“Who the hell are you calling a liar? I’ve never lied to you about Taeil.” The tone of their conversation sounds like their usual banter, but you can understand why Jeno may have been inclined to step out. You begin to gather that there’s much for them to reminisce on, so you take the chance to sneak outside.

Cool nighttime air whispers against your cheeks as you gaze to the stars hanging above. It seems like tonight would be the final farewell between Kun and Yongqin, you need to let them have this moment to themselves. Being an outside observer to the intimacy of their conversation tells you this, at least.

In the midst of your contemplation, you think you see Jeno speaking to someone in the distance. You know he said he’d been planning to meet a friend in Ungjin but you don’t recognize the figure.

“Are you sure about that? You’re the Commander’s acquaintance, aren’t you?” You hear Jeno speak to him as you slowly approach. “You’re already here so why don’t you stop by?”

“I think I’ll pass on that.” The person says coolly.

“Why?” Jeno questions further, “This may be the last time we step foot in Ungjin.”

“Wasn’t Taeil just arrested by Goguryeo soldiers in Hanseong?” The person murmurs, “I don’t know what I’d say to Kun in a time like this, knowing what everyone’s been through and all.”

Jeno’s head suddenly hangs, as the words from the conversation penetrate and resound around his head, “You don’t need to mince words. Just, you know, tell them how you feel… talk about what you’ve been up to, or what you’ve seen. Isn’t that good enough?”

“Jeno…” For a brief moment, the stranger looks unsettled by the suggestion. However, he takes a deep breath and continues, “But I was never one of the Hwarang. I just happened to be around when the newer group was established.”

“Then why did you paint them as Furies?” Jeno frowns, “If they didn’t matter to you anymore, then you wouldn’t go through the trouble of drawing that? It’s not like it’d make you any money.”

“Well…” The other stops.

“So, are you absolutely sure there’s nothing you’d want to say to the Commander, Colonel or Jaemin? You’re positive?” Jeno lists off the names of the Hwarang, only making you question the stranger yourself. Is he a friend of theirs? Perhaps Jeno had met with him to bring him to your side?

Whatever the case, the stranger’s countenance gives the impression that he’s reluctant to be involved at all.

As you’re thinking of this person, a voice speaks up behind you, “You should go and talk to Yongqin while you can.”

Kun. You hadn’t heard the door open, much less his footsteps approach.

“S- Sure,” you say quickly, spinning on your heels and walking into the house from the darkness.

After making smalltalk for a while, Kun rejoins you and begins to say his farewell to him, “We’ll see you later, Li. Don’t trouble Namekawa too much.”

“I never do,” Yongqin shakes his head, “The man just worries too much.”

“Forever the smartass,” Kun rolls his eyes jokingly, “Whatever the case, we’ll be on our way soon.”

“Leaving already?” Yongqin asks, eyebrows raised.

“Goodnight, Yongqin. Please take care of yourself.” You say with a small smile and begin to turn to leave.

“Hey,” Yongqin calls out to you, “Can I have a word?” He beckons you over with a gentle gesture so you walk to him.

“Is something the matter?”

“I know he won’t admit it, but Kun looks like shit. Are things at the front going bad?”

If you speak too carelessly you can give away information– information that can easily hurt Yongqin, so you fall silent.

“Here’s the thing: I don’t like that man at all, and quite frankly, I can’t give a rat’s ass what happens to him. But… I want you to be by his side. If he goes down, then the Hwarang go down with him.”

“I understand…” you murmur out before Kun butts in.

“Are we done here? Time to get going.”

He doesn’t ask a thing about your conversation as he begins walking briskly ahead of you on the darkened streets. Watching him make that promise of bringing Taeil the next time he’d see Yongqin… it seems as though that burden of promise, and the potential of it being left unfulfilled, weighs heavily on him.

Suddenly, he stops in his tracks.

“You should go on ahead and go home.”

“Huh?” You pause yourself, “What do you mean? What do you plan on doing?”

“I’m going to speak to the Goguryeo forces in Hanseong,” he turns to face you, “And I’m going to personally ask them to release Taeil.”

“You’re going now?!” You sputter, “I thought you said they can’t be reasoned with?”

“If we can’t get results, then I can’t say we’ve done everything we could.”

“It’s not safe for you to go there! They could capture you at any moment!” Frantic energy runs in your voice, “If they take you like they did Taeil…”

Yesterday this idea would have been preposterous to Kun, what happened to mak him change his mind?

“So you’re telling me to my face that this decision is a mistake?”

“No… No I’m not saying that.”

“Then what is it?” He snaps, “If you have something to say, just say it.”

“Stay strong.” You raise your voice, nearly shocking yourself, “You of all people know what needs to be done.”

“I decide on what I do. It’s not your place to say.”

“I understand, but what will you do if you’re arrested by the Goguryeo army?”

“So what if I am?” He frowns, crossing his arms, “Sitting here and talking about ‘what-ifs’ isn’t any better than taking action.

“So you’re going to let Minhyung and Jisung’s sacrifices go in vain?!”

“What do you know?!” He explodes, and you have to stop yourself from taking a step back.

“E- Even I can understand a little!” You refuse to let your convictions amount to nothing. With a heavy heart you continue, “I was there when they gave their lives for… I saw it with my own eyes. Both of them loved the Hwarang. And they trusted their commander! If either of them saw what I am now, it would crush them.”

“Crush them, huh?” At last, he seems to let go of a bit of the tension in his shoulders. They relax slightly as he looks off into the distance. “Do you believe it to be the survivor’s duty to carry on the will of the deceased?”

“I think so.”At least that’s what it feels as if you’re doing now. The reason you can’t back down, even if Kun feels compelled to yell at you, is because you know Jisung and Minhyung would have done the same.

“Damn, guess this means all I have to look forward to in life is shouldering more burdens until I die.”

“Kun…”

He shakes his head and gives you a short, melancholic smile, “Sorry for yelling at you. You were right. You did know. There’s no point in me being irrational when our situation is already grim, huh? It wouldn;t look too great if there’s nowhere for the Chief to go when he gets out eventually.”

With that last statement, you see that he’s finally regained his composure, and you respond in kind by calming down, “I know I told you to stay strong, but please, don’t push yourself too hard. I noticed you’ve been running around during both day and night time.”

“Where do you have all this time to show concern for every person you meet?” Kun sighs out, “Once we leave here, if you so much as collapse on the way out, I’m leaving your ass behind. Brace yourself.”

“Okay!”

You’re happy to have gotten through to him, even if it was just a courteous gesture. He begins walking again and you run right behind him, doing your best to keep up with the swiftness of his pace.

At the entrance of the city, you regroup with Jeno and Shotaro, the two greeting you quickly.

“Commander, I need to speak with you urgently,” Jeno says, looking frigid as he approaches Kun. “Please let me petition for the clemency of both the Chief and Sungchan! Surely the Goguryeo forces understand what killing Moon would detail. If we work hard, I’m sure we can find people to cooperate with us. So please–”

Kun stares at Jeno, who’s bowed over in a sign of respect, and seems to take his suggestion into consideration.

“...You beat me to it. I was going to say the same thing.”

“Commander! Then–”

“Osaki, I have a favor to ask you. Take her and head to Kyeju first.”

“What?!” You gasp out.

“We’re going to continue our fight for Taeil’s freedom. Your presence here is only a burden for us right now.” Earlier he’d given you the same instruction, albeit with a far more aggressive tone. But this time you can tell thoughtful consideration went into it.

You’re worried, of course. But there isn’t anything more you can argue.

“This is an order from your commander. We’ll meet up again soon so get out of here and stay sharp.”

It felt strange to part from them, as if some piece of yourself is now missing– but you don’t have much time to harp on it as you meet up with other troops in Kyeju.

You’re worried about what’s to become of Taeil, but perhaps because the situation seems grim, no one has brought it up.

May 1st, 666 – Outside of Kyeju, Kingdom of Silla Kun soon rejoined Shotaro and you as you resided in Kyeju, only after he’d settled his affairs for Taeil’s freedom in Ungjin first. Yuta had taken the main body of Hwarang soldiers to Koksan and then onto Bakjak to keep an eye on the Fury Corps. You have just left the small town with Wen Junhui’s men to hop onto the route to follow after him.

After a while, you manage to meet up with some allied soldiers, but many of them look at you with a strange mixture of curiosity and fear. It’s unpleasant, to say the least.

“Those are the Hwarang, right? The murderers?”

“Yeah, noble dogs that kill men for no reason– even their comrades! Best not to look at them for too long. You never know what might set them off.”

It isn’t difficult to hear the gossip that floats through the ranks.

“They sound like a bunch of old wives spinning those stories!” Shotaro scoffs, turning to look at Kun, “Want me to keep them quiet for you?”

“No.” Kun shakes his head, sounding more irritated than usual, “They want to talk, let them talk.”

“Are you alright?” You ask as you walk along, “You don’t look too well.”

“I’m fine.” He says but he clearly seems otherwise. His skin is a pale color, almost blue, and he looks exhausted. Marching during the day is hardly a pleasant walk for a Fury.

Taeil is clearly at the forefront of his mind. And although you hate to admit it, he has a good reason to be on edge.

“Excuse me, could you let me pass? Ah– apologies, oops…” Someone moves towards you from the back of the column of men, pushing his way through the rest of the marching soldiers.

“Hello,” a man, no older than Kun, steps forward and offers a bow, “Are you Qian Kun? I’ve heard a great deal about you and the Hwarang.”

“Who the hell are you?” Kun asks, puzzled.

“Pardon my rudeness, I’m still not fully functional with the language– my name is Wen Junhui, one of the commanders of the Tang forces. I’m sure I’ll be talking with the Hwarang a great deal in the future. It’s nice to meet you.”

It’s strange, for the man who claimed to command the infantry of men, he looks more like the son of a wealthy merchant than a soldier.

Kun snorts under his breath and turns away, leaving Junhui to look on for a moment longer.

“Do you have business with Kun?” Shotaro asks.

“Ah, yes. I was hoping to hear stories about the Seorabeol attacks from the Commander of the Hwarang himself.”

“Sure you wouldn’t rather hear some ridiculous rumor from a drunk soldier?” Kun bites, “Seems like everybody here loves to gossip.”

“I apologize for them. We’ve been far from home for a while and they’ve only grown more undisciplined as time progressed.” Junhui shakes his head to continue his original plan, “At any rate, I came here to give you an overview of how our forces are being deployed. We have five thousand soldiers in the advance guard, main body and rear guard. As the highest ranking officer–”

“Wen Junhui… The Wen Junhui who took back Hanseong a few months back?”

“That’s me,” he smiles.

“And you lost it.”

“Yes, well… I suppose I did. It was a misstep of my forces and I take full responsibility for it. But I assure you that we will be taking it back, and keeping it this time.”

Kun looks as if he’s just swallowed something rotten. He’d only just lost his Chief and it seems as if this newcomer’s trying to force himself into Taeil’s place. No one, no matter the skill, can replace his friend. Still, Junhui seems to have been expecting to be rebuffed, and continues, showing no sign of being put off by Kun's behavior.

“The advance guard is made up mostly of men from the Silla army. The rear guard, however, is composed of men from Tang. I’m thinking of promoting you to Deputy Commander in order to lead the advance guard. What do you say?”

“Why?”

“I have experience leading my men. And am I wrong to think that the advance guard would take more kindly to a fellow countryman than an outsider?” Junhui speaks plainly, “Besides, there isn’t anyone on our side or theirs who hasn’t heard the name Qian Kun. I can’t think of anyone better suited.” His copious praise does nothing to thaw Kun, they just stare at each other for a few awkward moments.

It’s painfully clear that the two of them don’t see eye to eye, and it cannot be a worse first impression.

“Well,” Junhui claps his hands together, “I suppose I better be on my way. We’ll talk later, and go over some more in-depth plans.” Their conversation ends as one-sided as it had begun, and the Tang general disappears into the swarm of marching soldiers.

Later that night, your group camps a short distance away from the rest of the force. Kun, sitting by the fire’s edge, beckons you and Shotaro over, “We need to talk.” The main bulk of the Hwarang forces are with Yuta heading even more northward, meaning that the only people in the camp were you, Shotaro, Kun and three dozen more Hwarang. “Remember what Junhui told us earlier?”

“About taking command of the advance guard?” Shotaro inquires, “What of it?”

“I’ve been thinking about what I want you guys to do. You can’t be in the advance guard, so I’ll have to send you off to fight with the main body or the rear guard.”

“So this means you’re going to take his offer?” Shotaro shifts as he speaks.

“Yes. You were in Seorabeol. You’d be a good commander for men who’ve never seen a real battle.”

“But…” A frown carves itself on the younger’s lips. Kun’s reasoning makes sense, but it doesn’t mean he has to like it. It feels as if Shotaro had grown attached to the idea of fighting in the same unit as Kun. Perhaps the commander is insensitive for either ignoring this sentiment, or not acknowledging it at all.

Shotaro sighs, resigning himself into a period of deep thought, looking up to Kun’s gaze, “Understood. Whatever you order me to do, I’ll do it. But first, I want you to tell me something. This doesn’t mean you’re planning to disband the Hwarang, does it? If I fight in this, it’ll be as a member of the Hwarang.”

It seems the two of you feel the same way. Kun’s hope may be flickering but yours isn’t.

“Fine. Whatever.” Kun seems disengaged.

“I should also point out that I think commanding soldiers is a little more than she can handle.” Shotaro adds, glancing over to you, “She doesn’t belong on the front line. She’s a page, not a soldier.” He rises to his feet, dusting the dirt from his knees, “Anyways, I’ll go and tell the others what you’ve decided.”

Kun and you are left alone with the crackling fire as Shotaro jogs back to the main encampment. He sighs and his shoulders drop. Suddenly he looks very, very tired.

“Why did you try to order us away?” The question leaves you before you can think it through.

He doesn’t answer, only tilts his head to look at the flecks of starlight dappling through the trees above. As the melancholy silence speaks, you nearly regret asking the question before he laments, “If I knew Taeil was coming back, then I could go out there ready to give my life to win. Just like Minhyung said– Taeil and I were the Hwarang. With him gone, there’s no way in hell I can carry all this on my own.”

When he normally speaks to you, he is oft cruel and rude, you’ve never heard him sound so defeated before.

“Yukhei was right, wasn’t he? Remember what he said when we decided to attack Hanseong? He said there was no way in hell Kim Yong would fund us without some sort of hidden agenda.” Kun huffs, “He was right. So was Jaehyun… You know who was the first to petition for a settlement between Goguryeo and our forces? Kim Yong.”

“...What?”

“He wanted to showcase our defeat as costly and an expenditure of life and resources. Make it abysmally clear that the war is funded on blood, and to keep his own money in his coiffers.” He laughs despondently and kicks at a rock by his foot, “Damn it, how couldn’t I see that coming? If I thought about it, that would’ve never slipped past me. I was desperate for Taeil to be off fighting big important battles, winning all sorts of glory… But I let it all blind me, we were played and Taeil lost his spirit…”

The Hwarang had put their lives on the line for the Kingdom. How could the King just let them be pawned around?

“Noble or commoner– we all busted our asses to get where we are. Aren’t warriors meant to be the masters of the battlefield? What the hell have we been fighting for this entire time? Is anything I believed in still true? We believed that we were fighting for something, so no matter the shit we had to crawl through, we did it. Turns out it was just a trench that just circles itself. What are we supposed to do now? What the hell am I supposed to believe in?”

Every word of his punctures you with pain. But the kingdom had betrayed them, their trust. The war had changed and it feels as if the Hwarang had been tossed aside. All that the Hwarang had done is fade away, what could Kun do to fix it?

“You lost what you believed in,” you say quietly, “They think as long as you’re there to lead, they’ll be fine and refuse to show fear in front of you. They want you to see the kind of men they are, which means they’ll fight to the death if you tell them to.” If anything, you want to soothe his wounded soul a bit. “But if someone were to ask why I’m here… I’d say it’s because I believe in you.”

Perhaps that’s the wrong thing to say, all you’ve done is give him something more to worry about.

Kun looks at you, but for once the light in his eyes is soft, “You’re right. If you lose sight of something the only person who can find it again is you. Besides, we’ve got a big fight coming up. Guess I should be thinking about how we’re going to win that, not whining about my problems.” With a small smile, he turns back to the stars.

You fall silent again, cicadas fluttering and chirping through the night being the only cacophony of sounds around you.

“Are you really going to stick around?” He asks. You know he wants to go alone, but you can’t go with Shotaro, you both know that.

“Yes, I am.” Perhaps you don’t know how you can help him just yet, but you can hardly leave him alone.

“Fine. Just stay out of my way.”

“I know.” You sit there in the silence of night, you’re just about to return to your tent when he groans out in pain. Almost immediately you know what’s happening, your fears confirmed when his hair begins to turn white at the roots. Quickly you scramble to your feet, urging him to his and leading him to the shadow of a large tree where the nearby soldiers won’t be able to see him.

“Damn it,” he curses through clenched teeth, “Why now?!”

With shaking hands you reach for your collar, and as he grasps your intent he grimaces. Kun takes a hold of your shoulders and roughly pulls you toward him, seconds later you feel a dull sting on the back of your neck and then the hot trickle of blood.

His warm breath comes in pants across your bare skin, but after a time his ragged gasps for deliverance begin to steady. And slowly, his grip loosens. Then, without a word, he pulls away from you.

“How long do you plan to keep letting me do this?” He mutters, as you turn to him, worry in his eyes.

“Forever,” you say simply, “As long as you need me, I’ll be here.”

“You’re a stupid woman,” he sighs, “And I’m a man who’s lost sight of what makes him human. How can you just let me cut you open like that and drink your blood? What the hell are you thinking?”

“It’s alright, Kun. I really don’t mind.”

There’s nothing for him to say to that.

The next day, along the route to Hanseong, the news breaks.

“So, Goguryeo forces are pulling out of Hanseong?” Wen Junhui frowns, “That’s… unexpected.” He and Kun stop to talk over the news and their next move.

“Unexpected? They’re cocky bastards that think we won’t try to retake the city.” Kun scoffs, “It’s the most opportune moment to take it back.”

“I’m not against going into battle,” Junhui states, “We are leading an army, after all. But the main body and the rear guard are still on their way. All I’m asking is that you wait until they catch up with us. Attempting to lay siege to the city with the men we have is folly beyond folly. We should–”

Kun sighs, “This isn’t a theoretical scenario from one of your war manuals.”

“Sun Tzu isn’t just a war manual. The highest form of generalship is balking enemy plans; the next best in preventing enemy junctions,” Junhui argues, standing his ground, “After that, it’s attacking armies in the field, and the worst of all is besieging walled cities. Therefore, we should only lay siege as a last resort. Attacking head-on is foolish. If you’re determined to be foolish, the best you can do is make sure your army is in the best condition possible and–”

“Though we have heard of stupid haste in war, cleverness has never been seen associated with long delays! No kingdom benefits from prolonged warfare!” Kun offers his rebuttal, “Remember that one? He’s saying that it might get messy, but it’s better to end your battles quickly. Taking your sweet time just comes back to bite you in the ass.”

“Qian… Don’t do that.” Wen Junhui’s brow furrows, “I’m not asking you to wait long. They should be here in just a few days.”

“And we’re just meant to sit here twiddling our thumbs until the Goguryeo army shows up?” Kun frowns, “If they catch us unaware then we’re screwed, no two ways about it.” He must sense that he caught a nerve in the other as he pushes ahead, “You want to miss this opportunity, fine. I’ll just take the advance guard and capture Hanseong myself.”

“That’s suicide!” Junhui shouts as Kun snorts derisively. He clearly has no intention of taking his opinion.

“I guess we’ll see. I’ll take Hanseong by tomorrow.” His lips pull back from his teeth in a feral grin, and he looks off in the distance toward Hanseong.

He isn’t being belligerent. He’s being reckless. With Kun like this, can you really win?

April 13th 666 - Hanseong, Kingdom of Goguryeo Hanseong is in turmoil. Your forces neared three thousand, while Hanseong’s barely had a thousand. And although the Silla forces easily outnumber your opponents, the guards are able to use their fortifications to great effect, fighting you to a standstill. Arrows fly, swords clash, and men scream in pain.

“We can’t keep this up,” Kun sighs out with crossed arms, “This is as good a time as any to attack the enemy lines.”

“Attack?” You look toward him in disbelief, as a nearby soldier cries out, “Their fortifications–”

“Can fall.” Kun says flatly, “An arrow or two won’t kill you.” The men around him are stunned into silence, never having imagined they would receive orders like this. Their commander, however, just stares back coldly. “What the hell did you come here to do? You’re here to fight a war. If you’re prepared to fight, you should be prepared to die. Am I wrong? So, when I give the word, you’re going to charge that line!”

The men before him pale, and many tremble. Eventually, one of them snaps, “I can’t do it! I don’t want to die here.”

No sooner had he turned to run, does Kun’s sword flash in the daylight, striking the soldier dead. The men watching swallow thickly. For a few moments they stay utterly silent. Commotion breaks out shortly afterward.

“What is this?!”

“Is he crazy?!”

Kun lets his cold eyes slide slowly across their ranks, and slowly the mumbling ceases, “Anyone else want to run? If you’re too scared to fight, go ahead. Be my guest. But anyone who runs will die by my hand. So either I kill you… Or you take your chance out there. Up to you.” With one final scowl, he turns back to the battlefield, taking off across it.

He runs through the throng of bodies and hail of arrows, falling upon the men defending the main gate like a vengeful god. His sword drips with fresh blood, you stay in the shadows of the treeline waiting for him to return.

Shotaro runs to the commander, grime and blood smeared across his face, “With another push we should be able to take the gate!”

“Great!” Kun shouts, “I believe in you Osaki!”

As Kun effortlessly slices through the enemy, the mood among his men begins to change. A ripple goes through them, a surge of newfound energy to fight. You can’t hear him from the distance, but he shouts something over his shoulder and his soldiers fight with intense vigor.

And soon after the sun passes its zenith, the city gates open, the news of it spreading like wildfire.

The Silla forces sweep into the city soon after, finding relative ease when liberating the streets. Kun glances at you with a grin as Shotaro runs up to him.

“Commander! The men we sent to the town head’s home ran into trouble!”

“What?” Kun almost sounds confused, “We haven’t seen any real resistance so far.”

Shotaro shakes his head, “I’m unaware of the details. Should I go see…?”

“No. I’ll go.” Kun stops him, “I’m leaving you in charge here.”

“What would you like me to do?” You ask.

“Come with me,” he says simply, “Don’t want you wandering around. Might get hit by a stray arrow or something.

And thus it was decided. You quickly follow after Kun, and even upon approaching the building, you can tell something is wrong. Inside, your men are dead on the floor, their bodies laid out like the spokes of a wheel, and at its hub… Lee Donghyuck.

“What are you doing here?” Kun asks, more nonchalant than you’d have thought. “Decided you’d take a vacation? You do know there’s a war out there, right? Or maybe you’re just hiding out here, hoping you won’t get hurt.”

“We were acting under orders from the King.” Xiao Dejun, whom you hadn’t seen upon your arrival, speaks out, “We are here to deliver a secret message. We did not expect to be drawn into battle and we certainly did not expect to encounter you here.”

“Huh,” Kun scoffs, “Gaesomun yells jamp and you leap. You sure are dedicated.”

“Well, I didn’t think I’d see you again so soon, Qian…” Donghyuck leers with a snide grin.

“And I didn’t think you were so anxious to get your ass beat again. Don’t worry though, I’m happy to oblige.”

Donghyuck grinds his teeth and draws his sword at his hip, “Killing you will erase the humiliation I suffered at your hands. You and your dogs have been a thorn in my side since Wonweol. Today, I will have my revenge.”

“... Sounds as if you’ve got this covered,” Dejun sighs, stepping back once more, “He’s all yours.”

Kun just as easily draws his sword, “Guess the face wasn’t enough, maybe if I take an arm you’ll get the message.” He soars across the room at Donghyuck, their blades rattling against one another as Donghyuck block’s the commander’s strike. Then, the demon pushes back and Kun is thrown across the hall.

“You’re not getting away,” Donghyuck says coolly, his hair turning stark white, just as Kun’s had done at the beginning of the battle. In the blink of an eye, he leaps after his opponent, whipping his sword in a quick slash. Kun brings up his blade at the last second before the strike could wound him.

“You’re slow,” Donghyuck taunts, “Your movements lack finesse. Don’t tell me that killing humans has tired you out? Last time you said you were a Demon…” Their blades locked together, Kun’s begins to shake under the pressure of the other’s force.

Donghyuck’s right, though, Even with his Fury abilities, Kun is slower than before, too unfocused.

“Ah, I see,” the Demon’s eyes flicker to the open door for a moment, “The sun’s still out. You don’t like it much, do you?” He chuckles, “Don’t worry, I won’t go easy on you just because you’re weak. After all, a warrior always gives all he can, no matter the situation. That is your code, isn’t it?”

“Damn you!” Kun jumps backwards, but not fast enough to escape Donghyuck’s blade. It arcs down across the Hwarang’s chest, blood erupting from the gash and splattering to the floor. Kun drops to his knees, skidding across the hard wooden panels panting heavily as blood blooms across his robes and pools on the floor below him.

Agonizing seconds pass as both you and he wait for the blood to stop, yet it continues to fall through his fingers clenched to the robes hanging from the wound. “What the hell is this?!” Kun asks through clenched teeth as he stares daggers at Donghyuck standing before him.

Donghyuck laughs, almost as if Kun had told him a joke, “What’s the matter? Not healing like you should? This,” his wrist flicks upward to show off his blade, which almost looks to be faintly glowing, “is Hwangun’s Blade. It’s been passed down through my family for generations, but… no one had ever thought to test it on a Demon. This is an excellent chance to see what it can do. And you know what? I can use it to put down a fake Demon.”

He smirks, giving the impression that he’s figured this victory is a foregone conclusion.

“You must be pretty desperate if you’re willing to grab your family’s magic sword. Really need something like that to take on a fake Demon?” Kun gives his own taunting laugh, but Donghyuck’s grin doesn’t falter.

“You humiliated me for the first time in my life. Nothing is too much if it will send you to hell.” With another flick of his wrist, Donghyuck sends droplets of gore spraying down onto the floor, “Your abilities can’t heal any wounds from this blade. You became a Fury to defeat me, but now that sacrifice means nothing.”

“So, tell me if I’ve got this right. All I have to do is avoid getting cut by that thing? Hell, before I became a Fury, all I did was dodge swords. This’ll be easy.”

“Does your impudence know no bounds?” The Demon scoffs, “Fine. I’ll put your short lived defiance to the test.” His blade shimmers a blue-white and seems to shiver with his murderous intent. The air is thick, feeling like a struggle to just breathe.

Donghyuck slashes downwards toward Kun, who’s able to dodge out of the way in time, bringing up his own sword to strike back. But when it arcs upward, instead of hitting flesh, Kun’s sword cuts through air. In tandem with the strikes, Donghyuck moves too fast for the bare eye to see, Kun’s margin for error becoming slimmer and slimmer. With another dodge, the Demon slams his riposte into the Hwarang’s shoulder. Kun’s robe is torn away, displaying a fresh wound.

“Good… You’re overthinking on how you might kill me,” Donghyuck smirks, “But I want to see more. I want to see your face when you realize that you can’t kill me and that I will win!”

Blood pours from him, but Kun brings up his sword to catch Hwangun. Teeth clenched, you know that he’s lost far too much blood to carry on for much longer. Donghyuck kicks Kun back and as he does, the commander’s hair returns to its natural hue.

“What the hell?!” Kun cries out, still in a defensive stance.

“Reached your limit, I see,” the Demon chortles, inching closer, “Even a false Demon is better than this pathetic existence! You might as well be an insect.” His laugh echoes through the hall, gloating over the near unconscious Kun, “I want to hear you cry! Scream! Beg me for your life! You and your filth have stood in my way for too long. I’ll kill you and the Hwarang!”

Kun’s head twitches, “Kill…the Hwarang? You?” It’s almost as if he’s keeping himself upright with sheer force of will at this point. “After we left Taeil and the Hwarang fell to me, I felt like there was no way I could do all that by myself. I was just about ready to give it up.” Suddenly, the hair on his head shifts back to its demonic white, “...But now, when you say you want to erase everything we did… I’ll be goddamned if I let you destroy the Hwarang!”

Ichor continues to fall from him and you know that if he’s to continue like this he’ll most certainly die.

“Kun, no!” You cry out, “If you don’t stop you’re going to die!”

His eyes flick to you and you can already see the resolution in his gaze, then he gives you a grin before looking back to Donghyuck, “You really think I care about how much of my future I’ve gotta burn to get this bastard? I can’t let him kill me here. I can’t let this bastard and his damn sword get the best of me now!”

Relaxed now, Donghyuck speaks once more, “You’re practically dead already. What do you intend to do? This charade is pathetic.” Almost lazily, he swings his sword again.

Kun cries out in pain, not having the strength to lift his sword entirely to block the blow. Then Donghyuck’s sword slams into his right shoulder. Kun’s clothes are soaked in blood, his skin the color of parchment.

“I hoped you might be entertaining, but I suppose it’s time for me to say goodbye now. Shame you don’t have enough energy to talk. I miss that dry wit,” Donghyuck sighs, “What’s the matter? Can’t hold your sword anymore? Where’s that warrior spirit?”

Even though he struggles to draw breath, Kun musters what little strength he has left to reach for his sword. The point of the blade tips and weaves in the air as blood pours from his body, but he stands. Donghyuck lifts his sword slick with the commander’s blood, and smiles.

“At last! I can kill you with my own hands and erase the humiliation you gave me!”

Before he can land another blow, the building shakes as an ear splitting crash barrels through somewhere on the estate. Smoke rapidly fills the room, making it hard to see.

“What is this?!” Donghyuck spits, distractedly turning from Kun to find the root of the interruption.

“Fire! Fire!” Cries scream out from deep in the building, and you can ascertain that one of the trebuchets aligning the fortified walls had been turned against the city for some reason or another in a last act of defense.

The fire from the lit fodder spreads quickly, roaring around the room and licking at the sides of the hall. Black smoke pours into the room, irritating your eyes and throat. Even as the room plunges into a near unbearable heat, the two men don’t lower their swords.

It’s only when the ceiling begins to give way does Donghyuck remark, “Damn it, this place is falling apart.” Not wanting to endanger himself, he shoves his sword back into its scabbard angrily, glaring across the smoldering wreckage at Kun. “I’ll let you go this time. We’ll finish this duel another day. And you will die.”

He disappears shortly thereafter and you run to Kun, “Are you alright?!”

Waxen skin and face writhing in pain, he doesn’t respond as he drops to the floor. And as he does, the near forgotten Dejun walks toward you from his corner, unbothered by the flames around him.

“The Demon clans no longer intend to involve themselves in your governmental squabbles.”

“Why?” Kun asks, sweat beading on his forehead.

“We owed favors to Goguryeo. We feel those have now been repaid.” Dejun shrugs, “Besides, even you must know that they will soon fall, regardless of the efforts of my kin.”

You spot a bitter smile creeping along Kun’s lips, “... Yeah.”

“And I suppose you intend to watch that ship sink?” Dejun asks, “Silla never gave your Hwarang the recognition it so desired, and pawned you off when they had nothing to lose. Why do you still fight?” The truth of his words drive a knife into Kun’s heart, and you see his face fall.

“We’re knights of the Crown, we fight for them no matter what, right?” Kun says with ragged breaths, “What I’m fighting for now isn’t Hanseong or Pyongyang, or any of those bastards that call themselves ministers. What I– no– What we’re fighting for is the bond in our hearts. The bond that we joined the Hwarang with.”

His hand clenches to his chest and he lets out a small ‘fuck’ before continuing, “It’s not easy, not by a long shot, but… I’d feel like a real asshole if I died before Taeil came back.”

Dejun closed his eyes while Kun spoke, he now stands silent, “If Donghyuck chooses to involve himself with either of you again, he will have betrayed the moral code that binds all of our kind. He will no longer have the support of the clans. He will be on his own.” He looks to the building around him, “I imagine this will be of little concern to him, but I ask you to hear his mind when he next tries you, he is not doing so at the behest of the Demon clans. He is, I fear, your problem now.”

Then, he turns and disappears. As you look to where he once stood, you hear Kun thud to the floor, collapsing from relief or exhaustion, you cannot tell. But, he’s fallen unconscious, and if you cannot escape soon, you’ll burn to death.

“Hello?! Are you here?!” A figure bursts into the hall, shrouded in smoke but with a voice you recognize.

Shotaro had come to the rescue in your most dire hour. He quickly helps you lift Kun so you can shoulder the weight of his body together as you leave the estate.

Hanseong, the town Kun had fought tooth and nail to overtake, only remained in Silla custody for a few days. As an army of Goguryeo soldiers came within the following week to recapture the city, leaving your commander’s mission for naught. After the battle, Wen Junhui’s army, along with the remaining Hwarang, set off to Koksan. Kun had somehow miraculously survived, but by no means has he recovered. For days he drifts in and out of consciousness, settling in at a small residence in Kyeju for him to recover.

April 20th, 666 - Kyeju, Kingdom of Silla Since you’d arrived in Kyeju, you’d buisied yourself with taking care of Kun. As a Fury, most normal means of healing and medicine have little to no effect on him. So, most of your nursing consists of fervently hoping that his natural strength and tenacity would bring him through. Fortunately, your prayers begin to pay off and in time his wounds begin to heal.

Although those made by Donghyuck’s blade did not do so easily, or quickly. You find yourself thinking of the battle of Hanseong. After watching Kun, many of the reluctant soldiers came around to clash swords with the enemy. They had told him it was an honor to fight alongside the Hwarang, for they were true warriors.

You replay that fated battle several times over the course of your day, you’re just about to do it again as you open the door to Kun’s room, set to change his bandages. Yet, you don’t have the chance, as when you peer in, you see him sitting at his desk. He’s healed enough to move and speak without pain, but he’s still meant to be confined to his bed.

“You shouldn’t be up,” you say quickly, walking inside and shutting the door behind you, “When I said you were healthy enough to get up, I didn’t mean you were healthy enough to work!”

“It’ll be only a minute,” he murmurs, looking over a few papers before him, “I’m going back to bed as soon as I finish this.”

“You nearly died! You need rest!” You rush to him, setting the bandages down on the tabletop.

“Died?” He laughs once, dryly, “Me? Hah. That was nothing. Barely a scratch.”

“Barely a– Do you know how long I’ve been taking care of you?!”

“Fine, fine,” he relents with a sigh. “Just a bit more reading, it’s all I ask.”

You sigh too, reaching for his blanket he’d strewn aside when he awoke. Moving to stand behind him, you drape it over his shoulders, “At least let me put this on you. You’re going to catch a chill.”

“Hm, I’m sure even if I said I don’t want it, you wouldn’t listen to me.”

“I’m glad you see how this works,” you say with a smile, “Now, as soon as that’s done, it’s straight back to bed.”

At last he turns to look at you, his face quirked in a small, bitter smile, “Alright, fine. Sorry for the trouble.”

“Huh?” You stare back at him intently.

“Guess I should be thanking you and Shotaro, huh? Well… I appreciate what you did. Thanks.” His thanks are rarely unaccompanied by cynicism, sarcasm or outright derision but this is different. Noticing your baffled expression he speaks again. “Something wrong? Did I say something funny?”

“Oh! No no no,” you quickly assure him, “It’s not that.” It’s more you’ve never seen him act so nice.

After that, you leave him to his work, checking back an hour later to make sure that he’s asleep and not working himself to the bone. Once doing so, you return to your quarters for another few, quiet hours, before a visitor arrives in the night.

“I thought I’d come and pay him a visit…” You hear the voice of Wen Junhui speak out as you approach the common area, you also note Shotaro standing next to him.

“He’s resting at the moment–” You begin, but stop when you hear movement behind you.

“Sir–!” Shotaro says, rushing to Kun’s side, “I’m glad to see you standing! For a while, I really wasn’t sure what was going to happen.” His eyes begin to tear up and he blinks rapidly to clear them.

“C’mon, don’t give me that,” Kun gives a short laugh, “You really think I’d die so easily?”

“I’m sorry sir, you’re right,” he rubs his hand across his face awkwardly, trying to brush away the tears that refuse to stop forming.

“Kun,” Junhui says solemnly, “I’m going to be honest with you. You fought like a Demon back in Hanseong, I’ll give you that. Morale is through the roof. The whole army won’t stop talking about you. But your actions were dangerous and idiotic,” the once calm demeanor of the general turns angered. “You are a commanding officer, not a soldier! You don’t belong on the front line!”

“General Wen, he’s only just recovered… Don’t you think you’re being a bit too harsh–” Shotaro tries to quell the other’s discontent.

“No! I’m going to give my piece, I won’t let him slide out of this one!” Junhui shouts, “Listen to me, Qian Kun. Combining our men isn’t just about new clothes and new titles, we have to change about how we think about war. We have to learn new tactics. The commander charging at the front of the army does not show that we are improving our strategy!”

Flustered at this point, Junhui struggles hard to keep his composure, “If the soldiers are the hands and feet, then their commanding officer is the head. Without a head, the body is a useless mess! This war will be lost if we succumb to our own pride!”

Kun’s eyes go wide. The words similarly mirror one of the last things that Minhyung had said to him. Keeping his head on so that the body can move forward…

“Minhyung’s ghost back to haunt me,” Kun sighs out with a weighted smile, a faraway look in his eyes.

“Is something funny?” Junhui frowns, “This is serious! Don’t you understand how worried I was about you? Hell, how worried the whole army was about you?!”

For a few moments, Kun simply stares at him.

“Say what you want!” Junhui stands his ground, albeit a bit taken aback at the commander’s attitude, “It won’t change my mind!”

“You’re right, Wen. Sorry for worrying you.” He follows his surprisingly genuine apology with a similarly surprising bow.

Junhui has clearly prepared himself for a variety of reactions from Kun, but this had been none of them. For several moments he stands there, too flabbergasted to speak.

“My apologies to you too, Shotaro. I hear you helped carry me all the way here.”

“Oh no!” Shotaro shakes his head, “No, it was nothing. Anything for you, sir.”

June 19th, 666 – Koksan, Kingdom of Silla Summer blooms from the remnants of spring in full fury. Rumors and news about the intense fighting floats in and out of the town, and you grow uneasy thinking about the loss of lives on each side. In the subsequent weeks following Wen Junhui’s visit, he’s once again able to take Hanseong and keep a steady hand over keeping it in Silla's grasp. And although he hasn’t completely healed, Kun has decided to leave Kyeju as soon as he is well enough to march with Junhui who’s now stationed in Koksan.

The way there seems longer than you'd ever thought possible. At last, you’d caught up with the main body of the Hwarang.

Yuta’s at the door to greet you the moment you arrive at the estate.

“Commander,” Yuta says with a small smile, “I’m grateful to see you alive.”

“Glad to see you’re alright too, I hear you’ve been doing well.”

Although Yuta looks relieved to be reunited with Kun, he frowns and rubs his hand to his forehead. Perhaps fatigue from the battles occurring is beginning to get to him.

Kun looks past him to the people standing behind him, “Jeno, Sungchan, nice to see you’re still around. Was starting to get worried about you two.” Despite their commander’s voiced appreciations, both wear glum expressions.

It’s Sungchan who begins to shake before breaking down into tears, his voice quivering violently, “You entrusted me with Chief’s safety, b-but– I wasn’t strong enough! I couldn’t protect him!”

Although hearing his words, you cannot get yourself to grasp their meaning. For him to be this distraught can only mean one thing.

“We have been told that at the end of last month that Taeil was… beheaded in Pyongyang.” Yuta steps in after Sungchan fails to compose himself, being ushered aside and consoled by Jeno.

‘Beheaded.’ You swallow at the word. Taeil had been killed like a common criminal, and you know it would have been pure humiliation for him.

“Hm, didn’t even let him kill himself,” it almost seems as if Kun had expected this. His voice is controlled and unsurprised, but within his eyes you can see a bottomless, yawning despair.

“It’s my fault he died!” Sungchan exclaims, “Please commander, I deserve to die as well!”

“I as well!” Jeno adds, “I begged you to let me fight for his freedom, but I– I wasn’t successful! I’m a failure!”

“You idiots! Look around you,” Kun frowns, “There’s no goodman way we have a single Hwarang left to spare! If you’re so prepared for death, then don’t give me your cheap words. Prove yourselves on the battlefield!”

The two fall silent after a quick, “Yes sir.”

Later that night, both Taeyong and Jaemin come to visit Kun.

As members of the Fury Corp, they had been resting when you’d arrived earlier in the day.

“Your arrival has the men in something of an uproar,” Taeyong muses, “It woke me somewhat earlier than usual.”

“I heard you got hurt pretty bad, Commander. Didn’t think we’d see you again so soon,” Jaemin says, almost scanning for wounds on the elder.

“Well, I couldn’t just sit on my ass once I heard there were battles happening all over the place,” Kun says, sounding calm and relaxed. You know that isn’t how he’s feeling on the inside though. If you have been feeling depressed since learning of Taeil’s passing, you cannot begin to comprehend how he must be feeling.

“We should be on our way then, our work begins at night, after all,” Taeyong notes and begins to head for the door. Jaemin nods and heads after him before Kun speaks up.

“Jaemin, do you think you can tell Yuta to come by?”

“Huh?” Jaemin looks back, “Uh, sure… I’ll go and get him now.” Before he leaves he says one more thing to Kun, “I know you only just got here. But you should really rest tonight.”

With both of them gone, the room falls into an awkward silence. Kun hasn’t told you to leave, but it seems unlikely that he’ll start talking to you either. Just as you’re about to break the quiet, Yuta opens the door and steps inside.

“I heard you had business with me. Can I help you?”

Without even waiting for him to settle in, Kun says, “From now on, I’ll be commanding from the front line.”

A strangled gulp treks down your throat as he says this out of almost nowhere. If he were to fight on the front line, the violence would be intense and he still hadn’t fully healed.

“Do you intend to die in battle?” Yuta asks simply.

“No,” Kun shakes his head, “I won’t go out that easily. You’ve been out there. Only right for me to take that burden off you, right?”

His presence would raise morale among the men but if he died, the Hwarang dies with him.

“You raise an excellent point, sir. If you mean to take my place, however,” the air grows thick as Yuta’s hand falls to his sword, “I must ask you to defeat me first. If you cannot best me, then only death awaits you on the front lines.”

“Getting a little full of yourself without me, huh?” Kun’s lips turn upward into a grin as his sword slides from its scabbard.

“You shouldn’t be doing this!” You cry out as Yuta’s blade is also released, the blade glinting in the glow of the lanterns.

“Stay out of this!” Kun says and locks eyes with Yuta. Seconds linger as they remain unmoving, just then they leap towards one another, swords struggling against one another. After a bit, Kun is thrown backwards to sprawl across the floorboards.

“What?!” He looks surprised. Even only partially healed, he still has far greater strength than a human, and he isn’t the type to go easy on a friend.

“This war is not so easy that you might rush to the front line without your full strength,” Yuta says and as you look back at him your eyes grow wide.

“Yuta…” With his now reddened eyes and white hair, there’s no doubt that he’s a Fury. “You drank the pimul?”

“Don’t worry about me, I made my own decision.” The simple fact that he’s decided this path says more about the battles he’s been fighting than words ever can. Yuta looks to Kun, who’s rising to his feet, “I understand why you wish to fight, that is why I cannot allow you to.” He straightens himself and sheaths his sword, his hair returning to normal. “Perhaps you might be able to forget your pain in the midst of battle, but I cannot afford to let you do that. You cannot be permitted to turn a blind eye to our problems.”

Kun slowly puts his sword away, “Because I’m the Chief now?”

“Because you’re the only one who can unify the Hwarang.” After hearing that, Kun sighs, only allowing Yuta to continue. “Leave the front line to us. You, Kun, should remain here and plan our strategies.”

“Fine. The front line’s yours until my wounds heal.”

An honest, “Thank you” leaves Yuta, and then he turns to you. “I’m leaving him in your care. Don’t let him out of your sight until he’s healthy again.”

You nod and give him what you hope to be a reassuring smile. He inclines his head to you, turns to Kun to give a short bow, then leaves. As soon as the door closes, Kun’s face darkens and his brows draw together.

“Damn it… He’s gotten to the point where he doesn’t trust me and thinks I need you as a babysitter.”

“He’s just worried about you, that’s all,” you try to justify Yuta’s actions.

Kun gives a bitter laugh, then stops suddenly. He gulps out a noise and clutches his stomach in pain, his body and hands shaking as his hair and eyes begin to change color. With the bloodlust taking hold, he begins to groan out in pain.

“This way,” you quickly take his arm and lead him to a room off of the main hall. In the open, anyone is privy to catch him.

As he settles in the room, you set out towards him, and he has a look in his eyes as if he already knows what your next move is. You tug at your collar, loosening it like you’d done before. He leans toward you and you feel a sharp prick on your neck, you stay as still as you can as he bites down onto you. His hot breath panting along your neck, drinking slowly as he begins to calm.

Eventually, he pulls back. There’s pain on his face but not from the bloodlust.

“This can’t go on forever…” His face turns upward into a half sour smile, “You. Me. This war. Everything…”

“Kun?” His eyes are distant and he doesn’t seem to hear you. You can’t describe it but something feels strange, wrong, even.

September 6th, 666 – Koksan, Kingdom of Silla By the time Kun’s injuries heal, it’s early autumn. Battles still rage along the fronts, and Silla inches nearer and nearer towards its goal. Kun hasn’t received any orders of late, but you feel that that’s about to change when you hear Shotaro storming down the hallway.

You’re settled in the main room with Kun, Taeyong, Jaemin, Jeno and Sungchan when the doors burst open, Shotaro shouting, “I have news from Wen Junhui! He says were to launch an offensive against Pyongyang.”

“Pyongyang? That’s the capital….” Jeno says seriously, glancing towards Kun.

In other words, this may be the push to finally close in on Goguryeo.

“What now then?” Sungchan looks to Kun as well.

“We’ll need to get there as soon as possible. No doubt Junhui has some elaborate plan to route out their forces.” You haven’t seen Kun this excited in a while, and the others in the room pick up on his energy.

“Our ships have already been sent to Ongjin, they will be able to converge on Pyongyang once the situation up north has settled.”

“Then I should go to Ongjin first,” Taeyong says, “We should establish a stronghold for when the main body of men arrives.”

“Isn’t it a bit dangerous to have our representative be someone from the Fury Corps?” You postulate to the group.

“My father’s family is from Ongjin, you know.” Taeyong says quietly, “I have a few connections there. I feel I am most suited to lead the advance guard. There’s… Something else that’s been bothering me as well.”

“Bothering you?” You question but all he does in response is nod and smile.

“Taeyong… you’re supposed to be dead, aren’t you?” Jaemin interrupts, “Seems like that might be an issue.”

“A minor detail,” he waves it off, “easily dealt with.”

“In that case, he’s probably the best choice,” Shotaro murmurs.

“No,” Kun disagrees, “The Fury Corps isn’t cut out for that. You still can’t stand up during the day.”

“It’s difficult, certainly, but not impossible.” Taeyong argues, “I don’t see any reason to just follow behind the rest of the army, and I’d be glad to push myself for this.”

You don’t doubt his ability to do that, but you do question the validity of his motives.

“There’s… a bit more to his message,” Shotaro says after Kun and Taeyong have been staring at each other for a moment. “Junhui will be leading his men to Tagok Pass in hopes of stalling the Goguryeo reinforcements. I believe he means to buy time so that our allies can sack the city without interference. But…”

“The pass is on the front line right now,” Jaemin drums his fingers along the hilt of his sword. “I understand what he’s trying to do, but I don’t think it’s going to be as easy as he thinks it’ll be.”

“That’s a good point,” Jeno sighs, “The enemy’s getting desperate, and we don’t know what else they’ve got up their sleeves.”

“If we want Junhui to come back alive, we need to send some reinforcements to go along with him,” Kun ascertains.

“I disagree.” Taeyong frowns. “If we are to win in Pyongyang, we must arrive there at full strength.”

“Are you saying we should abandon Junhui then?” Yuta asks.

“Well, if both of our forces are wiped out by Goguryeo, there is hardly any point at all.”

The men all shoot glances at one another, formulating their own thoughts and responses before Yuta speaks once more, “I will remain with Wen. Without their aid in previous battles none of us would be here. I will go to Tagok Pass. Kun, please take the rest of the men to Ongjin.”

“Yuta, you–” Kun’s eyes grow wide.

“Then I’ll go and prepare to depart.” Before giving Kun a chance to respond, Taeyong stands quickly and leaves the room.

Jaemin doesn’t seem particularly happy about the way things have gone either, and after a moment of furious thought, he stands as well, “I guess I’ll go with him. Don’t really want to let him out of my sight, you know.”

“Yeah,” Kun nods, “That’s probably smart.”

“Be careful, Jaemin,” you say as he walks past you. He gives you a small smile and a wink, then dashes out the door after Taeyong.

“Osaki,” Kun looks at the man still at the door, “I need you to go and tell Junhui what we’ve decided.”

“Understood,” Shotaro says quickly, “I’ll be off as soon as I can.”

Once he leaves, Yuta turns to Kun. Whether or not he was waiting for the room to be cleared, you’re unsure.

“Please survive. No matter what happens.”

“What’s the matter?” His brow furrows as he looks to the other, “That came from nowhere.”

“In the Hwarang, you and Taeil upheld the path of a true warrior.” Even when slanted by their own kingdom, they had never compromised what they stand for. “Our standard of truth is a banner for everyone who fights. We lead the way.”

Yuta and Kun look at one another silently, before Yuta continues. “As the man who made the Hwarang into what it has become, it must be your duty to carry that standard. Every Hwarang before you and after is relying on that.”

“You make it sound so easy.” Kun replies with his thin lipped grin. “I’ll promise you this though, I’ll stick around until the Hwarang’s dead, or I am.”

“Thank you, Chief.” Yuta smiles, eventually turning to you, “I leave Kun in your care.”

The words are few but hold great emotion behind them, “We’ll be fine. I’m sure of it… After all, I don’t think he could die even if someone killed him. I’ve seen him on the verge of death many times, but he always pulls through. So,” your jaw locks and you look directly into Yuta’s eyes, “Please don’t die, Yuta.”

The battle at Tagok Pass is sure to be an intense one. Many lives, you’re sure, are going to be lost.

“I won’t die even if I get killed?” Kun’s eyebrow piques, “That’s quite a statement. If you’ve got time to worry about me, maybe you oughta be worrying about yourself too, Yuta.” He’d said it as a joke but there’s no mistaking his underlying sincerity.

“I won’t die easily either. After all, I will be fighting in the name of the Hwarang.” Yuta says calmly and then addresses you, “Thank you for your kind gesture.”

And so, you accompany Kun to Ongjin. He’s still gravely concerned about Yuta, thus he’d ordered Shotaro to remain alongside him at Tagok Pass. LEaving them both turns out to be much more difficult than you’d imagined. All you can do is pray that they survive, and that you will meet again someday.

December 1st, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla As winter takes hold, the cold wind blows down on the main body of the Hwarang as they arrive in Ongjin. The trip had been impeded by several small snowstorms, but now upon your arrival a new problem is encountered: Taeyong and the Fury Corps were nowhere to be found. Jaemin, too, had been unheard from.

From the townspeople in Ongjin, you hear disturbing rumors that murder has been on the rise in recent weeks.

Upon reaching the regional minister’s house, you’re met with a man who splits a grin as soon as he sees Kun. “Long time no see, Qian. How are you?”

“I’m glad to see you’re doing well, Xu.”

Later on, you learn that this man is Xu Minghao, the Tang navy’s second-in-command. When the Yamoto forces had fired upon Sabi some years earlier, Minghao had been in command of the Tang ships that aided the Silla forces on land. While Kun hadn’t been at the battle, he was able to speak with and befriend the man when he visited Seorabeol some weeks later.

“Have you already heard about Taeil?” Minghao frowns,as Kun nods. “I apologize for having been unable to help. Your kingdom has truly lost a great man.”

“He would’ve been happy to hear you say that,” Kun says with a bitter smile, “But he wouldn’t want us to stand around crying about him. He’d want us to get to work. Can you give me a rundown of what we’re working with?”

“Unfortunately I don’t have the greatest news,” Minghao says, “While we’ve secured the city, there is something… wrong occurring. I have requested a meeting with the newly implemented officials but I haven’t received any form of response. To top it off, there’s a suspicious group of men running around Ongjin. Well, there are rumors, at least.”

“Suspicious how?”

“Well murders have increased, and a few rumors report the assailiants running back to the minister’s home.”

Suspicious men running around, possibly murdering civilians… Taeyong and the Fury Corps unreachable… It isn’t hard to put two and two together.

Kun and you lock eyes, no doubt thinking the same thing.

“If this continues we may become sidetracked here from our main goal,” Minghao states, “Perhaps if we could arrest these murders and restore peace in this area…”

“Minghao, think you could leave the murders to me?” The other man opens his mouth to protest, but something in Kun’s gaze makes him change his mind and he nods.

“Alright, I’ll leave this one to you. No more questions from me.”

Once Minghao returns to his men, you turn to Kun, “Do you think it’s Taeyong…?”

“Can’t say,” Kun sighs out breathily, “You heard the same things I did. No way to know for sure but if it is… I’ll have to kill him.”

“Kun…”

“He got pretty freaked out when he heard about where a Fury's power comes from. Might be he’s pretty depressed right now. Maybe crazy.” He shakes his head and looks to the minister’s house, “Strange things are afoot in Ongjin. We can’t be careless.”

December 2nd, 666 - Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla The next day, Kun begins his investigation. Despite your attempts to convince him that he still needs rest, not the stress of a murder investigation, he presses on. And so, that is how you find yourself lounging around the rooms the Hwarang are occupying while Kun goes off on rounds with the rest of the men.

You’re engrossed in reading over some medical papers Namekawa had left you with when you receive an unexpected visitor.

“Where were you this whole time?!” The papers drop from your grasp as Na Jaemin steps into the room, “We couldn’t contact you, we were all so worried…”

“Do you know where Kun is?” He doesn’t answer your question, but rather jumps straight to the chase.

“He’s off doing rounds at the minister’s estate…”

“Ah,” Jaemin looks a bit crestfallen, “Can you give him a message for me? I can tell you everything since we got here. Just make sure you pass it on to him.”

You gulp, waiting for him to open up. “The minister isn’t being cooperative. Chances are they're being pressured by the enemy somehow. At least that's what Taeyong thinks. So, we looked around a little more and while we were doing that we found out that Heo is actually here.”

“What?!” You cry out at the unexpected revelation. Your father had been forced to do research on the Furies by the revivalists before the war broke out, or at least that's what you thought.

“Yeah… and… he seems to be leading a unit of Furies for the Goguryeo forces.” Jaemin frowns, “Well we figured we could just let that slide so we started watching their Furies, you know, where they go and stuff and well… I saw Taeyong meeting with Heo.”

Jaemin explains that Taeyong told him they'd be more likely to get spotted if they moved together and went off on his own. This is pretty peculiar on its own but sometime after they split up Jaemin witnessed Taeyong meeting with your father.

“I don’t know anymore… I don’t know what Taeyong is thinking.”

“It doesn’t mean that Taeyong is connected with Goguryeo, does it?” Your brow furrows.

“If that were the case then there wouldn't be a need for him to lie to me though, right?” Jaemin says frustratedly, “Doesn't act like he's got any plans to contact the rest of the Hwarang. I just didn't know what to do…”

You’re not sure what else to say and just before you open your mouth you hear a commotion happening at the entrance of the building. The door to your room is kicked open and several strange men suddenly leap inside.

“Who the hell are they–?! Shit!” Jaemin shouts as they unsheathe their swords and lunge after him. He dodges the attack easily drawing his own sword as he moves. He strikes out at one of the men before he has a chance to recover. The man laughs and the spot where Jaemin had struck him is beginning to heal immediately. Suddenly, the man's eyes begin to grow a deep crimson you understand what you're up against.

“Furies…!”

“Get behind me!” Jaemin reaches out and grabs your wrist, pulling you backwards.

“Now, there’s no need for that,” a new voice says from the entrance. You feel your eyelids footer incredulously after hearing a man's voice. It's familiar… nostalgically so.

“Father?!” You’re frozen in place as Jaemin continues to fight the Furies.

“What the hell!? Who are these guys! It's broad daylight! How are they moving swiftly?!”Although he's Clearly they're superior regards to swordsmanship, he's outnumbered and the daylight had weakened him. He's slow and his strikes are unsure.

Your father maintains his cool composure, and he mutters under his breath as he observes the events, “Aren't they wonderful? Furies no longer restrained by the cycles of day and night.”

“You…” You stare at him, mouth agape, “You did this?”

“Of course, my child. I am unsure if the news has reached you yet but I was captured by the Goguryeo Army, and in this captivity I continued to research the pimul.”

“Father– you need to stop them!” You look to your friend fighting, “At this rate he’ll–”

Heo Jinsang’s eyes widen as if he’s only just remembered and he looks over to Jaemin with a smile. “Ah, yes. I don’t know how to thank you. Without you, it would have taken much longer to find my daughter.”

“You followed me?!” Jaemin spits through grit teeth.

Ignoring him, your father looks back to you and speaks with a soft voice, “I’ve come to get you. At last, we’ll be able to restore our clan.”

“Clan…? You mean the Heo family?”

“With these superior Furies, restoring the glory of our clan will be child’s play.” Heo laughs, “Once the kingdoms bear witness to the potential of these breakthroughs, they cannot ignore us! We can even wipe out the Demon clans who rejected our plea for help, avenging our kin!”

“You’re planning on using Furies to restore the Heo lineage to power?”

“Yes, I am. Everything I have done was for you.” His voice evokes the same tone he had used to speak to you when you were a child. You shake your head to combat it and his eyes narrow. With a few swift footfalls, he closes in, “You’ve been with the Hwarang for too long. They’ve corrupted you.”

No… It isn’t you who’s changed, it’s your father.

“Goddamn it! Get off me you bastards!” Despite being out of breath, Jaemin manages to swipe at the Furies with his sword, giving himself space. However, no matter the amount of wounds he’s able to inflict on them, they heal immediately.

“Father…”

“If we just sit down and talk this through, I’m sure you’d understand.” Your father’s face lies in a stony demeanor.

“I–!” Before you can say anything else, he drives his fist into your stomach. Stars leap before your eyes, the world grows dark and you slip into unconsciousness.

When you awake, you’re in an unfamiliar room.

“Where…” Your hands gripping your head as you sit up, “Where am I?”

“You’re at the minister’s estate.” A voice says before you and you widen your eyes.

“Taeyong?!” You cry out before noticing the figure next to him. Beside him stands your father.

“What’s going on here?” You say as you scramble to your feet. “Why are you two together?!”

“I met with Heo secretly here in Ongjin, and we’ve agreed to work together in order to do Fury research.” Taeyong explains, resting his arm on the hilt of his sword.

“Then… You’re working with Goguryeo? You’ve betrayed Silla… Betrayed the Hwarang…”

“Is that what you think?” Taeyong raises an eyebrow, “Interesting…” Explaining himself had never been one of Taeyong’s strong points.

“How are you feeling, my child?” Heo asks sympathetically, “I apologize for the rough treatment. I hope you aren’t too hurt.” His tone is intimate and caring, you feel yourself wavering towards the father you used to know.

“I suggest you make no attempts to escape…” Taeyong says calmly but with more intimidation than you’d seen from him before, “We could make that difficult. In any event, it was reckless of you to bring her here, Heo.” He glances at you before continuing, “Kun is no fool. Her disappearance will surely mean that he will be onto our plans. I expect him at any moment.”

“You told me that if I wanted to know where my daughter was, I just had to follow Na to the Hwarang.”

“Yes. I did.” Taeyong’s lips curve into a frown, “But I never suggested to kidnap her. Alas, what’s done is done. No point arguing about it. We need to be thinking about what this could mean, and plan for it.”

“I’m sure the Furies I left to deal with Na will return to the estate soon, you needn’t worry about the future.” Heo shrugs.

“What did you do to Jaemin?” Your voice nearly breaks.

“I doubt he survived. After all, I did bring quite a few of them.”

Your whole body shakes. You want wholeheartedly to not believe it, but the Furies that your father had brought were unlike any you’d ever seen before. Jaemin had already looked pale and weak even before he’d started fighting…

“You just have to assume I’m dead?” A voice says from the open doorway, “C’mon, that hurts my feelings…” He’s leaning against the frame and someone brushes past him, glaring at Taeyong and your father.

“You alright?” Kun asks as he looks at you.

“I am!” You nod vigorously and he lets out a snort of laughter.

“How did you find us?!” Heo asks incredulously, “I’ve made so many improvements on my Furies. How could you have destroyed them all?”

“Improvements? If you say so, but if you want to take out the Hwarang, you’ll need about ten times what you sent.” Kun smirks.

“I figured you’d be here soon,” Taeyong murmurs, “You didn’t bring any of the men, though… Well, I suspected you wouldn’t. Still, doesn’t it seem rather reckless for the two of you to charge headfirst into unknown enemy territory?”

“Explain.” Kun’s eyes narrow at Taeyong, “Why didn’t you contact us?”

“There’s nothing for you in Ongjin.” Taeyong says simply.

“I was given orders by Yeon Gaesomun to come here. They told me to take my Furies and kill the traitors who reside here. However, I found such a plan unagreeable when so many test subjects reside here…” Heo sighs out.

“We found common ground in our distaste for Goguryeo,” Taeyong explains, “and thusly decided to seize Ongjin for ourselves.”

“So you’re not fighting with our enemy…?” You struggle to piece together everything.

“I’m on your side, child. I have no intention of taking part in mankind’s disputes.” Your father says as he crosses his arms, “Let us bring retribution to the humans who destroyed our clan and the Demons who betrayed us. It is in our destiny to forge a new Demon kingdom with our own hands– no, we will be the only Demon clan!”

You recall Sooyoung explaining how the Heo village had been destroyed by humans. Even then, you can’t get yourself to agree with your father.

Just then, the sound of footsteps loudly resound out from the hallway. Furies pour into the room as Taeyong smiles, “Ah, they seem to have noticed our intruders.”

“Hey–!” Kun’s eyes widen as he notices their faces, “They’re the Hwarang’s–!”

“Not only does this castle hold the remnants of Goguryeo’s Fury army, but also of the Hwarang’s Fury Corps.” Taeyong crosses his arms, “All of the Furies that exist in both Kingdoms are gathered here.”

Red eyes surround Jaemin, Kun and you. No humanity resides in their gazes.

“Please give us your help,” Your father calls out to you, “We need you to lead us. You must command the Furies and restore the Heo clan.”

But you don’t care about restoring the clan. You don’t want to create more Furies so that blood can drive them mad. You don’t want to see more suffering.

“Father… you’re wrong.” Heo’s eyes go wide when you speak. “Building a kingdom on the corpses of others isn’t right! I can’t agree to it!”

Human or Demon, every life is precious. Just because your home village was destroyed doesn’t mean you can oppress humans.

“I believe Heo was saying that he’d be willing to assist the Hwarang.” Taeyong interjects, looking at Kun. “What do you think, Qian? Would you like to lead this army of Furies against Goguryeo?”

“You know the answer.” With Kun having been against Furies from the very beginning, you doubt he’s changed his mind about them.

“So I suppose that ends our negotiation.” Taeyong sighs, slowly drawing his sword from its scabbard. “Very well…”

You stiffen, yet Kun doesn’t move towards his own blade. He remains still, cooly contemplating Taeyong. Almost as if someone’s dumping white ink on it, Taeyong’s hair slowly changes to white and he raises his sword.

Instead of swiping at Kun though, he cuts down a Fury standing nearby him.

“All a Fury exists for is battle, and now we’ve taken that away from them…” Taeyong shakes his head with a sigh, “The least I can do for them is let them die here, in battle.”

The room falls silent. Then it explodes in noise– the enraged cries of the Furies and the rattle of swords being drawn.

“Jaemin–” Kun says quickly.

“I know!” The younger shouts and drops into a fighting stance, slipping his hand around the hilt of his sword. A grin splits on his lips as his hair turns white, “Taeyong, this is way too badass for an old guy like you! Why didn’t you tell us?!”

“Well,” Taeyong chuckles, “as they say, to fool your enemies, you must first fool your friends.” Their swords whistle and spark through the air, Fury after Fury falling before them. “Besides, doesn’t the hero’s right-hand man make the best villain?”

Kun responds with a bark of wry laughter and draws his own sword in a flash of silver light as his hair turns white as well. The men get into their stances and face the Furies as Furies themselves.

“The hell are you talking about?” Kun says with a grin, “Still means the hero gets stuck cleaning up the damn mess.”

As their three swords spin and hiss through the air, blood gushes and spatters, painting the walls of the estate a deep red. Wave after wave conquered, they drown their foes in a sea of blood. You notice that your mouth has gone dry, your hands beginning to shake. In the corner, you spot your father sitting down.

“Everything you told me was a lie?” Heo asks Taeyong. “You said you wanted to do more research on the Furies in the kingdom of Demons… Why?”

“I saw the end.” Taeyong answers, “I was trying to discover a way for Furies to live past their… limits. Our short lifespans made me impatient. To continue my research I even dirtied my hands.” Every suspicious thing he had done had been in the service of a single goal: saving his fellow Furies. “We have no future as Furies. You know this as well as I do, Heo.”

“No matter how resistant you make them to sunlight, they will push themselves too hard, and their lifespans will shrink and the bloodlust will drive them mad.” Taeyong confirms the truth you’d all suspected: there is no way to save the Furies. “We are a mistake: a failed experiment. Furies are not something that should exist in this world. Let’s end this.”

Taeyong’s true intentions leave you surprised, as does his admission that the Furies are a failure. Is he right? Can they not be saved? Has all hope been lost? You let your mind drift for a moment, and then you see a shadow move in the corner of your eye– A Fury only feet from you, his eyes red and mad with bloodlust. You reach for your sword but it’s too late.

Before your hand even touches the hilt, you see the Fury’s blade sweeping toward you. Blood splashes down onto the floor before you, but it isn’t yours. A figure standing before you had taken the blow in your stead.

“Father?!”

The Fury pulls back for another swing but then it freezes, gurgles oddly and slides neatly in half, a blade glistening in the center.

“Turn your back on us in a fight, will you?” Kun spits as he looks down to the halved Fury, “Idiot.” He shifts his eyes up to your father’s wound, and you see his face twitch. Immediately, he moves closer and turns his back to the two of you, sword held at the ready.

“Are you… alright? Are you hurt anywhere?” Your father asks as he turns to look at you. There’s blood splattered all over his chest. The wound, now that you can see it, is undoubtedly a fatal one.

“Yes, yes. I’m fine. I’m not hurt at all,” you say quickly. His hand reaches out and grasps your shoulder, he falls to his knees and you follow after him. Quickly you lay him on his back, clutching at his hand.

“Our research was a… failure. I knew there was no future for the Furies…” He murmurs out as tears begin to well in your eyes, “But I couldn’t give it up… I wanted to bring back your clan, your family.” Ever since you were young he’d always tried to do what was best for you. “It seems my fate is to die with the Furies… I have committed terrible sins. This is for the best, please, don’t cry.”

You nod your head knowing that if you’re to open your mouth the tears would never stop. He gives you one last smile, sighs a calm breath and is gone.

After what seems like an eternity, you look up. The battle is over. The Furies that came to fruition by the Hwarang and your father lie dead, scattered around the room.

“Kind of a waste, isn’t it?” Taeyong says as he looks at the bodies, “That many Furies could have been awfully useful… The Hwarang could have used these men.”

“You don’t win battles by thinking you’ll lose them.” Kun says.

“Well, you don’t win by thinking you’ll win either,” Jaemin snorts with laughter, then coughs to cover it up.

It’s true, the Hwarang had lost a lot of Furies but their unity had grown stronger.

“Ack–!” A sudden burst of pain wipes the grin from Jaemin’s face. Taeyong, too, has doubled over in agony. Their hair which had returned to normal goes back to stark white.

“Looks like we’ve reached our limit,” Taeyong says through grit teeth.

Dejun’s words suddenly flash to you. The Fury’s power isn’t a gift from the gods. You’re only borrowing life that you would spend decades on.

Jaemin sees your eyes go wide and gives you an awkward sort of laugh, “We were some of the first Furies.” They’d been in more battles as Furies than anyone else, and all of the strength and healing they’d enjoyed ate away at their futures until there was nothing left.

“Did you know…?” The question leaves Kun as a whisper.

Taeyong smiles and then gives a slow nod, “What warrior doesn’t know his own body?” His legs suddenly shake violently and he falls to the floor, Jaemin soon following.

Kun drops to his knees and takes both of their hands in his own.

“Kun… Do you remember?” Taeyong remineces weakly, “Back when we were at Moon Hall, we would spend all night talking.”

“Yeah,” Kun nods, “We would say that Taeil would never be content with being just the heir of a small school. We promised to do what we could for him…”

“Who would’ve thought he would leave this world before us?” Taeyong frowns and his voice grows quiet, “I know we haven’t always seen eye to eye, but without you, we couldn’t have built up the Hwarang.”

“Same goes for you too…” Kun says with a small smile, “You were the one that always calmed me down whenever I’d start a fight with Yixing.” He’s doing his best to act tough so that Jaemin and Taeyong won’t worry.

“Looks like we’re taking the lead this time… Don’t be in too much of a hurry to catch up though, alright?” Jaemin adds in a bright and kind tone, “I mean, you barely had any time to rest since you joined the Hwarang.”

Kun just nods.

“I’m having a hard time buying that ‘yes’. You’re a little too short-tempered to keep a promise like that…”

“Shut it, you little brat. You really think I’m gonna take that crap from you?”

Jaemin’s face relaxes as Kun snarls back at him. Even in this moment, Jamein’s tender and kind for the benefit of his Chief.

“You must go south.” Taeyong suddenly says. “Heo said he used water from Tamna when he was refining the pimul.”

Your eyes widen– perhaps there still is hope. Maybe, just maybe, there’s a chance something south can repair the curse of the Fury to these men. Taeyong’s last words are the fait muster of hope for the fate of the Furies.

“Kun… Don’t… don’t lose sight of what matters, alright? Being reckless doesn’t work out so well.” Jaemin’s voice has grown rough and raspy. Kun’s knuckles whiten as they tighten around his comerade’s hands. But with a sound like sand pouring over a stone, their hands crumble into ash. In moments, they are no more.

“Kun…” You call out but he doesn’t answer. He only stares, silent, at the twin piles of ash that sit where his friends were only moments before. There aren’t any tears in his eyes, but even so he’s somehow crying.

You’re not sure how long you sit there before he stands up. The room that includes only you two is devastatingly quiet.

“Let’s go.” He says quietly, his voice curt and clipped. Yet, when he turns to you, his eyes suddenly go wide. “Hey, no crying.”

You nod, trying to stop, but it’s no good. The tears don’t pause, regardless of how much you wipe them away. In one day– an hour– you’ve been forced to say goodbye to Jaemin, to Taeyong… and the father you haven’t seen in over a year.

December 17th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla The events of the magistrate’s house resonate with you for a while, and after some time has passed you find yourself alone again, standing in front of the estate. Wisps of snowflakes fall around you, wind hitting your cheeks and chapping your lips.

“They sure took their sweet-ass time,” Kun quips as he exits the front gates of the building. His worn expression indicates a worried tiredness.

“Hello,” you greet him, “How was the meeting?”

“How? Hmph.” He shakes his head, “Those idiots north of Pyongyang don’t like any of the plans we’ve proposed, even with Junhui and I poking around as often as we are. Apparently with the incident here and continuing at Tagok, Munmu doesn’t trust us yet to act. That’s the bullshit they relayed! Can you believe that?”

Kun paces the front gate, arms crossed and breath puffing in the air, “They act all high and mighty on their capital in the north, but pussy out when it’s time for the final push. It’s pathetic, Munmu hasn’t done shit and is relying on the Tang for everything.” He frowns, “Whatever. Let’s head back to the inn, the sun’s really beating down today.”

“Okay…” A cloud of frustration seems to follow you as you return to the inn, most notably in Kun. “We’ll be there soon enough, hang in there.” His skin looks pale and watching him in silent agony makes your heart ache.

“Don’t worry about me,” he sighs, “How about you? Are you holding up alright?”

“I’m… fine. I mean, I’m pretty resilient.”

“How can you say that?” He lets out a dry laugh, “You stay up all night just to tend to me…”

“I’m tough.” You smile back, “When you finally fall asleep, it gives me the peace of mind so that I can rest easily too.”

Kun’s lips curl and he doesn’t seem satisfied with your answer. Instead, he just stares at you. He turns his head gradually to the hues of red and orange covering the winter sky in the distance. You follow his lead and look towards the horizon.

“Huh…?” Your vision suddenly blurs.

“Hey, what’s the matter?” Kun’s right next to you, but yet his voice sounds so distant.

Before you know it, your body collapses to the ground.

“Hey!” Kun shouts out, “You alright?! Hang in there!”

When you regain consciousness, you discover yourself tucked snugly in bed.

“About time you woke up,” Kun says as you look around the room. “Do you know where you are right now?”

“Ah! Kun…” Once you realize that it’s him, you snap out of your daze. “I’m sorry, I–”

“You idiot!” He shouts, causing you to jump. “If you weren’t feeling well, you shouldn’t have gone outside. You should’ve rested!”

“I’m sorry…” It feels as if a stone has dropped into the pit of your stomach as he scolds you, and you can only look down at your hands.

“Uhm, well… I guess I shouldn’t be too hard on you,” Kun sighs. “You’ve barely had any chance to rest, especially after what happened with your father’s passing… I can’t really be surprised that you would push yourself to act like everything’s normal.”

But he’s lost people too, and if you’re suppressing how you’ve been feeling you can’t imagine the turmoil happening within him,

“Until further notice, you don’t have to join me when I meet with members of the war council. You’re going to stay here to rest.”

“What?” You shake your head, “No, I’m fine. Today was just a lot to handle. So, please… I’ll be careful. I won’t let this become a problem again in the future.”

“Why? Because Taeil, Minhyung and Jisung asked you to watch after me or something?” His head tilts, “None of the men who died for us would have wanted you to look after me at the expense of your own health.”

He does have a point. But that isn’t the only reason you’re still here.

“I… I want to be by your side, Kun.”

“Yeah?” His brow furrows, “Why’s that?”

“What do you mean ‘why’?” I, um…” You can’t continue. Of course, you know the true answer but to admit that is a bit too much. There’s no way you can tell him your feelings. Suddenly, the hairs on the back of your neck stand on end.

“Well, fine. Whatever,” he waves it off, flashing his usual sense of detachment, muttering to himself, “If you don’t want to tell me, I don’t care.” Caught up in his own thoughts, he mutters something shortly, “You were close with Namekawa, right?”

“I wasn’t close with him… My father was, though.” You admit, “However, he did watch after me frequently.”

“I see. He’s a good man, but I just can’t seem to put my full trust in him.”

“Okay…?” You can’t quite grasp the point Kun is trying to make.

“If anything happens while we’re out here, I want you to find him and stay with him.” Kun states, “Even if Goguryeo catches you, they won’t touch you as long as you’re with him.”

“What? Why would they–”

“Look. When you’re at war, you can’t just prepare for victory. Gotta consider your defeat as well.” Kun crosses his arms, “I’m sure Doctor Namekawa will show up here any day, so when that happens…” He falls silent. After a while, he shakes his head tenderly, “Nothing. Forget it. I’m just rambling.”

In the empty space of your conversation, you try to sift through what Kun’s trying to say. All you can do is pray that this brief, peaceful reprieve will prolong itself for a bit longer.

December 21th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla In the following days Minghao and Kun make another trip to the war council stationed in the minister’s home. Although they hope their audience with the officials will be fruitful, it turns out to be less than eventful.

“Yeah,” Minghao sighs, “It’s no use. The water’s going to be frozen over soon enough, I get that. But waiting until it thaws in the spring…”

“It’s idiotic,” Kun agrees. “Guess we should kick back and relax until then, huh?”

“Even if you’re joking it’s not funny.” Minghao frowns, “We’re only giving them more time to reinforce Pyongyang.”

“Sure,” Kun says, “But it’s not like they’ve got anyone else to come in and save them. They’ll be holed up in the city, waiting for a reprieve. If they’re smart they’d have surrendered by now.”

“Knowing Gaesomun, it’s not like he’ll have a shortage of ideas of how to turn this around. For fuck’s sake he killed their last king to wrest power from him. I suppose we’ll refrain from making any rash decisions until we reunite with Li.”

December 26th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla You find Kun in his apartments when you approach him, “I hear our forces are gathering in the north of the city… Are we leaving?”

“The Hwarang serves two things:” he sighs, “the King and the Kingdom. That hasn’t changed.”

“The Hwarang shows the way, right?” You point out.

“It’s funny, isn’t it? All this time, we had those lords and ministers looking down and judging our actions. Now look at us.” You can almost recall Taeil’s grin as Kun smiles.

“Well, that’s one more reason not to die, then.”

It’s a burden on him, undoubtedly, but Kun has seen many of his friends lay down their lives for the Hwarang and what it represents. Knowing what it had meant to them, he can’t allow himself to die.

“As long as the men believe in what we stand for, I can’t let the Hwarang die.” The doubt you’d seen in him weeks before is gone. He’s accepted his place at the head of the Hwarang. “I have to protect them.”

He looks over to you, his gaze warm, it makes you feel better than you have in a while. Just being next to him is enough to make you feel like everything is right in the world.

December 30th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla A few more days pass and the men you’d left to go to Tagok Pass finally reach Onjin. Unfortunately, bad news comes with their victory over the pass.

“Yuta has fallen in battle,” Shotaro reports, his head bowed, “His last words were ‘Leave the rest to Kun’...”

Ever since this war started, you’re unsure of how many times you’ve seen this expression on a warrior’s face. You bite your lip until it almost bleeds.

Kun puts his hands on Shotaro’s shoulders, giving him some words of encouragement, “I’m sorry I put you through that, Osaki. I’m just glad you made it back alive.”

Shotaro’s eyes grow wide and he looks overcome with emotion, “Th–Thank you sir!”

Jaemin and Taeyong lost their lives in Ongjin, and Yuta at Tagok… This means that Kun is the only Fury left among the Hwarang.

“It’s been hard already, but I’m pretty sure things are going to get worse,” Kun crosses his arms, “You’ve all fought enough, so…”

Shotaro sets his jaw and looks back at Kun, “I’ve given my life to the Hwarang, it just hasn’t been lost yet. We’ll follow you to the end of the world and back, sir.”

“Me too!” Jeno says firmly, “I’ll follow you all the way!”

“Let me accompany you, no matter where it takes us!” Sungchan adds.

“You guys…” Kun’s almost at a loss for words.

“We want to fight as the Hwarang, not as foot soldiers of Silla. We want to fight for the justice we believe in.” Shotaro smiles at him reassuringly.

You’re sure that if Taeil were alive, he’d be crying. The Hwarang united in body and mind. A great happiness wells within you and suddenly you can’t hold it in any longer. Tears spill forth from your eyes.

“... Idiots.” Kun’s face twists into a sneer, but there isn’t any hiding the warmth in his eyes as he looks out over the men. They know the coming battle will not be an easy one, but there is no doubt in their mind: their place is with Kun and the Hwarang.

January 7th, 667 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla Ultimately, it is decided that Minghao’s fleet will head to Cholsan while Li’s army will march to Yangdeok. In the cold of winter, you leave Ongjin and head into the surrounding forest.

You’re only a few minutes walk in when Kun stops you, “I can’t take you this time. You stay here.”

“What?” You stop in your tracks, “But why? Where is this coming from?”

“There’s going to be a lot of fighting. You should get away from that. No reason for you to stick with us anymore, right? I know Taeil, Jisung and Minhyung asked you to take care of me. But I’m sure you’ve fulfilled your promise in full. If you were to die in the mess of this war, then I’ll be the one that gets scolded by them in the afterlife.” His voice quiets, “I think it’s time you are released from us.”

“No!” Now that your father’s passed, there isn’t anything to justify staying with the Hwarang but… Your heart yearns to be with Kun.

“Donghyuck’ll probably be coming after me soon, but I can take him. You don’t need to worry about that.”

“That’s not it!” Once again you find yourself almost yelling. “I don’t want to stay just because I think I need to be protected from him!”

He sighs, looking as if he’s dealing with a fussy toddler. “Come on, don’t be like that… I can’t make you happy.”

Your eyes go wide, your voice shaking when you speak, “... I don’t need to be happy. All I want to do is fight alongside the Hwarang. I want to follow the same path you do.” There was never an ulterior motive for staying alongside him. “Please, I’ll do whatever you tell me to.”

“Well, I’m touched that you feel that way, but I want you to be happy. Without being with us.” He isn’t saying this to just make you feel better. You feel the sincerity behind his words. And you’re happy to know he cares, but it pains you just as much.

“These are orders from the Hwarang’s Chief.” He looks you in the eye, his voice flat and cold. “You would impede the function of the Hwarang, and therefore will not accompany us to Pyongyang.

The air is sucked from your lungs and your heart skips a beat. You feel the blood drain from your face and your hands begin to tremble.

“You’re a woman, and you deserve to have your own life. I can’t let us tie you down anymore.”

Hearing that, all of the power in your body leaves you, and you fall to your knees in the snow underfoot, “Kun… Please wait…” You want so badly to scream this at him, but your voice no longer feels like your own.

“Take care. That is all.” The minute he turns his back on you, you know it isn’t good. It’s clear that he really intends to leave you behind and you can’t even lift a finger to stop him.

He’s getting further and further away, his footsteps crunching in the snow. It was him who you’d been running after since the battle in Seorabeol… A man that, up to now, was working on chipping the distance between you, bit by bit.

“I don’t want this!” You scream out, forcing your voice to be heard. But Kun walks as if he doesn’t hear you. “Qian Kun!” Even calling out his name doesn't make him stop. And eventually, you can’t see his back anymore.

Minutes pass and you remain in a defeated stupor on the ground. It feels as if something inside of you has crumbled. You’ve been chasing after Kun this whole time… but he’s someone who only moves forward. His whole life was lived by keeping his pain sealed away, but never once did he leave you behind. He would always give you the chance to cling onto him.

Now you understand that there aren’t any more chances to gather yourself, or run after him, or any other childish endeavor to bring you closer. He has deemed no further use of you and severed the ties that burden his duty.

“Ah… Excuse me…” A quiet voice speaks up behind you, and you turn to see who it is. “I’m sorry but I heard everything,” Wen Junhui inches toward you, “I apologize for eavesdropping, but there didn’t seem to be a good moment for me to admit I was here.” He coughs awkwardly and hands you a small piece of cloth to wipe your face.

He waits for you to calm down before he begins to speak again, “You want to stay with him, I take it? Then… Will you wait for us? We’re settling down in Yangdeok before our attack on Pyongyang… So, can you wait until then?”

“What do you mean…?”

“Once we’ve settled in, I can send for you. I mean, I can hardly leave you crying here alone!”

“General Wen…” Your mouth hangs open.

“Oh, you don’t need to thank me. Once you get to Yangdeok, I’ll assign you to Qian. It won’t be easy work, but at least you’ll be with him.”

February 14, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla You get your summons right after Yangdeok falls to Junhui’s forces. Yangdeok, to the Silla and Tang armies, has been seen as Goguryeo’s last city to topple before moving forth to Pyongyang to its west.

“It’s good to see you again!” Junhui calls out to you, waving his arms in the air to summon you closer.

“Thank you so much for arranging all of this,” You say as you gather your bags together and walk over to him, “And congratulations on your victory here.”

“My victory is a bit of an exaggeration,” he says, “Qian put in a lot of work too. As soon as we finished deciding on the new council, I sent for you.”

“The new council?”

“Yeah,” he nods enthusiastically, “With the effort going to close in soon, we decided to pull our forces together and combine the northern armies and southern armies to collapse on Pyongyang. Xu Minghao is our general now, he knows enough about the Silla and Tang armies to combine us together.”

You learn that Junhui has been elected the Army Minister, and Kun has been named the Assistant Army Minister.

“You had to wait a while, I understand.” Junhui frowns apologetically, “Was it too long?”

“It could have been shorter,” You say halfway joking and halfway serious.

Still, the fact that they’re this close to pushing inward says something to the end of this war. Despite the losses you’ve accrued, this is a glimmer of hope.

“Ever since we got to Yangdeok, Kun’s been… different.” Junhui notes your confused expression and continues, “He’s nicer to the men, which is good, but he spends too much time locked away in his room. Says he spends most of his time in deep thought and won’t let anyone come by.” He sighs, shaking his head, probably wondering what to do with the man before reaching into his pack and removing a piece of parchment. “I think he needs you,” a smile graces his lips and he hands the paper to you.

“Me?” You question, taking it from him.

“This document officially appoints you to your position. You can get the details after you give it to Kun.”

It takes a while, but you muster up the courage to go into the main hall of where the leaders of the army are staying. Yet, Kun isn’t among them, he’s in his room, alone. After inquiring about where his room is, you find yourself standing before it.

You take in a deep breath and rap your hand against the door several times. After a few silent seconds, a tired voice drifts out, “I’m not attending… This isn’t the time for a party.”

Without saying anything you push open the door. Kun turns toward the door, preparing a half-hearted tirade for whoever had decided to intrude on his solitude. When he sees you, the words freeze in his throat.

“Reporting as ordered, sir.” You say, standing straight, “I have been assigned to serve as Assistant Army Minister Qian Kun’s page… by Army Minister Wen Junhui.”

His mouth works soundlessly for a moment, finally closing with a snap. He stares at you incredulously for several more seconds before frowning, “It’s a mistake. I haven’t been told about this.”

You pull out the letter that Junhui had given you and hand it to him, “I received these orders from him earlier.”

Kun’s hand snatches the letter and he scans the page rapidly, his frown deepening with each line. When he finishes he shoots you a sharp look and thrusts the letter back into your empty hands, “No. Take it back. I don’t approve of these orders.”

“I understand…” You sigh out, looking at the paper now in your grasp before tearing it into pieces.

“What are you doing?” His eyes widen in shock.

“I don’t care if you won’t approve these orders,” you let the pieces fall to the ground, “I shouldn’t have relied on them in the first place.” You hadn’t taken the letter because you wanted to be in Yangdeok, you accepted Junhui’s help and came here because you want to be with Kun. That’s all that matters. “I came here because I wanted to. I want you to let me stay. Here. With you.”

It’s his choice.

“Not fair for me to be the only guy with the luxury of a girl for a page. Especially when I’m sending men off to die.”

“Is… Is that why you left me?”

Kun falls silent and shifts uncomfortably.

“Stop this!” You find yourself yelling, and Kun looks equally surprised. “You always do this! You decide you can’t do something, then you make up all the excuses you need to justify it! You say you’re doing it for my feelings without even knowing my feelings!”

When he’d left you behind, he said that he couldn’t make you happy– that you should go on and live your life. But he is what makes you happy, and you want to live your life with him. Now he’s trying to push you away again so that he can bear this burden alone. You can’t let him do that.

“You take on so much and you won’t let anyone help!” Tears sting at the corners of your eyes as you try and make him see the errors of his ways.

He crosses his arms, “That’s my job. If I can handle it, then it’s my responsibility to!”

“What about the people who have to watch you do this?!” You’d watched him torture himself this way for far too long… Every hardship, every burden, is his and his alone to suffer with. And you haven’t been the only one to witness this. “I can’t let you do this to yourself! I want to be here for you! I want to help you! What else am I supposed to do?!”

With a sigh he falls silent, “I give up.”

You blink, furrowing your brow as you have no idea what he’s referring to.

“Can’t fight a country girl… Better to just listen to them, I guess.” His voice is gentle as he looks up with a wry smile. You then find his arms wrapped around you. As unexpected as it is, you let yourself sink into his embrace. He holds you tightly, almost as if now that he finally has you, he doesn’t want to ever let you go.

“Ever since you left…” He murmurs before pausing, and you can sense him trying to organize his feelings. “I’ve figured some things out,” he squeezes you a bit tighter, “you… supported me. Guess that’s the best way to put it.” As he speaks, he sounds slightly bewildered, as if he can’t believe what he’s saying. “When you’re not here… It’s hard for me to deal with it. All of it. Life, I guess.” With each word, your heart swells warmly in your chest. Each word descends like the snowflakes outside, gently gathering in your heart.

“You saved me,” he whispers and you feel the warmth of his body touching every part of yours. You’re sure there’s tear stains on his uniform from where you’ve been pressing your face into his robes. “... Do you think the Hwarang still stands for what it means to be a true warrior? Have I done what I was supposed to? Have I led us down the right path?”

You nod, “The soul of the Hwarang that our friends believed in is alive in you. In fact, I think it’s stronger now… We’ve been through a lot but it’s brought all of us together.”

His lips curl into a smile, “Hearing you say that makes me happy. The men that the Hwarang have left are true warriors. No more need for the iron fist.”

Everyone in the Hwarang now has the unity of vision that brings the clarity of purpose, hopefully meaning Kun’s burden will lessen a little.

“Well,” you say, “from now on, please don’t try and hide your problems from me. I’m here to help you. You don’t have to do this alone anymore.”

He’s silent now, but his arms stay wrapped around you. You feel his hands grasp at your robes as his voice is barely above a whisper, “Stay with me…”

February 15, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla The next morning, you’re greeted by familiar faces waiting for you in the main hall.

“Long time no see!” Jeno smiles, “We were eagerly awaiting your return for a while now.”

“Jeno, Sungchan…” You smile back at the two.

“How was the dramatic reunion?” Sungchan pushes eagerly.

“What do you mean?” Your eyes widen, unable to answer him with a straight face as his face blushes with color.

“Well, ever since Commander– er Chief– left your side, it looked like he just sank deeper and deeper into depression,” he says quickly, “It just made us realize how much he needs you by his side.”

“And now the two of you can be together as much as you want to be!” Jeno adds.

“Ah,” you feel heat rise to your cheeks, “Yes, well, I’m sure we can.”

“Oh?” You hear footsteps coming from down the hall, “I thought I heard a familiar voice. So, you’re in Yangdeok too…”

“Jungwoo!” Your eyes widen at the familiar face, “You’re safe!”

“Indeed,” he smiles weakly, “Sadly, I was injured in combat against some of the Goguryeo forces.”

“He was appointed as the Infantry Head of the Kyongjong Unit during the last meeting,” Sungchan says quickly.

“Really? That’s fantastic news! Congratulations, Jungwoo.”

“Thank you, but I don’t know how much I’ll be able to accomplish in this state, unfortunately.” You glance down to his bandaged left arm before looking back up to his face. “But for now, I am here, and all I can do is fight until the end beside Kun.”

“Jungwoo…”

“If there’s ever anything you need from me, don’t hesitate to ask. I will always support you and Kun.”

“Of course,” you smile at him, “Thank you.”

February 25th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla As Kun’s page, you spend every day assisting him in his duties. Since your arrival in Yangdeok, he’s seemed much more at ease during the daylight hours. Your job sees you spending more time around him than you ever had before. He’s actually begun treating you quite nicely.

You feel a little bad that you’re getting spoiled, but whenever you’re around him, your heart pounds.

On one afternoon, some days after you’ve settled in to Yangdeok, Junhui comse to visit Kun in his quarters.

“I’ve made tea,” you say as you set down the tray in front of the two sitting figures.

“Thank you,” Junhui smiles, gingerly picking up one of the cups before him and looking over to Kun, “Your assistant here is quite something. Tell me, where did you find her?”

“Well,” Kun leans back in his seat, “I think some big shot wannabe had her sent over here without my permission. You know anything about that?”

“Oh, I was doing it for your sake, you know. Although, I’m a bit jealous now” he sighs, “A cute, dedicated, efficient page… What man could ask anything more?”

“No, I’m… um….” You say quickly, frantically busying yourself with your tea.

Kun glances at you for a moment, then back at Junhui, his face calm and serene, “I agree… So long as she sticks with me, I don’t think I’ll ever need any other page.”

You nearly drop your tea at his statement. Junhui also looks surprised, but raises his cup to his lips to hide it.

You look for words to say but you can only hear the blood rushing to your head and feel your heart pounding in your chest.

“I, ah, didn’t think I’d hear something like that from you, Qian…” Junhui muses, “I’d want a wife like her too.”

“Well she’s mine.” Kun says simply, “You’ll have to find one of your own because there’s no way I’m letting her go.”

Junhui laughs, “Now you’re just rubbing it in.” You feel your face growing hotter by the second.”Well, with Kun in this sort of mood, I suppose I shouldn’t stay too long, hm?” With one last grin to you, he turns to Kun. “So, back to business… Do you think they’ll be mobilizing?”

“Yeah,” Kun nods, “As soon as the snow melts.”

“Well, if you think so too, then we should prepare to mobilize.” Junhui sighs, “Minghao says it will be a few more weeks before his ships can set out from Ongjin.”

“There’ll be a fight once they reach Pyongyang’s harbor, that’s for sure,” Kun nods, “There’s no way they’d let us take that easily.”

“Of course,” Junhui agrees, “We’ll need to reconvene to see what troops we can send to aid the navy.”

“Huh,” Kun muses, “Gotta admit, before we came here, I never thought you and I would see eye to eye.”

“I know, right?” The other smiles, “I was taken aback by you the first time we met.”

“And I was with you.”

Junhui laughs, “Well, I wasn’t born into a family of warriors…”

“Hey, me neither. My family were merchants from Tang before I was adopted.”

“Yet here we are, commanding respect as true warriors…” Junhui nearly marvels at the fact, “A man can only be judged by the path he walks, not the name he bears, nor the house from which he comes. We chose to fight for what we believe in. That path led us here. That’s all there is to it.”

Kun and Junhui are two very different people, but listening to his passion as he talks resonates with you as well. You were born into a family of Demons, but here you are. All your life, you thought you were human. Nothing more, nothing less. But the truth in this discovery gave you life beyond you thought you were, and they accepted you.

“Our ambition will never waver. We’ll fight to the end like we promised to.”

“Thank you for your time,” Junhui says, setting his cup down. He nods to you and Kun before standing and excusing himself from the room.

“They’re already going to fight?” You ask as you begin to clear the teacups.

“Come here,” Kun says, reaching out and taking your hand in his. He stands, gently pulling you towards the door outside. The wind is frigid, without your thick coat on it cuts you straight to the bone. “See that plain down there?” From the higher vantage you have, you see the rolling hills pour down into a sunken valley that spans as far as the eye can see.

“We’ll go down the plain and attack Pyongyang from there. Minghao’s ships will come from the west and attack by sea. And if all is communicated correctly, the forces up north will converge on the city at the same time as us.”

“Then we’ve got to make sure we plan all of that out correctly, right?” You ask, “Sending troops in waves would only give them time to prepare for the next one.”

“Yeah,” Kun smiles, “If we can take Ajinham before they can fortify it well enough I’m hopeful we can end this before summer hits. The battle in Pyongyang will be my last. It will be the last place I draw my sword as a warrior.”

“Kun…” You’re desperate to talk about anything else.

No sooner do you step back into the inviting warmth of his apartments does his expression suddenly shift. He lets out a grunt as you watch his Fury nature forcing itself to the fore. His hair shifts hue, his eyes turn red.

“Don’t worry,” he assures you weakly, “I’ve been doing pretty well since I got here. Looks like my body’s getting worse. Hope it’ll hold up until spring ends.” Does he mean that he’s ready to throw away his life so long as he lives to fight in one last battle?

“Please don’t say that,” you say, “Didn’t I tell you why I’m here?” Unfastening your collar, exposing the flesh of your neck, you step towards him, “Please don’t say you just want to live until spring. I need you to live longer than that. Much longer.”

“You’re a scary woman, you know that?” He smiles, although the pain twists it into a heart-wrenching grimace. His hands clasp your shoulders, and you feel his lips brush against your neck. “I haven’t tasted blood in a while,” Kun murmurs.

“You haven’t had any since you left?” His silence answers your question, “Why?”

You feel as if you know the answer, though. If he only cares about his body lasting until spring, then he likely hasn’t been taking care of it.

“I suppose my blood must taste awfully good,” you chuckle, “Because, you know, I’m a Demon. In fact, it must be so good that you don’t want to drink anyone else’s blood.”

He lets out a snort of surprise, “Well maybe you’re right…”

March 2nd, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla You find Kun at his desk, his eyes fixed on a stack of documents, and you muster a troubled smile at him. This has been a familiar scene for whenever you find him, as it seems his work ethic is the same as it ever had been.

Even if you are worried that he’ll start to find you obnoxious, you place his teacup beside him as he writes furiously onto a piece of parchment.

“The hell’s this?” He asks, not looking up from his work, “Don’t remember asking you for tea.” Kun scrunches his nose as he finally looks up to you as you flash him a bright grin. A sigh escapes him, “Don’t worry. I’m not tired. In fact, I’m starting to think I’m cut out for all this bureaucratic crap.”

“Well, it’s true that your duties here in your office are very important, but…” You hum, “It’s not like I can imagine a job or position that you wouldn’t be cut out for.”

“Of course you can. I hate public speaking, and even worse, I hate having to deal with emotional bullshit.” You suppose for him, a loathing profession never had gotten in the way of completing his duties. You’re certain that he has a knack for public speaking, let alone balancing the emotional stress that comes with managing a large group of soldiers. “So, it looks like I have to thank Minghao and Junhui for stomaching all of that shit so that I don’t have to.”

You chuckle at him, “Yes, but in return, you’re the one who’s in charge of managing all of the subordinates. Right?”

“Eh, win some, lose some. They’ve been calling me a Demon for so long, it’s kinda been throwing me off.” He shakes his head, “Hell, I don’t think you could pay me enough to bark at those idiots, or act like the Demon I used to.” His warm eyes glance toward you with an exceptional gleam, and it’s like he’s a completely different person from the man you met all those years ago in Seorabeol.

It’s true– Kun is no longer the Demon Commander and it seems like he’s discovered an inimitable truth: the practice of self-love is deeply fulfilling.

“What’s the matter?” His gaze narrows, “Do I have something on my face?”

“I was wondering when people started calling you a Demon.”

“I guess it’ll come up sooner or later… Don’t get too excited, it's not that interesting…”

March 19th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla Before Minghao’s fleet is launched from Ongjin, a group is splintered off from the main army in Yangdeok and sent to the navy to aid in their future attack on Pyongyang. Jeong Sungchan had volunteered to go and you received word on the thirteenth that the fleet had left port to set the offensive in motion.

On the night of the news’ arrival, Kun holds a meeting into the late, late hours of the night.

“Our meeting is over,” Shotaro says as he exits the meeting hall, looking to where you’ve been sitting patiently.

“Thank you for telling me, Shotaro,” you smile up at him. “I’m planning on bringing Kun something to eat, would you like anything?”

“Oh no, I’m quite alright.” He says glancing back to the room, “Although I think it best for you to hold off on your plans for now. I don’t want to worry you but Kun’s been in quite the foul mood after tonight’s meeting.”

For Shotaro to be in such a dour mood must mean that whatever they'd discussed in there must have been truly serious.

“It can’t be that bad, I’m used to being scolded…” You raise your head high and stand before his door. As you let yourself into his room, you see something that stops you dead in your tracks. Kun isn’t sitting in his usual spot. Instead, he’s sitting on the floor with an apprehensive expression. “I=I’m sorry. I, um, heard your meeting ended. If you’d like something to eat I can bring something up soon. What do you say?”

“Don’t want it. Not hungry.” He’s curt, and you can tell he’s irritable.

Although whatever was discussed in their meeting had been left in the meeting room, you can tell those heavy thoughts still swirl around his mind.

“Is there anything I can do for you?” You ask him.

“I don’t know how many times I’ve heard you say that,” he sighs, “I seriously have nothing to ask of you. Sorry for taking things out on you.” Now he turns his head upward to look at you with a sad smile, “When we first men, it drove me mad thinking that you and I couldn’t relate to anything at all. But now that you’re here, I can truly say that it makes me happy to have you here with me. I mean it.”

“Kun…?”

“You’ve kept your eyes on me this whole time… Ever since we were in Seorabeol, in fact. If I think about it, you’re probably the person who’s seen me at my lowest.” He lets out a dry laugh, “It’s ironic, isn’t it? Thanks to you, I can remember. The weight of my burden… The reason every one of our friends sacrificed themselves. If it’s something as simple as rushing straight in, I can just handle that kind of stuff myself. But having you here with me as someone to talk me through doing something stupid make me think twice. You’re my rock.”

He moves to his feet, walking over to the window cracked open to let cool air into the room, “Putting my life on the line isn’t something I have to think about, but it’s all about knowing the timing. You’ve helped me to come to this conclusion.”

“Then if my life’s purpose is to be there for you, then nothing could make me happier.”

Another laugh, “I’ve only caused you trouble. It’s too much of a burden to put on the shoulders of a woman like you.”

“I won’t let this bring me down… I’m your rock after all.”

“I see…” He hums, leaving the windowsill and slowly begins walking toward you. “I’ve changed my mind. I could use something to eat. Preferably your cooking.”

“Oh? Is there something in particular you’d like?”

“Surprise me,” he smiles, “Just make sure it’s good. Cook like the fate of the Hwarang is in your hands.” It’s as if the realization of your connection hits you suddenly, and you can’t help but grin madly.

With the threat of war looming on the horizon, you can sense that Kun’s mind will struggle to find itself at ease in the coming days. You take solace in knowing that you can give him just one moment of reprieve before whatever’s to come.

March 15th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla Several days later, the town begins to welcome springtime. As you all had long anticipated, Minghao’s ships make port in Cholsan but stay docked until given the word to advance on their enemy. Being a key member of these discussions of when to push forward, Kun is often pulled away from the Hwarang’s compound and Yangdeok in general, to a secret meeting place where it is believed all high ranking members of the Silla and Tang debate. You, on the other hand, have been ordered to remain in Yangdeok, the only thing you can do is wait patiently for his safe return.

The day that the men stoll back through the door is a happy one; Kun, Jeno and Shotaro stepping inside from the warmer day.

“I’m so glad to see you all safe…” You aren’t sure what catches hold of you, but as soon as you catch site of them, you feel your heart begin to swell and tears begin to prick at your eyes.

“Such a crybaby,” Kun chuckles, “You know, pretty soon you’re going to dry up from all the tears you’re losing.” Despite his words, he stands next to you with a warm greeting.

“Have you heard from Sungchan?” You look at Jeno, “I know the ships arrived in Cholsan a few days ago…”

Suddenly, everyone’s expressions drop.

Jeno furiously bites his lip, “We received word that the troop of men he went with to Cholsan were ambushed somewhere along their route… There haven’t been any reports of survivors.”

An altogether completely different emotion washes over you, the tears justifying themselves. This has been the first time since arriving in Yangdeok that you have to surrender yourselves to the news of another lost comrade, and your vision blurs for a moment.

“Sungchan had been dealing with the guilt of being unable to protect Taeil for quite some time… If I recall,” Shotaro closes his eyes, “it was his wish to greet the Chief with his head held proudly when he crossed over into the afterlife. Sungchan didn’t die a coward, so I believe that at the very least he accomplished that.”

Later that afternoon, as the sun begins to transition into red and orange hues, Kun summons you to his quarters. The light filters in on him as he sits at his desk, looking up at you as you enter.

“You’ve got time,” He says quietly, “Get as far away from here as you can. I can send you with a merchant’s caravan, I’ll get everything worked out. You don’t need to woot about a thing.”

You understand immediately what he’s trying to do. Kun knows the loss of war- does he not want you to get mixed into the crossfire?

“You can try and convince me all you want but I won’t budge… I want to stay. With you,” you say softly. Knowing everything he’s gone through, why would you leave him now? Besides, you’re sure if you hear of his passing in some far off, distant place, it would surely break you in two.

He lets out a breathy laugh that almost sounds more like a sigh of relief, “I figured you’d say that. You’re a real strange one.” You watch his eyes flick in miniscule directions as if he’s coming up with another plan.

“You’re worried about me, right?”

“Of course.” He says immediately.

“Well if you’re worried about me, then don’t let me out of your sight, okay? It’ll be your job to keep me safe.” You smile at him as his eyebrows raise in surprise. “And you can’t do that if you’re dead, can you? So, survive. To protect me.”

“Don’t worry too much about it,” he smiles at you, “I can’t let you die before I do.”

April 19th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla By the first of the month, you get news that Goguryeo is expecting the assault on Pyongyang. They began reinforcing their walls and reports say that many of the cityfolk fled the city in a want to not get caught in the fighting.

Xu Minghao reunites with his fleet in Cholsan, Junhi leads the men who have been assigned to navigate Kangdong Pass to reach Pyongyang, while Kun has been assigned to the men at Haegok Pass. You accompany Kun where you wait for the enemy’s resistance.

Even though the snow has long since melted, the weather still gets quite cold at night. To rouse the men, Kun has brought several large jugs of yakju.

“The battle’s going to start soon,” he says as he pours the men cups of liquor, “I’ll be counting on you guys. We can’t afford to rest, unfortunately, but I figured you could have something to warm you up. I’d like to give you guys as much as you want, but we don’t know when those bastards are gonna show up.”

After he’s emptied the supply, you and he walk together back to his tent.

“Kun, are you alright?” You ask, rubbing at your nose so it doesn’t begin to run.

“What do you mean by that?” He turns to look at you, the empty jugs clinking together in his hands.

“You’re not drunk, are you?” You look at the aforementioned jugs.

“That’s it?” He laughs, “I had one cup, I can hold my liquor, promise.” The smile slips from his face and he looks off into the distance, “They’re almost like kids to me. Not much I can do for them personally on the battlefield, seems like a little yakju is the least I can give them.”

The two passes are the last line of Goguryeo defense before the city itself, this would be an important undertaking to take these points if the Silla-Tang plan is to go smoothly.

“I’m sure they understand,” you nod, setting down the jug you’re holding beside his tent.

“You always say what I want to hear,” he says softly, setting down his next to yours.

April 30th, 667 – Anjinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla With the warming weather, comes battle. Junhui and his men are routed at Kangdong, letting Kun’s forces push through with concerted effort towards the fortress at the mouth of Haegok Pass. Beyond these walls and field beyond is where the final battle will take place.

Everything has gone well, just as Kun had predicted all those weeks ago. Before the night ends, Kun requests your presence in his quarters.

“Are you going to be up for much longer?” He tilts his head as you approach, “You should sleep soon, there are long days ahead.”

“I know,” you have to try and stifle a yawn, “but… “ As the days press on toward the final assault on Pyongyang, days like this in relative closeness to Kun become more and more sparse. All you want is to cherish every moment with him while you still can, so you linger for a moment longer. Before you’re able to finish your thought, a visitor arrives.

“Chief, are you here?” The muffled voice of Jeno speaks out.

“Yeah, I am,” Kun responds, “Come in.” As Jeno enters you look to him, Kun questioning, “What’s the matter?”

“There’s something that just couldn’t wait, something I need to give you, Kun.” Jeno says, his hands fumbling with a rolled up scroll in his hands. He holds it out to Kun, “Here…”

When Kun realizes what he’s looking at, his eyes grow wide and he stares intently at it. “Did… Did Kunhang draw this? Why are you giving it to me?”

“When we were in Ungjin some time ago I went to see him…” Jeno confesses, “And that’s what I told him, I told him to show all of you where he’s been… To show you the life he’s led and experienced. And so, not long ago, he sent me this drawing. As soon as I saw it I thought it best to give it to you.”

“I’ll take this,” Kun says after a moment, solemnly smiling at him, “Thank you, Jeno.”

Without another word, the younger one turns with a bow and leaves the room. Kun gives a curt smile, exhaling as he plops back into his chair.

“What was that all about?” You ask, looking at Kun reviewing the drawing, “What is that?” The minute you see it, the vivid brushstrokes on the page evokes a small gasp and a feeling of magnificence from you. “A Fury…?”

Painted onto the scroll is the depiction of a Fury, complete with white hair and crimson eyes. Within those eyes, however, is none of the murderous rage you’ve come to expect in Furies. A peculiar kindness is imbued into them, “Who is this?”

“Well, this was the Chief of the Hwarang, but that hasn’t been in a long, long time.” Kun guffaws, “The bastard would get into skirmishes with merchants, nobles, and commoners. Then go partying in Noseo-dong when he was finished. His name was Zhang Yixing. When he was still kicking around, I don;t think I ever got a good night’s rest. Always had to get into some bullshit.”

Everything he describes to you about Yixing seems incongruent to the kind-looking image of the man on the page.

“Actually, funny to think about it now, but I remember spending every day thinking of ways to fuck with him. Then, he told me something… ‘If you want any chance of pushing Taeil to to the top, you need to become the ‘Demon’ you were born to be.’” Kun hums, “And I took his word for it, then I took his life when it seemed being a Fury was too much for him.”

“Pushing Taeil to the top…” You can’t begin to imagine bearing the responsibility of killing the man who was supposed to be your leader, and you realize how dire those straits must’ve been.

“I have a feeling that night Yixing knew, somehow, that I was going to take his life.” Kun’s eyes are locked with your own for a minute of dull silence before falling back to gaze on the drawing. “Strangely enough, the same look he gave me as I killed him is the one drawn here.”

“Huh?” The man you see on the page looks so warm and gentle, and in no way did you interpret his expression as belonging to someone expecting to meet their demise.

“You know, come to think of it, I could probably credit the bastard for giving me the kick in the ass needed to get my shit together.” Kun smirks, “If I let the Hwarang half-ass their way to power, who knows what kind of shit Yixing’ll have to say to me in the afterlife.”

When it comes to people who’ve made a considerable impression on Kun, Taeil is one of the first people to come to mind. Yet, it seems as if Kun holds a special place for Yixing as well, and you can hear the admiration.

“I don’t know what the hell fate’s trying to tell me,” his arms cross, “but he visited me in my dream last night.”

“What kind of dream was it?”

“Well, we weren’t speaking to one another,” Kun nods down to the painting, “But he seemed at peace, not too unlike how he looks on this… It was like his eyes were telling me to let go. Let go of the pain, the burden…”

May 8th, 667 – Ajinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla As the men come in and out of the fortress, Kun is dead set on making sure everyone and all equipment is up to par for the days ahead. A certain group of incoming soldiers does catch him off guard–

“Hello, Chief!” Shotaro greets with a smile.

“Everything’s going to plan,” Jeno smiles as he bounds up alongside him, “We’ll have the city in no time.”

“I’m glad to see you all safe…” You sigh out in relief.

“Of course they are,” Kun says, looking at the pair, “The battle’s not even started yet.”

“It’s nice of you to be concerned for us,” Jeno blushes sheepishly.

“I’m glad you’re doing well too. How are things with you?” Shotaro asks.

“Great,” you shoot a glance at Kun, “He’s allowed me to stick around as usual. I’m not sure if I can live up to the bar you set, but I’m doing my best!”

“Nah,” Shotaro shakes his head, “Nobody can do what you do.”

“He’s right,” Jeno nods fervently, “The only person in the world that can defeat Kun is you.”

“Knock it off, guys,” Kun chuckles, “This is all going to go to her head and then I’ll be the one to deal with it.”

“Apologies, sir,” Shotaro says, “It can’t be helped.”

After some time, Kun fixes his gaze on Jeno, “Thanks for stopping by with the painting.”

“There’s no need to thank me, I’m confident that Kunhang is happy you have it.”

“Hmph, maybe it’s time for me to stop being such a hardass all the time.” Kun nods, “Hey, I’m leaving the rest to you.”

The words don’t register for Jeno at first, and he blinks incredulously with a nervous chuckle, “...Um… What do you mean by that?” Kun smiles back kindly, staring back at Jeno with eyes that brim with warmth. After a second, Jeno perks up and his eyes widen, finally realizing what he means, “Understood. Please leave everything to me.”

Kun nods curtly, perhaps satisfied with the confidence in his reply, “Osaki, do me a favor. Can you call Junhui? I have some words for him.”

A few minutes later, Shotaro returns with Wen Junhui at his side.

“Sorry for taking so long to get here… They put up a hell of a fight at Kangdong,” Junhui apologizes.

“We split our forces, we got screwed a bit because of it but we brought it back in the end.” Kun nods slowly, “All that matters now is concentrating our men on the front gates of the city.”

“We’ll take it no matter the cost,” Shotaro nods firmly.

“As long as we fight under the Hwarang banner we’ll fight to the very last man!” Jeno says quickly.

“Don’t say shit like that– Did you already forget that Junhui’s in command going forward?” Kun frowns.

“I’ll raise the Hwarang’s standard for this battle. Then everything should be fine, right?” Junhui asks, “So long as it’s up, I don’t think I could falter. I’ve lost a few battles here and there, sure, but I’ve never given up on the spirit of a warrior.”

“Hah,” Kun smiles at him, “Now the Army Minister’s superstitious? You need to get your act together, Wen.” That’s when you realize that all four of them are smiling. “We should get going,” Kun looks to you, “the men aren’t going to move themselves.”

“Alright…” You say, looking back to the other men, “I’ll see you all again soon.”

As you’re walking away, Shotaro shouts out, “I’m entrusting you with Kun!”

Ever since the war had begun, you’re unsure of how many times people have said this to you. You turn to look over your shoulder at him, “I’ll do my best! I’m ready to lay down my life just like anyone in the Hwarang!”

“You don’t need to risk your life,” Shotaro shakes his head as you turn fully to look at him, Kun continuing on behind you,, “I want you to protect Kun’s heart. He’s a strong man, but he hides behind that strength and he suffers alone. He needs someone who can look past that, and be there to support him. I believe that someone is you.”

To stay by Kun’s side and support him is all that you want… “Can I really do that?” Soon you’ll be plunged into a violent and bloody battle. How much help can you be to him in the middle of a war?

“What are you talking about?!” Jeno saysm “No one else except for you can do it!”

“Kun trusts you more than anyone else,” Shotaro smiles.

“Alright…” No one else can stand by him in the days to come. You nod firmly and wave to them one last time before rushing back to Kun’s side.

May 10th, 667 – Ajinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla You’re sitting quietly in Kun’s study when he suddenly says, “We’re going to attack tomorrow.”

“Right…” You nod slowly. You’ve been on Pyongyang’s doorstep for weeks now, the battle is inevitable. When the sun rises the next day, the area will become a battlefield.

“Are you sure–”

“Yes, I’m going to stay with you.” However the battle ends, you intend to be there with him when it does.

“I need to stop letting you say it all the time…” His expression is solemn, but his lips are pressed tightly together and you can feel his hesitation. Kun’s eyes stare back into yours.

“Um…” The silence drags on and on.

“More than anything else, I want to keep you safe.” His voice is low, quiet, “I’m… I think I’m in love with you.”

Your mouth hangs open, the question you had intended to ask now forgotten. You’ve loved Kun for some time by now, and in the past months you’ve begun to realize how much he cares for you as well. For a moment, you think you’re heart is going to stop.

He gives you a crooked smile, reaching out to close your mouth, his fingers lingering under your chin, “I thought I could just die as soon as I’d done what I had to do for the Hwarang.”

The words linger in your ears and you can feel just how much has been weighing down his heart. It seems as if he’s trying to assuage your anxieties as he speaks in a soothing tone, “I mean, it’s not like I had a death wish or anything. I just… wouldn’t have anything to live for anymore.” His hand drops from your chin and into his lap, “So long as I led the Hwarang and made them into what they were meant to be, what did it matter if I lived or died? … But now I’ve got a reason to live.”

You feel your shoulders relax from a tension you didn’t realizing you’ve been holding.

“Because you’re by my side… It gives me a reason to keep moving forward.”

“Me…?” As you struggle to comprehend your worth to him, you squeeze your fists together.

Kun reaches out and embraces you, holding you tightly without saying a word, he opens his mouth as if he was going to say something, then closes it. There isn’t a need for words in this moment. At last, his stubborn heart opens, and through his lips pours out what it has long kept hidden. His touch is gentle as ripples on a lake but when you kiss, you feel within him a passion that burns so hot it could put a forge to shame.

And though that feeling fades as your lips part, the love that flows between you remains in your heart.

“Continue to stay by me,” he says softly, pressing his forehead against yours, “I won’t let you go even if you want to, so be prepared.”

“Of course, Kun,” you respond quietly, his hand raising to brush away the tears you didn’t realize were falling.

May 11th, 667 – Ajinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla Once the first and second wave of Junhui’s troops leaves, Kun decides to travel with the men stationed in the third group.

“You’re coming, right?” Kun asks you as he walks to you, the reigns of his horse in hand as it trots alongside him.

“Yes!” You nod and he grins back at you.

The two of you gallop through the valley, moving at an incredible pace.It seems to be going well until something impacts Kun’s body, the horse, surprised by the sudden jolt rears up and throws you to the ground. Rid of its frightening burden, the horse bolts.

You’re fortunate to have landed in a small area of brush, only a few small scratches littering your body. “Kun!” You cry out to him, crawling across the ground toward his body, your own bruised and aching. The soil around him is staining red, more blood than you’d seen over the course of your time in the Hwarang.

Terror grips you and you can hear blood hammering in your ears.

“Kun!” You call out to him again, shaking his body as you call his name again and again.

“Hm?” His brow furrows ever so slightly. A normal human would have died from this– but his Fury blood is keeping him alive, if only barely.

“Say something!”

His eyes open to thin slits, “Are you alright?” Near dead and undoubtedly in serious pain, and his first thought is about your safety. “We’re in trouble if they come back to finish the job. We need to get out of here and wait for this to heal.” He struggles to his feet and begins to walk, blood dripping down the length of his body.

“Stop!” You say and haul his arm around your shoulder, and he leans against it gratefully. Scanning over the vicinity, you cannot see any enemy soldiers. Perhaps they’d seen you fall from the horse and assumed you’d died.

Nudging Kun, you push him to move into the brush away from the open air. In the forest you find a grove and settle down, “Kun, are you okay?”

He rests under the trunk of a large tree, a steady flow of blood leaving him. One might guess him dead from his pale complexion, “I guess so…”

“We need to do what we can to stop the bleeding…” It takes a sheer force of will to stop your fingers from shaking as you carefully peel off his clothing. Revealing his chest, you see two arrow punctures, one near his heart and one on his stomach. “This is horrible…” You murmur, thanking whatever deity’s out there that the archer had missed his heart.

You do what you can to staunch the bleeding, but without the proper tools you can only minimally patch him up, “As soon as you’re able to move again, we need to go back to the fortress.” With no response you call out to him again, “Kun…? Can you hear me?”

“Urg, yeah…” His breaths are heavy, “I don’t know if I can go back out there on my own yet.”

“Okay!” You say, knowing you need to keep him awake. “Shotaro and the others have everything under control. They’ll be waiting for you.”

“Damn r-right they will…” Sweat pours from his forehead, “They’re not Hwarang for nothing… We can;t waste too much time though, we– we have to come back and cover them while they take the gate.”

“You’re right… you’re… You’re going to make it,,” however the spots where he’d been shot don’t look like they’ll be closing any time soon. Had they used silver arrowheads? “Kun…?” His eyes close you begin to panic, “Kun!”

“Goddamn it… S-stop making a scene. I can hear you, alright?” His voice is barely above a murmur– it’s practically a wispy breath.

At once, a sense of clarity washes over you– he’s a Fury. “Kun. You need to drink my blood.” Without any doubts, you move your blade to your wrist.

“Stop it!” The force of his command startles you, and the blade drops to the forest floor. In his condition, he shouldn’t be able to scream this loudly.

“Why–?!”

“Spare me,” he says through grit teeth, “I’ll be okay. I’m not going to let this crap kill me… This isn’t the end, I told you that. You’re… you’re the reason I’m alive. I’m fine, I won’t die here.”

“I don’t believe you.” You frown, “I believe that you want to live and don’t plan on dying here. But you’re not ‘fine’!” He blinks incredulously, perhaps taken aback by the intensity of your glare. “So, I’m mot taking your word for it. You always put up a wall and pretend everything is ‘fine’ even when you’re bursting at the seams!”

You’re determined to get your way just this once. And maybe this time, you’ve gotten through to him.

“Some lady you are…” He chuckles weakly, “I’m starting to second guess why I fell for you. Ugh, this is why they say women from the countryside are trouble…”

“Look, I promise you can give me grief for this later, but for now, please…” Before you finish, Kun closes his eyes in silent resignation.

“Do as you wish…” He leans gently against the tree carefully. You pick up your blade, running it across the length of your wrist.You put your lips against the cut, sipping in a large gulp of blood without swallowing. You then lean over, pressing your lips against his and let the blood flow into his mouth.

Perhaps its his Fury instincts kicking in that allow him to accept the blood as readily as he does. You repeat the process of this blood transfer over and over again. You’re about to do it one more time when his hand reaches out to stop you.

“That’s enough,” he says calmly, “I’ve stopped bleeding.” His cheeks, once pale and pallid, begin to show color once more. “You’ve gone and hurt yourself for me…”

“It’ll heal soon…” you say, hiding the cut with the sleeve of your robes.

“What kind of absolute idiot would ever allow the woman he loves to hurt herself for his sake?” He sighs out, “Try putting yourself in my shoes for once.” After all of that trouble, the first thing he does is scold you… You can’t help but burst into laughter.

“What kind of absolute idiot would ever want to watch the man she loves suffer?”

“Oh, shut up…” He says as you continue to laugh.

After another handful of minutes he brushes himself off and rises to his feet.

“We’ve got to get going,” he says, pulling his robes back together. “Let’s head back to the fortress. Oh– and by the way, I’d prefer the next time we kissed to taste a little bit better than that did.” He chuckles as you help him start walking. His body isn’t great, but it’s enough to get you back.

Once you get back to the fortress, you’re met with a startling site. Perhaps you hadn’t noticed them bloom, or they’d come into their own while you were away, but the azalea bushes surrounding the fortress have sprung to life.

Their petals dance in the sunlit breeze, fluttering like small butterflies. The area is empty, the men away fighting at Pyongyang…

“Kun, how are you feeling?”

He forces a small grin. As a Fury, he should be fully healed by now. Dejun’s words about the Fury’s borrowing their power from their future lifespan suddenly comes to mind. You slowly begin to panic, becoming paralyzed with dread over the implications of this realization. Is this the end for Kun?

He breaks the silence, interrupting your anxiety, “You don’t look half bad surrounded by flowers.”

“You really think so?” You muse, “I’ve alway thought they really suited you, though.” Each falled blossom is strikingly beautiful in defiance of the tragic end they’ll surely face.

A strong gust of wind blows through the clearing. And then, out of nowhere, a figure emerges from the treeline.

“So, you were alive…” Lee Donghyuck’s eyes fall on Kun and his mouth curls up into a smile.

“Why…?” Your voice breaks and the Demon only laughs.

“This man is an affront to my honor.” He says simply, “I’m here to put an end to all of this.”

The last you’d seen Donghyuck, he warned you that he’d return. You didn’t think that he would forsake his clan and travel all the way here just to fight Kun.

“I’m surprised to see you make it this far,” Donghyuck mutters. “Impressive, for a fake. I heard your pathetic friends got their asses kicked until it was just you standing. I’m not sure if being born into a warrior family… Or hell, even being born as a Demon, could help you survive the embarrassment of failing as often as you fools do.”

It’s strange… his tone is as derisive as usual, but his words are almost compliments. In some way, he recognizes what Kun’s been through.

“Didn’t think you’d come all the way to Pyongyang.” Kun crosses his arms, his voice still a bit raspy. “What were you gonna do if I ate it already? You would’ve wasted your time.”

Donghyuck’s face screws into a twisted grin and he draws his sword.

“He’s hurt!” You cry, stepping between the two men.

However, Kun puts his arm in front of you and moves you, “Step back. He’s thrown everything away to come fight me, right? It’s only polite of me to accept the invitation to fight a warrior of his quality.”

Donghyuck practically abandoned his clan. This, up until now, seems to be his entire lids, just for the sake of defending his honor.

Kun and he are two different men in almost every way, but perhaps they share a warrior’s pride.

“I’ll be fine,” Kun tells you as he reaches for his sword, “I won’t die. I already told you: I have a reason to live.”

If he fights Donghyuck, then surely by then his life’ll be up. Even if you can convince him to run, then everything he’s stood and lived for will be destroyed. But you can’t stop him.

“...I’ll watch, then. I believe in you.”

Kun’s smile is fleeting like the blossoms scattering at your feet.

“Furies are only imitations,” Donghyuck says, brandishing his sword, “The more you use those powers, the shorter your life gets. You’re nothing compared to a pure-blooded Demon. You are destined to wither and die. You’re no different than these,” his show skids across the ground, swirling the azalea petals around.

“A man’s gotta protect the people he cares about. It’s not so easy to be a warrior, didn’t you know?” His tone indicates that he’s speaking seriously, but a sardonic grin dances along his lips. Watching him now makes you see just how much he’s given, every drop of sweat, blood and tears in his life to protect the ones he loves.

“Perhaps the name of ‘Fury’ no longer suits you.” Donghyuck says, his gaze narrowing, “The life you strive to live is not that of a fake.” There’s no hint of contempt left in those red eyes of his, full of confidence. “You are a Demon.”

The man who takes so much in being a Demon calling a Fury, a ‘fake’, a Demon… For him that’s possibly the highest compliment he can ever give.

“I take back all the crap I gave you for being a fake. If you’re really ready to take on the life of a Demon, that means you must have a Demon’s name. I name you… Dùjuān huā jīngshén.”

You think back to the first night you met Kun, his hair whipping around his face as snow falls around him like these monstrous azalea blooms do… It seems almost as if the name had been chosen long, long ago; so perfectly befitting of him.

“Thanks, I guess, but I’m not doing this so you’ll call me a Demon, you know.” Kun’s mouth quirks upward into a smile as he slides his sword from its sheath. With a sigh, his body shivers and suddenly his hair is white.

“Can’t play long, though. That a problem?”

“Not at all. I’ll kill you with the first blow.”

The air is tense between the two; not a soul can come between them. A wind blows up, casting scores of petals into the air. Between the two combatants, there’s a brief moment of stillness. If only for a second, their swords meet. The two trade blows that thunder through the field around you, slashing with their full body weight.

Donghyuck’s sword passes within a hair's breadth of Kun, but the Hwarang had found his mark.He buries his sword deep into the Demon’s heart.

“There’s still something I’ve got to protect,” Kun murmurs slowly, his voice full of confident authority, “I can’t lose, not even to a Demon.”

Donghyuck gazes up at the clear blue sky, and you can almost see a faint grunt creep onto his face.

His lips move, “If my end were to be met with the blade of a Demon like yourself… Then I have no regrets… I have lived my life with honor, and I die with the same.” Donghyuck’s eyes are free of hostility, if anything, he seems at peace. To die in a duel against a foe he respects… “You’ve defeated me. Now you must live out what you have left, Qian Kun.”

Those are his last words.

Kun draws his sword from Donghyuck’s body as it falls, dropping the still bloody sword back into its scabbard, “... I will.” Then his body trembles for a moment, and he gasps before falling to his knees.

“Kun!” You shout and run to his side. As he lies on his back, you take his hands into yours, “Please hang in there!” Your desperate screams reverberate around you, but Kun can only manage an uncertain lip curl.

“Man, you always have to cry, don’t you?” Kun smiles up at you, his voice weak, “If you don’t get thicker skin, there’s no way you’ll be able to handle being married to a warrior…” He winces with near every word and your heart clenches at the pain he must be in.

“I only cry because of you… And besides, being married to a warrior doesn’t make you impervious to watching the person you love get hurt.” Teardrops stream down your cheeks, dripping down on his bruised face. He reaches his hand unsteadily upward to wipe your flowing tears, kindly running a finger across your cheek.

“D- Don’t worry… You won’t ever have to cry on my behalf again. Just let me spend whatever time I have left with you beside me. I want to enjoy it…” Kun’s eyes quietly shut. You hold tightly onto his blood soaked body, hugging him closely as the blood seeps into your robes. Bright blossoms dance cooly around you as you look to the sky.

June 15th, 667 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla Kun never made it to the gates or siege of Pyongyang. He never saw the fall of Yeon Gaesomun or the Unification of Silla. You hear later that it was Wen Junhui who brokered for a sated peace between Tang and Silla, at least for the time being.

The Tang reclaimed Minghao and his ships as soon as they could, returning him to their capital to bestow honors and titles on him. Somehow, Shotaro made it through the battle, despite having been on the front line. When you asked what he intended to do, he laughed and said he’d probably open a swordsmanship school in Seorabeol. Jeno, on the other hand, was entrusted by Kun with the Hwarang, returned to Seorabeol to try and rebuild what men they have left. As for Jungwoo, before the battle of Pyongyang, took his own life with a concoction of opium. You suppose he would have seen his life as forfeit if he couldn’t continue being a warrior…

From the stoop of your home, you watch the blooms of flowers lining the road before you, recalling everything that had occurred up north.

How many men had given their lives for what they believed in…? Perhaps most of all, you remember the time spent with Kun. Every time you come across an abundance of them, they remind you of that dreamlike spring, so far removed from it, you’re left to wonder if you really had spent all that time with him.

“You really like those flowers, don’t you?” A voice murmurs out from beside you, a mass of warmth pressing against you as another body squeezes into the doorframe.

“Yeah.” Neither the Yuchae nor the sansuyu can compare. “I like them because they remind me of you.”

Kun looks at you in a serene contemplation for a moment, then lets his grin spread across his face into a smile, “Well, I like them too. They look good on you.” His voice, soft and quiet, throws your mind into chaos.

“Lately, I’ve been worried about the end…” He hums, noting your confusion, “I never get bored when I’m with you. Sometimes, I wish I could live forever.”

As a Fury, Kun has spent his future in exchange for power in the present. How much he’s spent, you don’t know. His life could end tomorrow. If he could live forever, then that fear of the unknown will disappear.

“It’d probably be an easy way to go… to accept that I’m used up and wither away. But there’s no need for me to ask for an end. Since I want to live, I'll fight for survival. That suits me better.”

“I don’t want to be apart,” you say, your hand holding onto the sleeve of his robes. “I want to stay with you for as long as I can.”

He chuckles, “You cry so easily, I’d feel pretty bad if I left you behind.”

“Oh…” Tears had begun to run down your cheek without you noticing at first. You blink in surprise, but that hardly helps. You raise your hand to wipe them away but he grins and stops you.

“I’ll get them for you,” he says softly, gently drying them with his fingers. “It’s my job to help you.”

“Then it’s my job to support you too.”

“Of course, who else could fit that role aside from you?” He murmurs with a smile, “No matter what I do to drive you away, you won’t go. You even followed me to Pyongyang. I lost to you… and I don’t think I can ever win.”

You want to hold on to this moment of him, the memory, for as long as you can.

#nct fluff #nct angst #nct smut #kun x reader #kun fluff #kun angst #kun smut #wayv fluff #wayv angst #wayv smut #it's here :)

78 notes · View notes

lebrookestore · 3 years

Text

four years later

Pairing: Ten Lee x female reader

Themes: angst, ex! best friends to strangers, strangers to lovers, imagery, post college au, slight humour, slowish-burn, star crossed lovers, college reunion

Warnings: heavy ansgt, swearing, confusion, regret, food, alcohol consumption, The Fault In Our Stars, kissing, pg 15

Wc: 11.5k

Taglist: @danishmiilk @channoticedmeuwu @chicksung @1-800-seo @blueprint-han @jenosslut @cupidluvstarrz @kkakkdugi @sweetlyjaem @leetaeyonglover @kunrengui @unknown5tar @kisshim @intokook @mrkcore @coco-riki @kiri-ah @koishua @itsapapisongo @rr0zu

Summary: Four years later, a college reunion and an old best friend. Collared shirts and button ups, time separated the two of you, but have the years changed you?

Authors Note: hello! Okay so my fic, Four Years One Night, hit 400 notes! And as a thank you, I wrote this sequel. You do not have to read fyon to understand this fic, it works as a one shot as well. (however if you do read fyon ill be very happy and a lot of things will make even more sense)

Have we met before? Maybe in another time I loved you, maybe you’re the one I would run to

The streets were the same.

You got out of the cab, paying the driver and pulling your suitcases behind you. The first thing you notice is the way it all looks the same. You stand on the sidewalk, taking it in.

It had been so long. It almost felt unreal, the fact that a few streets away was your old apartment. It had been your home until you moved away, leaving everything behind. You left it all after you graduated to pursue your dreams. You had been accepted into the Royal School Of Music, and had taken the opportunity, even if you had had to start anew.

“Hey,” a voice came from behind you. Turning around, you faced your friend Taeyong. You had met him at RSM, he had been in your singing class. The two of you were pretty close, you had even invited him to come with you for this trip.

He dragged his own suitcase behind him, taking in a deep breath, “So this is where you lived?”

You hummed in response, nodding, “My college town.”

“Ah.”

You’re not sure why you invited Taeyong, but you were glad you did. Something about being back made you feel vulnerable in some sort of way. Curling your fingers around the handle of your suitcase, you pulled out your phone, “The hotel is walking distance away, shall we?”

He nodded, shooting you his pretty smile and taking your hand in his. You walked down, dragging your luggage with you as you reached the gate of the hotel. You remembered the place, having passed it several times when you lived here.

The two of you checked in, walking into your room. Taeyong flopped onto one of the beds, sprawling out and sighing tiredly. You sat on the other bed, running a hand through your hair. There was a lot of emotional baggage that you carried with being back here. It had actually taken you a while to even agree to come, but your friend Angie persuaded you in the end. You looked forward to seeing her again.

It had been four years.

Even the timing was bitterly ironic.

Scoffing softly, you pulled out your phone, checking for any messages from her. She had come with her boyfriend, Renjun. They had been going strong ever since college, that was over which was admirable.

You had been, what you called, silently successful, passing out of RSM with flying colours. You had worked with several famous composers throughout your time there, some of your very own compositions had been used in musicals. You would be approached by productions to work for them.

You had everything, except one thing.

It wasn’t like people would recognize you on the streets, but you were doing good. The years had treated you well, and now at the age of twenty five you found yourself back before it had all begun.

You were going to be in town for two weeks, on request of Angie who wanted to ‘hang out’ since it had been so long. Initially you were only going to go for the two days of your college reunion, but you eventually obliged with Angie’s wishes. You’d be lying if you weren’t ever so slightly excited to meet her again.

She hadn’t messaged you, the last you had heard from her was a very colourful looking keysmash and a slew of random emojis expressing her excitement. She had always been the carefree type, the type to live in the moment.

You didn’t like living in the moment, because you knew from experience that moments could end, bringing you down from that high.

Shutting your messaging app, you looked at your lock screen. It had been the same for so long now, a picture of a painting. It was beautiful, a girl sitting amidst books in a greenhouse of some sort.

That girl was you.

Switching your phone off, you tossed it to the side and fell backwards onto the bed with a sigh. The stress of travelling and jet lag was starting to get to you, so you pushed your shoes off and told Taeyong you were going to take a nap, pulling the covers over you.

You’d deal with everything later.

From the moment I loved, I knew you were the one, and no matter whatever I do, I will never not think about you

“Rise and shine Tchaikovsky,” Taeyong’s voice rang out playfully, disrupting your sleep. You groaned, grabbing a pillow from the side and pulling it over your head to drown out your best friends obnoxious teasing.

He had always been more of a morning person than you were.

He would do this, call you names of famous composers in history just to irk you. It was annoying, if not somewhat endearing.

Finally you got out of bed, getting ready for the day. Pulling on a sweater and a pair of comfy jeans, you found yourself sitting on your bed and waiting for Taeyong. He came out, standing by the door of the room, “So where are you taking me?”

You raised an eyebrow, walking to where he was and the two of you walked out into the hallway, “Me?”

“You’re the one who lived here,” he pointed out with a smile. You shrugged, “I haven’t been here in years.”

“So suddenly you remember nothing?”

You shook your head amusedly, “Honestly? I was just going to depend on Angie’s plans but that is after the reunion which is tomorrow so..” You trailed off, “We’re meeting at the mall the day after tomorrow.”

“Then let's go get breakfast?”

The two of you found yourself in the cafe, drinking coffee.

Tomorrow you would meet everyone again, you would step into your campus for the first time in four years, now older and different. Maybe you’d meet your old professors, maybe you’d see what had changed.

Maybe you’d see him.

You gripped your cup of coffee, letting the warmth of the drink surge through you. Part of you was excited, another part was somewhat scared. What if you felt out of place? you had spent the last four years running away, only to have to face it all again.

You glanced at Taeyong, pressing your lips together. He had always been there for you, even now when he had no reason to be. He even seemed excited to see how your life used to be, to see the person you were before you changed.

You knew exactly why you got along with him so well, even if you denied it everytime. You would push the thought away, refusing to acknowledge it, but it sat in the back of your mind.

Fuck.

The town weighed you down, not because you hated it here, in fact you had been happy. You had so many good memories, this was one of you many homes. It didn’t weigh you down for what had happened, but rather for what didn’t.

Taking a sip of the coffee, you savored the bitter sweet taste and refocused your attention on whatever Taeyong was chatting on about. His voice filled your sense as you let a smile slip at him, nodding along the best you could.

To hell with what hadn’t happened, you were content in the moment.

Stepping onto campus, you felt somewhat like an intruder. You had moved on, you didn’t belong here anymore. This wasn’t where you were supposed to be.

Taeyong stood beside you, looking around eagerly. He looked like a puppy of some sort, it was adorable. Smiling at him, you walked further in.

You were to meet everyone on the grounds. Your feet seemed to work on their own accord, leading you there. Passing the buildings you once knew extremely well, you found yourself reminiscing about your time spent here, and the countless sleepless nights due to your Psych class.

The grounds had several people on it, some people you recognized, some looked like strangers. Taeyong seemed extremely comfortable even though he was a stranger to them all.

Then again, you supposed you were a stranger as well, time had separated all of you.

“Y/n!”

You spun around on your heel, facing the culprit who had called out your name. She walked over, eyes shining as she spotted you, her pace increasing. Before you knew what was happening you were being tackled in a hug.

“IT’S BEEN SO LONG!” The girl screeched in your ear, hugging you tight. It took you a moment to comprehend that it was Angie herself, squeezing the air out of your lungs in her excitement.

“A-angie!” You said, an automatic smile appearing on your face, still in mild shock, “Oh my god! Hi!”

She pulled away, hands on your shoulders as she studied you. She looked almost the same, her hair was cut into a shorter, more chic cut that was a lot more adult like than it used to be. Half her hair was dyed platinum blonde, but her eyes were the same type, that held a glint of mischief.

“You look great!” She stated, taking a step back from you and finally letting you breathe. You grinned, a surge of happiness rushing through you at seeing your old friend. She laughed almost giddily, waving aggressively in the opposite direction.

A man appeared, apparently sporting a similar hairstyle to Angies, half of his hair dyed the same shade as hers. On seeing you he smiled, “Hey Y/n”

“Renjun! Wait-what's up with you guys’ hair?”

“Terrible decisions and me following along like an idiot.”

Angie gasped in offense, “Excuse me, you did it because you love me and wanted to support me, thank you very much.”

“I’m a fucking idiot.”

“My idiot, stuck with me for life,” she grinned, kissing his cheek. He rolled his eyes, “Yeah, yeah,” you could tell he was trying to push down a smile. They were the same, you could almost imagine yourself back at nineteen in your freshman year.

He wrapped an arm around her, pulling her closer and resting his chin on her shoulder. Angie’s eyes flitted up as she spotted your best friend, a sly smile on her pretty face, “Is this your boyfriend? Introduce me!”

You shook your head at that accusation so fast even Taeyong laughed, slinging an arm around you and wiggling his eyebrows, “It’s not a bad idea,” he mused.

You scoffed, “No, this dumbass is my best friend, we met at RSM.”

“Oh my god right! You made it big, Renjun and I were watching a movie and your name was in the credits! When I tell you I screamed-”

“She really did scream,” Renjun muttered dryly, as if he had lost all ability to hear that day. Knowing Angie and her over enthusiasm, he probably did.

“-Anyways,” she ignored her boyfriend's grumbling, “Come on, we have people to meet and stuff to catch up on!” Pulling away from Renjuns grasp she intertwined her fingers with yours, she pulled you along, “I’m glad we’re all back.”

All? The question sat on the tip of your tongue, but you swallowed it back down. There was one person missing from your little group, and you didn’t want to jinx it. Taeyong would make up for him.

Silently chiding yourself for that last though, you shook it off and followed along with your old friend.You spotted Mark Lee, who was busy talking to Donghyuck, another acquaintance of yours from your college days. They were in your friend group as well, seeing them now made you realize you missed them, all of them more than you thought you did.

“There's a cocktail night later today in that bar near the mall - you remember the one right?”

You nodded, smirking, “Are you going to make me look after Renjun again?”

Renjun looked offended, “Excuse you, I can hold my alcohol thank you very much.”

You turned behind, looking at Taeyong who seemed to be following along, but he looked slightly out of place. Taking his hand in yours, you squeezed it and offered him a smile, “Angie and Renjun,” you explained, “Were some of my best friends, and they’re together.”

“I figured,” he said amusedly, looking around, “They seem nice.”

You elbowed him playfully, “Come on, we can’t lose them.”

The two of you followed your friends through the hallways. You would stop and look around occasionally, answering Taeyong’s random questions about your college life. He would occasionally tease you about some facts, which you brushed off. He got along with Angie and Renjun like a house on fire, fitting in right away.

You found yourself being grateful you had brought him along once again.

“We need to be at the classroom in ten minutes - wait which classroom is it again?”

“I think its on the top floor, I’ve forgotten where shit is”

Fortunately, the four of you managed to find your way to the classroom. Instantly you recognized people, it almost felt like normal, as if they were people you saw everyday.

“Go say hi to your friends old woman,” Taeyong teased. You scowled at him, hitting his arm and glaring, “Really? We’re the same age, dumbass.”

He grinned cheekily, gesturing at your hand on him, “If you stick with me the whole time it won’t be a reunion, would it?”

“Literally, why did I ask you along?”

“Because you love me, and I’m here for moral support, being the greatest best friend you’ve ever had, now shoo.” He swatted at you as if you were a fly, and you rolled your eyes, saying you would be back in a minute, going to join your friends. You were reluctant about leaving him all alone, but he assured you that he would be fine with the snacks, and Renjun and him had sort of become friends.

You spotted Mark, walking over, but bumping into someone in the process. Muttering out an apology, you looked to your side, recognizing the person almost immediately. He was fixing the end of his shirt sleeve, looking up at you, eyes meeting yours.

You knew those eyes very well.

You had loved them, you had hated them, and now seeing them, you froze, sucking in a breath. Those damned eyes widened as he stopped what he was doing, stilling in place as if he was rooted to the ground.

He was right in front of you, after so long. He looked slightly different, hair slightly shorter than you had seen the last time, but other than that he looked the same, dressed in a shirt and jeans. It was like being thrown back in time, so much so that it almost hurt.

Almost.

“Ten,” you breathed out, fingers curling into a fist subconsciously and you squeezed, half of you wanting to throw yourself on him and give him a hug, the other half praying this was a dream. Feeling the pressure at your fingertips from squeezing do hard, you let out the breath you didn’t know you were holding.

He nodded slowly, “Y/n- hey.”

Releasing your fingers from their fist, you sucked in a breath, looking away. “Hi.”

You didn’t mean for it to come out as curtly as it had, but you couldn’t do much about that. This was stupid, you should have expected him to come, you had expected him to come but fuck, you were hoping you wouldn’t see him.

And now he was right there, so close.

“How have you been?” He asked, fixing the end of his sleeve and stuffing his hands in his jeans pockets. You wished you had pockets, you didn’t quite know what to do with your hands at the moment.

“Good, good,” you cleared your throat. The tension had visibly doubled as he coughed uncomfortably. You couldn’t even bring yourself to look him in the eye, because that held too much.

Suddenly you regretted coming all together.

You didn’t quite know what you felt, was it happiness? Was it regret? Resentment? Anger? All you knew was that you were confused.

Taking a step away from him, you shook your head ever so slightly as if you were trying to shake off any feelings at all. Clicking off your tongue, you forced a small smile, “It was nice seeing you Ten,” even saying his name felt odd, “But I have to find Angie.”

He looked slightly dazed, as if he didn’t quite process what you had said, but nodded, “Ah-yeah of course.”

He even sounded the same.

You nodded, averting your eyes and turning around. With every step away from him, it felt like a weight had rolled off your shoulders. You went back to Taeyong since Angie was with him, chatting at the top of her voice. You joined them, trying your best to follow along with the conversation, that same thought springing to your mind again as your eyes fell on your best friend.

The similarities almost made you dizzy, guilt welling up at the pit of your stomach, which was ridiculous. You hadn’t committed a crime, you had done nothing off the wrong.

Maybe it was just the reminder of him, a reminder that Ten would haunt you for the rest of your life.

Ten Lee was your best friend all throughout your college life, he was the boy with the pretty eyes you hated so much, those eyes that pulled you in, the smile that could persuade you to do anything for him.

He was the fourth member of your little friend group back in the day, and the one you were the closest to. You remember your tradition of having a movie night every week, with him ordering pizza and you supplying the candy and blankets. He was what you described as a free spirit, roaming about without a care in the world.

Ten Lee was the boy you loved, and the boy you lost.

He had seemed to see everyone but you, the girl who sat on the sidelines and watched as he went around with others. It had made you doubt at times, why were you invisible to him?

You loved him, you had him, you lost him.

Time had run out for the two of you, just as your youth was running out now. You had him for all of a night before he was gone again, and you left, heavy with regret. You were bitter at first, angry at the world for fooling you into its little charade. Resentment morphed into acceptance as you tried to forget the boy.

You had loved Ten for four years, and did everything you could to leave him behind, hoping to forget him and everything he stood for in your life like a page lost in a book.

You now see him again after four more years, as if that book had been bookmarked, bringing you back.

You wanted to believe that it was because you had stopped reading in the middle, and now was back to see the ending, but fucking hell, that scared you even more.

We were just two kids, too young and dumb ~

You looked good, Taeyong had reassured you, kissing your forehead affectionately and intertwining your fingers. You squeezed his hand, and the two of you walked into the little old bar. You had been there several times before, but now after so many years you felt as if you were visiting for the first time.

A visitor, an intruder.

Taeyong was your moral support, and you were grateful for it, you were sure you would have flaked out and left behind all of the plans you had promised to Angie the moment the reunion at the campus was over.

You had never been one to run, yet it seemed like that was all you had been doing lately.

You squinted, eyes adjusting to the dim lighting as you tried spotting your friends. You couldn’t find Angie, but your eyes fell upon Renjun instead and you made your way over.

“Hey Junnie,” you teased, the old nickname slipping off your tongue and you gathered his attention. He rolled his eyes, inclining his head in greeting, acknowledging your presence. Mark smiled at you, and you found yourself easing into a conversation with them, Taeyong fitting in right away.

“It’s been a while, huh?”

You nodded, seeing another old friend, Johnny, walk up to you with a drink, handing you one. You grinned at him, “Still handling the alcohol Suh?”

He laughed, “Some things never change,” he mused and you turned back to Mark, “Yeah, four years, damn can you believe we’re old now?”

“I prefer the term mature thank you very much,” Hyuck popped in, his eyes holding a twinkle of mischief. Mark shook his head, “You are anything but mature.”

“Fuck you,” Hyuck stuck his tongue out at Mark, “I’m youthful, unlike you.”

You laughed, seeing Angie coming over with someone else. You felt the smile slip off your face as you realized it was Ten. He smiled at her, looking ahead at your reunited friend group, “Hey.”

He was wearing a T-shirt and jeans, looking even more like a college kid than he did before. His hair was definitely a little messier than before, but all in all he looked like the same boy you had fallen in love with all those years ago. You looked away, shuffling towards where Taeyong was standing, taking a sip of your drink because lord knows you would need it.

He looked good.

“We’re all here now!” Angie said excitedly. She really hadn’t changed one bit, clapping her hands like a kid and falling beside her boyfriend, taking his drink and stealing a sip. Ten looked around, eyes falling on you as he sighed.

“Hey.”

You blinked, “Hey Ten.”

“Who’s this? You were more popular than I thought you were,” Taeyong asked with a teasing lilt to his voice. Rolling your eyes, you sucked in a breath, “Taeyong this is Ten, my old- uh- friend, Ten, this is Taeyong.”

Ten looked at your best friend, “boyfriend?”

“She wishes.”

You groaned, “Why does everyone think we’re dating Jesus Christ,” you grumbled under your breath, feeling that the wall between the two of you had broken down to an extent. While grateful for that, you found yourself raising your own barriers. You were cautious, weary of him, and rightly so.

You weren’t ready to face that again.

“He’s my best friend.”

“Oh,” a pained smile appears on Ten’s face as he nods, “Long time no see?” He used to be your best friend.

You nodded, “Yeah, you uh-look good.” You complimented, looking at your shoes. You didn’t quite know what to say to him, even though there had been many instances throughout your four years away that you would think of it. You would wonder what would happen if the two of you met again, and what you would say, but all those ideas had deserted you as you faced him right now.

He grinned, lips upturning into that kittenish little smile you had loved so much. “Why thank you, you look great too.”

Silence again.

Angie looked up from her conversation with Mark, frowning slightly at the two of you. In all honesty, she had been dying to know what had happened between you and Ten, it was obvious the two of you had unfinished business. The awkward tension, the avoiding of looking at each other for too long.

It was getting painful.

Handing Renjun’s drink back to him, she walked over, “Hey Y/n, can I speak to you?”

You looked at her, nodding and bidding the two goodbye and walking with your friend. The two of you made your way outside to the back of the bar where she folded her arms, looking at you expectantly.

“What?”

“Oh don’t act oblivious,” she huffed, “What the fuck happened between the two of you? You used to be inseparable.”

“Who-”

She pinched the bridge of her nose in exasperation, “Do I have to spell everything out for you? You and Ten, t-e-n, like the number.”

You rolled your eyes, “Okay?”

She stared at you as if you were mad, “Well? Tell me!”

Biting your lower lip, you leaned against the wall of the building and looked up at the sky, as if you wanted it to swallow you whole. “It’s complicated.”

“Do tell.”

You wondered how you could explain it to her, it wasn’t something you could say easily. How could you sum up the flurry of emotions that came as a package with that boy. “I don’t know,” you said truthfully, “It’s not easy to explain, a lot of this happened.”

“Then make it simple.” She said it as if it was the world's most obvious thing. You scoffed, pushing yourself off the wall and dusting down your jacket, “Okay, Ten is my tempest, and the reason I don’t play it anymore.”

Leaving her baffled, you walked back inside.

We never got it right, playing and replaying old conversations, overthinking every word and I hate it, 'cause it's not me

The mall was a place you had loved when you were in college (not so much when you were broke) because it was one of the only places in your old town that had some sort of life. You loved walking along the stores, looking in and hanging out with your friends.

Now walking into it all these years later, you almost felt that same spark of youthful excitement. You were alone today, jet lag crashing over Taeyong who decided to stay back and catch up on his sleep.

The air condition hit you the moment you walked inside, and you were glad you made the decision of wearing a jacket, pulling the sleeves further down and looking around. You spotted your old favorite clothing store's sign gleaming down from the first floor, a smile appearing on your face.

If that was still there, could it be…?

Biting down on your lower lip, you walked to the escalator as fast as possible, trying not to run. You still had about fifteen minutes until all of you met up, so a little investigation wouldn’t hurt, would it?

Not having the patience to wait through the escalator carrying you up, you climbed it like they were stairs, reaching the first floor and walking to the side, passing the stores. At the end, you spotted a familiar sign, a grin spreading out on your lips as you made no attempt to hide it. Your pace quickened as you approached it, until you were leaning against the counter, peeing through the glass down at the several ice cream flavours.

On Ice used to be your and Ten’s favorite spot for ice cream, you would come here almost every week. You remembered the day you had gotten him out of a date and he took you there as payback.

“Would you like something, miss?”

You glanced up at the employee, nodding, “Can I have the coconut cream flavour please? In a cup.”

She nodded, taking out a scooper and serving you the cold treat. Taking one of the little wooden spoons, you scraped off a little bit of the ice cream and sucked on it, savoring the taste. You looked at the other flavours, spotting the cookies and cream flavour, which used to be Ten’s favorite.

“One cookies and cream, In a cone please,” a voice called out from behind you. Turning around on your heel, you faced Ten, who looked somewhat amused, “Don’t mind me, you’ll see I’m here and make me pay for your ice cream too, won’t you?”

You glared at him playfully, “No I won’t!”

He laughed, taking his ice cream from the employee, “Okay then,” he sounded unconvinced though as he dug his spoon through the scoop, licking the top off, “Came to reminisce as well?”

You shrugged, taking a spoonful of your own ice cream and looking away so you got a minute to think about your reaction. “I missed the ice cream.”

“And here I was thinking you may have missed me.”

He looked offended, like a kicked puppy. You bit back the giggle that was threatening to erupt from you. It felt wrong to stop yourself from laughing, because it felt so natural being with Ten, but at the same time it was so tricky.

“I did miss you,” clearing your throat and looking down at your ice cream, paying attention to the little that had melted into liquid at the sides. The air had thickened with unsaid words.

“I missed you too,” he said softly, biting at the edge of his waffle cone and frowning, pulling a face. You raised an eyebrow, “You okay dude?”

“I accidentally bit the ice cream,” he hissed, the crease in his brow deepening in discomfort. You laughed at him, the awkward tension dissipating at his display of idiocy, “And that is why I take a cup.”

“But the cup is boring,” he argued, going back to taking another bite of the cone. He was a slow learner, evidently. You rolled your eyes, “Yep, and getting brainfreeze is very appealing.”

Ten scowled at you, glaring playfully, “You haven’t changed a bit have you?”

You pressed your lips together, though they upturned at the edges even so slightly. “Of course I’ve changed, it's been four years, four years is a long time.”

“I know.”

There it was again, that mystification, the hidden meaning in your exchange. You sighed, finishing up the rest of your ice cream, “The other must be waiting for us, come on.”

He nodded, “Yep, I’ll just hold my cone,” he fell into step with you as the two of you walked to the food court. It felt right, him by your side, even if it hadn’t been like that for four years.

Ten and his ice cream soon became a problem.

You had met up with Renjun and Angie, the latter of which was ready to drag you around for a shopping spree while the boys held your bags. However her grand plan came to a standstill when Ten was not allowed to enter the store because of his precious cone ice cream.

“Just stuff it in your mouth for gods sake,” Renjun grumbled, not liking to be stuck in one place, The four of you had standing outside one of the clothing stores for about ten minutes now while Ten tried eating his ice cream as fast as he could, “I’m trying idiot.”

“Try harder.”

“Should’ve taken the cup,” you said in a sing-song voice to tease him, which resulted in him glaring at you, “I’ll throw it at you.”

“You wouldn’t.”

His lips twitched as his eyes met yours, “Try me bitch.”

“If you don’t finish it quickly, I’ll throw it in the trash,” Angie warned, losing her patience (though she never had much to begin with). Ten stuffed the button part of the cone in his mouth, grumbling with his mouth full, “Lets go.”

You rediscovered something about Angie that day. You say rediscovered because you had always known it, but over the course of time had forgotten.

That something was that the girl (now woman) was a fanatic for clothes. Whatever sanity she had possessed before entering the store had disappeared as she went mad, in the seventh heaven surrounded by her second loves.

Second because Renjun was her first.

You almost wished Ten was still eating his stupid ice cream.

At the end of it, you were exhausted, but in a good way. You had barely gotten anything, just a pair of shoes, but Angie had come out with an entire closet.

“You’re going to steal my closet space aren’t you?” Renjun whined, looking so genuinely distressed at the possibility it was comical. She rolled her eyes, handing him yet another bag which did absolutely nothing to ease his concerns, “No I won’t, besides even if I do you have like, an entire cupboard empty, I’ll just use that.”

“Oh you two moved in together!” You said in surprise, though you didn’t know why exactly you were surprised. It was pretty obvious, you wouldn’t be surprised if they were married to be completely honest.

You supposed the realization left you a little baffled, and maybe a little envious.

No, you shook the thought off. You were happy for them.

“Okay,” you said, glancing down at your phone screen to see the time, “I’ll get back to the hotel, Taeyong is probably awake by now.” You nodded, giving them a smile, “See ya!”

You bid them goodbye and walked a little away to the sidewalk, calling a cab. The yellow black car stopped for you, and you were about to get in when someone called your name.

“Y/n!”

You whipped your head around, seeing Ten jog over. He approached you, taking a deep breath, “I was wondering-”, he looked to the side, scratching the back of his neck awkwardly, “Is your number the same?”

You nodded, “Yep, you would’ve known that if you ever called.”

The words flew off your tongue before you could stop them, they came out harsh too. You dont know where that bout of emotion came from, but you couldn’t take it back now. Biting your tongue, you sighed, instantly regretting it, “I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to-”

“No, it's okay,” he offers you a pained smile and you hate it. “I-uh- deserve that.”

You looked at your shoes, sighing. There were unanswered questions hanging around you, making the air thick with what you thought was regret. The book wasn’t done, you had unfinished business, and yet you wanted to run away again.

What if the end was a bad one? It always had been with the two of you.

“I’m sorry.”

You sighed, curling your fingers around the door handle and pulling it open, “I have to get going, Ten.”

“Right, of course,” he took a step back, “See you later Y/n.”

You didn't reply, getting into the cab and telling the driver your destination. You looked out the window, eyes falling on Ten as he watched the car drive away. He waved, turning around and walking down the sidewalk.

See you later.

You picked up the call, even though you could see the caller ID. You had never deleted his number, maybe because you were still holding on to the hope that maybe, one of the days while you were away he would call you.

Raising your phone to your ears, you sat on your bed, sitting criss cross as you looked out of the hotel room window.

“Ten?”

“Hey,” he said softly, and for some reason, you felt breathless. Sucking in a deep breath you shut your eyes, “Hey.”

Silence.

Taeyong was in the bathroom currently, so you were sitting alone in your room. Part of you was glad, the other part was wishing he was right beside you. You didn’t know what to say even though there was so much.

“Why did you call me.”

“I just wanted to,” he said, sounding truthful, “And to see if your number was still the same,”

“You still kept it?”

You could almost see the small smile on his face, “Yeah, I did. Four years.”

“I kept yours too.”

The bathroom door clicked open and Taeyong walked out, rubbing his hair with a towel. He was wearing a T-shirt and shorts, as he sat on his bed, looking at you in mystification. You shook your head and he shrugged, picking up his own phone.

“Goodnight Y/n.”

“Goodnight Ten.”

And I wish I would've been patient, instead of letting all of your motion, stay emotions with you

~ “That,” Hyuck declared, sipping on the remnants of his soda, “Was fucking amazing.” Today it was the seven of you, Mark and Donghyuck tagging along. You had gone to the local cinema house and had watched a movie that had come out recently. You had enjoyed yourself, it had been a long time since you had watched a movie with friends.

Taeyong hummed, hands in the pockets of his jacket, “It was good.”

Hyuck whined at the unenthusiastic reaction (probably because he had chosen the movie) and you laughed, nudging Taeyong playfully. He grinned, “Alright, it was fucking amazing.”

“Thank you,” Hyuck said dramatically, “See Mark? People appreciate my taste.”

You had watched a horror movie, and Mark wasn’t one for those. He glared at his friend, “Y/n literally had to pry it out of him.”

“And? Your point is?”

Mark had yelped several times during the course of the movie, so much that it was more comical than scary anymore. You found yourself giggling every time he whimpered like a baby, clinging on to your hand.

“You two should have stayed for longer like Y/n,” Angie said, “Can’t you cancel your flight? The rest of us are staying for like two weeks.”

“I wish, but I have work,” Mark said, “And Hyuck does too.”

Hyuck pouted exaggeratedly, “Yeah, adult stuff.”

You realized how lucky you were to work as a composer/musician, simply because you didn’t have set working hours, you were able to take holidays and producers would approach you. You had reached that level in your line of work, and you were grateful.

“Hmm, what about you Mr Artist?” Angie asked Ten, who shook his head amusedly, “I had an exhibition before I came so yeah, I’m allowed a bit of a break.”

“Artist?” You asked, “The last time we talked before you left you said you got into a dance company?”

He laughed awkwardly, “Yeah uh I-”

“He left? I thought it was you who left?” Renjin said, raising an eyebrow at the two of you. You sighed, “We both left.”

Your tone was closed off, silently warning them not to ask any further. Angie had that same look on her face she had that day at the bar when she asked you about Ten. You turned to Taeyong, stealing one of the gummy bears from the little packet of them he had brought.

“I suppose we all left,” Mark said, humming an idle tune. A silence fell over your little group as you looked around. All of you were different, older, things had changed, but something in the back of your mind wanted to go back in time.

You wished you were back.

“Anyways-”, Hyuck cut through the reverie, “We should get going. Our flight is at 5 in the morning.” He cocked his head to the side, “Come on.”

The two leave, bickering as they walked down the street and turned the corner. You would miss them, because the chance of ever seeing them again was scarce.

Everyone would slowly leave again.

Angie and Renjun bid the two of you farewell, saying something about getting dinner together. Taeyong yawned, stretching his arms above his head. Clearly he was still lacking the sleep he so loved.

Ten looked at you as if he had to say something. You raised an eyebrow, prompting him to go on. He gave you a crooked smile, running a hand through his hair, “Wanna get pizza?”

You found this extremely sudden, “Uh, sure but I don’t see-”

“It’s Friday,” he started, “And we watched a movie. All we need to complete the evening is pizza.” His voice grew softer with every word, as if he was starting to think the idea was stupid, but it clicked in you as your lips parted in surprise.

“Movie nights,” you whispered, staring at him. He nodded, “Every Friday together.”

There it was again, that breathless feeling that seemed to take over you. You felt tongue tied, as if your lungs had seized.

You shouldn’t still be this affected by him, you knew this.

“Right,” you said, “well I mean Taeyong and I-”

Taeyong interrupted you, “Nah, I can get back myself, I’m a big boy,” he teased, “Go have fun with your friend.” You clicked your tongue, squeezing Taeyong’s hand, “Okay.”

Taeyong left as well.

You were left alone with Ten, who grinned, “Let’s go?” You nodded to this, and the two of you walked down the street to the pizza place he led you to.

The main characters.

We were so beautiful, we were so tragic, no other magic, could ever compare

You giggled at the stupid joke Ten had made, making his smile triumphantly. Taking a bite of your pizza you chucked the paper plate in the dustbin beside you. “I forgot how this felt.”

He nodded, finishing up his own pizza, “Yeah, it’s nice to do shit together again.”

You hummed in agreement, getting to your feet, “Okay, I really should get back now.” He stood up as well, “I’ll drop you.”

“Huh? What no it’s okay-” “What type of best friend would I be if I didn’t make sure you reached back safely,” he tutted, “Nah, I’m coming with you.” You rolled your eyes, biting down on your tongue to refrain from saying what you instantly thought of.

You’re not my best friend anymore.

He led you to his car, opening the passenger seat door for you dramatically. Rolling your eyes, you smacked his arm playfully and got in. He sat in the driver's seat, switching on the radio. Some random pop song filled the night silence, and for a moment, just for a moment, it felt like you were twenty again.

You didn’t want it to end.

The ride was mostly silent, both of you hadn’t much to say. He pulled up to the hotel gate and you sighed realizing it had, in fact, come to an end. Pushing the door open, you walked out of the car, standing and taking a deep breath.

Everything had changed.

This was still your town, you did spend a long time here, but everything was different. No one was here anymore, you were alone. Nothing was the same and it tore you apart inside, you didn’t even know why. You were homesick, for a home you had lost four years ago, you realized.

Ten stood by your side, “So.”

He was still there.

It was bitterly ironic, the way that life seemed to always lead you back to him. He was the one place you could still call home, but you could never call yours.

“So.”

“This was nice.” It was a statement, he wasn’t expecting you to reply. You shut your eyes, looking up at the sky. The stars seemed to mock you, telling you that it would never be in the stars for the two of you.

With the moonlight framing your face, Ten thought you had never looked prettier, highlighting the unruly strands of your hair that refused to stay in your ponytail. Your eyes held a secret, he knew, they were closed off from the world around you. He knew that look, very well in fact, because he saw it every time he looked in the mirror.

Fuck it.

He moved forward, slipping his arms around your waist and pulling you closer to him. Your eyes snapped back down to meet his as you let out a surprised sound, but you didn’t pull away. Instead, you held his gaze, wrapping your own arms around his neck, hugging him back.

He rested his chin on your shoulder as you sighed. This felt right, like it was where you were supposed to be.

“I missed you,” you whispered softly, just loud enough for him to hear, “more than I care to admit.”

He smiled, loosening his grip on you. “Missed you too, dumbass.”

“This is madness,” you hissed at Ten, who just grinned at you. Taking your hand in his, he pulled you along from behind the campus, “Just pretend you’re a student.”

“Why are we even doing this?”

“Why not?” He shot back, pushing open the door that he stopped in front of, taking you with him. There was a set of stairs, which he climbed up two at a time with you following. Grabbing into the side railing, you breathed heavily when you reached the top.

“Why the fuck are you making me run dude?” You asked, mid panting. He rolled his eyes at you, teasing, “Old woman”

You smacked the back of his head, which did nothing since he still donned that pretty smile on his lips. Not that you staring or anything, but Ten was definitely someone you could stare at. He just exuded that aura.

A main character in the book you hated.

He pushed open the next door in front of you, revealing the back of the library. The two of you walked into it, and you looked around, eyes widening like a kid in a candy store. This was the far back of the library, you hadn’t even known an entrance to this part existed. You walked to one of the bookshelves, running your fingers over the spines of the books.

Ten watched you as you explored the place. “I think it’ll be best to stay behind here instead of going in the front,” he said, “So our chances of being caught are less.”

“You’re the one who suggested we sneak into the library- why?”

“Like I said, why not?”

He always had been more ambitious than you were.

You shrugged, not finding a suitable retort. It was almost funny how the two of you had fallen back into the same routine you had all those years ago. No matter how much you tried to pry yourself away from him, you’d always find yourself back where you started.

You spotted a blue spine, walking over to it, partly because you were curious and partly because you wanted to put some space between you and Ten, gripping the book by the top edge and pulling it out. A small smile filtered onto your face as you stared at the blue black cover, turning the book over and reading the back of it. Ten raised an eyebrow, silently asking you what you were looking at.

“The Fault In Our Stars,” you whispered, suddenly remembering that the two of you were in a library, “It used to be my favourite book.”

“Ah,” he said, putting his hands in his pockets and leaning against one of the shelves. You wondered what would happen if it fell over, but that was not likely. “What is it about?”

You blinked at him in disbelief, “You’ve never read it? You uncultured swine, this book literally tears me to pieces every time.”

“I wouldn’t be asking you what it was about it I had read it,” he deadpanned.

“Watched the movie?”

“Nope.”

“I disown you.”

“Good to know,” he smiled sickly sweet, “Now educate this uncultured swine, honey.”

You rolled your eyes at the nickname, placing the book back into its slot, “It’s about this girl named Hazel who has cancer and she falls in love with a guy named Augustus Waters, who also has cancer, but it's gone.” You started explaining the storyline little by little, introducing the characters, and letting him step into the world of the story.

“Anyways, she gives him her favourite book and he's displeased with it’s ending, and tracks down the author-”

“Why is he displeased with the ending?” Ten asked, seemingly invested in the plot at this point. Slightly miffed at being interrupted, you continued, “Because it ended abruptly.”

“Ah,” he hums as if this was extremely important. You shifted your weight to your other foot, “They go find him, but the author is actually horrible to them and so they leave. They confess that they love each other and are happy, but when they go back, Augustus discovers his cancer has come back.”

Ten nods slowly as if anticipating the end, “And?”

“He dies,” you say simply, glancing at the spine of the book, “And Hazel is left heartbroken and alone.”

“What the fuck?” Ten’s voice raises slightly and you look at him alarmed, shushing him, “That can’t be the end???”

“It isn’t,” you assure him as consolation, “I mean it is, but later Hazel finds out that Augustus wrote her a letter of sorts, telling her that the world is never not going to give her pain, but that she can work through it. He’s happy with his choice, and he asks if she's happy with hers. She is.”

Ten looks almost pained, as if your half assed explanation had hurt him. He looked at the book like it was the cause of all his worries, “That fucking sucks.” “Yeah.”

“They don’t get a happy ending,” he said weakly, it almost sounded like he had said it before, an echo. You shook your head, stepping away from Ten and sighing. “They don’t, but she's happy. Hazel is content with her decision.” You wished you could read his mind, wondering what he was thinking about. He pushed himself off the bookshelf, waking a step closer to you, his eyes meeting yours. Those eyes, fucking hell, everytime you looked at them you felt like you were falling. He studied your expression, almost perplexed looking. “Are you happy?”

The question startled you as frowned, cocking your head to the side, “What?”

“With your decision, I mean. Are you happy?”

You looked away, thinking over the question. Sure, you had a best friend, you had a good and comfortable life doing what you loved most. You had a pretty house in New York and was successful. You had it all.

Except one thing.

“Maybe,” you hummed, “I’m not entirely sure. Are you?”

“Maybe,” he echoes, “I’m getting there.”

Maybe.

I just can’t explain the way it hurts, now that what we had is gone, I don’t have the words, I’m so bad at playing along

You’ve always hated silence.

It seemed too free, too unstable for you. Maybe that's why you liked music, it could join those awkward silences, making it just a little more bearable.

Right now you sat in silence, thinking over the question Ten had asked you earlier in the day. Taeyong was fast asleep and rightly so since it was two in the morning. You shivered ever so slightly, pulling the blankets over your legs and sighing.

Were you happy with your decision?

You shut your eyes, trying to think, willing the darkness to help. It seemed only to pull you into it further, until you could see an image that you had buried in the back of your mind. Ten was smiling at you, looking at you as if you were the world.

“It’s not hard when the subject is beautiful.” He had said when you complimented the painting he had done of you, the same painting that served as your lock screen. You remembered that day so clearly, because it was the day everything truly fell apart, the day you told him you loved him and the day you realized he could never be yours.

Damnit.

You wanted to deny it, you wanted to push any of those thoughts away, but it was getting increasingly harder. He was here, with you, after so long. You knew this was stupid, you knew it was wrong and pathetic, but fuck.

It was hard not loving someone after loving them for four years.

Four years, god, everything about the situation was just punching you in the gut. You loved him for four years, and because of shitty timing, you barely had him for a day before he was lost to you again. You meet him after four year, and it's like nothing has changed, but everything is different.

The world loved irony.

And it would constantly throw it at you, making you buckle at the knees every time. The world was cold and cruel, the world had given you a role and made you stick to it. You had let the years water down whatever you felt for ten, but it had never left.

You were destined to be a side character in its storyline forever, loving the main character you could never have.

You looked down at your phone for the time, noting that it was about six in the evening. The air was cold as you hummed in thought, thought, taking a bite of your burger. Ten and you sat in the park, on the swings side by side with each other.

You felt like a kid again.

Ten peered over, looking at your screen and growing, “Your lockscreen.” He noted, looking almost dazed, “You still have it?”

“Have what?” “The tempest.”

You hadn’t heard that name in so long, you almost didn’t register it. Nodding slowly, you clicked your tongue, “Didn’t have the heart to throw it away.” It was true, the painting he had done of you hung on your wall back at home, the only piece of him you had left.

“Oh.”

“Yep.”

He crunched up the wrapper in his hand, aiming for the dustbin that was a few feet away and throwing it. It fell right in thankfully, which meant he didn’t have to go and put it in. Getting to his feet, he let out a yawn, making his eyes turn into little crescents. “Come on.”

You raised an eyebrow, using the chains of the swing to get to your feet, “Where are you taking me?”

“A place I think you’ll like,” and with that ominous sentence, he walked out of the park and you followed, grumbling something about you being Watson to his Sherlock.

He took you on a drive, and towards the end you started recognizing the streets, eyes widening when he pulled up against a glass house.

“The greenhouse,” you breathed out, getting out of the car, and staring in awe at the structure. Ten smiled at your awestruck expression, taking your hand in his and dragging you inside. The evening rays of the sun filtered through the glass, giving the place an ethereal look, almost as if it was another world.

You looked around, taking in the place as you walked around slowly towards the back with Ten following until you reached a certain spot, and it was like all the wind had been knocked out of your lungs.

There it was.

The place you had sat down on while he painted you. Fumbling, you brought out your phone, clicking it on and bringing it up.

Of course, it looked different in the evening, with the orange golden hues of light streaming in, but it was the same, this was the same place. The place you told Ten you loved him, the place he painted you, the place that was on your lockscreen, and had been for three years now.

You stared at it, before looking back up at the scene, and at Ten. He gave you a lopsided smile, shrugging.

At that moment, you felt more confused than ever, because you didn’t know how to feel at all anymore. Ten had always been like walking a tightrope, one slip and you could fall, but you had already fallen, and fallen and fallen and you were still falling. There was no end to the chasm, and there was no end to the two of you.

Being here, in that moment, meant something, it had to. You were hoping it did, but at the same time, you were praying it meant nothing. You hated it, you wanted it.

You were scared, the same girl all those years standing in front of Ten in tears, saying she loved him.

You really hadn’t changed.

“Let me paint you?” Ten asked, reaching a hand out for you to take. You stared at it, and he let it hang, waiting for you. Grasping his hand, you intertwined your fingers, bringing it up to look at it, chuckling softly, “Last time you did it I got paint on my sweater.”

He grinned, stepping forward, “I’ll be careful this time, I promise.”

Let’s fall in love for the night and forget in the morning

Time began running out once again.

Your two weeks blended into one, and now you had five days left. Not that you were in any rush to leave, you didn’t even have to, considering you pretty much worked for yourself. Still, you didn’t want to leave, the prospect of having to do so was almost laughable.

“Oh come on! One song!” Angie whined, pushing you towards the piano. You protested, trying to pry her hands off you, but she had an iron grip on your arm, nails almost digging into your skin as she pulled you to the piano.

The four of you were in the mall yet again, this time in a piano store that Angie had dragged you into, only to pursue her master plan of bullying you into playing the piano.

And that was how you ended up sitting on the piano stool of a gorgeou Steinway piano.

You sighed, “Why?” “You’re a literal musician,” she deadpanned, “I want to hear you play! It’s been so long.”

Defeatedly, you placed your fingers on the piano, pressing a few and playing the C major scale just to get a feel for the weight and keys of the piano. Once you were done with that, you looked up, “What would you like me to play?”

“Play one of your own pieces!” She suggested excitedly and you nodded, playing out one of your own compositions, fingers flying over the keys of the piano. You lost yourself in the music, it felt as if you were finally home.

The piece came to an end, and Angie clapped, nudging Renjun to follow suit. He grinned, clapping and you rolled your eyes, seeing some of the store employees beginning to sate. Feeling your face heat up, you shook your head at them, “Stop it.”

“We’re just showing our appreciation for you Y/n,” Angie said innocently, eyes looking away from where you were sitting and looking through the glass. “Oh, wait, you two stay here, Renjun come with me.”

“Wha-”

Renjun was dragged away before he could even ask his eccentric girlfriend why. You watched them amusedly, turning back to the piano, realizing your fingers were still resting on the keys.

“So,” Ten started, walking closer and leaning against the top of the piano, “You gonna play something for me?”

You raised an eyebrow, “Whatever would you like me to play?”

He grinned, before that smile melted off his face, “Uh,” he scratched the back of his neck awkwardly, “What about the painting?”

You stared at him bewildered, “You want me to play your painting?”

“No I mean the piece it was named after,” he said hurriedly to clarify, almost sheepishly, “The Tempest. Used to be your favorite, At least from what I remember.”

Staring back down at the keys, you took a deep breath, “I haven’t played The Tempest in four years, Ten.” Your voice suddenly turned ever so slightly shaky, “I don’t know-”

“Try? For me?” Sighing, you nodded trying to remember the notes, grateful when you realized you had already placed your hands on the correct starting notes. Taking a deep breath, you started playing.

And you remembered why you stopped playing it.

It held too many memories.

It was painful, because the piece was much more to you than a ballad, it was your relationship (if you could call it that) with Ten, it was the one piece you had of him, it was the storm, a reminder of what happened. The haunting melody transitioned into something harsher, and it felt as if you were a lone ship on the sea.

And then, with horror, you realized you had forgotten how the piece sounded, you had forgotten the notes. Panic took over as your mind raced, trying to recollect. It was embarrassing to forget a piece right in the middle of playing it, though you had never done it before. But this was Ten, and for some fucking reason, he was much more important than the thousands of people you had played for.

But muscle memory took over, and even though you were internally panicking, your fingers seemed to know what they were doing, playing on their own accord. The harsher sounds transitioned into the pretty ones as the piece fooled you into a false sense of security. Your foot gravitated towards the pedal, pressing it at the right parts, creating a hauntingly beautiful ballad.

And when you were done, for the first time, you felt as if you were the one who had triumphed the storm, the Tempest.

Lifting your fingers off the keys, you let out a breath you didn’t know you were holding in. The waves of the storm had calmed down, and the sun had begun shining over the horizon.

Ten stared at you, as if he wanted to say something, but he was holding back. “That was...god Y/n.” He seemed torn, as if he was fighting his very own Tempest. Maybe he was, maybe he wasn’t. “That was beautiful.”

You didn’t respond, looking up at him, eyes meeting his own. You felt as if you were back in your old apartment, with Ten sitting beside you on your little piano stool, as the two of you played your digital piano. While you frustratedly complained about a part you weren’t getting and he would try helping you. It had always been just the two of you.

Ten leaned forward over the top of the piano, until you were impossibly close. His eyes, fucking hell, you hated his eyes, you hated them because you could never truly hate him. Those eyes flickered to your lips, before he pressed his own to yours.

Ten was kissing you.

If you weren’t already sitting, your knees would have buckled at the feeling. It was barely a kiss, his lips were just brushing over yours. It was innocent, but it felt so heavy, and the world around you seemed to blend away in a rush of reds and yellows, a blur you couldn’t quite decipher.

His hair tickled your forehead, and you were floating, you didn’t know what was happening, other than the fact that Ten, the boy you had loved for impossibly long, was kissing you. You tried not to play a discordant chord on the piano, so as to not alert the store employees.His hand came up, thumb brushing against your cheekbone, and that was what brought you crashing back down to reality.

He pulled away.

Your eyes fluttered open, looking at him. The initial shock still remained, but so did those odd first crush butterflies that seemed to flutter about in your stomach. You hated it, because this was so hopeless, the two of you always were.

When you looked at him, Ten was already looking at you. Sucking in a breath, you abruptly got up from the piano stool. Taking a step away from ten, putting space between the two of you.

No, you were not going to do this, never again would you let yourself be swayed by foolish hope. It had been long enough, you had fooled yourself enough.

“I have to go.”

“Y/n-”

“I have to go,” you echoed, walking away from the piano, towards the entrance of the shop. The one thought replayed in your mind, you had to go, you had to go, you had to-

“Wait-”

“Damnit Ten, I have to GO.”

You raised your voice, feeling the tears starting to well up in your eyes, which was ridiculous. You had no reason to cry, why were you crying? You felt stupid, which only added to your distress. Maybe you were crying for yourself, for the things you had lost, the memories this stupid town brought along.

He stopped in his tracks, a few feet away from you. The two of you stood there, rooted to the spot. You sniffed, brushing your hand against your nose, “It’s always so fucking hard with you.”

“I suppose we’re even them.”

You looked up at him, and he wore an expression that almost mirrored yours. Confused, pained, regretful. You frowned, not understanding what he was trying to say.

“Four years, Y/n, I’ve waited for four years.”

You staggered backwards in disbelief. He had waited? He had waited for you for as long as you had waited and loved him. And it fucking hurt, because even eight years into this, you still loved him. You wanted to hate him, you wanted to despise him but you never could.

“We could have been but time didn’t permit it,” he said, “We could have been.” You wanted to run at his words, you wanted to slap him, and shake some sense into him, because he was still holding on to that stupid hope you had.

“But we weren’t.”

“But we should have.”

“I have to go,” you repeated, walking out of the store and to the escalator, stuffing your hand in your pockets to stop them from shaking, shutting your eyes to blink away the tears that were threatening to fall. Maybe in another life you and Ten could be, maybe your book was written by the wrong person, who ended it abruptly.

The waves came crashing down again, washing away the pages of your book.

You would never forget the one night you had Ten, sitting on your couch, in his arms. He had kissed you, he told you he loved you back, and just for that night, you had it all.

How did you go from having everything, to having nothing at all?

Sometimes you wished you had never left, that you had tried for the two of you, but you were tired of waiting, you were so fucking tired that you had given up, and now you regretted it. Everything felt like a figment of your imagination, until he kissed you again at the piano store, leaving you a mess once again.

Was it supposed to hurt after all this time?

Your youth belonged to Ten, as did your heart, no matter how much you tried denying it.

You could break my heart in two, but when it heals it beats for you.

Taeyong was one to live in the moment. He was free, a happy soul, and could always pick up your mood no matter what. But at the moment, he couldn’t tell what was bringing you down.

“Hey,” he nudged you, “Wanna talk about it?”

You were sitting on your bed, knees pulled to your chest and arms hooked around them. You glanced down at your best friend, contemplating if you should tell him. Taeyong could practically see the cogs turning in your brain.

“Pinky promise I won’t tell anyone,” he said with a goofy grin, raising his pinky finger out to you. You smiled tiredly, hooking your own pinky in his and swinging your legs off the bed. Taking a deep breath you began.

You told him everything, from your history with Ten, to when you met him again at the reunion, to the days you spent together and finally the kiss. You told him about the years, and the pain and even the painting. Taeyong listened patiently, and when you came to the end, he looked pensive, his big doe eyes looking at you.

“You don’t have to leave,” he said, “You work for yourself.”

“That's not the problem here, Taeyong.”

“Then what is?” He asked you, lying down on his bed, hands tucked behind his head, “You finally have time, are you going to throw it away again?”

You didn’t have an answer to that, so instead you sighed, getting ready for the night. You splashed your face with water, , looking into the mirror that was placed above the sink and studying yourself.

Were you happy with your decision?

You could leave and never look back, and that would be a decision in itself, but would you be happy? You didn’t think you could be.

Your choice was made.

Later that night, you found yourself standing outside Ten’s door. You were on the last page of the book, the last few paragraphs. Taking a deep breath, you knocked, waiting for him to open it.

Waiting for the main character once again.

And he did open it, eyes widening once he saw you. You hated him, you loved him, you were standing in front of him. He clicked his tongue, leaning against the doorframe. “You came.” It was a statement, not a question.

“You waited.”

“I did,” he smiled, almost a little sadly, hands in his pockets. He cocked his head to the side, gesturing inside, and reaching out one of his hands to you, “You coming?”

And you returned his smile, taking his hand and a step forward. Eight years had led you up to this point, and you were happy with your choice. Did you regret some of it? Hell yeah. You wished you had told him sooner instead of waiting. But even if you could do it all again, you knew it would always be Ten. You would always go back to him.

Squeezing his hand, you nodded.

“Just for the night.”

fin.

605 notes · View notes

d3vilyves · 5 years

Text

「 12:00」

You felt your entire body go into a sudden warmth as Ten caressed the curves of your body, causing you to bite your lips of the ticklish yet pleasurable feeling. You and Ten dated for a few months; today you thought was the first day that the two of you would have sex. You were nervous, Ten knew that. He was going to take care of you.

“ Hey, baby.” Ten says, taking you in his arms and pressing gentle kisses down your collarbones, beginning to suck on the skin and eventually leaving patches of dark purple. You gasp as you feel him entering you. “ It’s too much.” You moan into Ten’s neck, who kept still and made sure you got used to his size.

“ I’m sorry, honey.” Ten whispered, kissing your forehead as he began to move into you slowly, hitting a soft spot. You two press your foreheads against each other, Ten watching and praising you as feel your high coming closer and closer.

#ten smut #ten x reader #nct ten #li yongqin x reader #wayv smut #nct smut #nct x reader

116 notes · View notes

your-world-with-nct · 3 years

Text

— requested, also i’m back after exams 🥳

💌 • 10:09am

“ooh, ooh, that’s it, sweetheart, and you kick four times… and then you twist your feet inwards twice, and, wow! you’re such a fast learner, mei, clearly you take after me,” husband!ten grinned at his daughter’s determined expression as she tried to memorise the moves of his new song for a tiktok challenge, her furrowed eyebrows and her little kicks had his heart soaring, “alright, do you wanna film it now, baby?”

she nodded eagerly, rolling up the sleeves of her pyjamas that she had yet to change out of, catching her father’s eye and eliciting a light chuckle from him as mei stuck her tongue out in concentration whilst going over the simplified moves she had just learned.

“babe, what are you doing? i thought i told you to double check your stuff, y’know, like your passport, your boarding pass? important stuff?” you poked your head through the doorway of your shared bedroom, rolling your eyes at your husband’s lack of organisation.

“what do you mean? teaching mei the kick back choreo is way more important than all that, and it’s not like i haven’t already double, triple, even, quadruple checked my bags and my passport last night. as long as i have the picture of you two in the back of my phone, i’m good to go,” ten grinned, pulling you into his arms to try and dissipate your annoyance, as you sighed at the fact that his tactic actually worked, “do you want to show mama how good you are at dancing, angel?”

with his prompt, she gave another nod, “papa only taught me a little bit,” mei exaggerated by pinching her chubby fingers together, “but he said i’m really good so i’ll show you!”

her excitement was contagious and you could feel the corners of your lips subconsciously turning up as ten’s arms snaked around you to envelop you in a tight embrace, your daughter waddling over to ten’s charging phone to play the music.

you felt yourself singing along to the chorus and you heard ten cheering and squealing at mei’s every move, temporarily forgetting that the rest of your husband’s group members, along with their manager, would be arriving in a matter of minutes to drive them to the airport, and simply basking in the pure happiness you felt in the moment.

as soon as mei finished performing the short section she knew, you both applauded her, ten scurrying over to her to scoop the four year old in his arms and dragging you over with his free arm to dance to the remainder of the song with the people he cherished most in the world.

as much as he loved his career and the life that came with it, ten despised the fact that his work schedules conflicted with his beloved family time, and the few moments he did get to spend with you and mei, were either filmed or cut short due to, well, more work.

which is exactly why he treasured moments like these—being away from the spotlight, where he was only ever blinded by yours and your daughter’s smile, rather than flashing cameras and stage lights; being off stage, where his heart only raced when he was around you, rather than after exhausting performances; being himself, where he was only ever met with loving gazes of adoration, rather than the judging eyes of the public.

“what are you thinking about?” your inquisitive question quickly snapped him out of his reverie, holding mei’s tiny fists in your hands and carelessly dancing to the song’s bridge as you wondered what had ten in such deep thought.

“nothing really, i’m just— i’m so grateful to have you two in my life,” your lover blushed, burying his reddening face into mei’s shoulder as she playfully poked her doting dad’s cheek, “i mean it’s not like i just realised, i just… remembered, i guess, and, i love you both so much, i’m gonna miss my two babies when i’m gone!!”

you huddled closer to ten and mei at his sweet words, snaking your arms around him, whilst the precious girl in between you gave her dad a kiss on the cheek, causing ten to lean over to you, tapping his other cheek as if asking for one from you too.

rolling your eyes again at his cheesy gesture, you placed a chaste kiss on his cheek, “i’m gonna miss you too, baby, don’t forget to call us every night, this little one won’t be able to get any sleep without hearing a nighttime lullaby, won’t you, mei?”

“you have to sing me to sleep on facetime, papa!!! promise you won’t forget?” unfortunately for ten, mei had inherited your irresistible puppy dog eyes and pout, which worked very much in her favour right now as he nodded and interlocked his pinky with hers, to confirm their deal.

“don’t worry, baby, i could never forget, especially when it comes to my favourite girls,”ten kissed both of you alternately on the forehead, giving you an extra kiss on the lips when he saw your bottom lip jut out.

he chuckled at the simple exchange of affection; although he was upset that he wouldn’t be able to do any of that for the next three weeks, he was no longer fazed by the distance he’d have to deal with for the next three weeks, because all the distance in the world couldn’t interfere with the overwhelming love he had for you and mei.

302 notes · View notes

fullsunalicia · 4 years

Note

can I request wayv's reaction to a clingy/cuddly s/o? thank you! 💙

THE WAY I FEEL THIS,,,,, i am literally the clingiest and cuddliest s/o ever lmao pray for my future partner. you absolutely can, thank you for requesting! 💛 i hope you like it, bubs!

Qian Kun

would love love love a cuddly s/o!!! affectionate kun is a headcanon i will go down with, no one can convince me he’s not beyond soft for physical affection

though he’s not that big on pda, he never stops you from holding his hand or linking pinkies!!! the happy smile you get every time you lean on him??? IMMACULATE

in conclusion, please give kun a cuddly s/o

Chittaphon Leechaiyapornkul

every time i do hc for this mf i realize how much of an enigma he is. does he,,,,, love the affection??? DOES HE NOT??????? I CANT TELL

i don’t think ten initiates pda, but he doesn’t mind it either???? like you can literally sit on his lap or play with his fingers but he’s never going to do that on his own tho. he just doesnt seem like the type

will eat that shit up in private tho, like he loves just throwing himself on you and cuddling for hours on end LMAO

Dong Sicheng

pda is a big no-no for sicheng, atleast not the very evident type! doesn’t mind the pinkie linking though, but gets really shy when ypu kiss him in front of his members. would never tell u off, it’s just a personal preference :)

he loves how soft you are!! that’s essentially why he never says anything even if you do initiate pda, because he thinks your personality is very precious.

as long as you’re happy, he’s happy!

Wong Yukhei

king of pda and affection and everything that comes with it. i said what i said. no i don’t take any criticism

another whipped man for cuddly s/o’s!!! he literally IS the cuddly s/o!!!!!!!!! he loves your warm heart and indulges you, no matter what you do!!! wanna sit on his thighs? sure, come here, bubs!! wanna have a piggyback ride?? hop on!! you want a pinky?? the whole hand? TAKE IT

please this man is literally wrapped around your finger,,,,, you literally win

Xiao Dejun

contrary to popular belief,,,,,, i think dejunnie DOES like pda. like casual one!! brushing your hand, wrapping an arm around your waist while you talk to someone? i’m soft

while he gets awkward at first because he’s not used to such confident affection, he warms up pretty fast and cant help but smile every time you reach for him!! it’s like a personal teddybear....

you are literally his fav type of person

Wong Kunhang

........ another enigma . like . i think it just depends what day you catch him on LMAO,,,, sometimes he’s not very big on it and on other days, he needs your attention 24/7 or he will scream

your cuddly and kind personality is what drew him in, actually!!! you treat people around you so carefully and kindly like,,,, porcelain queen,,,, get it bc u treat everyone like porcelain? my metaphors suck

will get envious when you cuddle others so just cling to him LMAO this big child

Liu Yangyang

LIVES for affection. literally that is the way to yangyang’s heart, have y’all seen him????? cuddliest in wayv!!! probably gets self-conscious about himself bc he thinks he’s being too clingy

honestly does not give a fuck where he is when he’s serenading you. the type of dumbass to kiss you at an award show and wonder why the cameraflashes are suddenly going this way LMAO

once you’ve both established that you’re comfortable with the other, your relationship is literally going to be perfect!!! go get your mans!!!

248 notes · View notes

kunbunn · 4 years

Text

~One Condition~

Royalty!Ten x reader

A/n: if it doesn't make sense to you just know that it's all Ten's fault....

A sudden knock startled Ten, he looked up his graze from the book he's reading with confusion in his eyes.

"Your majesty, princess y/n came to see you." His guard announced from the outside of his office doors.

Ten smirked, already knowing why the girl visited his quarters. "Let her in."

The doors to his office unlocked slightly plenty enough to let the royalty in. Her eyes the colour of pale red and puffy. She looks at the prince with fear and hope in her eyes.

Ten's expressions softened when he saw her. He didn't like seeing his princess like this, all venerable and a mess, he knows it's all because of what he did, he caused this and now it weakens and guilts him.

"Sweetheart, what's wrong? Did something happened?" He softly asked as he moved toward the girl, reclining her down in one of the sofas. She looked up and saw concern in his eyes, she despises being seen like this, Ten knows how strong she is in restraining her emotions at bay. She looks pitiful in front of him. Tears burst again from her eyes as she couldn't take the distress she's feeling.

"T-ten... my f-family, it's an m-mess..." she said the utters in between sobs, some hiccups are there too.

"Love, talk to me, what happened to your family." He brushed away some tears in her face as he kneels down on the carpet to look at her in the eyes. Ten also requested the guard outside to get him some water.

"It's b-been weeks... my kingdom is suddenly financially u-unstable. No trades are coming in and it's w-winter season s-so no harvest can be taken to other k-kingdoms. We've almost used all funds to keep the t-townspeople stable." She explains to the prince. She tried hard to explain it understandably to Ten.

He hugged her tight, letting her rest her chin at his shoulder and sob. "You know that I can help you love." Ten muttered in her ear. A wicked tone was in his voice. It's all part of his plan. "You know the condition love, marry me and I'll support your kingdom in times of need. That's all I ask in return." He resumed.

Y/n expected this, she knew what Ten wanted from her if she ever asked his help. She had no one else to help her in all of the 7 kingdoms. Ten's being the wealthiest in all. She had no choice.

She pulls away from Ten, looking straight to his eyes. Ten wiped more tears from her face.

"You promise you'll help us?" She asked him bravely, she might be a bit intimidated of him.

"Yes love, anything for my sweet princess." He answered her clearly. He wasn't lying for sure. He'd do anything to please his princess.

"Fine... I'll marry you, but please keep your promise. That's all I ask for you." She tried not to cry harder again. She's giving herself up for the sake of her kingdom. She did a good thing, right?

He smiled so widely at the words. He couldn't be any happier than now. Ten softly leaned in and kissed her, not rough but tenderly. He has always waited for her to say yes. Months of persuading and finally she's all his. She kissed back with the same softness. She loved him a lot really, but she knows she loves someone more than him.

"You're finally all mine my love. Not Qian's nor Wong's but all to myself" He broke off the kiss, his grin still wide as it was. She nodded to her fate. All to save the kingdom she loves.

=====

Photo ctto. Pinterest

#nct #kpop #wayv #nct 127 #nct dream #Ten #Wayv Ten #nct ten #ten imagines #ten scenarios #ten x reader #nct ten x reader #wayv ten x reader #ten royalty au #wayv scenarios #wayv imagines #nct imagines #nct scenarios #li yongqin

28 notes · View notes

dreamiesdotcom · 5 years

Text

[10:49] "Is the flower Lele or is Lele the flower?", you ask Chenle who is pressing soft kisses on your face or literally wherever he can reach as you two cuddle on the couch, the TV playing in the background, "Hey, answer me~"

"Nooooo~ Y/N is the flower~", he presses a kiss on the tip of your nose.

"Well then you are the angel~"

"Nope, YOU are~"

" No, I can't be a flower and an Angel!", you giggle. "Oh but you are!", he cooes.

"Zhong Chenle!", you laugh, "You're the Ange—", you freeze as the other side of the sofa shifts, Chenle stopping midway pecking your cheeks.

"Oh, no, don't mind me", Ten laughs, holding a popcorn bowl on his hands, "What're we watching?"

"Really, Ten? 5×2? 10÷2? Really?", You groaned, deciding it's enough (NEVER!) cuddles for now to which Chenle not so quietly protested about, and time to actually pay attention to the movie.

169 notes · View notes

starlitmark · 3 years

Text

{11:28pm}

Genre: fluff

Pairing: Ten x gn reader

Warnings: none

You roll over in your shared bed with your boyfriend to find he isn’t there. Sitting up you find him standing by your closet putting on his winter coat. I’m the process you must’ve made a noise that let him know you were awake.

“Hi sweetheart I was just about to wake you up” he’s says and walks over and kisses the crown of your head

“Yongqin what’s going on? Why are you dressed to go outside it’s like 11 at night?” you rubbed your eye trying to whisk off sleep

“Come get dressed we’re going out” he gently pulls you up to your feet “and watch out for the cats they’re somewhere on the floor by the bed”

“Yongqin can you tell me where we're going?” you ask despite still listening and getting changed

“Just trust me okay? If you want you won’t even have to get out of the car” he sang and again kissed you but this time on your temple

“How should I dress then?”

“Like I am. Warm. I don’t need my favorite person getting sick”

~~~~

Not before long you were in the car driving to somewhere Christmas music gently playing in the background. You half zone out looking out the window seeing the lights on homes and streets alongside the freshly fallen snow. It now truly felt like Christmas with the visual now matching.

“I need you to close your eyes now love” he said holding your hand and focusing on the road

“Why?” you questioned knowing your boyfriend’s antics

“I thought you trusted me?” he faked a hurt tone

“Fine fine I’ll close them” you giggled

Not in complete darkness you hear the car stop and Yongqin get out. Soon after your door opens and you’re greeted by a cold blast of air followed by your boyfriend’s hand grabbing yours. He slowly and carefully guides you to his surprise.

“Can I open my eyes yet?”

“Just a few more feet okay?” I won’t let you fall or get hurt I promise”

You feel him let go of your hand and hear him walk behind you. “Yongqin what are you up to?”

“Open your eyes now” you can hear the excitement in his voice

As you open your eyes you gasp and cover your mouth. In front of you lies the most beautifully decorated Christmas village you’ve ever seen. Some areas are decorated in more of a cute manner than others in a classy one.

“Yongqin! This is what this was all about?” you do finally say to him as you turn around

“Mmhmm! Do you like it?”

“Qinqin, I love it. Totally worth waking up me up at 11pm” you lightly giggle approaching him where he stands under an archway admiring you

“Good I really hoped you would. You’ve had such a busy year and I wanted to end it on a high note somehow”

“But babe you’re so much more busy than I am. I should be doing this for you” you pouted

“No no don’t start that” he pulled you into a hug “this was my surprise for you so let’s go enjoy it”

He takes you by the hand again to lead you through the village but be before you take your first steps toward it you keep him there a moment longer

“I love you Yongqin” you smile at him

“I love you too darling” he glances up “hmm, look” he points “mistletoe.” He leans into you and places the warmest most loving his on your lips you could imagine

“Now let me show you the village”

With as crazy as life has been this past year you couldn’t imagine spending it with anyone but him.

~~~~

A/n: this was completely spur of the moment and unedited but I hope it’s okay I needed some Christmas writing in my life

#neoturtles #multifandomnet #nct-writers #nct fluff #ten fluff #timestamp #nct timestamps #ten timestamps

28 notes · View notes

neohighwayv · 5 years

Text

WayV as kisses

Characters: WayV x fem reader

Genre: fluff, romance, suggestive

Word count: 4.9k

WARNING! Suggestive elements for some members

Soundtrack: Face to Face, Love Talk

Description: What kisses with WayV would be like!

Author’s note: I know it’s mainly supposed to be about kisses with WayV but I got carried away with some of the members and wrote more than that so they’re longer! Nonetheless, I hope you still enjoy reading them ^^

------

Kun. Kisses with Kun are sweet.

Each one is purposeful, and it's hard to not feel the sincerity, love and pure adoration that he has for you behind each one. He gives you one whenever he gets the chance to, to make sure that you don't forget how loved you are. He presses a kiss right below your ear each morning that he gets to wake up next to you. It's the easiest spot for him to reach and it's also the spot that tickles, so he does it just to see your sleepy smile & soft puffs of laughter. He presses a few more to the same spot until you're whining for him to stop, to which he finally relents. Tightening his hold around your frame, he presses one last kiss to your shoulder before he reluctantly detaches himself from your side to get ready; the idol duties still call, as much as he wants to stay by your side.

With what little time he has with you, Kun works in more kisses in the morning. You're grabbing sugar from the top shelf when he wraps an arm around you from behind to press a kiss to your cheeks. He comes back with his own mug, sets it down beside your hand before he moves your hair to the side to press kisses along your neck and shoulder, inter spacing each kiss with an update; either his schedule for the day or the group's latest activities. He thinks it's important to keep you updated on his activities so that you don't worry about him. An effort that you greatly appreciate even if it's such a simple thing. Kun is all too sad when the coffee machine finishes dispensing your coffee, because that's when you detach yourself from his side to let him have the space. At the dining table, Kun holds your hand in his as you continue talking about your days; it's a little hard to eat with one hand only but you don't complain because you know it's his way of having you close for as long as he can before he has to leave again for a few hours. Maybe a few days. Sometimes a few weeks. The ring of the doorbell tells him that his time with you is up but Kun still doesn't let you go. Instead he pulls you closer to press more kisses on your face; the forehead, nose, cheeks and lips before he's finally willing to let you go. He lingers after each kiss because one, he's reluctant to leave and he's trying to buy more time and two, he wants you to know that you're loved and appreciated. Kun usually doesn't leave until the members and managers are banging and yelling through the solid door to ask Kun to hurry up as his phone bursts with multiple missed calls from them – all in an effort to get him to leave your side. "I love you" is the last thing you hear from him before the door shuts, leaving you all alone again. Your face burns where his lips have touched before, the only reminder that he was ever once in the same space with you.

You love receiving kisses from Kun – they're the sweetest thing in the world. But your favourite kiss with Kun? The ones that you give him. He's always giving so much of himself: to the team, to his work, to the fans – but – who's there to take care of him when he needs it? The eyebags and lines around his eyes don’t lie – sometimes work does take its toll. So, when he’s finally back in the humble shared apartment, you don’t ever deny him hugs. You’re by his side before he can even free up his arms to hug you and you’re in them the moment he opens his arms. Kun gives you a tight squeeze before he lets you go to look at your face but before he can open his mouth to ask about your day, you’re dragging him to the sofa, pulling him down beside you as you cradle him in your arms. Well, as much of him as you can anyways. He’s still bigger than you. Kun melts instantly into your touch, letting him be held without fuss. You press a kiss to his hairline, the tips of his pink hair tickling your nose.

“How’s your day?”

“Good because we got to see all the fans. But it’s tiring simply because… well… it’s been a long day away from home. And you.”

As Kun recites what happened at the fanmeet to you, you help him relax by pressing kisses over his face, hands kneading his tired muscles subtlety. When he’s finally done, his eyelids are threatening to flutter close and that’s when you press a kiss to his lips before whispering against them: “Well done today Kun, rest now love.” Your sweet lover complies as he nestles his face into your neck and you rest your cheek lightly against his hair, pulling him closer as both of you drift into dreamland in each other’s arms. He feels safe in your embrace, and you make a silent promise to protect this sweet angel for the rest of your life.

---

Ten. Kisses with Ten are passionate and sensual.

They start in the most unexpected moments. Your body picks up on the shuffling beside you, slowly rousing you from the sleepy haze of sleep. Hands rubbing your eyes lazily, you turn to face the source of movement, expecting to meet your lover’s face. Except that expectation doesn’t correspond with reality and instead of his face, you’re met by the lenses of his camera instead. The shutter of his camera goes off before you can react, the soft click reaching your ears. You groan in response, shielding your face from his eyes as you roll over to the other side of the bed, burying your face into his pillow; still warm from his residual heat, the smell of his perfume reaching your olfactory senses. There is no way that you’re going to let Ten take photos of your face in the morning, it’s too ugly to be captured. You hear more shuffling come from behind you, before you track the sound of footsteps rounding the bed to reach your side. Settling himself in front of your face, Ten’s soft pleas reach your ear as he begs you to show your face.

“Come on kitten, just one more! You look so pretty in the morning; I just want to document it down to make the moment last forever!”

“No Ten, I do not look pretty in the morning. My hair is a mess, my eyes are puffy and my face in bloated. That’s hardly beautiful.”

“But it is to me…” You open an eye to give him a pointed look, and Ten is giving you his best pout, hoping to gain your favour.

“No.” You close your eyes and promptly go back to “sleep” but it is made impossible by what Ten does next.

“Come on… just one more…” Ten props himself up on his elbows to whisper into your ear, teeth softly biting onto your ear lobe to get you to relent. It feels good, so ridiculously good – but you won’t give in because you don’t want to give him the satisfaction of knowing the power he has over you – so – you bury your face deeper into his pillow, hoping that it will muffle the soft moan that just left your lips. Ten continues his ministrations – biting, sucking and licking – he’s so sure that you will relent eventually. But when you take too long to respond, he decides to take matters into his own hands. Climbing onto the bed and over your body, Ten straddles your hips, the movement righting your body so that you have no choice but to face him. The shock on your face is evident and Ten takes advantage of the moment to click the shutter once more, throwing his head back in laughter after he inspects the shot as you writhe in frustration beneath him.

“Li Yongqin!” You hardly use his Chinese name so when you do, Ten knows you mean business. He sets the camera down quickly on the bedstand before turning his attention back to you. He apologises sincerely, but it hardly sounds sincere when he’s also trying to stifle his laughter.

“Sorry, I’m sorry, you just look too cute love.”

Ten cups your face with his warm palms, squishing your cheeks slightly before he places a quick peck to your lips to appease you. But when he pulls back, you still don’t look happy – narrowed eyes looking right into his bright ones. Ten, however, remains unfazed – he knows just what to do to make your anger dissipate. The ends of your shirt – his shirt – had ridden up slightly just now when you writhed, and Ten starts working from there. He whispers apologies against the skin of your tummy, lips ghosting over the warm skin as he deeply inhales your intoxicating scent and presses lingering kisses against the soft skin, fingers softly gripping the sides of your waist. Ten moves further, and further up your body, his cute nose pushing the shirt higher, and higher. Your resolve crumbles with each kiss that he presses against your body, and you bite down harshly on your lips to stop your breathy whines; Ten will get too cocky if you let him know how well he’s pleasing you now. He stops when he reaches your ribcage, right below the bone that rests in the middle. Ten is still waiting for a response from you – you haven’t moved an inch since he started his little game, but he wants to get a sign from you, something to let him know that he’s been forgiven. Ten doesn’t know what else to do, so he drags his blunt nails down the side of your ribcage, marking you slightly but careful enough to not hurt. The harsh contact finally breaks your resolve, and you let out a moan at the new sensation. Ten giggles, happy that he finally got a response but his happiness is short-lived when you pull his face upwards towards yours, melding your lips onto his. It’s an intense French kiss, you plunge your tongue directly into his mouth, swiping over the walls of his mouth. Not one to lose, Ten fights back. Both of you battle for dominance, marking one another slightly. Ten continues to run his blunt nails down your body; the sides of your ribcage, the front of your stomach as you press curved crescents into the planes of his back. The need for air forces both of you apart and finally, Ten sees you smile for the first time that morning.

“Am I forgiven yet?”

“Only if you give me another kiss.”

Ten doesn’t need to be told twice before he jumps back into action, pressing kisses along every inch of your body. Even if you hadn’t asked, he would have still done it all the same.

---

Winwin. Kisses with Winwin are...shy.

You have to pay attention; else you'll miss it. The sensation goes as quickly as it comes. Most days, you see something flash past the periphery of your eye, feel something soft land on the apple of your cheeks and by the time you react to it, Sicheng is long gone from your personal space, and he's not even looking at you. His eyes are glued to the phone as you stare at him, but the red slowly tinging his ears and the bite on his bottom lip to suppress his smile gives him away. You know he feels the intensity of your stare when he buries his neck deeper into the collar of his jacket, but otherwise, he doesn't do anything else to acknowledge your new attention on him. He looks adorable, like a baby chick wrapped up in layers of blanket and you can't help the sudden surge of affection of that you have for him. Not that you don't love him on a daily basis – of course you do – every hour, every minute, every second – whether he's with or away from you. But today, just in this moment, you love him a tad bit more. Surging forward, you press an identical kiss to the apple of his cheeks and you watch with amusement as your stoic, cool prince loses his poker face; he's still got his lower lip tugged between his teeth but this time, you can see the obvious smile tugging at the corner of his lips, his smile getting wider and wider by the second. He's cute, he's so adorably cute. Moving forward again this time, you capture his face in both your hands, pressing a kiss to his forehead, before moving down to leave kisses along his eyes, the bridge of his nose, the tip of his nose, his philtrum and finally, finally, finally – his lips. You press a firm yet quick kiss to his lips, knowing he will combust if you do anything else. You pull back to admire your work with a soft smile on your face, watching as his face burns a shade redder as he struggles to meet your eye. You giggle at the shy boy in front of you – years of being together and he still can't get used to giving kisses or receiving kisses – how adorable. You let your guard down for a moment and boy, what a mistake. Sicheng has the roles reversed within seconds, your back now pinned between the worn leather of the couch and his chest. His lips are yours instantly, moving softly and tentatively against your own. He detaches his rosy lips from yours, only to whisper a very soft "I love you", the skin on your lips barely brushing each other’s. There is so much sincerity in those 3 simple words and you don't hesitate to reply with an equally soft "Love you too Sicheng"

It's alright if you have to be the one giving more kisses in this relationship – Sicheng might not be big with his actions but in these rare moments, you know he loves you just as much, and for that, you are grateful to have this sincere albeit shy boy to call yours.

---

Lucas. Kisses with Lucas are always messy.

Both of you never know how the kiss is going to go. He's got an elbow against the kitchen counter, resting his head on his knuckles as he watches you work around the kitchen, admiration for you softly glowing through his doe eyes. You decide to surprise him with a small peck on his lips, taking advantage of the fact that he's not fully awake yet. The poor boy shoots up too fast at the sudden soft contact, knocking his head on the cabinet right above his head – he's too tall for his own good. Your tinkling laughter echoes through the quiet apartment, and in a moment, Lucas is onto you, swinging you around. Albeit a little too harshly. The loud sound of the back of your head making contact with the same cabinet reaches his ears and then his huge hands are flying to cradle your head, hurried apologies spilling forth from his lips. You, on the other hand, still can't stop laughing at how silly this whole encounter is, shaking your head and telling him that it's alright, that it doesn't hurt at all. Hands on his wrist, you place a soft kiss to his palms and then he realises. Gosh. He's so terribly in love with you. He dives in for a kiss this time, wanting to make it proper. But still, he can never seem to get it right. Your teeth clash, and he doesn't know what to do with his hands. He can't decide if he wants to cup your face, hold your waist or press them against your hips. So, he lets them roam in a haphazard manner, a few fingers slipping under your loose shirt to press against your warm skin, the other gripping the supple flesh of your thigh. You don't really care if he can't get his kisses right for the rest of his life – and yours. That's what you love about him anyways – raw, eager and always just a tad bit clumsy.

---

Xiaojun. Kisses with Xiaojun are spontaneous.

There is no planning or build-up before it happens, it just happens. You look up from your laptop, eyes needing a break from the harsh blue light emitting from the screen and they focus on the person right in front of you – Xiaojun. You watch him for a short while, observing the way his perfectly shaped eyebrows furrow in concentration at the one thing he’s scribbling furiously away on his notebook for. His lips are soon pursed, making him look mildly angry although you know it’s more likely that he’s just slightly annoyed. Probably because he can’t get something right. But a second later, you see the corner of his lips lift up as he laughs at himself – or rather – at something that he’s written in his notebook. You wonder what’s gotten him so frustrated and amused at the same time, so you walk over in hopes of being slightly useful in the situation. You snuggle against his side, placing your chin on his shoulder as you press your lips to his sunken cheeks. The sudden contact draws his attention to you and he turns to face you, your lovely face right beside his, pink lips looking so kissable. Xiaojun doesn’t think twice before pressing his lips against yours, it just feels like the most natural thing to do in that moment – see, no planning required. You smile in appreciation when he pulls back slightly, chasing after him to press one back in return to his lips as well. You turn back to face his notebook before he can work in another kiss, leaving him to settle for one on your cheeks instead.

“What are you working on? Need help?”

“Babe, tell me what this looks like.”

Xiaojun hands you his notebook, his arms coming to wrap around your waist once his hands are free. Now, it’s his turn to place his chin on your shoulder, watching as your eyebrows furrow. The cogs in your mind work fast to decipher his drawing and yet, the best answer you can come up with isn’t one you think he will be pleased with.

“So… what do you think it looks like?” He mumbles against the skin of your cheek lazily, letting his sentence drawl on.

“You want me to be honest?”

“Yea.”

“It looks like a cemetery atop of a hill…” You feel Xiaojun pull back from your side in shock and you quickly drop the notebook onto your lap and turn to face your boyfriend, rushing to comfort him and hold onto him before he can pull away fully,

“I’m sorry love! I know that’s probably not the idea you had in mind but – ” You’re silenced by Xiaojun’s lips, his peck swallowing the last bits of your apology.

“Why are you apologising? You didn’t do anything wrong, it’s my drawing that’s atrocious. I pulled back because I was shocked that it was this atrocious.”

“It’s a good effort though, I can –” Again, silenced by his kiss.

“You don’t have to comfort me babe, I know I really don’t have a talent for drawing. But if I told you that I was actually trying to draw a city skyline for my upcoming shoot with Kun-ge, can you see it from the drawing?”

“Oh yea. Yea. Now that you mentioned it, I can!”

You tilt your head to the side as you bring the drawing closer to your face for inspection, fingers pointing out the various details in the drawing to yourself, including the two small figures of Kun and Xiaojun. Your head tilt exposes more of your cheek to Xiaojun, and again, he gives it another quick peck.

“How many more times do you intend to kiss me today, Jun?”

“Hmm… an infinite amount more?”

Your jaw drops at his statement, an incredulous expression on your face as your boyfriend scrunches his nose, eyes turning into crescents as he giggles, thin lips pulling back to reveal his cute little teeth. You slap his arm playfully, cheeks burning at the thought of more PDA in public – what if a member suddenly walks in?

“You’re just too adorable, it can’t be helped babe.”

“No Xiao Dejun, get away.” The words sound harsh, but there is no bite in your tone. He pecks your lips once again before he flashes you his sweetest smile, a decisive “No.” coming from him.

“Bye Jun~”

“Not letting you go so easily!” Before you can even move, Xiaojun has got his arms around your waist, leaning dangerously close to you to pepper more kisses against your face, your arms growing limp against his chest as you stop resisting your boyfriend.

You really don’t know how you ended up here, being locked in Xiaojun’s arms as he peppers more kisses to your face between giggles – it just happened because it felt like the most natural thing to do. Like how loving Xiaojun came naturally to you.

---

Hendery. Kisses with Hendery are... unpredictable.

He’s a complete softie in public, but at home, he’s going to be all over you. You truly never know what to expect – because they cover the whole range from cute to downright hot. In public, he’s shy – and you figure it’s just because it’s the start of your relationship. He mostly just holds your hands; in the cold winter, he especially likes stuffing your intertwined hands into his pockets. He gives them a small squeeze every now and then, just to let you know that he’s there. Kisses to the back of your hand are also a thing; he’ll just casually brings them to his lips, leave a quick kiss before putting them down again. This is alright for him; he thinks – nothing more than that in public. He might just collapse from embarrassment if anyone caught him doing anything more than that. After all, he’s a shy boy. But in private – it’s a completely different story. If both of you have a whole day to spare at home, his lips are never going to leave your skin at all.

In the morning, Hendery often likes taking your hands from under the pillow, holding them lightly in his hand before pressing kissing to all 10 of your fingertips. You’re usually awake by the time he’s pressing kisses against your knuckles – it’s a good way to start the day. Within the privacy of the 4 walls at home, Hendery gives you all the kisses he wants. A kiss to your forehead, temple, cheeks, lips and so many more places that you’ve lost count by the time noon rolls around. As the afternoon movie plays on the big screen, Hendery has you seated between his legs, exposing the entire column of your neck to him because of the messy bun that you’ve done your hair up in. His slow kisses start from the tip on your neck, lips tracing the knobs along your backbone, reaching as far as he can by craning his neck. When he can no longer reach any further, he moves either left or right, leaving kisses along your shoulder blades as he travels up to reach your shoulder. His kisses are distracting, very distracting – so you pat the back of his hand; one that’s currently wrapped around your hips to get him to stop. He does, but you can still feel his lips against your shoulder, feel his warm breath fan across your collarbones. These types of kisses make your head spin, leaving you tethering close to the edge of euphoria. But they’re not the worst yet – the worst ones are the intoxicating ones, the ones where his presence just floods your entire body, leaving your senses completely inhibited, your mind a mess of incoherent thoughts. The kinds you never see coming.

“Babe.”

“Hmm?” You look up from the book in your hand – only to find Hendery staring down at you, a silent flame burning in his eyes. He wants something from you, you’re just not sure what exactly it is.

“Can I kiss you?” You raise an eyebrow at his odd question – of course he can. He knows he can, so why is he asking?

“Yea.”

“Great.”

Hands on the sofa behind you to brace himself, Hendery lowers his face towards yours, tongue immediately darting past your lips and teeth, tongue doing a clean sweep on your mouth as he sucks on your lips. Oh. Now you know why he asked. Because it wasn’t the typical kind of kiss he usually gives. This one is completely different, running on pure adrenaline and feral instinct. Hendery doesn’t slow down at all, giving you no chance to dominate the kiss. His lips continue moving against yours firmly, leaving no inch untouched as he presses his body closer to yours. Your head is getting slightly dizzy, both from the fast pace of the kiss and lack of oxygen. Yet you cannot resist him, his presence already flooding your system too much. The inviting warmth of his body, his intoxicating scent, the crazy pleasure from his lips. Sliding your hands up his chest, your twist the straps of his tank top in your hands before pulling him down to the couch with you. Hendery hovers above you carefully as he settles himself between your legs, careful to not crush you with his weight. Yet, you yank him down further, not liking the empty feeling when he gets too far from you. Taking your eagerness as a sign to carry on, Hendery gets bolder, and moves his hips against yours. You whine into the kiss at the new sensation and Hendery immediately pulls away, worried that he had hurt you, the emptiness hitting you like a blast of cold air.

“Hendery… what’s wrong?”

“I hurt you, didn’t I?” You then register the shock in his wide doe eyes and you throw your head back in laughter, having to wipe tears from the corners of your eyes from the intense laugh.

“No… that was… I was… I was just shocked at the sudden contact. But don’t worry, it didn’t hurt.”

“Phew.” His entire body sags as he breathes out a sigh of relief, gently connecting your forehead together. Your breaths mix together in silence for a short while, giving one another time to come down from the previous high. You break the silence first.

“So… are you going to finish what you started?”

“Oh, eager, aren’t we?” He opens his eyes to raise an eyebrow at you, clearly teasing you.

“If I say yes?”

“Then your wish in my command.” You catch a glimpse of the smirk lifting the corners of his lips before he crashes his lips into yours again, leaving you completely at his mercy.

Hendery is never predictable – he can be sweet at times, like the sweetest candy or hot at times, like the blazing fire that threatens to burn if you get too close. But you don’t mind – the unpredictability makes life exciting, after all. Kind of like now.

---

Yangyang. Kisses with Yangyang are silly and goofy.

You never know when they're coming, or where they'll land. They usually come with some snide remark on the side – something like – "Gosh your hair stinks today. Someone didn't wash" as he walks past you in the kitchen to place a kiss on your temple that's covered by your hair, only to do a double take and take the chance to tease. Cues you giving him the stink eye as he grins at you innocently; you know your hair doesn't smell bad, you washed just an hour before he got up.

On other days, his kisses usually come in surprise attacks. You're reading with your legs laid across his lap, both sitting on opposite ends on the couch. Taking advantage of the fact that you're too engrossed in your book to notice him, Yangyang launches himself at you and decides to blow air against your clothed stomach - the kind where he places his lips against your skin before blowing air through his lips – causing you to burst into fits of laughter at the ticklish feeling. Think of it as blowing a kiss. He moves further up to blow a kiss against your neck, eliciting another fit of laughter from you. He continues doing it without ceasing; he'll blow a kiss, watch you with adoration as your features scrunch up and laughter leaves your lips but just before you calm down fully, he blows another one, causing the entire cycle to repeat again. Yangyang could do this all day if he had all the time in world; he'll never admit it but your laughter is his favourite sound in the whole wide world. He loves it more than anything else in the world. More than the sound of the bass in his favourite songs. More than the sound of revving engines that he grew up loving. The playful fights usually end when you finally turn to meet his eyes, eyelids softly drooping as you look at him with love. Hands reaching up to cup his jaw, you crane your neck up to press a kiss against his lips. It was meant to be sweet, but as always, leave it to Yangyang to ruin the mood.

"Oh, someone's eager for my lips. Just now wasn't enough for you?" Your eyes would widen as you glare at him, immediately releasing his face to smack his shoulders harshly. His jaw would drop in shock, feeling incredulous at your sudden attack.

"Oh honey, it's on." Diving for your jaw, he blows another kiss there just to rile you up, knowing that you're ticklish there as well. You land another smack on his wide back as you unsuccessfully try to stifle your laughter, not wanting to lose to him. You feel him smile against your jaw, and now you've truly lost it, opening your mouth wide to let laughter spill forth again. You may never get a proper kiss from Yangyang for the rest of your life but it's alright – at least he makes you happy – and maybe that's all that matters.

205 notes · View notes

fullsunalicia · 4 years

Note

ohh so can i request sorting wayv into big and little spoons like you did with dream and 127? please and thx ♡

of course you can! thank you for the request, my love! 💛

Qian Kun

it’s literally so hard with him HDBDHSH i cant say anything definitely, so i’ll just say both !!

being a little spoon offers so much comfort with one action. it has him HOOKED. for example, after a long day of managing the six loudest and most energetic boys on the planet, he loves just falling into your arms and have you wrap yourself around him like a human teddybear 🥺 it’s the best

i must say that he likes being a big spoon more, though. it just gives him that sense of security he craves and he likes knowing you below his touch. overprotective momma bear kun

Chittaphon Leechaiyapornkul

doesn’t care at all babey !! he just wants to be: [held]

there are days where he expects you to let him baby you and wrap both arms so tightly around you you can’t breathe. it’s just an instinct. he loves draping himself over you and then smelling his cologne on you, the biggest ego boost there is

won’t say no to being the little spoon either!! he gets especially soft when you guys watch movies and he leans his head back on your chest and you kiss the crown of his head. mans straight up melts

Dong Sicheng

can be found here!

Wong Yukhei

you may think you are the big spoon but the second you guys fall asleep, yukhei moves to cover you with his body. lmaoooo he’s physically unable to be anything else than a big spoon

it’s a matter of comfort!! his heart skips a beat when you spoon him, but it feels so much better to hug you instead. being able to hide his face in your hair?? feeling your heartbeat beneath his fingertips?? superior feeling

when you cuddle though, it’s a different story!!! let him sit on your lap this instant!! big boy wants to be HELD

Xiao Dejun

thinks he’s a big spoon when this babyboy is just a little spoon LMAO who are you fooling xiaojunnie

i’m not kidding - be the big spoon once and he’s gonna be spoiled rotten. he never wants to be the big spoon again. loves it when you pull him tightly against you and interlace your fingers ugh CUTE

if you manage to convince him to be the big spoon, he tangles your arms and legs and falls asleep with his face hidden in your shoulder 🥺🥺 I LOVE HIM

Wong Kunhang

forget about ever being the big spoon. firm big spoon and he would rather die than give that up LNDJRHDB

he dislikes it soooo much to not hold you at night omfg, kunhang NEEDS to have his arms looped around your waist or he’ll cry. big drama queen. rudely uses you as a teddybear, soothes it with a lot of kisses tho !!

you guys end up rolling around in bed once or twice because you fought over being the big spoon and then proceeded to crash to the ground whdhdhs THE CHAOS IN THIS BEDROOM

Liu Yangyang

quite frankly doesn’t give a damn as long as you shower him with love tbh. get in bed already he’s cold!!

you guys usually end up falling asleep with him as the big spoon, though. his schedule often reaches deep into the night, so when he comes back home, you’re already asleep. slips in and wraps all his limbs around you. sleepy kisses !!! i’m in love

when he’s the little spoon, he’ll pull your hands to his face and give them sooo many kisses!! it’s a little tradition. instead of counting sheeps, he counts kisses. falls asleep with your fingers interlocked 🥺

160 notes · View notes

fullsunalicia · 4 years

Note

hi can i request a lil something where wayv or the dreamies studies with their s/o for a test? having exam season rn and lacking the willpower to study so yea 🥴 thank you so much!! 🥰

hey bubs!! i feel you so much omg. i can’t wait for school to be over and finally be on summer break! i chose wayv for this, i hope that’s okay! thank you for the request! 💞 good luck with your exams!!

Qian Kun

studying with kun is so.... productive

like,,,, he doesn’t allow any joking around?? literally uses a reward system with you so you stop procastinating and doesn’t allow any private talks until you stopped studying ehdhdh you may aswell be studying with your teacher

but !! his reward system is the best. every answer u get right is one free kiss 🥺🥺 also makes sure that you stay hydrated and cooks you food while you’re studying!! where can i find a qian kun

Chittaphon Leechaiyapornkul

there’s only two possible outcomes to this. you either get shit done or you’ll literally abandon all your work max 5 mins in HDHHDDBDB

promises to help you but then doesn’t know anything and suggests making out instead of studying. sir ........ i have an algebra test tomorrow . PRIORITIES.

if it goes well though, studying with him can be pretty fun, actually !! he uses little jokes that you use to memorize certain grammar rules for example !! oh yeah this is big brain time

Dong Sicheng

sicheng is as confused as you are. your page is still empty, an hour has passed, and you’re both none the wiser. congrats !!

honestly sicheng is so intelligent but i’d think he’d be the type of student who has no idea how to study with others??? because he learns by writing down and memorizing???????? relatable sicheng

will take care of you tho!!! gives u lots of kisses and encouragement, and he still tries his best to help with anything he can !!

Wong Yukhei

ma’am... sweetheart........... DO YOU REALLY THINK YOU CAN STUDY IN A ROOM WHERE WONG YUKHEI RESIDES??? NOOOOO this mf needs to have all your attention: [all the time]

keeps crawling on your lap even though you’ve told him thousand of times now that he’s a big lanky baby and he’s going to crush you. mans just wants to be held and you know what ? Me Too.

if he’s not distracting you, this sweet and gentle giant is going to fall asleep on you. it’s finally quiet enough for you to actually study, but you’re pretty sure your legs are dying from the lack of blood circulation

Xiao Dejun

i ...... i’m gonna say something so weird and i absolutely cannot explain this but this man has ✨ i n t e l l i g e n t v i b e s ✨ I CANT TELL YOU WHY IT’S JUST A MOOD

he’s the best and worst teacher at the same time. explains everything to you very patiently and i SWEAR you will understand everything and anything if he explains it !! but: gets so easily distracted it’s INSANE

one second he’s explaining math to you and the next he throws your flashcards aside to tackle & cuddle you

Wong Kunhang

listen this man is an enigma i can’t tell you anything for sure. like,,, yes he is ten’s chinese teacher but also ? the amount of energy this man possesses ?????? does he ever ???????? stop and breathe ???????????????

you have to use the reward system on HIM !! like if he explains u how tf to calculate this, you promise you’re gonna kiss him and it helps for like half an hour until he’s bored and decides he’s in the mood for sexy times

you definitely flunked that test but atleast the wong kunghang made out with you 😔✊

Liu Yangyang

my sweet babyboy. my darling prince. love of my life. PLEASE STOP JUMPING UP AND DOWN AND START HELPING US WE’RE GONNA F A I L

needs some convincing to help you study because :////// the things he could do instead... like eat a pizza or sth.... but once he’s convinced, things turn pretty serious/productive.

explains very calmly and never once belittles you, even if you don’t understand it after even the fifth time. kisses you as encouragement 🥺🥺 this man isnt called the most intelligent for nothing, he’s gonna make you ace that test

71 notes · View notes

kunbunn · 4 years

Text

Amortentia (crack ver.)

Kunten

Original ver.

A/n: my brain told me to do this at like, 2:30 in the morning

====

Kun placed a plate of cookies at the table. He smiled at her and pointed at the cookies.

"Have some. I went through the kitchen to see if I can get you any snacks. I only found cookies available." His smile growing bigger, his pearly white teeth now showing.

"EYYYOOOO" A sudden scream startled the two and the whole library scowled at their table.

"Ten what the hell-" the said Slytherin shushed Kun. "I haven't seen you guys for weeks" He pouts at the two. Y/n giggles at the two as they both banter back and forth while others still eye sharp daggers at them.

Ten's hand slowly slides in the table to reach for the cookies while he sat on the table, he grabs one of the sweet treats and hastily munches the cookies before y/n could notice him.

"Hey! Those are mine!" She looks up at Ten from her book and gives him a frown.

"Come on learn to share for once." He rolled his eyes and proceeds to chew more in the cookie in his hands. "Right, Kun?"

Kun stays silent and gawks at Ten in horror but quickly flashes an anxious smile at them both. "Haha yeah..." he smiled said, still frightened in his mind.

"Damn Kun have I ever told you how hot you are?" Ten practically exclaimed again but was quickly interrupted when Kun covered his mouth. "What?" Y/n looks up from her book again and stares at Ten, now confused.

"I said Kun is really hot-" He voiced out, still muffled by Kun’s hand. He clasped Kun's wrist and tugged said man's hand away from his mouth. "Kinky." He continued and stared at Kun.

Kun was horrified at say at least while y/n just eye both of them, more unsettled than ever. Ten snickered and leaned in to smooch Kun on the cheeks before pulling away to stand up and walk towards the library exit.

"See me later in the kitchen!" Ten blows a kiss from afar and winks at Kun before turning away to leave the library.

"The hell was that???" Y/n now looks at Kun, stunned and confused for her partner.

"Uhh..."

14 notes · View notes

jungwooisms · 2 years

Text

hwarang | l.donghyuck

ACT II

pairing: lee donghyuck x female!reader genre: historical au, fluff, angst, supernatural members: moon taeil, lee taeyong, nakamoto yuta, qian kun, li yongqin (ten), jeong jaehyun, dong sicheng (winwin), wong yukhei (lucas), xiao dejun (xiaojun), na jaemin, lee jeno, osaki shotaro, jeong sungchan warnings: crass humor and language, blood, violence, mentions of suicide, alcohol, possessiveness, minor character death, war, some historical inaccuracies for the sake of plot progression word count: 24.8k it is important to read the prologue and act i first to understand the context of this! i can’t link it here but it’s on my masterlist!

ACT II – Ghosts of the Past

June 29th, 665 – The Northwestern Pass, Kingdom of Silla The wind whispers past your cheeks, its song whistling through the pines in the summer night air. Thick fog covers the mountain path, blanketing the rows of trees in front of you. The fresh scent of dew cupped on the leaves hits your nose immediately. The roads to Ungjin are still plagued with the remnants of the felled Baekje forces and pushing Silla men.

For Donghyuck this is both enemy and allied territory. In order to avoid being detected and engaging in unnecessary violence, you had no choice but to abandon your horse some weeks back and travel down a minor off-trail path. Your mind has been elsewhere, focusing on the hope that the Hwarang had arrived in Ungjin safely. Visions plague you, some in which several members hadn’t survived the onslaught at Seorabeol, and had been left to suffer alone on the battlefield as their life fades atop the cinders.

Instead of heading straight for Goguryeo territory, Donghyuck and you settled on arriving to Ungjin first to reunite you with the members of the Hwarang.

Your arms and legs are scraped by the scattering of branches sticking into the path, your eyes struggling to see through the opaque dark,

“Calm down for a moment,” Donghyuck sighs out loftily, “At this pace, you’re only going to overexert yourself well before we reach an inn.”

“I appreciate your concern,” you begin, swatting away a few gnats flying in your field of vision, “If we want to get to Ungjin as soon as possible, then we need to be quick about it.”

“Well, it isn’t going to happen simply because you will it,” his voice holds a calm resolve, “Tonight, we rest here.”

“But—!” You begin.

“Munmu has already foolishly aligned himself with the Tang.” His lips turn downwards into a frown, “It will be some time before they are prepared to stage another large-scale battle. Without a war to fight, Jinsang will have no master to give his bone, stifling his plans momentarily. So,” he looks to you, his eyes glinting in the moonlight, “quit your incessant rushing. Nothing you do now will be of any consequence later.”

He’s right. You hate to admit it but he’s right. Your feet are swollen, throbbing to the point that if you might take another step, you may topple over. You’d been aggressively jaunting through the rough, dimly-lit terrain for who knows how long.

“As luck would have it, I believe there’s an abandoned home over there. Why don’t we look inside?” He says, not asking, really. His feet carry him forward to a black mass of a building that you had only just been able to make out the outline of until you near it.

Its dilapidated exterior doesn’t bolster much to its structural integrity, but you nonetheless follow Donghyuck’s lead.

The house itself is very modest in size. A fine film of dust coats nearly every inch of it, giving you the notion that it had been vacated some time ago.

“Is it really okay for us to stay in someone’s house?” You ask tentatively as you step across the floorboards.

“Hm,” he shrugs, noting the worn interior, “I would rather call this a hut than a house. It’s austere, isn’t it? But it’s obvious that no one lives here, so surely the former occupants won’t mind.”

Although the thought of intruding on someone’s home unsettles you, you do need somewhere to rest. You can’t run the risk of dying or being caught before finding the whereabouts of your father and brother.

Donghyuck finds a room with some dingy bedding arrangements, so at least you won’t be sleeping on the floor. His eyes dart around the room before he steps toward a sunken hearth, lowering himself to take a pinch of soot between his fingers.

Being alone with him in this derelict house is nerve-wracking. Without anything to contribute to the moment, you watch him examine the fireplace in silence.

His eyes thin as he hums to himself. After a moment, he reaches his hand into his pockets, taking pieces of flint from inside of it to try and ignite a flame.

“Donghyuck?” You call out, “If you’re trying to start a fire, I can do it.”

“Just be quiet and sit back,” he says, intent on his work, “This will warm us soon enough.”

“But isn’t building a fire more difficult than that?” Back when you’d lived with the Hwarang, or even with your father, it was rare that you’d need to build a fire from scratch. More often than not, you could rely on the hospitality of neighbors to provide materials when they were unavailable.

“Yes,” he nods, “it can be quite difficult. But only a human would shy away from difficulty. It’s only in their nature.” Donghyuck holds each piece of flint in his hands, clapping them together in a swift motion to produce sparks. Once more, he reaches into his pocket, pulling out a piece of parchment to use as kindling over the small, sunken fireplace, then continuing to clap the flint.

After a few more seconds, the sparks turn to embers over the parchment. He blows air into the flame, creating a fire where one hasn’t been seen for ages.

Although he’d been the one to suggest staying in this house, he doesn’t look tired in the slightest. Perhaps, you wonder, if he’d only suggested it for your sake….

“Sit closer to the fire,” he says quietly, “Even if it’s summer, it can get quite cold at night.”

You nod, moving over to sit by him near the flames. Your hands extend, hovering over the embers licking up into the air.

A shadow twists and flicks upon his face as he gazes quietly at the hearth. You realize now that there isn’t much you know about him, let alone the history of his people or where he comes from. To you, they’re simply Demons who are ideologically and politically opposed to the Hwarang. And that, as a Demon woman, you’re their target.

This is the extent of your knowledge, as his people have enshrouded themselves in secrecy for generations, so much so that even you hadn’t known you were a Demon. All you know is that Lee Donghyuck, Xiao Dejun and Dong Sicheng are all fierce, cunning warriors. Everything else is a complete enigma to you.

“…Donghyuck? Would you mind sharing some stories with me about our people? About the Demons?”

His eyebrows raise as he glances to you, “Where did this come from?”

“If what you, Sooyoung, my father and my brother all said is true… Then I, too, am part of the Demon clan, right?” You shift, “But I can’t help but feel so disconnected from it all. I have no idea where Demons came from, how long they’ve been around, or what they even are… That’s why I want to know more about myself, and about all of you, too.”

You’re staring into his face now, watching his scarlet eyes fixate on the fireplace scornfully.

For a moment, he’s silent, until he begrudgingly turns his face to your direction.

“I’m not a historian. I don’t know how the Demons came to be, nor when they decided to settle on this land. But one thing I know for sure is… The cycle of strife and bloodshed between Demons and humans is a tale as old as this world itself.” He lets out a huff of air, mulling over his next words, “We Demons will never lose to a human if it’s a one-on-one battle. But, what humans have, that we do not, is the gift of numbers. A tiger may be the toughest hunter in the forest but there is a limit to how much prey it can hunt. Human greed, however, has no limit,” an old log within the fireplace snaps, releasing a burst of light spiraling towards the hole in the ceiling, “Thus, Demons decided to exile themselves as a measure against their destructive forces.”

Your brow furrows as he speaks, waiting patiently for him to continue.

“Some Demons chose to resist the stain of inferiority encroaching upon our lands. Their resistance proved futile. In the end, the humans exterminated them without remorse.”

“If you were ever told the legends about ‘Demons’ in the past…” You recall the stories from your childhood.

“This is where their legend bears its origin. Some of them—those that survived, at least—are still alive, living in the shadows all across this country.”

How many Demon clans have gone into hiding…? How have they coped with their fate?

Listening to him speak of his people’s history so coldly raises so many questions.

“You mentioned something about how many of the Demon clans went into isolation to disappear for human society…” You begin, “What compelled you to align yourself with Baekje-Goguryeo and oppose Silla?” It’s peculiar that he’s violating his self-imposed exile when the rest of your kind is in hiding. Re-entering human society as a force of reckoning in the middle of a heavily politicized conflict rings out as especially strange to you.

He’s expressionless, thinning his eyes slightly in reaction to your question.

“There is nowhere left to hide for us. Nowhere left to run. Nowhere untainted by the curse of humanity.”

“…What?”

“The average human knows nothing of our existence. Unlike the leaders or cultural elites, who have been well-acquainted with out people for ages… Seven centuries ago, some lords of the Samhan approached our people, successfully currying favor with those willing to share their Demon powers with mankind… One such example was your clan.”

Your lips part in surprise, unable to form a coherent exclamation of surprise.

“During the Battle of Giryeong, it was your ancestors who aided the Mahan confederacy to push back the Han.”

The Battle of Giryeong was a momentous one, still spoken about today. Had the Samhan not pushed back Han forces, the three Kingdoms now would never have taken root…. To think that your ancestors had such a hand in influencing the battle’s outcome astounds you.

“The Lee and Xiao clans realized the threat posed by the Samhan and allied with the Han. Our current allegiance with Goguryeo stems from the fall of the Han, simply a continuation of our previous arrangement. Sicheng’s clan, on the other hand, appears to be serving the remaining Baekje loyalists and their former Yamato allies with intentions that are unknown to me.”

He hums, staring at the flames once more, “However, this shall be the last time our people involve ourselves with the paltry concerns of human conflict. Goguryeo is no longer dependent on our aid, either… Their newfound numbers of Furies will most certainly absolve us of our positions.”

Your mind goes to the thought of the Hwarang, and your gaze falls to the floor. The flame continues to crackle, punctuating the silence between the two of you.

“We start early tomorrow morning. Perhaps it would be better for you to rest now.” He states, fixing his posture.

In all honesty, you want to continue talking with him a bit longer, but you know of what’s to come tomorrow. There’s still so much of the mountainous range that you have left to trudge through, so you need every minute of rest that you can get.

“You’re right,” you nod, moving to your feet. It isn’t until you walk to the bedding do you see how moldy and musty it is. “Donghyuck… do you really expect me to sleep here?”

“Excuse me?” He asks, “How many other rooms do you see?”

As you listen carefully for any sound outside the house, you realize there’s nothing. Not a single bird or insect. Seemingly, the only life in the nearest mile is Donghyuck and you. That’s right; just the two of you, alone…

“What’s wrong?” Donghyuck’s voice pulls you from your thoughts, “Haven’t you crawled off to sleep yet?”

Although both of you are Demons, and in spite of how you’re dressed, the fact remains that the two of you are sleeping under the same room like it’s nothing. Not wanting to tip him off suspiciously about your behavior… Just in case, you discreetly pull the bedding from beside his bed towards the far corner next to the hearth. No matter how sly you try to be, he catches onto it immediately, smirking mockingly at you.

“I noticed how uncomfortable your eyes had been shifting, but now, it all makes sense.” He chuckles.

“Do you have a problem with that?” You question, “I am a woman, I have to be more safe than sorry.”

Donghyuck snickers lightly at you, his eyes thinning as they dart toward your direction. He speaks sharply, just above a whisper, “Do you think I’d make a move on you?”

“Of course not!” Your face is hot, and not because of the fire.

“I’m messing with you,” he shakes his head, “You think I’m some sort of ill-mannered creep, don’t you? Demons hold tradition and decorum to a high standard. I won’t lay a finger on you until our marriage is finalized.”

“Marr—I have no intention on marry—”

“Forget it,” he interrupts, “Just get some sleep. Tomorrow will be even more grueling. It would be in your best interest to rest.” Donghyuck spits his words out at you harshly, but you know his intentions are kind. Nevertheless, you slip tentatively into the damp, mildewy bedding.

Although, it hasn’t gone without saying that you’re still skeptical of him. But for now, you have to trust that he won’t lie or take advantage of you while you’re under his watch. More than that, it’s far more pertinent that you should worry about your father and Ahro’s whereabouts. The thought of your father’s new Furies overwhelming the Hwarang with their savage hunger is terrifying. You need to do whatever it takes to stop them.

Your eyes shut uneasily, falling asleep as the fire crackles hauntingly behind you.

June 30th, 665 – The Northwestern Pass, Kingdom of Silla As you awake, you feel as if you cannot move. Every inch of your body aches, and it feels as though you’d only just closed your eyes to go to sleep. Turning, you see Donghyuck sitting where he’d been the night prior, giving you the oddest sense of time dilation.

Sunlight refracts through the window, illuminating the dust flitting through the air. A sparrow chirps brightly outside… It truly is morning.

“Good morning…” You say tentatively as you pull yourself from bed.

“So, you are awake…” Donghyuck nods, “As soon as you’re ready, we’ll leave.”

Although it feels as if you haven’t slept at all, at the very least you’d been able to recuperate from the previous day, just in time for a physically-demanding trek.

“Donghyuck?” You ask as you begin to gather the few belongings you’d brought with you, “Did you stay up the whole night?”

“Well, not the whole night…” Or so he claims, but you have another idea. It was likely he observed the fire until sunrise, stoking it quietly in anticipation of morning.

“Thank you.”

“For what? I don’t recall doing anything to deserve your gratitude,” he says as he pushes himself from the floor. “Just hurry up and get ready, you want to find Jinsang as soon as possible, right?” Donghyuck sneers as he speaks, swiftly exiting the room as he finishes speaking.

Your initial impression of him had been a curt, egotistical man who intimidated and murdered his foes without remorse but… Perhaps there’s a bit more to them than you’d realized- maybe, deep down, he has a soft heart.

Ever since you’d been separated from the Hwarang, moments like these turned out to be far and few in-between. But you find your lips curling into a soft smile ever so slightly, and your chest feels a bit warm.

Donghyuck and you traverse the mountain path, walking through the dense rows of trees stretching as far as the eye can see, at long last, you reach a milestone, the Ungwon pass at Cheonhwangbong, the tallest peak on this range. It’s a positive sign that Ungjin isn’t too far away. Yet, just as you’re about to pass by a Silla security checkpoint stationed along the path by a nearby village, a voice calls out to you.

“Hey!”

Surprised, the two of you turn and greet a familiar face.

“Dejun!” You shout out, surprised and confused all the same, “What are you doing here?”

“I am en route to deliver a confidential letter on behalf of Goguryeo to a certain… other ally.” He says quickly, “What a coincidence to run into the two of you on my way there…”

“You would do best to ignore their orders,” Donghyuck says, “Consider the current balance of power. They no longer need us to serve as couriers to help their cause.”

“I had a feeling you’d have a snarky remark,” Dejun sighs, “Yet, I am here of my own volition. I figured there to be no need to cast Goguryeo aside just yet.”

“Suit yourself, fool,” Donghyuck murmurs.

“Well, the two of you have made excellent time to Ungjin but…” His brow furrows, “Just how do you plan on passing through the check over there?”

“Ah, well… Oh.” You begin. Donghyuck had taken the lead so decisively that you had never stopped to think there would be an issue. You glance at him worryingly, but he seems unfazed, answering Dejun with a deadpan delivery.

“I have a pass. It should work, no problem.”

“I hate to be presumptive but, things have changed quite a bit since when we were given those passes.” Dejun responds, “Since those passes are valid under the condition Goguryeo hasn’t become an opposition to Silla. I am certain that, if you present your pass, they will stop you to verify your identities. And while she may be okay… You… Hm.”

“Enough of your riddles. Why don’t you just say whatever it is that you’re getting at?”

“I recommend that the two of you find another path,” Dejun says curtly, “Perhaps something more remote, to sneak into Ungjin.”

Donghyuck leers at Dejun irritably, visibly annoyed by his suggestion. “’Another path’? Are you seriously expecting the two of us to discover a more suitable path to enter Ungjin on this mountain?”

“Hey, I’m just trying to give you some advice. Wouldn’t want there to be any trouble for you.”

“In case you weren’t aware, Silla won their battle, I doubt there will be issues for those trying to ‘flee’ back home.”

Dejun’s arms cross, “You underestimate the humans. Just because they won, doesn’t mean they aren’t willing to make points about those who dare threaten their Kingdom. They aren’t pushovers and will not be so understanding to your reasoning.”

“Damn you,” Donghyuck’s voice lowers, “Where do you get the gall to speak to me so audaciously?!” He’s fuming, and his voice only becomes louder with each smug refutation from Dejun.

If they continue to bicker publicly, then the soldiers stationed nearby will surely notice. You need to find a way to calm him— “If the two of us have an issue entering the city, then it may arouse the suspicion of both my father and brother to our plans… Although the trip may take a bit longer, we should probably look for another route.”

Donghyuck’s lips purse momentarily, carefully thinking over what you’d said. “You make a good point. We wouldn’t want to raise either of their suspicions.” He straightens himself, “Vey well. If you feel up to the challenge, then finding another way won’t be too difficult. I don’t care how taxing the trail is, though. You’d better not whine at all, got it?”

“Yes,” you nod, “I understand.”

“Well,” Dejun speaks up, “I will be on my way. Do be careful.” Without another word, he spins on his heels and vanishes along the thick forest’s path behind you.

Taking a moment before setting off, you look to the sky above, watching a few birds circle overhead before turning to Donghyuck and nodding. The two of you walk away from the checkpoint, towards an uphill trail that is far from the well-trodden path.

“Already out of breath, are you?” He muses, “I told you this would be too much for you to handle.”

“No,” you vehemently shake your head, “I’m fine.” The steep inclines around the area are dotted with wide, thick boulders, which makes your grueling hike all the more laborious. The rocky grit underfoot isn’t much better when—

You feel yourself falling, traction lost underfoot as you nearly tumble off the side of a cliff into the valley when a hand grabs ahold of yours. It’s hard to shake off your horror upon seeing Donghyuck standing at the edge of the cliff as you hold onto his sleeve for dear life.

“Are you okay?” He asks simply, pulling you back up to steady yourself on the trail.

You’re silent for a moment, steeling your nerves from your near-death experience. The thought of him rescuing you once more stands at odds with your initial impression of him.

“Why aren’t you answering?” He looks you up and down, peering at you from every front facing angle, “Are you injured?”

“No… no, I’m fine.” You say hurriedly, “Thank you.”

“Hmm…” He says, turning on his heels, “Let’s go.” Donghyuck then begins to trudge through the woods, keeping your hand tightly clasped in his

“Uh, Donghyuck?” You query, trying your best to keep your steps in line with his, “What are you doing?”

“What do you mean?”

“Um, you’re still… Holding my hand…” As you say this, he forcibly yanks your hand as he marches forward.

“You’ve already proven a danger to yourself up here,” He notes casually, “Stick close to me, okay?”

“Okay,” you nod, slightly embarrassed at his statement, but you do as he says and weave your fingers into his. His grasp is surprisingly warm and comforting, despite his grip being firm, you almost forget that they belong to someone who can easily kill you at any given moment.

Suddenly, you remember the question that you’d wanted to ask him earlier and tug at him slightly, “Were you trying to pass through the checkpoint earlier for my sake?”

Initially, he has no response, instead just choosing to glare at you from the corner of his eye, “Female Demons are different than male Demons. Although your wounds regenerate, your stamina is only a bit higher than any normal human’s would be. It’s their resolve that’s their strength.” His hand raises to move a branch from his path before he speaks again, “The female Demons are often left behind in our villages to watch over the elderly and young while the males who ensure their survival.”

So… The natural instinct for male Demons is to guard the well-being and safety of their women. Donghyuck rarely minces his words, but his comment offers you a unique insight that explains so much of his behavior. In a way, it reminds you of the Hwarang’s imperative to keep you safe.

“This journey will be over soon enough,” he murmurs, “Be patient and keep holding my hand.”

Prior to this, you don’t think anyone could have convinced you that you’d be willingly crossing into Ungjin hand-in-hand with Donghyuck, yet, as soon as you get to the other side of the range, you’ll arrive. Are the stories true? Would your father be waiting in the underbelly of Ungjin, trying to orchestrate a war with his army of Furies? You anxiously await the future, worrying yourself about whether or not you can stop him in time.

August 1st, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla By the end of your brutal hike though the unforgiving mountain ridge, you arrive in Ungjin safely, although it feels as if your feet are ready to fall off. It’s a stroke of good luck that neither your father or Ahro heard of your travels.

Your first order of business is reuniting with the Hwarang after weeks and weeks of separation. And so, you set off in search of their headquarters, but… The building is vacant, as all of the soldiers had seemingly embarked on a campaign for their next battle.

“The Hwarang are heading to Hanseong?” Donghyuck questions as you reunite with him at the inn you’re residing at.

“Yes,” you nod, “or at least that’s what Doctor Namekawa wrote me.” They had been tasked with guarding the territory around the city, so they mobilized their troops and marched north immediately after receiving their orders.

“How unbelievably foolish of them…” He sighs, “Their lives spared in Seorabeol, and now they’re just as eager to throw them away.”

“What?” You question, “They’re not being foolish.”

“Do tell me, then, how else should they be described?” He asks, leaning against a wooden support beam outside of the entrance, “They intend to stake out Goguryeo territory when Silla’s main army is still flushing out Goguryeo and Baekje soldiers in their own? They aren’t there to take the city, merely die as they wait for Munmu to send his men in.”

Your brow furrows, is Donghyuck actually showing concern over the well-being of the Hwarang?

“I’m in no position to judge whether or not they’re making a wise choice, but… I don’t think they’re the type of people to get hung up on the likelihoods of winning and losing.” In your experience, the Hwarang warriors are more interested in never having to compromise on their strict set of standards. It’s a lifestyle that lats beyond your scope of understanding since you aren’t actually a warrior, “All of them adhere to O Gye foremost, and this is an example. Of that, I am certain.”

He raises an eyebrow irritably to your suggestion. Just looking at him makes your stomach churn nervously, and contemplate how odd it feels to interact with someone so unapologetically cold.

“Adhere to O Gye, their principles, huh?” He taunts, “Open your eyes. They rely on instincts more than logic. What makes them any different to a wounded beast lashing out at those who maimed them?”

“Beasts?” He dismisses them to a degree that you can only describe as willful ignorance. You’d never met someone so incapable of empathy. It escapes you how he can mistake their sense of conviction as a desperate show of self-defense. However, as much as you want to argue, you chose not to say anything further.

Just as much as he’s been basing his remarks on assumptions, you realize you may as well be committing the same sin. In essence, there isn’t much of a point to arguing how other people decide to live their life.

“Forget about the Hwarang,” he sighs angrily, “I couldn’t care less at the moment. Have you been able to ascertain the whereabouts of Jinsang and Ahro?”

“Unfortunately, no,” you shake your head. You’d worded as hard as you could to get concrete details from Namekawa as well as some of your father’s old colleagues in the area yet they’d all come to dead ends.

“If they are as adamant as they claim about going through with this, then the potential war will be chaos.”

Feeding your father’s army of Furies will require a gratuitous amount of blood, which could cost the city—Silla and even Goguryeo— thousands of lives. You need to find a way to stop your father before there’s any chance of putting innocent citizens at risk.

As you embrace this resolve, Donghyuck speaks unexpectedly, “Whatever… I will see to it that both of them are removed, as well as their army of fakes. Why don’t you consider staying with the Namekawa man you spoke of earlier? Or, even stay at the Hwarang’s headquarters?”

“…What do you mean?” His question blindsides you and begs clarification. “I can deal with my father and brother myself—”

“My agreement with the Park Clan’s Princess was that I would escort you west. Nothing more, nothing less.” He states abruptly, “The deal never included a guarantee to dispose of your father or your brother with you.”

“But the entire reason we came to Ungjin was to stop them…”

“How delusional can you be if you think they will entertain any of your asinine opinions? If they’re even in this city, that is.” He says, raising a good point. Nothing you’d said upon encountering them last had gotten through to them, nor had your leads within Ungjin gotten you anywhere.

So, you ask him a question, “Do you honestly plan on killing them both?”

You may as well have been asking a ghost as your question hovers awkwardly without an answer. His silence is telling. Refusing to look you in the eye, he chooses instead to stare blankly at a passerby.

“It’s only a matter of time until they expand their army of fakes. Do not go near them. To them, you are nothing more than a bothersome fly. Got it?” He speaks in a hushed tone before, without another word, vanishing into the crowd of people bustling in Ungjin’s streets.

For all intents and purposes, your arrangement is over. This isn’t an issue, per say, but what are you to do at this point? To prevent the spread of Furies, Donghyuck has only one option. But you can’t let him do that, you need to stop him.

November 19th, 665 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla After gathering your bearings in Ungjin, you realize that your father isn’t there, nor is your brother. Your days remain listless until it occurs to you that your past may reveal some future questions. Your childhood home, which had been left unattended for however long, is the last place you can visit unannounced.

You find that the trek there is easier than that of the secret paths you’d had to take with Donghyuck. As a citizen of Silla, you had no issue on the roads or security checkpoints.

A part of you clings to the naïve hope that your father awaits your arrival as you open the door to the old clinic, but all that remains is a dusty workspace. The yard is long overgrown, cobwebs hang from the ceiling and thick dust coats every surface.

During the last conversation you had with your father, he seemed set on building momentum with his army, toppling Silla and increasing his notoriety, but… Is that really what he wants to do?

A wave of nostalgia hits you as you enter your old bedroom, which remains untouched since the last you saw it. You recall the memory of your father using it as a patient room long before it had been a suitable bedroom. He’d been kind to the poor and nobility alike in his treatment, not regarding how severe their illness was, either. He was remarkably kind, giving a personalized touch to each of his patients without expecting anything in return. A cherished, well-respected member of the community.

Surely, all of this has to be some sort of misunderstanding… His impetus for creating the pimul was for giving Silla a shot at rebuking Baekje forces. In hindsight, it had been a shallow pursuit, birthing what is, arguably, one of the most heinous creatures to live. You’re beginning to grow angry about it when—

The front door creaks as it slides open. You freeze out of panic, slowly turning your head over your shoulder to sneak a quick peek.

“Is someone in here?” The voice is unmistakable.

“Father?” You call out to him, your voice shaky as you catch a silhouette slink towards you.

“Ah,” he says softly, “You’ve returned home as well, huh? I’m happy to see you safe and sound, I was worried that you may have gotten swept up in the battle, or worse…” Tiny tears begin to form behind his eyes, it’s an expression with which you’ve been familiar with. You almost convince yourself that your last conversation had taken place in a nightmare rather than reality.

However, you know better than for it to be true.

“Where’s Ahro? Has he not joined you?”

“Indeed,” he nods. “I have ordered him to complete another assignment.”

You flick your eyes back and forth, trying to sense if any Furies are nearby, but you can’t. This may be your only opportunity to speak candidly with him, and perhaps even convince him…

“Father, tell me something… Do you really plan on creating more Furies as a way of manipulating Goguryeo’s army? That can’t really be what you want, is it…? You dedicated your life to becoming a doctor in order to save innocent people from dying!”

When you were a child, your memory of your father was of his incredible work ethic; how he’d pour himself into books. He invested himself in his patients. You remember peeking into his room one night as he flipped through his books with only a lantern as company. There’s no way that level of dedication could have faded so easily.

“Unlike you, my child,” he frowns, crossing his arms, “I am not a direct descendent of the Heo Clan. My family’s bloodline has been long since diluted, making me closer to human than Demon. As a child, my life neatly succumbed to a severe illness. This is what motivated me to put forth all of my energy into practicing medicine. It was a desperate wish to save those who suffered like me.”

“So—!” It’s just as you expected, he still possesses an innate desire to care for others.

Your joy, however, is short-lived as he continues, “Yet, the funny thing is that no matter how much the medicine evolves, humans are twice as efficient at creating tools of destruction and, in my experience, are more eager to test them on their fellow man than to help him. If this vicious cycle continues, then all that will remain are poor, lonely orphans like you and Ahro. I cannot, in good conscious, allow these imbeciles to run this country into the ground so petulantly.”

The mood in the room shifts. You look on in hoor as his body begins to radiate a blinding aura as if he’s being engulfed in flames. Two sharp horns begin to poke through the flesh on his forehead, akin to some kind of beast that you had only seen illustrated on various temple walls. His eyes slowly changed from a deep brown to gold, nearly paralyzing you with their bright, ominous glow.

“Father…?”

“Witness the Demons’ true form,” he says with a smile. “As Demons interbred with humans, our people distanced themselves from reaching their full potential, and I was resigned to suffering the same fate. Thanks to my serum… my Demon blood has been reawakened from its dormancy after years of suppression.”

“You drank the pimul,” you breathe, eyes wide in horror. It’s a nightmare scenario, and suddenly whatever delusions you’d had about expecting to compromise with your father are abandoned.

Not only had he been creating Furies, he’d become one of them.

How recently he’d drank the serum is a mystery, but it’s clear that the man who raised you is gone and the one in his stead is a monster.

“Between Ahro and myself, who has also discovered the means to unlock his true Demonic potential, and an army of Furies unhindered by sunlight… No one can oppose us. With this serum at our disposal, mankind will cower and learn how futile waging a war against our people would be.”

You shake with disbelief, tears streaming down your cheeks as the realization of his crimes sink in. Your time with the Hwarang granted you lessons upon which you otherwise had no perspective. When working in such a close capacity with people from different walks of life, one understands that getting your way is challenging—compromise is key. For the Hwarang, having the Furies made this particularly difficult… For your father, however, without anyone to challenge him, there was no one to inform him of what an egregious sin he had and is committing against humanity.

“Please, father, snap out of this.” You plead, “Do you truly believe that you will be able to easily curry favor with Goguryeo and eventually usurp power in the process?”

Even the Hwarang, as strong proponents of Silla, had been at the mercy of the bureaucracy, which had only served to frustrate and disenfranchise them. It’s hard to believe that your father and Ahro will be capable of avoiding the same issue.

“If you think that Goguryeo is sitting in any position to exploit and dispense us…” He shakes his head with a smirk, “Then you are mistaken. It is they who should be afraid of us annihilating every last one of them. In fact, we certainly have the means to do so.”

His eyes beam with an electrifying, almost unrecognizable madness, “Come with us. As a pure-blooded Demon, by rearing a child with the Furies, we can guarantee your offspring will be even stronger. If that were to happen, our clan, will give birth to a new generation of Demons.”

He wears a malicious smirk as he extends his hand towards you. You look for an escape route, only then to be stopped as your father moves with heightened agility, grabbing your arm before you can even begin running.

“Let go!” You cry out, trying to swat him away.

“Illuminate me,” a voice says with calmed anger from the doorway, “How do you expect to rally your people and form a new clan if you are nothing more than a bitter, senile idiot?”

A glimpse of yellow in the corner of you eye has your head whipping to gaze in the direction of the voice, “Donghyuck!” You shout, his name almost getting caught in your throat as you look towards the entrance, “What are you doing here?!”

You almost feel the need to pinch yourself to believe that it’s actually him, but he makes no secret out of his irritation when he glares at you from the corner of his eye.

“Could ask you the same question.” He tempers, “I thought I told you to stay in Ungjin, and yet here you are. Care to tell me what you think you’re doing?”

When an answer doesn’t come from you, Donghyuck dismisses you, shifting his angered gaze towards your father.

“Not only have you committed the ultimate crime in producing more fakes, but now you’ve stooped low enough to become one of them?” His hand lingers over the hilt of his sword, “It appears as though you’re practically begging for me to kill you.” With that, he unsheathes his blade, something about the sword intriguing you as it stays in the sunlight. Rather than reflecting the sun, as a blade normally does, it produces its own shimmering gleam, giving it an ethereal, blessed quality.

“Drink all the serum you wish, Jinsang,” he sneers, “but never in your wildest dreams will you be capable of measuring up to what a true warrior can be.”

Your father lets out a grunt of frustration; partly out of embarrassment of Donghyuck’s mockery, but mostly in the knowledge that he is no warrior. After a moment he grabs hold of your arm and shoves you towards where Donghyuck is standing. You brace yourself, thinking he’d move to avoid you and charge at your father.

Instead, Donghyuck catches you flying toward him, wrapping his arms securely around you as you land, “Huh?” You crack open an eye, surprised to have not hit the ground face-first.

Taking this ample opportunity, your father bolts towards the house’s back door.

“Wait!” Donghyuck shouts, letting go of you to chase after him. You chase after him, only finding yourself standing in the back alley. “He got away, huh? Should’ve guessed that rat would slip from my fingers.”

Heo Jinsang had disappeared, successfully evading Donghyuck’s brief pursuit. As the latter darts his stern eyes towards you, you find yourself staring intently at the ground.

“Thank you for saving me earlier…” you murmur as he raises the corner of his mouth flippantly.

“Your thanks are unnecessary,” he states, “Instead, I demand that you answer my earlier question. I told you not to go near them nor to pursue them. Why have you disobeyed that?”

“Because I am a member of the Heo clan,” you state, looking up at him, “If my father and brother are plotting to commit these heinous crimes, then I can’t let the burden fall on you to take care of everything, Donghyuck.”

“Were you not listening to what I told you before?” He frowns, “Female Demons pale in comparison to what the male counterparts can do in battle. Your presence benefits me none whatsoever.”

“I get that, but…” You frown, “If you were in my shoes, would you listen to yourself? Could you honestly live with passing your burden to someone else?”

The question seemingly catches him off-guard. Donghyuck looks at you inquisitively, and together you stay silent as the wind rustles some leaves atop the cold ground.

After a long pause, he speaks, “Understood… Perhaps I’m being forward, but I see in you the virtues befitting the leader of the Heo Family. All I ask, however, is that you refrain from acting so recklessly. Do not allow these rash thoughts to cloud your judgement, or else your leadership will suffer.”

You nod slowly at his words, taking them in.

“Anyone who even thinks of taking you under my watch will be punished without mercy,” it almost sounds like a promise. “Come with me, I’m sure you’ll feel better watching me peel the flesh from their bones with the swing of my sword.” Donghyuck then turns on his heels, heading back into town.

The thought of him promising to murder your father and brother still unsettles you but you suppose it is far better than being left in the dark as to where your father is or what he had been hoping to achieve. You run after Donghyuck, leaving your house behind.

By the time you find an inn to stay in, the sun has set, dipping into the orange horizon. Donghyuck had led you there, to the inn decorated with modest lighting and accessories, when lo and behold you find Xiao Dejun waiting inside for you.

“You made it back safely—What is she doing here?” He asks, surprised by your presence.

“Are you acting coy?” Donghyuck questions, “Do I have to spell it out for you, or are you going to quit playing the fool?” He shakes his head, “Enough of that, what have you uncovered?”

“There’s quite a bit to report,” Dejun says, settling himself down at a nearby table, “I hope you have the time to listen to it all.” With the way he glances at you, you’re unsure if you should listen in, but just as you’re about to leave, Donghyuck stops you.

“She has inherited Heo blood. She has the right to listen to this.” Donghyuck says as he sits across from Dejun, “It is up to her, that is, if she has the stomach for it.” In typical fashion, he’s speaking of you in a dismissive tone, but you now take it to mean that he’s respectfully acknowledging your agency in the decision to stay.

No matter what Dejun has to say, if it regards your family, you have an obligation to sojourn. So, you too take a seat at the table, “I am ready for whatever it is you have to say. Please allow me to remain here.”

Dejun nods, taking a deep breath before he begins, “In regards to Hak Ahro, he appears to be in Hanseong with warriors from Goguryeo. To make matters worse, he has a band of Jinsang’s enhanced Furies as well.”

Hanseong… If you recall correctly, then that’s where the Hwarang had been told to go. If Ahro is leading a band of Furies alongside Goguryeo forces there…

“It looks like the Hwarang is going to have their hands ties with those Furies, aren’t they?” Donghyuck asks, nearly putting your thoughts into words.

“Exactly.”

Your hands clench at your side, worry pervading through you. The Hwarang had suffered many casualties in the Baekje raid on Seorabeol and on top of that, Yongqin wouldn’t be able to join them either in is condition. Doctor Namekawa had said as much when he wrote you last.

“Negotiations between Tang and Silla are still ongoing in Ungjin,” Dejun nods slowly, “If their talks begin to grow more… intense against Goguryeo…”

“Then we’ll have a full-on war on our plate,” Donghyuck exhales out, “The perfect opportunity for Jinsang and Ahro to unleash their sick beasts onto the field.”

“I assume they will organize their Furies and march them to Hanseong as soon as possible. But then again, there aren’t too many areas there in which they could hide their army.”

“Interesting,” Donghyuck muses as he runs his index finger atop the wooden table, “For now, keep a watchful eye on their movements.”

As you listen to their conversation, an urgent feeling of panic rages within you, and you realize that you’re suddenly drenched in cold sweat. If Donghyuck’s prediction comes true, then the innocent people in both Goguryeo and Silla will be helpless against the tide of Furies, eager for the taste of blood. Everything is coming together and it horrifies you to imagine sacrificing entire towns for the purpose of feeding their insatiable hunger. It’s a violation of the world’s sacred order, and you’re running out of time.

“What of Sicheng?” Donghyuck questions, “Has he decided what to do with the remainder of the Baekje families?”

“He’s been a ghost, even on the battlefield,” Dejun explains, standing from the table and making his way to the exit, “Perhaps he’s grown tired of playing a part in this sick game.” He then leaves you with that, bowing lightly as he departs the room.

Donghyuck stays quiet for a moment before turning to you, “I am stepping out. Get some rest.”

“Okay,” you nod as he stands, “Please be careful.”

“Unless an emergency arises, do not leave this building.” He warns, “Otherwise, we may have a repeat incident of earlier today.” Donghyuck lingers a moment more, gazing into your eyes to assure himself, then quickly flies out of the door.

Once nestled in bed, you close your eyes and drift off to sleep. In your deep, dreary slumber, a dream comes to you. The setting is your childhood home, not the one in Toehwa-hyeon, but the one prior to that… Your arm is being pulled along by someone.

Through a muted, white haze, you watch smoke billow into the sky, tall flames surrounding you as you try to flee hastily.

“This way!” The shout of the boy pulling you cries out through the night.

The village burning before you evokes a strange sense of déjà vu. Beside you lay a small hill where you’d often pick flowers and the pen that housed your livestock. Those places, like the memories attached to them, are becoming reduced to ash and cinder, and in the distance, you can hear shrieks of terror.

What’s going on? Who could do such a thing? Where are your parents?

“The fire’s spread here too!” The boy shouts in anguish as flames block your path, encroaching on you slowly.

You hear a man call out to you and the boy from a way away, “Over here!” Although his identity is unclear, you understand him to be one of your relatives, “Quickly, hold onto me, the flames will catch up to us soon!”

You and the boy do as instruct, holding on tightly to his robes as he leads you into the forest at the outskirts of the village where the air is clearer.

“We’ve run far enough,” the relative speaks, “I don’t think the fire can reach us here. We should be safe.”

“Uncle,” the boy asks, “Why did this happen? Where’s dad? And mom?”

Suddenly, you recognize who the boy is. It’s Ahro.

“It was becoming too dangerous because of the fire,” your uncle grimaces, “We had no choice to leave them behind.”

And this man…

“Unforgivable,” he laments, “The humans have cruelly summoned calamity and misfortune to our people. Are they punishing us for refusing to help them aid Baekje? They destroy our homes for wanting peace?”

On that night, it isn’t your father, but a distant relative who saves you from being burned alive. He later assumes the title of ‘Father’ and raises you. Heo Jinsang.

You awake with a jolt, tears streaming down your face hysterically. For whatever reason, your mind needlessly exhumed a memory that you had unknowingly suppressed years ago. Now, it’s all coming back to you…

Humans had destroyed your home, killing dozens of your people, including your parents. In a selfish grab for power, they wiped the village from existence and attempted to absorb the land. Heo Jinsang made one thing abundantly clear… Continuing to allow humans to rule barbarically, and further their destructive tendencies, it would only produce more orphans like you and Ahro.

Although you’re opposed to the idea of using Furies, of all things, as a force to counteract mankind’s penchant for destruction… At the same time, there’s a method to their madness, and you can’t’ bear to think about how they coped with the memory of your people’s genocide.

A knock at your door snaps you from your stupor.

“Pardon me,” one of the inn’s attendants asks, “Are you awake?”

You rise to your feet, wiping away the tears on your face before you open the door, “Is something the matter?”

“I have a guest asking for you,” he says, “May I send him in?”

“Ah,” you say with bated breath, wondering who it could be, “In a moment, let me arrange my room first…”

After tidying up your quarters, the attendant opens the door and ushers in your surprise visitor.

“Oh?” they ask, sounding surprised, “Is it just you in here?”

“Sicheng!” You say, equally befuddled, “What are you doing here…?”

“Well, Dejun asked me to come so I came as quickly as I could…” He glances around the room, “But it looks like I’m a little late.”

“It would appear so.” You say, knowing that Dejun may not come back, “However, I believe Donghyuck will be returning momentarily.”

“That so?” He muses, “I suppose it wouldn’t hurt for me to stick around a while longer, then.” Sicheng studies the room meticulously and, eyeing a spot to sit, plops onto the floor quietly.

You watch nervously as he pulls his quiver from his back, inspecting the points of each arrow.

“Um…” you say, gaining his attention.

“Hm? What is it?”

“Is it true that Hanseong may be the center of the next battle soon?” You ask quickly, “I’m worried about something Donghyuck said.”

As you express your concerns, Sicheng suddenly freezes, his finger gently pressed to one of the arrow’s tips, “Well, I’d be lying if I told you there wasn’t a high chance of that happening.”

Images of your burning home are recalled to mind, if this were to happen, there wouldn’t be only two orphans left. And the friends you care for so dearly will be swept into another fray…

“Calm down,” Sicheng says, sensing your worry, “We were able to weasel the Hwarang away from Hanseong for the time being.”

“Huh?” You ask, not understanding.

“Oh?” His brow raises, “Did they not tell you? Silla has no intention of letting Hanseong fall under siege or be lit ablaze. They want that city for their own, the Hwarang are merely there to see to it that it stays intact until the Silla forces arrive in full… Not that Goguryeo will let that happen.”

Just as you’re beginning to put the pieces together, the door opens once more, “I thought I heard a familiar voice in here… Hello Sicheng.”

“Don’t look so surprised,” Sicheng says as he looks to Donghyuck, sliding the arrow back into his quiver, “You’re the reason I’m here. Let’s cut to the chase. I’m a busy man, you know?”

“There are some questions I need answering. It won’t take much of your time…” Donghyuck then goes on to recount what has happened since you last saw him in Sooyoung’s village. He mentions encountering your father, and describes in great detail Jinsang’s plot to gather blood in order to feed his army. The most crucial detail, however, is his proposition to use this army to manipulate Goguryeo into doing his bidding.

“Got it,” Sicheng nods his head solemnly.

“Well, what do you have to say?” Donghyuck questions as he sits across from him, “Do you expect them to fall prey to his little schemes?”

“As much as I want to give them the benefit of the doubt… They’re hurt,” Sicheng begins, “Their failed attack on Silla left them vulnerable and Yeon Gaesomun is crazy.”

“What do you mean ‘crazy’?” Donghyuck’s head tilts to the side.

“Other than killing his king? He is—was— undefeated in battle, and his pride is hurt. He’s bitter and will do anything he can to seek out victory. If I know him, then I don’t see him rejecting the offer to use Furies if it guarantees him victory.”

“What a circus,” Donghyuck huffs. The only thing he hates more than mankind is greed, and he makes no secret of his distain.

“Can you convince him not to use the Furies?” You plead to Sicheng. “Neither human or Demons have the means of handling them if they start outnumbering us. Even if Goguryeo wins, it’s only a matter of time until the Furies are turned on them.”

“I know,” he nods, “To be honest, the very notion of them requiring outside intervention of any kind offends me… Leave it to me.”

“Can we depend on you, Sicheng?” Donghyuck queries.

“Learn to trust your comrades, you bastard,” Sicheng frowns and then straightens himself. “That’s it then? That’s all you have to say? I suppose I’ll be on my way now.” He rises to his feet, slinging his quiver back across his back, smirking wryly as he moves towards the door. Without another word, he saunters out of the room.

A few days later you learn that the Tang-Silla talks have ended and forces are beginning to move out of Silla and into Goguryeo territory. Yet, this comes after a skirmish in Hanseong, leaving the Goguryeo forces there and the Hwarang locked into a bloody stalemate. You later learn that neither Jaehyun or Yukhei had been there. Yongqin, too, was absent as his condition worsened to the point that merely holding his sword is enough to exhaust him. Your curiosity drives you up the wall, and you want to learn more about their status, but Namekawa is away, his letters becoming fewer and far in between.

Around the time you heard news of the stalemate, rumors that Taeil had surrendered to the Hanseong forces to allow his fellow Hwarang to fall back race around Silla.

March 15th, 666 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla It’s a brisk, nearly springtime evening when Donghyuck quickly races into your room, urgency in his voice, “Listen carefully. Jinsang has emerged out of hiding.”

Dejun, trailing in behind him adds, “They are most likely heading to Fuyu.”

“Logic would dictate that…” Donghyuck nods, “It is the only locale near Pyongyang with a dense enough population to feed his massive army before Silla pushes even more into their Kingdom. Their foolish plan to thrust Silla into chaos hadn’t planned out as expected, and it seems as if Sicheng’s kept his word… Surely they are reaching the point of desperation.”

The Demon’s stare flickers to you, “Since this directly concerns you as a Heo, do you intend on accompanying us?” His gaze looks impertinent, almost as if he’s testing you.

Your mind is already set, “I am going.”

He squints at you in response, staring blankly at you for a brief moment before relenting, “Very well.” His curt response is all you need.

The last you and Donghyuck spoke about matters concerning Jinsang, he’d been dead set on prohibiting you form getting involved, yet now, as Silla pushes further into Goguryeo territory, you aren’t as worried at the fear of all-out war breaking out. If Furies can no longer be used as leverage, then maybe Jinsang can see the error in his ways once he realizes how little Goguryeo values his experiments. You wrestle with these thoughts as Donghyuck continues.

“I assume he’s matching half of his Furies to Fuyu as we speak,” He muses.

“Sicheng should already be there with a group of soldiers.” Dejun says.

“Then we will reconvene with him as soon as our business with Heo is concluded.”

Ungjin is blessed with a quiet calm as its residents sleep peacefully in the dead of night. The three of you wind carefully through the city, making your way to the northern gate to head towards Hanseong.

March 30th, 666 – Girin Residence, Hanseong, Kingdom of Silla “Have they already left?” Donghyuck’s question rings through the nighttime sky, “I don’t detect anyone nearby…”

During your travels north, Hanseong was readily captured by the Silla forces moving towards the capital of Goguryeo, allowing you easy access into the city. It had been difficult to track down the whereabouts of where Heo Jinsang had been holing up the Furies, but Dejun had gotten a lead towards this one particular residence on the outskirts of the city.

“Oh!” You say, your eye catching something moving atop the roof before hopping down to greet the three of you.

“It’s been a while,” Hak Ahro smiles, “I’ve been waiting patiently for you, sister.”

“Ahro—” you begin before he speaks over you.

“I’ve already spoken with Jinsang. He informed me that he had generously offered you the chance to join us, but…” His gaze flickers to Donghyuck, “He got in the way of that, or something. Don’t you think it rude to interrupt an emotional reunion between a father and daughter?

Donghyuck says nothing, keeping his guard raised as he glares at Ahro without humoring his sarcasm.

“So?” Ahro asks, “Why are all of you here? If you’ve brought these two as your bodyguards, it can’t mean anything good.

You know that speaking with your father had proved futile, but with their hope dwindling, maybe, maybe, you can get through to them.

“Donghyuck,” you whisper to him, “please give me one more chance.”

Without moving his head, he shifts his line of sight to stare at you begrudgingly, taking his time to decide, “As you wish…”

You feel a huge pang of relief, and after thanking him, you turn to face Ahro, “I want you and father to hear me out before this goes any further.”

Ahro gazes at you coldly, pursing his lips, “I see… I think I have an idea of what you’re going to say. Why don’t you all come inside? Jinsang’s been expecting you.”

The three of you follow him inside cautiously to a main room where Heo Jinsang stands.

“At last,” he smiles, “you’ve come.”

Although you’ve made yourself aware of all the horrible things he’d done over the past few years, every time that Heo Jinsang greets you with his jovial smile, it shatters you into a thousand pieces, “… Father.”

Even if you aren’t related by blood, he’d dedicated his life to raising you like a daughter. As the guilt trickles in, you have to snap yourself out of it, straightening your back as you speak to them.

“I dreamt of something. It wasn’t much, but it was a memory from my childhood…” You begin slowly, recollecting the memory, “I witnessed a vision of our village burning, and I recalled how the humans destroyed our way of life. Both of you were there to rescue me, and together we escaped the fire by fleeing into the forest.”

“I can only imagine,” your father winces, “how painful it must have been to remember such atrocities.”

You shake your head at him, “It’s not about me. I know the two of you have been mulling this trauma over for far longer than I have. After all that’s happened, I can’t blame either of you for holding onto your grudge against humanity for as long as you have.”

“Then…” Ahro’s voice perks up at his attempt to interject, you can swear you see his expression begin to soften.

“Keeping all of this in mind, however, I implore the two of you not to unleash your Fury army.” As you as you mention the last part, both Ahro and Jinsang freeze in shock. “We were able to avoid the terrors of war in Ungjin… Why do either of you seek to inflict pain on others? Haven’t they suffered enough? I’m sure neither of you want to impose the same nightmarish fate that we’ve had to endure, do you?”

A forlorn expression covers Jinsang’s face, Ahro, on the other hand, is less sympathetic to the point you’re trying to make.

“Don’t break your foot getting off of that high horse.” He frowns, “Must be nice living a privileged life, isn’t it? Do you know what I had to struggle with after our village burned down? About how I was treated with the Hak clan? Because I cannot bear children, they treated me like I was less than the shit they scraped from their boots. I was lucky they kept me alive…”

Bitterness erodes his voice, “They broke me again and again and again until I was nothing. A one point I…” He pauses, shaking his head, “Thanks to them, I realized humans and Demons are no different. Power corrupts all.”

Listening to him makes your heart sink. All that time you lived peacefully in Toehwa-hyeon… Just what had Ahro been subjected to? A life with no love or compassion, it explains so much.

“Then what is it that you want, Ahro?” You ask, “Do you want the Furies to rebuild the Heo clan? Is that what you really want?”

“Isn’t it obvious?” He spits out, “It’s my duty… I cannot let our parents down by letting our name hang in disgrace! I refuse to let those imbeciles destroy our legacy without putting up a fight! The Hak clan abused me, and the Demons in the south and north turned a blind eye to our suffering, letting our people scatter with the wind. How do you expect me to forgive them for spitting on us when we begged for their help?! Doesn’t that insult what it means to be a Demon?”

Each word he speaks breaks off another piece of your heart as his festering resentment comes to light. Maybe you had judged him incorrectly and the only thing that can soothe his soul is… if he exacted revenge on every person that had ever harmed or wronged him in the past. Perhaps, there is no other way…

Donghyuck steps in front of you all of a sudden, not even looking at you as he speaks, “Step back”

“Donghyuck…” Just as you had feared, their time of reckoning has come. “Donghyuck I—”

“I told you to step back,” he barks at you sternly, and you can’t help but move. His hand reaches for the hilt of his sword, drawing it in one swift motion. Donghyuck holds it comfortably in his palm as if it’s an extension of his own arm, and like a phantom, it glows, illuminating the room.

“Hwangun’s Demonslayer, hm?” Ahro muses as his eyes track the blade. “Since that weapon was forged to kill Demons, it must mean you’re really going for us, aren’t you?”

“Of course.” Donghyuck declares.

“Then,” Ahro smirks, “I suppose I’ll have to return the favor.” His hand slips into his pocket, procuring a crystalline vial.

“The dishonored bastard of a Demon clan has to forfeit his life in order to become a fake, is that it?” Donghyuck’s eyes watch the red liquid swirl around the glass, “Here, I thought you could stoop no lower.”

“It appears we disagree on what constitutes honor,” Ahro’s fingers toy with the opening, “No matter what happens, I cannot allow you to kill me here!”

“Ahro, no!” Taking a split second to decide, you sprint towards him to snatch away the serum.

As you near, he shouts out, “Don’t touch me!” And he shoves your attempt at saving him away, causing you to fall to the floor.

You’re too late, as he’s uncapped the vial and placing the vial to his lips, drinking the contents quickly. Ahro grips his chest, moaning in anguish. He lets the glass slip from his hand, it shattering on the floor as it lands. And then, just as Jinsang had done, his eyes begin to glow gold. His hair turns pale white and two horns emerge from his forehead.

Your brother has become a Fury.

“See?” He smirks, “Now it’s a fair fight, isn’t it, Lee Donghyuck?”

“You are lost, boy.” Donghyuck murmurs coolly. All of a sudden, an aura emanates from him as his own body morphs, his hair turning white, his eyes gold and the horns emerging from his own head. Both of them radiate spheres of energy, glowing white hot as they charge one another.

The thunderous clang of their blades echoes deafeningly around the room. Their agility is superhuman, making it difficult to track the paths of their swords as they rapidly trade a flurry of unrelenting attacks.

“You’re not quick enough for me!” Ahro laughs maniacally, “At this rate I will crush you in minutes!”

Sparks fly as their swords crack into one another, neither one willing to let up steam.

“Jinsang,” Dejun calls out, “You’re mine.”

“There’s no need to rush things,” Jinsang leers, “In fact, since we’re all together, perhaps you would be better off warming up with my beloved children.” He places two fingers to his mouth and whistles.

From behind you, you hear the ominous creak of doors opening. Within seconds, your worst fears are realized. You find yourself surrounded by a bevy of red eyes, Furies calling out for blood.

Dejun is the first to reach, unsheathing his sword, swinging fast slashes at the Furies funneling into the room. Yet… Not even Dejun’s skill with a blade can subdue the incoming Furies, they close in without flinching.

“Bastards!” Dejun cries out, releasing another volley of strikes. He has the advantage of battle-worn experience and superior strength but these Furies are different. His attacks do little to stunt their fervor, and soon, dozens of Furies have you cornered.

“Dejun! Donghyuck!” You cry out, reaching for the blade at your hip to join them in the fight. Suddenly, you’re grabbed from behind.

“Let’s leave while we can,” Jinsang murmurs to you, “No matter what anyone else claims, you are a descendent of the Heo clan. Your parents would have wanted you to join us more than anything.”

“No!” You struggle under his grip, “Let me go!” It’s impossible to slip from his grasp.

“Demons from the west and Demons from the east… Two species that have never been acquainted will now come together as one,” he says, “It will create the strongest Demon ever to exist. This is your destiny.”

His words paralyze you with fear, and at first nothing he says registers. Is this what he had planned for you all along?

If all goes according to his plan, then the causalities wouldn’t be limited to the Kingdoms alone. This affliction can potentially spread around the world, devastating countless lives. You can’t bear to let your life amount to this, nor can you stand to let yourself be attached to such a crime against humanity…

Your eyes flick down to your waist, and you struggle in your father’s arms to grab your blade.

“What are you doing?!” Jinsang shouts, “Don’t do anything reckless!” He attempts to pry the blade from you, but finds it difficult as you jostle yourself in his arms.

“Let her go, Jinsang,” Donghyuck says as he saunters towards the two of you.

“What?” Jinsang exclaims, “How are you here so soon…? Don’t tell me Ahro lost to the likes of you.”

“Are you deaf, old man? I said, ‘Let her go’.”

Your father snickers, continuing to ignore the command. Donghyuck shifts his eyes at you momentarily, looking at you intently as he motions with his lips. It’s almost as if he’s expressing his desire to kill your father, whether or not you approve.

At this point, it seems inevitable. You had spilled your heart out, and still he refused to listen. At some point, you have to accept the truth. Your paths had diverged some time ago, and it’s unlikely that you would ever see eye to eye about the atrocities he threatens to commit. Unfortunately, it leaves you with no other choice.

You look Donghyuck in the eye and without another second to hesitate, nod firmly.

Judging by his wry smile, it seems as if Donghyuck’s understood anything.

“Death is a messy affair, and this is certainly no exception.” Donghyuck raises his sword, “Shut your eyes.”

You appreciate his sentiment, but shake your head, “I am a Demon of the Heo Family,” you say, “The least I can do is dignify him with the honor of watching his final moments.”

“You’ve got a stronger heart than I thought. Don’t blame me if this haunts you forever,” His attention then turns to your father, “Okay, Jinsang. Have you made peace with yourself? Luckily for you, I am merciful. I promise this won’t hurt; well, not too much.”

He raises his sword high above your father’s head, stopping within inches of his face. Panic suddenly set in for Jinsang, realizing there would be no escape from his execution until— His eyes begin to glow menacingly, focusing his Fury powers within himself, causing the ground underfoot to rumble.

Jinsang breaks away from you to rush at Donghyuck. But it’s no use. Their difference in power is palpable. Donghyuck effortlessly swings his sword at the oncoming Jinsang, and in an instant, a deep, wide gash appears on your father’s sunken chest.

A splash of crimson blood cascades in the air as your father cries out in agony. He falls, lifeless to the floor, limp and dead. Donghyuck flicks his sword downward, sending an arc of blood droplets flying, before sheathing his blade as if to make a conclusive statement.

You run to your father’s corpse when something peculiar occurs. After the color leaves his face, his flesh begins to smolder, similar to the burning logs of a fire, and slowly, he turns to ash before you. As he disintegrates, what remains of his body floats away with the breeze, leaving behind nothing in its wake.

At long last, Heo Jinsang is dead. The man for whom you had spent years searching for had, once again, exited your life without a word.

Although you had accepted the possibility of his death long ago, your body feels suddenly light, perhaps feeling his empty weight in your broken heart. You cannot understand how it had come to this.

Reflecting on those circumstances sends you into a defeated slump, and without saying a word, Donghyuck draws you into his embrace, your tears staining his robes.

“Donghyuck,” you murmur, unable to look up at him. Whatever he has to say on the matter is an enigma to you, but for now you take solace in the comfort of his arms. You don’t think you can stand even if you want to.

“What happened to Ahro? Did you…?” What do you want to say? ‘Kill him’? The words are unable to form.

“I injured him, but he escaped.” Donghyuck says quietly, “However since it was a wound inflicted by my blade, it will take some time to heal.” The tone of his voice gives you the impression that he’s trying to put you at ease, but you doubt Ahro would completely heal from an injury Donghyuck would’ve given him. Yet the fact that he’s attempting to show you kindness makes all the difference in this moment.

“Father was a wonderful man… He was…” Your heart feels so heavy that you barely notice the tears streaming from your eyes. “He cared so much for his patients I just—I don’t understand… I was proud to call him my father.” The bittersweet memory of your childhood come flooding back to you, which seems to only exacerbate your tears.

“I wonder what caused him to change so drastically?”

“If your village hadn’t been burned to the ground, then perhaps there would have been some hope of saving the man he used to be,” Donghyuck says lowly, “At the end of the day, humans are to blame.”

There’s a resentful undertone lurking in his hushed voice. Donghyuck is unashamedly proud to be a Demon. Eventually, this pride morphed into hatred a potent discontent for everyone he considers beneath him. You can only imagine how difficult it must have been to murder one of his own kin.

“I understand…” Although humans had been responsible for the death of your people, which led to them following this path of bitter revenge… Your family chose to let it consume them to the point of no return. However, it’s easier to conceptualize than it is to accept.

“I’m just so heartbroken,” you sob so hard that your eyes begin to burn. Donghyuck, sensing your pain, holds you just a bit tighter. “I know what you mean, though… Some humans are unmistakably evil, but others are okay…” Tears drip into your mouth as you speak, their saltiness stinging. “There are so many though who commit their lives to pursuits other than power.”

In your experience, the Hwarang had been a prime example of this, you want nothing more than to learn of their fate. You need to find them, wherever they are. Now that you’ve lost your father, there aren’t many other convictions worth seeing to their end.

After a few more moments, you pull away from Donghyuck and he turns to Dejun, “I believe the fighting will soon stop in Fuyu.”

“Even though they’re fighting Furies, I doubt Sicheng will have much trouble. Perhaps we should come to his aid,” Dejun suggests.

“Indeed,” Donghyuck nods before turning to face you. “Return to the inn.”

“What?” You shake your head, “I can’t just let you two handle this alone…”

“Don’t flatter yourself. What good do you expect to do? You look dreadful,” he says, furrowing his brow. “Hurry up and return to the inn. Get some rest… Got it?”

You’re concerned about the outcome of Fuyu, but you trust Donghyuck to take care of things, and you’re comforted by the fact that he’s looking out for you.

April 8th, 666 – Hanseong, Kingdom of Silla After days of waiting, Donghyuck finally returns, slinking into the inn with a reserved expression.

“Sicheng performed his duty and destroyed all of the Heo’s monsters,” Donghyuck reports, “If you sincerely wish to reunite with the Hwarang, then prepare your things at once.” He speaks curtly, leaving you with that as he exits your room.

You quickly rummage to gather your things, your thoughts lingering on your father as you find one of his old books tucked away in your bag. Although, your attention is turned to the door once again as Donghyuck steps inside, sporting a whole new wardrobe.

It takes you a moment to recognize him as he’s wearing Tang styled clothing. It clings to the dimensions of his body so nicely that you can’t help but feel your face warm at how… nice he looks. You look away to keep from staring at him.

“What’s with your face?” He asks, “Do you want a uniform like this?”

“O-oh, no, that’s not it.” You shake your head, shoving things into your bag. “They just look a little uncomfortable.”

“Not at all,” he muses, flexing out his arms, “To tell you the truth, they’re a bit easier to maneuver in than my typical clothes. Perhaps I will have a set made for you one day, look forward to it.”

“I couldn’t—” you say quickly.

“I’m trying to show you kindness, it’s a gift.” He sighs out, “Quit wallowing in your self-pity for once. Now, there are people waiting on us. Let’s go.”

“People…?” You ask, following him outside. “Oh, hello Sicheng… Are you the person waiting for us?”

Although you had clearly addressed him, he ignores you, making you think that you’re imagining his visage. After a moment, he stares at you intently.

“Did something happen?” You ask with a tilt of your head.

Yet again, he doesn’t respond, choosing instead to chew on his lips as he picks out his word carefully, “Do you remember the Hwarang captain Jaehyun?”

“Of course,” you nod, “He was one of the kindest people I met when I lived with the Hwarang.” Why is Sicheng mentioning Jaehyun now? As you consider the possibilities, it hits you. It feels as if one of Sicheng’s arrows has hit your chest, and you’re finding it difficult to breathe.

No… It can’t be.

“Jaehyun passed away. He lost his life battling the Furies in Fuyu…”

“What?!” You cry out. Even though you had braced yourself for the possibility, nothing can soften the blow of the truth. “Wh- Why would he…?”

Because Namekawa had mentioned something about how Jaehyun wasn’t traveling with the Hwarang anymore, you had assumed he would’ve gone elsewhere other than the front lines.

“While investigating the movement of Jinsang’s Furies, he and I crossed paths,” Sicheng explains, “After briefing him of our situation, he and I struck up something of an alliance… All of a sudden, he began repeating how much he’d wanted to battle beside me. Maybe it’s me. Maybe I’m just back luck, since everyone I fight alongside ends up dead soon after.”

Although you’re watching his lips move, you mind instinctively mutes everything else that falls from his moth. You try your best to focus on your image of Jaehyun. There’s nothing of worth you can contribute so you simply stand there, demoralized and numb.

Jaehyun… Although he seemed rough around the edges to others, you remember him more as a gentle, courageous soul. How could someone so beautiful die so young…?

“No time for tears,” Donghyuck says, “You still want to find them, don’t you?”

You nod silently, hoping that Jaehyun’s death is the epilogue to your harrowing journey… Although you’re unsure if that’s the case now.

May 19th, 666 – Fuyu, Kingdom of Goguryeo By the time you reach Fuyu, spring is in full bloom. You find the town has already succumbed to Silla as their forces begin to encircle Pyongyang. The town itself is still in disarray from the battle, its ravaged exterior telling you everything you need to know.

“I have bad news,” Donghyuck murmurs to you as you walk along the streets of the town, not noticing that he had joined you some time along your stroll.

“Donghyuck…” Your heart still reeling from Sicheng’s revelation of Jaehyun, you’re unsure of how much more you can take. “Please, go on.”

As soon as you answer, he tilts his head down and speaks quietly, “In retaliation for their capture of Fuyu, Taeil was tried and beheaded by the Goguryeo forces.”

A paragon of benevolence and leadership… Taeil had been denied an honorable death and it breaks your heart to hear that he’d been decapitated like some criminal. For a moment you remain silent, softly turning your thoughts over in your head as Donghyuck looks away.

“You can decide whether or not you believe it.”

“No,” you shake your head, “I believe you.”

When Namekawa had notified you of Taeil’s surrender, you considered this to be the worst-case scenario. You buried the thought somewhere, clinging to the hope that he could be rescued, or maybe they would show him mercy for his character. But hearing Donghyuck say it, having it become real through his curt, impersonal words, is a devastating blow at a time when you’re reaching your limit.

“What does that mean for the Hwarang now?” You question.

Taeil had proudly served as the Hwarang’s Chief, and without him, you wonder how they would adapt to his absence.

“I hear they’ve begun to march onto Geumji to continue fighting in their late Chief’s honor.” He says simply, “Where does that leave you?” His question seems less interrogative and more interested in your feelings, which you appreciate.

However, you figure he’s intuitive enough to know that your opinion on the matter is unchanged, and you answer him resolutely, “I’m going to Geumji too. I’m going to wherever the Hwarang men are.”

September 5th, 666 – The Road to Geumji, Kingdom of Goguryeo After a long and encompassing journey, Donghyuck and you set foot in a small town some days away from Pyongyang, gazing at the peripheral view of its vast landscape. Tension boils in the air around the upcoming battles, particularly in the small villages in the area, just like the one you’re in now.

It’s here that Xiao Dejun meets you, giving you valuable information.

“The Hwarang were fighting in Naemihol until mid-June,” He relays, “They held the area until Silla forces could successfully take over entire control… But they lost many men in the conflict.”

“Just as I thought…” Donghyuck murmurs, “Cannon fodder.”

After being dealt another crushing wave of causalities, Dejun mentions something that piques your interest. “They’re heading to Namhansanseong. To my knowledge, their plan is to fortify the fortress and hold it for as long as they can until Silla once again comes to their aid.”

“Namhansanseong… Then that’s where we need to go, isn’t it?” You say quickly.

“One would assume…” Donghyuck nods, “Is that what you want?”

Chasing the Hwarang is trying to catch smoke with your hands, they’re just out of reach every time. Would your reunion ever happen? Or would each of the succumb to a fate similar to Taeil’s or Jaehyun’s before this war ever ends?

Fear and anxiety prompts you to speak, “I want to go.”

“I’m unamused by your poor attempt at humor,” Donghyuck frowns, “If you’re being serious, then I’m even less amused.” Sensing your resolve, he speaks bitterly, “Are you stupid or have you been living under a rock while they run themselves into the ground? Namhansanseong will be attacked relentlessly before Silla even sets foot into the area, are you sure that your Hwarang will be there when we arrive?”

“I understand,” you mirror his frown, “but that’s the only lead we have about their whereabouts. I’ve missed them a handful of times now and I don’t know if I could stomach never seeing them again.” You stop yourself, biting your tongue from contemplating the worst.

Donghyuck’s expression, however, is as aloof as it’s always been, “Let’s suppose they are, in fact, at Namhansanseong. What the hell do you expect you’re going to do if you make it there? Waltz on in?”

“Well—” You start before Donghyuck stops you.

“You would be killed. You’re an idiot if you think otherwise.”

“I am not going to do anything once I get there!” You don’t need his sharp criticism; not do you expect to come and rescue the Hwarang. You just need him to understand how you feel. “I just… I want to see everyone while I still can.” trying to steady your breath, you continue, “I don’t know if I could bear the thought of never seeing them again before something happens to them like Taeil or Jaehyun…”

“What?” He says bluntly, “You’re willing to get yourself killed for the mere possibility of seeing them?”

“I’m not going to let them kill me…”

“Mind telling me what you know that I don’t?” Voice piquing, “In case you were unaware, Moon Taeil has been executed, and his head is currently on display at Dosal Castle. Then there’s Jeong Jaehyun, who was ripped to shreds in Fuyu. No one’s patting him on the back for dying like a wounded animal. I’ve told you all this before—they will be a footnote in history.”

He makes sense, if the fortress is going to come under siege it would be foolish for you to go. The Hwarang would die and be written off as some common foot soldiers, warping the truth and their meaning as a while…

“I’ll remember them,” you state, “It doesn’t matter if people mischaracterize the Hwarang from who they really were…. I will honor their memory, and you can make damn sure that I’ll never forget it.”

You can almost hear Donghyuck gnashing his teeth as he glares at you, “I knew women were whimsied by delusion, but you are sitting at the top of the pile. Very well. Do what makes you happy.”

An awkward tension lingers in the space of your conversation, making you unsure if Donghyuck’s upset or just frustrated at your unwillingness to cooperate. His eyes are like daggers, sinking into you.

“Let’s simmer down, you two,” Dejun steps in, looking to the other man, “What’s the point in arguing? And you, Donghyuck, you normally keep your cool around women.”

He scoffs, “Maybe I’d keep my ‘cool’ if she wasn’t being such an idiot. This discussion is pointless. I have other things that require my attention, I’m taking my leave.” Donghyuck’s biting tone leaves you feeling uncomfortable as he spins on his heels and walks away.

You contemplate calling his name to clear the air but Dejun stops you.

“You should go after him.” Noting your confused expression, he continues, “Donghyuck is a real grouch, but he’s not the type of man that would let something frustrate him enough to walk off like that… I understand that you’re racing against the clock to see your friends right now, but it’s not like you’re in any position to get to Namhansanseong by yourself. You know that, right?”

“Yes…”

“Besides, it’s like you said. We have no idea or guarantee that the Hwarang will be there. I’ll do what I can to investigate their whereabouts for the time being… For now, why don’t you speak to Donghyuck?”

“Thank you, Dejun,” you say quickly, beginning to walk after Donghyuck.

“No need,” he shakes his head with a small smile, “I’m simply doing my duty.”

By the time you find Donghyuck, the sun is beginning to set into a warm pool on the horizon.

“Donghyuck…” You timidly call out to him.

He turns his head to gaze at you, but pays you no mind after and continues to walk at the same pace.

“Where… Where are you going?”

“If you insist on joining me, then shut your mouth and keep up. You’ll understand when we arrive.”

You sprint up to try and further the conversation, but he seems unwilling to entertain such things. You peek as him confusedly, and you’re struck with the most peculiar feeling of déjà vu.

“Huh?” Time seems to shift for a moment, things moving slowly as you look to a row of trees looming over the forested path. Its neat arrangement reminds you of a welcoming ceremony. Nose tingling with the most familiar scents; a fragrant patch of flowers dotting a lush meadow, dew clinging onto their petals…

Your body is trying to tell you something, consuming you with a vague sense of yearning. It all feels so surreal, and you can’t place your finger on it. An ambient energy imbues you, a serene grace that puts your tired heart at ease.

“Here we are…” Before you have an opportunity to voice how strange you feel, Donghyuck stops walking.

“This place…” you can hardly form the words as you realize. Your eyes scanning the environment, hitting you with a blast of nostalgia that nearly topples you. Beside you lay a charred hut with fallen supports, your mind immediately pictures what it once had been. This had been a village, and in the middle of it lays a decayed well, encircled by overgrown weeds.

Remnants of old life remains scattered here, an old bucket lay broken, an old doll lay weathered in the grass near your feet. There’s no mistaking where you are.

“Is this the village where I was born?” You look to Donghyuck, who neglects to answer you and shuts his eyes softly.

“Hm…” Something catches his attention, his eyes shooting open and he darts up a small hill to see what it is. To your surprise, you see Hak Ahro.

He’s collapsed in a bed of flowers, your heart dropping as you near. On the side of his ribcage is gauze that had been completely soaked in blood. You’re under the impression that he’d attempted to treat his injury inflicted by Donghyuck yet… It doesn’t surprise you that he would flee here in anticipation of death’s embrace, left to suffer his last, bitter moments alone.

“He’s been long dead…” Donghyuck ascertains by the stiffness of the body.

You take comfort in that, in the fact that his expression seems rather peaceful. Part of you believes that, after the evening passes, he’ll wake up to greet the morning and you could talk about everything that happened.

A new memory begins to uncloud itself as you look on to your deceased brother’s body… It had been years ago, back when this village was populated and full of life. You’d asked Ahro to take to see flowers… To see these flowers, even though your parents hadn’t allowed it. He’d offered to take you in secret, claiming that he’d protect you from anything outside.

“I just remembered something important,” you say, feeling a hot, sticky tear begin to roll down your cheek.

“Important?” Donghyuck questions.

You nod softly, “I was… loved. There were many people who protected and cared for me; most of all, it was Jinsang and Ahro...”

“I see…” Donghyuck doesn’t press the matter further. The two of you listen to the gentle hum of the wind passing through the bones of the village, grazing against the burned wood and worn stone. “Your brother deserves to be buried, a grave befitting the head of the Heo Family.”

Together, you hike to the peak of the hill that overlooks the village, and it is there that you bury Ahro’s remains. Donghyuck keeps his eyes fixated on the grave for a few minutes after you had finished padding the dirt down. He sighs and reaches for the canteen on the side of his belt, pouring the contents gently atop the grave.

The gokaju reflects in the moonlight as it falls from the bottle, seeping deep into the soil. Donghyuck is expressionless, watching the alcohol drip out as the container empties. His eyes glow with melancholy, and you wonder if he’s regretful about how things had transpired between the two of them.

“If it weren’t for the humans, then I am certain that your brother would have made a fine leader.” His sentiment heavy, seeming as if the two of you are learning to navigate the nuances of your grief together.

‘If it weren’t for the humans…’ It’s a lofty question, one that you will likely ponder for the remainder of your life. Things could have manifested so differently for Ahro and your father… At the very least, they could have made an impact on their people, unburdened by the curse of vengeance that unfairly plagued the rest of their short lives.

Ahro originally mentioned something about wanting to use the Furies to build back the Heo Clan, but in the end, you believe it all to have been a mask to hide the trauma inflicted by the wicked humans. In essence, he had wanted to preserve the picture of this village and everything it stood for.

Maybe—just maybe—he’d wanted to reclaim some of those memories that were viciously stripped from him. He was a boy whose every step was met with misfortune, tragically so. He died as he lived—alone. It’s the only way you’re able to think of him without slumping into a dark depression.

You wish and hope that his last moments were painless, that he’d been able to reconcile his hatred as he laid in the meadow of the one place he cared for.

“Donghyuck…” you call out his name once more as you leave the hill slowly.

“What?”

“I know that my father and Ahro committed unforgivable crimes against humanity and our people… Do you think it would be okay for me to remember them as gentle, kind people…?” Jinsang’s serum had been catastrophic, responsible for countless deaths. For them to violate the natural order of Demonhood, and all that encompasses your sacred existence, is a mark of condemnation to Donghyuck and his kin.

“You are free to do as you please,” he says quietly. “The Demon’s Code has no bearing on matters of the heart. Regardless of the sins they have committed, they are still your family.”

His words bring a weight from your shoulders, “Can I ask you one more question? Demons far surpass humans in strength and ability, right? How can you explain what happened to my people? How were humans able to do,” you look to the barren village, “this?”

Donghyuck tilts his head, staring into your eyes inquisitively. Perhaps he’s testing you to see if you can handle the true; to be honest, you’re unsure if you are, but the question needs an answer.

“Goguryeo asked for aid in stopping the preliminary attacks on Baekje almost twenty years ago, they needed more help than my or Dejun’s families could afford to give them, so they went east… It was then they asked the Heo clan.” Donghyuck pauses for a moment, “Your people, however, were unenthused about the idea of participating in human affairs, particularly in regards to warfare, and supposedly declined to help…”

Because the expressed no interest, you’re sure that the King of Goguryeo saw that as an affront to his authority…

“That’s why my people were killed? That was their justification?” You cry out in defeat and Donghyuck turns to look at the remnants of the village. It’s futile. The past cannot be changed.

“Do you now feel their hatred?” He asks simply before uttering his words of advice, “Remain in the shadows, out of their affairs. This is where Demons belong. Of all the clans, yours is the one who put the dignity of its people first by refusing. The humans had no right to attack your people, and were blinded by their lust for power and control.”

You direct your gaze to the forest floor as he speaks once more, his voice barely above a whisper, “It was never my intention to reveal the history of the Heo Clan to you, but… I suppose, because we are here, it is unavoidable.”

As you look to him, he asks, “Do you not resent the humans for what they’ve done?”

You mull for a moment, “There’s a part of me that thinks about how I should hate them… But there’s something overriding that angry voice and instead I just feel… heartbroken. I’m just filled with sorrow for what could have been.”

“Sorrow?” He asks and you nod.

When you first learned of what compelled your father and Ahro to embark on this path of revenge, all you felt was sorrow. Grief has taken you entirely now. You’d been reminded of the family you used to know as well as the parents you will never know.

“My real father and mother… And everyone else… Do you know how they died?”

Donghyuck shakes his head, “I haven’t the faintest idea. My only knowledge is that none of them put up a fight, and were complicit in the humans’ rampage. It was an admirable effort, holding onto their convictions as Demons by refusing to fight the humans, even at the cost of their own lives.”

As you and Donghyuck walk through the village, you kneel down to rest your hand to lay upon one of the fallen pillars that had greeted you upon your arrival. Had you touched this pillar as a child? Now it lays as a lifeless and forgotten artifact.

“Is there no way for us to live in a world where everyone can coexist peacefully?”

Why is the pursuit of peace so entrenched in the deaths of innocent lives?

“The Hwarang exposed me to so many different walks of life… A range of motivations, ideologies and ambitions.” When two opposing parties are unwilling to compromise, then it usually leads to war, yet… “All anyone should be concerned about is helping out their fellow man. It just breaks my heart to see that people are so willing to inflict pain on others.”

“I can see how hurt you are…” Donghyuck takes this moment to console you, not refute, and nods quietly. There’s a kind twinkle in his eyes, which you notice to be uncharacteristically placid as you look at him. “Perhaps there will be a day when we will no longer need our swords to speak for us.”

Eventually, you fall quiet, naturally running out of things to say. After a moment, he mutters to himself, “Humans are hopeless. They are, without exception, drawn to conflict like a moth to a lantern. This is why Demons have forsaken them, my desire to aid in their war wanes with each day. And of course, so should yours.”

“Donghyuck…” You had no intention of being near this war, but there’s so much you need to do; namely, learn the fate of the Hwarang. Understandably, they are still deeply entrenched in the war and whatever outcome that awaits them.

“Don’t think that I’m unaware of your concern for the Hwarang men’s safety,” he says abruptly. “If you want to see them so badly, then it is pertinent for you to exercise patience. If you become restless and enter conflict too hastily, then you’ll die before you get a chance to reunite with them. Impatience is unbecoming and I believe your ancestors wouldn’t wish that upon you.”

“You’re right…” You murmur, coming to realize what he’s been saying. Donghyuck is often blunt, if not outright rude. But he’s speaking honestly, and you can tell he’s genuinely worried for your well-being. That, you know for sure. “Thank you for looking out for me.”

“Well, with your penchant for recklessness, it is a necessity.” He hums.

“Recklessness?!”

“How else could I describe it?” A grin grows on his lips. “You have no means of reaching Namhansanseong by yourself.” Although he’s chiding you once again, you find his delivery endearing, his words snaking their way into your heart.

“Dejun said the same thing that you did, Donghyuck.” You say slowly, “he said that we have no way of knowing whether or not the Hwarang men will still be there by the time we arrive, so I should wait. I suppose will have to until we know for sure…”

His eyes scan you, thinning with satisfaction, “Glad to see you’ve wisened up by taking my advice to heart. Obedience is a good look on you, you’re well on your way to becoming a good wife.”

“Way to miss the point!” You huff, cheeks warming as you speak again, “Besides, I’m not your wife.”

After scoffing at his suggestion, you tun to get one last glimpse of the scenery around you. All you want is to reunite with the Hwarang, but now you can’t bear the thought of letting the deaths of your paternal parents, Jinsang and Ahro be in vain by wasting your life so wantonly. You have to make absolutely sure to pick and choose your battles.

As you leave the village, you put the image of the charred ruins behind you, instead carrying the resolve to honor your people and their sacrifice.

December 15th, 666 – Geumji, Kingdom of Goguryeo After staying in the village on the route to Namhansanseong for a while, it’s found out that the Hwarang have made it to Namhansanseong in record time. Yet, the battle had been short lived, Goguryeo surrendered swiftly, wanting to save their men for the final affront from Silla on their own doorstep. You’re now unsure of the Hwarang’s whereabouts, only waiting anxiously as you and Donghyuck spot Dejun walking down the well-worn path towards you.

“I have discovered their location,” he says quietly. He takes a deep breath and speaks somberly, “Allegedly, Li Yongqin, has passed away from illness in Sabi. As for Nakamoto Yuta, he was last seen leading a battalion of men at Wangnam Pass, and has been missing in action. We can only assume the worst…”

Your stomach sinks like a stone into the ocean. Suddenly, your breaths are shallow and staggered, they were… gone. Two of the most talented warriors in the Hwarang are now nothing more than just a faint memory, fading against the tide of time.

“Wong Yukhei, who had been reported to have left the Hwarang, is also missing in action.” You bite your lip. Is he safe? Are any of them safe? “Lee Taeyong and Na Jaemin, both of whom led the Fury Corps under the Hwarang, were killed in combat in Cholsan fighting Goguryeo soldiers.”

“Taeyong and Jaemin too?!” You cry out.

“The Goguryeo army was likely briefed of their use of the Furies and their weaknesses by Jinsang…” Donghyuck sighs.

Their deaths are difficult to take in as you swirl already in a pit of despair. They’d willingly gave up their humanity to become Furies, and not even that could save them.

“What about the others?” You ask, looking to Dejun.

“Thankfully for you, Qian Kun lives and is en route to Pyongyang with his remaining men. They’re actually leaving from the port here later today…”

“Today?!” Your eyes shoot open, looking towards the hill that leads down to the docks brimming along the town’s waterfront.

“Did I hear correctly?” Donghyuck questions, “Even with his men gone? That little dog still has some bite, huh?” He’d always been first in line to scorn the Hwarang’s actions, but this is different. His tone leads you to believe the he’s impressed by Kun, which is a little strange.

“So, everyone’s still putting up a fight?” Life for the Hwarang following the Battle of Seorabeol is nothing but one continuous adjustment to loss and victory. Yet, they continue to push forward with their heads high.

“What reasons have they scraped together to justify continuing on?” Donghyuck murmurs, “As I recall, the Crown has never taken favorably to them. I cannot fathom any reason to risk their lives so needlessly. Yet, here they are…”

“I’m unsure too,” you nod. Yet, you do know one thing. You celebrate internally, knowing their spirits are unbroken in the light of loss.

“Speaking as an outsider,” Donghyuck adds, “All they’re doing is hopping from one burial ground to the next. Can you honestly tell me that this is the future they envisioned for themselves?”

“Yes…” Their steadfast dedication on the battlefield is a monument to the courage and principles of their fallen comrades.

“Do you plan on following them to Pyongyang as well?” Dejun questions.

“Yes,” you nod, “The Commander may be unaware of the news that some of the captains have passed away…”

With Yongqin having died in Sabi and Jaehyun in Fuyu, it’s unclear to you if word of their passing has reached him. It’s your duty to honor their memory by telling Kun yourself.

Your eyes shift to Donghyuck, “I want to travel to Pyongyang and meet up with whoever’s left.” Before you continue, you take a moment to calculate what you wish to say, “Would it be too much to ask if you’d join me?”

“Me?” His eyes widen in surprise, “Go along with you?”

“Yes,” you nod somberly, “Even if it will be a victory for Silla, I have a gut feeling that this is the end for the Hwarang.” No battlefields had been left untouched by the vicious torrents of the war, and Pyongyang stands as the decisive scene in your Kingdom’s most tumultuous chapter. “I, um, I guess that’s even more of a reason why I… I want to travel together, Donghyuck. I want you with me when I witness the end of the Hwarang.”

It’s surreal, if not strangely appropriate, of you to ask such a thing of him. Yet, because Donghyuck’s been involved in so many duels with them over the years, you want him to bear witness to what could possibly be the Hwarang’s final, intimate moments.

He listens intently, and when you finish speaking, his lips curl into a smug grin, “The ‘end’ for them, you say…? What an enticing offer.”

“Thank you,” you’re flushed with relief at his acceptance. It’s felt like ages since anyone has been able to coax a sincere smile from you.

“I suppose that means we’ll be off…” Donghyuck says, waving a short goodbye to Dejun. “It will be faster to sail there than to walk…”

“Thank you, Dejun, I hope to see you again soon,” you say, beginning to turn around before he stops you.

“Hold on, there’s someone here who wants to speak with you.”

Turning back around, you’re met with both the visages of Xiao Dejun and Dong Sicheng.

“It looks like you’ve made it in one piece,” Sicheng notes with a smile.

“Sicheng!” You call out, “What are you doing here?”

“I just came to bring you something,” he says, reaching for a sword on his waist. You have trouble looking at it properly until he holds the sheathed metal out to you, and you can finally read the inscription on the sheath.

“Is that… Jaehyun’s?” You ask, reaching out for the leather holster.

“It is,” he nods slowly, “I was unable to reach the Hwarang in time. If he had lived, I believe he’d still be here fighting by everyone’s side. He was tenacious.”

Grabbing hold of the memento, you securely strap the sheathe onto you, letting it rest next to your own blade. The added weight feels as if you’re carrying along his legacy with you.

“You’re an ally of Goguryeo, are you not?” Donghyuck asks Sicheng.

“Like hell I am,” he scoffs, “I only answer to Baekje. Human history is only written by the victors, and everyone else is cast into the dirt. So, far be it from me to let their history speak for me.”

“Smells like bullshit to me,” Donghyuck hums.

Sicheng grimaces playfully at the other, then turns to face you, “You still plan on following after those Hwarang of yours, right?”

“I hope to,” you nod.

“Tell them that Jeong was one of the bravest, most ferocious warriors I’ve ever met,” Sicheng says with a smile.

“Sicheng…” Praising humans isn’t exactly one of his habits, especially to the degree he’s described Jaehyun. Imagining what he must have witnessed with Jaehyun moves you almost as much as it must have moved him, a bittersweet warmth swells in your chest.

“Understood, I’ll pass on the word.”

Donghyuck sighs, “Don’t bother. Isn’t this just another worm you’ve let crawl into your insipid heart?”

“Well, look who’s talking. Who was it exactly that you came all the way here for?” Sicheng pokes, “I bet you’re just as curious in seeing what’s going to happen to the Hwarang.”

“Hardly. I am but a passenger of circumstance, which has taken me on the same path as them.” He shakes his head, “Enough wasting time, we have a ship to catch.”

“Okay,” you nod and turn to the other Demons. “Sicheng, Dejun, please take care of yourselves.”

As you bid the two of them farewell, Donghyuck and you see yourselves out to port. Once arriving, you find the harbor to be eerily quiet.

“Have they already left?” You wonder aloud, not seeing many people bustling around.

“It appears as though the boat has already left the harbor…” Donghyuck looks to the western ocean, “I believe we just missed them. They couldn’t have gotten far, so we may be able to see their boat. Do you want to try?”

“Of course. Let’s go.”

Donghyuck and you ascend a nearby beach bluff where you hope to get a clearer view. A cascade of maroon ripples across the vast sea in a reflection of the wide sunset, and in the distance, you watch the shadow of a boat on the horizon.

“Do you think that’s them?” You ask Donghyuck as you squint from the light on the water.

“I believe so.”

You had traveled two Kingdoms searching for them. Now, once again, you have just barely missed them, left in the dust. A sharp pang shoots up through your nose and suddenly you find yourself fighting back a wave of tears. Your teeth dig into your lower lip, hoping to not let this deluge of self-pity come to the surface.

“If you want to cry so badly, why don’t you?” Donghyuck asks.

“No…” You shake your head, the tears still welling up in your eyes. “Only because I can imagine how much pain they’re in right now… I have no right to shed tears when it’s not me who’s fighting out there.”

Donghyuck sighs out of frustration and closes his eyes, pausing as he shifts back and forth, “You know, just because you’re not good with a sword doesn’t mean you’re not fighting. Although your methods are quite different from the Hwarang’s, you’ve had your own demons to fight. Even I’ve noticed it.”

It feels warm to hear his gentle words acknowledging how much you’ve been through.

After seeing your father’s death, your lukewarm reunion with Ahro and visiting the village of your birth. Then your revelation of what had occurred to your friends. A tempest of grief gathered its winds in your heart, continuing to swirl with fervor as you try now not to collapse.

You can’t cry… If you do, then you’ll blur your sight of the ship that houses the remainder of your friends in the Hwarang.

“I’ll turn around if you’d like. Cry as much as you wish.” Donghyuck points his nose towards the ocean, which glows with hues of orange and gold under the glimmer of the late afternoon.

In this moment, the levee holding back your tears bursts. Your forehead presses against Donghyuck’s back, hands grabbing hold as well. Wailing as quietly as you can, you lament them once again slipping through your fingers. The ship begins to vanish beyond the horizon, sailing into the ocean’s furthest tendrils. Soon, it disappears from sight. You listen to the roar of the ocean for a moment before Donghyuck speaks,

“I promise you… I will take you to them.” His voice low, yet urging, “Just be patient… okay?”

Donghyuck, who previously seemed hell bent on abducting you at any cost from the Hwarang…. Now the shoe is on the other foot, and he’s promised to keep you safe on this last journey. Although, you’re unsure of when it’d actually happen.

February 11th, 667 – Geumji, Kingdom of Silla Your initial attempts to leave the harbor, to chase after the Hwarang, proved fruitless. Negotiating with ship captains to allow to random strangers, who for all intents and purposes where no more than stowaways, is aa difficult sell. And finding a captain to go northward in the winter months is a harder find.

Donghyuck had sensed that your search would require more time than originally thought, an so he rented out a nearby mansion in the city center for the time being.

Funnily enough, you’re becoming used to your cozy life in Geumji.

Word reaches you that the siege of Pyongyang is under way. And your want to reach the Hwarang grows by the day.

Sitting in your room, you find yourself becoming too distracted to continue sewing, heaving a small sigh to yourself in the comfort of the mansion. Almost two months have passed since you heard about the report of the massive invasion now taking place in Pyongyang. But, even as the threat of conflict looms in a nearby city, leads for a means to reach Pyongyang are elusive.

Your circumstance had become particularly dire when Goguryeo forces began to attack ships sailing in from the south. Thanks to increased tensions, locating a suitable ship for a civilian like yourself is near impossible.

It’s been so long since your separation from the Hwarang, which only worsens your anxiety about realistically being able to find them. Would you ever be able reunite with them?

It isn’t that Donghyuck’s promise of safely reaching them is wearing thin with you, but each day without progress is making you impatient.

Each day, Donghyuck and Dejun flit around every market and tavern, eavesdropping on conversations to gather intelligence and leads for transport to Pyongyang. For yourself, you’d been tasked with keeping the homestead tidy, taking time each day to prepare meals and mend clothes.

The sound of the door opening makes your ears perk up; you straighten yourself reflexively.

“…I’m back.” Donghyuck says as he saunters into the room, settling down at the table in the center of the main room.

“Welcome back,” you say, quickly moving onto your question, “Did you hear any leads about ships departing…?”

His silence is deafening; no such luck today. He seems especially aggrieved, given his slumped body language.

“Did something happen?” You ask tentatively. “I feel like you’re keeping something from me…”

Silence.

“Donghyuck?”

His mannerisms in his foulest moods are uncannily cat-like: dismissive to a spiteful degree. You know that sitting idly by only gives him time to let his attitude fester.

“Regardless,” you say with a smile, “Thank you for searching for our sake. I’m going to start dinner so please, make yourself comfortable. Or would you rather I wait a while and let you rest?”

“Neither.” He says shortly, “My throat is rather dry, I desire a cup of gokaju before dinner. Fetch me a bottle at once.”

“Sure,” you nod, complying with him, “Although I’m only going to grab you one as drinking too much isn’t good for your health.”

“Hmph. I bring death to those who threaten to waste my precious time and you worry about my health?” He asks, “Besides, gokaju is more of a medicine than a poison, and as you’ve noticed, I’m sick. Make it three bottles.”

“Hey,” you frown, “Don’t take your frustrations out on me. Also, it’s only a ‘medicine’ when you drink it in moderation—not when you’re piss drunk. Haven’t you heard the phrase, ‘The last drop makes the cup run over’?”

He glares at you repugnantly, no doubt incensed by your brevity in challenging him. Yet, after have spending nearly every moment of the last two years together, you’re beginning to peel back the layers, making his behaviors a bit easier to decode. Your intense stares go on for a few more moments, pressure bubbling to the surface like sulfur.

As tension reaches a breaking point, the two of you break the silence at the exact same time.

“Fine… Two will do.”

“Oh, very well… I’ll get two for you.”

You laugh at this, finding yourself more comfortable with his petulant veneer. It gives you the confidence to assert yourself more and more.

“How playfully cavalier of you,” he notes, “So far, neither a vessel nor the location of one has been ascertained. Doesn’t this bother you?”

“I can’t help my anxiousness over it but… To tell you the truth, I’m grateful of all that you and Dejun have done for me recently.” You’re not speaking of just their diligence in Geumji. Many times, you could have fallen prey to a bevy of dangers while outside of the Hwarang’s custody, but Donghyuck has repeatedly saved your life during your time together. “If I had to deal with all of this alone, then there’s no telling where I’d be at this point.”

You pause for a moment, “You know, I was intimidated by you at first. But now, I have to admit that I owe much to you. So, from the bottom of my heat… Thank you.” With every ounce of appreciation you can muster, you admit to him your sincere debt of gratitude.

“That’s more like it,” he smirks. “Humility is a more attractive color on you. From now on, feel free to humble yourself by complimenting me however much you deem fit.”

“Oh please,” you nearly groan, “I just did. Don’t make me regret it already…” Throwing a petty fit, you pout your lips as Donghyuck chuckles to himself.

Suddenly, his expression drops and he appears stern without missing a beat, “Earlier, you had a question. I have a response.”

“Oh?” Your heart seems keen on bursting from your chest, wondering if he had in fact located a ship.

“Actually, this would be a better discussion for after we’ve eaten. Prepare yourself in the meantime.”

Your meal is shared in silence, you have trouble finding room for your last piece of fish, so you stand to collect the dishes. After cleaning the plates and utensils, you stand in front of Donghyuck calmly, waiting for him to share any possible information about a ship.

“So, in regards to leaving for Goguryeo… Their army has graciously offered us permission to board their ship.”

“Really?!” You exclaim.

“Of course. In what world would lying about that benefit me?”

“Thank you!” you cry out, “At long last… I can finally reunite with the Hwarang.” Euphoric tears form behind your eyelids, and once more you thank Donghyuck.

As in usual custom, he bears no immediate reaction, his expression unchanged.

“Donghyuck?”

“I cannot guarantee that either of us will find them, however.” He closes his eyes momentarily, “In all honesty, the chances are slim to none.”

“What…?” Somehow, the message behind his words fails to register, and you fall silent. “Wh-Why not? We’re still going to take our chances and board that ship, aren’t we?”

A sneaking suspicion that things are about to change spurns the furious pounding of your heart. His words had been spoken eerily, worming their way into your heart like a haunting premonition.

“The Hwarang were some of the first men that breached the walls of Pyongyang, and while the city is almost in Silla’s favor… Well… Not many men survive the initial attacks. Their fate has spoken, we just aren’t privy to it yet.”

You hold your breath, predicting the worst. Years of blood, toil and sweat, spent in countless battlefields over the corpses of friends and foes… They can’t be gone yet… They can’t. By the time you set sail for Pyongyang, there might not be anyone alive to greet you.

Just as you’re on the brink of collapsing, Donghyuck reaches out his hand to steady you. “Stand. You committed yourself to witnessing their end firsthand. Or were those all hollow gestures?”

“I… wasn’t lying.” His words slap you across the face. Donghyuck has a habit of provoking your insecurities, as if he takes pleasure from seeing you panic. For some reason, this is different as he strikes a potent nerve.

“So, if you were being truthful, then it must be clear to you. Their sense of pride. The journey they’ve traveled, and how you are woven into their myth.” He says, grip tightening on you, “Your tenure together may have been brief, remember them as they were; remember how they honored their code. This duty is yours alone… Should you survive, then you will be the sole keeper of their memory.”

Now, unlike any moment prior, is the moment that you realize how fiercely Donghyuck’s crimson eyes burn, how they can spark inspiration within you to do anything.

“Okay…” All you can muster is a nod in response. It’s still too soon for you to accept grief, let alone wallow in a pool of sorrow, “But, we’re still able to board the ship, right?”

“Yes…”

“Okay, then let’s leave for Pyongyang. To see the Hwarang, whatever state they’re in.”

Upon hearing your response, Donghyuck’s mouth turns into a grin, and you swear you see a twinkle in his eye, “Very well, I shall take you there. Besides I vowed to do so. You can always count on a Demon to be true to their word…”

“Thank you.” You take a deep gulp of air, letting yourself process the weight of the undertaking you’d just accepted.

Thinking back on it, your father and brother… In fact, almost every warrior you’d ever met imparted something significant to you before passing on. Your heart is keenly aware that another memory, as Donghyuck had described, would be waiting for you in Pyongyang. It’s the end of a long, long war.

You’re sure that your journey with the Hwarang, too, will succumb at this war’s culmination, and nothing you say or do will ever fully prepare you.

February 27th, 667 – Nampo Bay The scents of rust and salt greet you as you board the small trading vessel, and you think of the strings Donghyuck and Dejun must have pulled to make this happen. Your initial impression of them had been heartless monsters set on destroying the Hwarang… But here you are, finding yourself thanking them repeatedly. No matter how many times you say it, it never captures how indebted you feel to their kindness.

“Shall we?” Donghyuck asks, holding out his hand to help you step onto the deck.

“Yes,” you say, taking his hand and jumping aboard, “Let’s go.”

A faint smile curls onto his lips as his hand leaves yours.

As day turns to night, you sit atop the ship’s deck, letting the cold air whip by your cheeks. Beyond this stretch of water are the remaining members of the Hwarang… You’d been so close to Pyongyang earlier last year; you find it funny now that you’ll be approaching it from the opposite side.

As you find yourself lost in thought, you’re startled by Donghyuck’s presence next to you.

“We should arrive no later than tomorrow,” he says coolly, “Have you given any more consideration to your aim in witnessing their final moments?”

Your gaze falls to the deck, you think that you’re ready for it, but the more you inch towards Pyongyang, the more hesitant you become. The reality is that the number of men who fought and sacrificed their lives is a mystery to you, and you’ve been oblivious to it for some time. For all you know, them men whom you so desperately pine to see could be long gone, their bodies ravaged in unspeakable ways.

Taeil, Taeyong, Yongqin, Yuta, Jaemin, Jaehyun… Over the past two years, news of their deaths had traveled to you while tending to your own business with Donghyuck. You fooled yourself into thinking that, somehow, not bearing firsthand witness to their deaths means there’s a chance that they’re still alive but…

“I need to see it for myself.” You state firmly, looking out over the water, “I want to see their frit, their conviction, and I want to be there for them… when it all comes to a close. Since we keep their memory, we must witness every second of it for the sake of its truth.

Donghyuck keeps his gaze fixed on the northern star, which softly flickers above the ocean. It takes him a moment to speak, “I hate the cold. Let’s return inside.”

You follow shortly after him, hearing the waves crash against the side of the ship as you go below deck.

February 28h, 667 – Nampo Bay Just as Donghyuck had predicted, the ship arrives on the outskirts of Goguryeo the very next day. In order to travel upriver to Pyongyang, you move to a smaller ship, dropping anchor before hastily boarding.

As you travel upstream, the sounds of fighting and the smell of smoke pervades through the air.

“We’re sailing right into the thick of it…” Donghyuck murmurs as your heart drops, realizing that the Hwarang are likely fighting for their lives right now. In your anxious haste, you seem ready to sprint from the small ship as it docks at a port outside of Pyongyang before Donghyuck calls out to you.

“Donghyuck…?” He wraps his arms around your shoulders from behind, your body going warm in his tender embrace. The suddenness of his gesture throws you off, entirely. “Is something wrong?”

He offers no immediate answer, the boat gently rocking underfoot. In fact, you’re totally in the dark as to why he’s acting the was that he is, given you cannot see his expression. Instead, you can only rely on the tight warmth of his embrace.

“Nothing can stop you from going, can it?” He murmurs, but it almost sounds like a request. “There is still a chance of saving yourself from the pain of watching their demise unfold.”

Contrary to your initial discussion, Donghyuck seems less concerned with the fact that you want to go, the focus now being on your well-being. It begs an answer, one that still needs forming.

A lump forms in your throat as you question yourself, moments from now, whether or not you had adequately prepared yourself for it… You may encounter the corpses of friends you care for deeply. Will you be able to cope with it? Can you, like the rest of the Hwarang, grapple with loss, conquer it, and come out all the stronger?

“Yes,” you grit your teeth, you can’t have any doubts, “I’ll go. To where everyone’s fighting… But I do have one request.”

“What is it?” His breath tickles your ear.

You rest your hands softly on his that still lay coiled around your body, “Will you stay with me… until the bitter end? If I were to stand witness to the Hwarang’s demise, and it becomes difficult for me to keep my composure, let alone stand… Would you be there to lift me back up?”

Under his embrace, you can feel his muscles tense, and a small exhalation of air from him is enough to tell you that he’s smiling. It takes him a beat to conjure a reply, “How stupid of you to ask… Do you take me for a man who does back on his word? I will follow you, no matter the distance.”

A part of you had expected him to respond as such, but hearing those words fall so comfortably from his mouth evokes a warm feeling in your stomach. Although his response is rather arrogant, its delivery is muted by the way his arms pin you next to his beating heart, and through this intimate expression, he lays bare his truthful self.

“Thank you…” You’re beginning to lose count of how many times you had thanked him during your time together. Because of him, you’re alive today, ready to brace whatever comes next.

After disembarking the small boat, Donghyuck and you make your cautious approach towards the city, unsure of who or what could be lurking in the surrounding forest.

“Wait.” Donghyuck’s voice stops you in your tracks, “Do you hear that? The fight’s stopped.”

“Now that you mention it…” The silence is far more eerie than the score of shouts that were roaring moments earlier.

“Do you think the city’s been captured?” You ask tentatively.

“Maybe… Perhaps fate is telling us something, something we won’t know until we reach their headquarters. Let’s move.”

His body language is suggestive enough for you to assume what may have occurred, but there’s no way in knowing for sure. Each step closer to the city unsettles your nerves. There’s nothing to do but push forward, readying yourself for whatever may await you.

March 1st, 667 – Pyongyang, Kingdom of Silla The Kingdom of Goguryeo is no longer. After weeks of resistance, their terms of surrender lay crumpled in the wind as the Tang and Silla forces finished their chokehold on the city. Over two years removed from the Battle of Seorabeol, the war had drawn to a close. Your arrival within the city is met with a group of familiar faces, in bittersweet celebration of the victory.

“Jeno! Shotaro!” You cry out as you see the two Hwarang standing in front of a dilapidated building you assume used to be their headquarters, “I can’t believe you’re safe!”

“Ah—” Shotaro looks as if he’s seeing a ghost, “Since when have you been in Pyongyang?”

“Our ship docked just the other day. It’s been so long… There’s so much I have to tell you all.” You say quickly, unable to get the words out quickly enough.

“Wait a minute,” Jeno shakes his head, “Just because you had something to tell us… You came all the way out here?! You’re crazy! What if a stray arrow were to hit you, and you got seriously hurt?! The hell were you thinking?!”

“Enough of your whining,” Donghyuck stops him, “As long as she’s under my protection, there will be no such threats to her safety, especially ones as harmless s you describe.”

“Hey! You’re—!” Jeno exclaims.

“Aren’t you the Lord of a Demon Clan?” Shotaro asks gruffly, “What is your business with her?”

“Actually,” you interrupt, “Donghyuck was my escort here.”

“Are you sure about that?” Jeno asks worriedly, “You don’t have to lie for his sake. He’s not keeping you hostage, is he?”

It’s natural for them to have aroused suspicions regarding Donghyuck, considering he had plagued the Hwarang for years in Seorabeol. The two Hwarang look at one another with puzzled expressions.

“So… Are the men here what remains of the Hwarang?” You ask gently, “What happened to the Commander and Sungchan…?”

Jeno’s shoulders slump, his teeth biting into his lip. Your stomach sinks in anticipation, noting his souring body language.

“Sungchan didn’t make it… We lost him at Namhansanseong…” You grimace at his words, nothing softening the blow of someone notifying you that a friend has passed away. No matter how many times you’re given news of someone’s death, it absolutely shatters you.

“And the Commander…?”

“In a last-ditch effort, the remaining Goguryeo forces attacked our supplies outside of the city, the Commander left to lead the reinforcements… We received word that he, too, was killed in action during the skirmish.”

Even Kun… The fearless leader of the Hwarang, who picked up the pieces after the execution of his beloved predecessor, hadn’t been spared from this war.

“We have yet, mind you, to discover his remains.” Shotaro says, “All we have not is some information we coaxed from a Goguryeo soldier who encountered the Commander.”

By virtue of his unstoppable rage, Kun had lifted the Hwarang by the scruff of its neck and led the frontline proudly. The remnants of the group are preserved in honor of the memory of his last stand.

“Jeno, was it?” Donghyuck says, “Word is that you’re responsible for tendering the Hwarang now that you’ve been promoted to Chief. What compelled you to accept something like that? You’ve barely any men to lead. Surely it must scare you to take up such a threshold.”

“The burden of responsibility was there for the taking, and someone needed to step up. Someone needs to rebuild, laying the foundation of a new Hwarang with the same resolve that the Commander and Chief stove for,” Jeno says resolutely.

Donghyuck smirks at this, “Just what they need—another fool who can’t think two steps ahead, huh? Look alive, kid. The war’s over. The way you’re doing things, you might as well etch a line on your neck so the next enemy of Silla knows where to swing.”

“What’s that supposed to mean?!”

“Jeno!” You try and calm him, “He doesn’t mean any harm by that!”

“Your allies will be sweeping the city soon… It’s best we leave,” Donghyuck says, turning on his heels and swiftly walking away.

“You should go with him,” Shotaro says quietly, “I’m not sure if anyone recognized him as an ally of Goguryeo… If they were to rope you into that… I’m not sure what may happen.”

“Well then, Jeno, Shotaro,” you smile at them softly, “Please take care of yourselves.”

“You too,” Shotaro returns your smile.

“For all we know, this may be the last we see of each other,” Jeno says quietly, “but, be safe. We’ll see each other in the next life.”

They send you off warmly, waving as you trek after Donghyuck. You know the path ahead of them won’t be an easy one. The Hwarang had been all but decimated, regaining their numbers or even getting approval from the Crown to regroup would be a difficult task. They’re holding onto an inspiring devotion in the name of the Hwarang, and what they stand for.

April 25th, 667 – Pyongyang, Kingdom of Silla Nearly two months have passed since your arrival to the city. In the throes of spring, you find your nerves calmed by the gentle winds blowing in from the coast. After separating from Jeno and Shotaro, you track Kun’s journey to the storehouses where he’d last been seen, hoping to uncover the whereabouts of his remains.

“Donghyuck,” you turn to look at your companion, “You mentioned something to me about how humans only wage wars for wealth and power, but… Do you… honestly still believe that?”

Prior to your time here, you’re sure he would’ve nodded without giving it a second though. But recently there’s been a noticeable shift in his attitude. After killing both Jinsang and Ahro, and witnessing the end of the Hwarang, seeing all they had died for… Perhaps he’s had an epiphany of sorts, or at least, is more receptive to notions that he once viewed as foreign, if not beneath him.

“This experience has been enlightening,” he admits, “The men who gave their lives in Pyongyang are certainly exceptions to that belief. My views were upheld by the atrocities we saw back in Seorabeol, but Kun was no fool, not did he suffer any delusions of grandeur. He fought, like any man should, to his death.”

“That’s a good point…” You aren’t sure what sore of magic the Hwarang had conjured to keep hold of their strength in the face of certain death. As Donghyuck had described, they knew their odds, of their position, yet somehow were steadfast in their convictions against Goguryeo.

“Take a long look at everything around you…” He says, motioning to the carnage of war, “This place is no more than a graveyard, but to you and the people who mattered, it is a memorial to the will and testament of the Hwarang’s character.”

“Even then…” you murmur, noting silently that they had been rudely disbanded in the face of victory.

“They failed. Some of them held a notion that their idealistic worldview would stand up to scrutiny, and that notion was proven false,” Donghyuck sighs loftily, “They are fools for believing otherwise, and so the world went, spinning without them.”

As painful as it is to listen, you understand why Donghyuck may feel this way. Yet, you totally disagree with him,

“They were warriors…” You push, “It’s not like they couldn’t keep up with what was going on. It’s that they refused diverging their path out of principle. I’m certain they had a good reason for staying true to their convictions.”

“It never ceases to amaze me how hastily you jump to conclusions,” he smiles, “Listen back to what I said. I hadn’t labeled them fools out of spite… But, chasing such an elusive dream of honor… is impossible. Demons don’t often value upholding personal convictions, however temporal they may be.” He speaks vaguely, but it’s likely the greatest compliment that he can ever give to anyone, much more in reference to the Hwarang.

In a way, you detect a hint of envy in his statement, as if he wishes there were opportunities to out his needs before the collective needs of his kin.

A long silence stretches between you, broken only by your timid musing, “Where do you plan on going from here?”

“Before engaging in the bane that is human affairs, we Demons lived a peaceful, secluded life. I pine, quite dearly, to return to it,” He says simply, wistfully, “I tire of participating in the frivolous squabbles.”

“I see…” You had never thought to consider him a transplant in this world. How does he cope with strife? With the pettiness of human conflict?” The risk, of course, is losing touch with his concept of ‘home’ in these destitute conditions.

“I have a lingering suspicion that it’s only a matter of time before the remnants of Goguryeo call on me just as Baekje did Sicheng…” He hums, “Heading back to my clan is my utmost concern, so that I may prepare my people to head into hiding where they will be out of the humans’ grasp.”

“Back to your clan…” This means that your journey with him has ended, and that it’s time for you to part ways. Your time together these past two years…There’s a part of yourself that had slid into some fantasy that the two of you would travel together indefinitely.

“What about you…?” He asks, causing you to think.

Each of your affairs had been concluded. In a way, you’re without direction or purpose, “I haven’t decided yet. I do think, however, that I’ll stick around here for the time being… I don’t want this memory to fade. I’m not ready to relinquish the resting place of the Hwarang.”

While you speak, Donghyuck brings his fingernails close to his eye level, gazing at them with disinterest, “You know, in the beginning, I only expressed interest in you because you were a Demon, and a female at that… But fate brought me closer to you, and by extension, the Hwarang as well… You overcame the tragic loss of your father and brother with unexpected maturity, proving that there is more than meets the eye with you.”

This is the first time he’s complimented you outright. In all honesty, it leaves you a bit perplexed on how to respond, “I didn’t really have a choice… Father, Ahro, and the Hwarang… I just dealt with losses as they came, as there wasn’t any use dwelling on the past.”

“No need to be modest,” he smiles and lowers his hand, “If I had never embarked on this quest to locate the members of the Hwarang with you, then I would have likely never become aware of their real selves. Heh, who would’ve guessed you were capable of teaching me something?”

His words confuse you, having become so familiar with his sardonic remarks you’re unsure if these are genuine. All of a sudden, he outstretches his arms toward you.

By the time you realize what’s occurring, his face, stunningly handsome in spite of his intimidating expression, is merely inches from yours. Taken aback, your heart flutters as his hand moves to cup the back of your head, pulling you in ever so slightly until your lips are pressed together. Numbness trickles from the top of your head, your lips remaining shut and vexed.

Although… You don’t mind this. Donghyuck flicks his tongue gently over your lips, and before you know it, you’re locked within an intimate throe. There’s an inexorable draw to him, an energy that tingles your face just from the touch of his lips. All of your deep longings awoken by the heat of this sensuous kiss, it makes you unable to focus on anything else.

And just when you think your heart’s ready to burst—he relinquishes you, just as quickly as he’d pulled you into his embrace.

For a moment, you’re entirely speechless, perhaps wide-eyed enough to elicit a smile from Donghyuck, “Let this kiss stand proof that I do not consider you a stranger”

“Where did that come from…?” You somehow manage to escape your stupor long enough to ask him a singular question.

“As soon as you are ready, come find me.”

“Wait, so you mean…” Why is he behaving so cryptically? All of this feels so unclear, and you’re still reeling from the kiss…

Donghyuck, however, is unconcerned with your incoherent ramblings, continuing on without bringing to attention your flustered demeanor, “And if you don’t, well,” he grins, “then I’ll come for you.”

Although you had accomplished everything you set out to do in Pyongyang… It seems as if Donghyuck has his own unfinished business to attend to. Granted, you aren’t totally unopposed to the idea… As you bookend one chapter of your lives, it’s time to start anew. And for the first time in years, you’re ready for whatever life has to throw at you. You can shed your skin and blossom with nothing to tether you down. November 16, 667 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla You stand alone outside of your childhood home, cold vapors escape your mouth with each breath as you bundle yourself in a blanket. Your restlessness is further spurred by the incessant urge to clean the aging home. So, you enter the chilly yard, gathering the dead leaves scattered along the walkway into a neat pile with a broom.

The season brings in winter festivals, keeping the small-town buzzing, you can see people hustling up and down the street at nearly all times of the day. After returning to Toehwa-hyeon your first order of business had been to write Doctor Namekawa a heartfelt letter. He replied almost immediately, expressing sincere relief after having been notified of your safety. He made a point of iterating that if I never needed aid, you can reach out to him, which had warmed your heart.

Your second order of business was writing to Sooyoung. She insisted that you stay with her in her village. And although you appreciated her generous offer, you refused. It’s because—

Doctor Heo,” an older woman smiles gratefully, “You have no idea how thankful I am for your help. Do you remember me? You inspected my child’s cold.”

All of a sudden, you’re approached by your next-door neighbor, who sings you words of praise.

“It was really no issue,” you shake your head, “How is he doing?”

“Wonderfully!” She beams, “Back when Jinsang closed his clinic, and I was told that you left for Seorabeol, I was so worried about you… But seeing you here safe brings a tear to my eye.” Noticing your silence, she continues, “Enough about that… You aren’t spending the winter here alone, are you?”

“Ah, yes… Sadly, my father passed away, so I’ll have to make do…”

“But, living alone as a woman is so dangerous,” she says with ample worry, “The war may be over, but evil always lurks when you least expect it to… So, what’s next for you, then? Do you still plan on running the clinic from this house?”

“That’s something I have yet to figure out myself,” you chuckle.

“Whatever you do, it can’t be easy to do it alone, can it?” She hums, “Say, I have an idea! Why don’t I find a nice man to introduce you to? Couldn’t hurt!”

“Huh? Um, well…”

“You see,” she speaks quickly, “Right around the corner from Seongji bridge, there’s a quaint, little medicine shop there. One of the clerks is…”

“Oh sure!” You say to interrupt her, “I’ll be sure to check it out when I have the chance…”

“Are you sure?” She asks, “The two of you would be perfect! Same age, I think, too… Ah, well, a pretty girl like you should have no problem finding suitors, so please let me know whenever you’re ready, and I’d be happy to help!” Your neighbor flashes a bright grin, nodding her head politely before waving you goodbye.

You can’t help but sigh after she’s gone. It’s kind of her to express an interest in your well-being but…

“Finding a suitor…” You hum, “Maybe it is time for me to start thinking about settling down…” Although, you still have some wounds to lick, finding yourself too preoccupied to think about it just yet. If you had to marry someone, though…

It’s almost as if you can feel the ghost of Donghyuck’s lips atop yours, you have to shake your head to rid yourself of the thought.

Donghyuck had been so patient with you during your separation from the Hwarang. And when you lost Ahro and your father, he had been a shoulder to cry on, offering you words of comfort. He’d even gone to witness the end of the Hwarang with you.

Even if you were to meet another man, you’re unsure if the memories made with Donghyuck could ever be bested by another, but that’s assuming anyone else could understand what you’d gone through. Although Donghyuck said he’d come for you when your heart is ready, so much time has passed that you’re beginning to wonder if he really meant it.

Just as you’re thinking of him, continuing to sweep the stones in front of your home, you nearly brush over the feet of a passerby.

“Oh, I’m—” You look up to apologize and nearly choke on your works. The yellow embroidery should’ve given it away… Are you hallucinating right now? You rub your eyes incredulously, finding that Lee Donghyuck remains in front of you. Like a specter from an ethereal mist, he’s here.

“I’ve come back for you,” he says simply.

As soon as you hear his familiar, arrogant tone, the hairs along your neck stand up and you find that the broom that had once been in your hand is now falling onto the ground.

“What’s with that look?” Donghyuck questions with a slight frown, “This is the warmest welcome you can muster after being deprived of my presence for months?”

There’s no mistaking that this is him. Almost eight months have passed since you last spoke, yet he is still his usual, callous self. Honestly, you can’t expect any less from him.

“So, you really did come back…” Tears prick at the corners of your eyes.

“Hadn’t I mentioned that Demons always keep their word? Or, do you still doubt me?”

“Whether or not I believe you is one thing, but you can’t blame me for starting to worry,” you begin, “I mean, I’ve received no correspondence from you in the time we’ve been apart… Nothing… Not a letter or messenger…” Your eyes shift away from him, and you rush to wipe the tears from your puffy, swollen eyes. You had been your only friend throughout this period, save for the encroaching winter.

“You can just say how much you missed me,” he teases with a smile.

“I- I never said that!” You know there’s no hiding that, though. You had missed him. But, he’s so frustratingly smug about it, as if had been his intention all along to keep you waiting.

Just as you’re about to offer your own snarky response, he stops you with an outstretched arm. He draws you in close, pressing his lips against yours. Instinctively, your head jerks backwards.

“What do you think you’re doing?!”

“I told you I’d be back for you,” he murmurs as a well of emotions stirs tirelessly in your stomach, glancing back and forth between euphoric joy and trepidation. Your heart is being pulled in a thousand directions. “Just so you know, I’ve begun to make arrangements to migrate the Lee clan to a new home. A place which, if everything goes as planned, would be out of reach from any of the Kingdom’s squabbles. A safe place.”

He hums softly and you can feel the vibrations in his chest, “You are the last piece of the puzzle. You will come with me, won’t you?”

“Hold on a minute! I can’t just up and leave everything so suddenly,”

“Sudden?” He asks, “What’s sudden about it? I’m not here to play games. You kept me waiting for eight months. Actually, not just eight... If you add up all the time I wasted while you were in the Hwarang’s custody, it’s even longer.”

You thought that your last interaction would have changed things, but he’s as pompous as ever. You’re so aghast with embarrassment that you have nothing to say, not that he would listen to it.

Yet, as the world seemed to spiral out of control, Donghyuck had remained constant, unbending and unbroken, and always by your side.

“Well?” He asks once more, “Are you coming with me, or not?”

As you search for the right words to say, it leaves an awkward space to which Donghyuck thins his scarlet eyes gleefully, “There was no need to bother with asking, was there?”

You shake your head and he slowly closes the distance between the two of you once more. From the moment you parted in Pyongyang, your heart yearned for his embrace once more. It’s a feeling you’re sure to cherish for the rest of your life.

Donghyuck may be a pain, but he’s your pain, and you’re all the better for it.

#haechan x reader #haechan angst #haechan fluff #nct imagines #nct angst #nct fluff #nct 127 angst #nct 127 fluff #nct dream angst #nct dream imagines

102 notes · View notes

jungwooisms · 2 years

Text

hwarang | l.donghyuck

ACT I

pairing: lee donghyuck x female!reader genre: historical au, fluff, angst, supernatural members: moon taeil, suh youngho (johnny), lee taeyong, nakamoto yuta, qian kun, kim doyoung, li yongqin (ten), jeong jaehyun, dong sicheng (winwin), kim jungwoo, wong yukhei (lucas), lee minhyung (mark), xiao dejun (xiaojun), na jaemin, huang renjun, lee jeno, osaki shotaro, jeong sungchan, park jisung warnings: crass humor and language, blood, violence, mentions of suicide, alcohol, possessiveness, minor character death, war, some historical inaccuracies for the sake of plot progression word count: 71.4k a/n: a big thanks to @pinkypark, your comments really made me finish this way earlier than i planned haha it is important to read the prologue first to understand the context of this! i can’t link it here but it’s on my masterlist!

DISCLAIMER: as some parts of the Hwarang series appear in every route, some scenes will appear the same with major to minor differences within the text.

ACT I - THE TROUBLE WITH BAEKJE

February 1st, 661 – Shinson Temple, Kingdom of Silla The cold, gray sky of winter greets you with its hollow breath as you swing the door to your room open, any heat that has accumulated overnight swiftly dissipating as swaths of blustery air invade the space. From the looks of it, thick, gray clouds had begun to accumulate over the city outside the walls of the Hwarang’s compound, forecasting at least a light blanket of snow in the coming hours. You’d have to make sure that the fires from the kitchen aren’t low so that the ondol kept warm under the building’s floors.

Before you move to exit the room, you reach to grab a jacket from your handful of things, sighing as you catch sight of a piece of paper hidden under your coat. It’s the letter that had brought you here in the first place. Nearly two weeks have passed since your arrival at the Hwarang’s headquarters, the same frigidity that had met you on your first meeting is still ingrained into them, the same distrust, no doubt, but it isn’t as if you could leave.

A frown as you look down at your clothes after shrugging the jacket onto your shoulders. Instead of your father’s clothes that you’d arrived in, they’d given you robes of their own. Not the blues of their commanders or warriors, but the deep green of their lesser ranks; of the pageboys, cooks, and less desirable positions within their numbers. They were and are foreign to you, you’d much rather wear the clothes that felt more familiar, even if they are a man’s. But you aren’t meant to raise suspicion, just keep your head low until they find out more information of your father’s whereabouts. A female hiding out in the Hwarang’s headquarters would raise suspicion, start rumors, and with how much the Hwarang hold themselves to a gold standard, it would be irreparable to their reputation.

Kun, the Hwarang’s commander, had given you strict instructions to keep up the facade as a male. Saying that, while it would be harmful to their reputation if the word got out, it would also be a beacon for those looking for your father, or perhaps even you. Only those that you’d met on the first day, as well as a handful of others within their leadership, know of your true identity.

As you move your hands away from the hem of your jacket, your fingers brush against the blade that Kun had given back to you the day you’d arrived. It’d been somewhat ceremonial in your household, not a thing of use as there was no need for it. Your father had claimed it to be an heirloom kept in the family since the birth of Silla as a kingdom. You aren’t sure of the validity of that statement though, as the metal isn’t tinged with rust, it looks newly forged at times.

Regardless of the validity of the blade, your father made you take several lessons with your town’s local head guard, who’d only taught a girl because her father was a well-known physician. Also, because your father could treat any injury you sustained while practicing, which wasn’t ever needed as any scrapes or scratches you obtained healed quickly. When you were little, you didn’t think much of it. Yet as you grew older you realized that you healed faster than most. Your father said it must’ve been a gift from the Heavens but urged you not to tell anyone about it. And you hadn’t, fearing that those around you would treat you like a witch or a monster if they were to find out.

Swordplay was never something you took much interest in, seeing that you’d probably never put the techniques you’d learned to use. Besides, you aren’t a bloodthirsty fiend looking for a chance to use it anyway, you’d rather help people than hurt them.

You’re pulled from your thoughts for a moment as a wang-do, one of the common Hwarang soldiers, passes by your room. They lock eyes with you for a moment, a scowl sneering onto their lips before they break their gaze and continue to stride past. Private rooms were only given to personnel of a higher rank within the Hwarang, and seeing how you are a newcomer, you can somewhat understand the resentment some of them have with your staying not in the typical quarters of those of your rank.

With more guilt than not as you accept the hospitality of the Hwarang, you try to help as much as you can, despite the wishes of the commander. To the average wang-do, it probably seems as if you’re receiving special treatment from the captains. Despite the actuality of them keeping watch over you to make sure you wouldn’t spew their secrets; it would be confusing, aggravating even, from an outsider’s perspective. But, even if you were allowed free reign of the headquarters, it’s not as if you could speak to any of them, most were nobles from families of high wealth. And your father isn’t poor by any means, but the wealth disparity between the nobles of the capital and nobles of the countryside is nothing to scoff at.

So, you remain alone, for the time being, finding that the best way to not draw attention to yourself is to become practically invisible. Maybe if Kun allowed you to go out and search for your father you would find yourself more useful, but he’d just left for Hanseong a few days prior. Seeing as the man in charge of your stay here isn’t available, maybe your best bet would be to stay in your room until something of note happened, despite how aggravatingly boring it is.

The room is practically empty, only a bed, a small chest of drawers and a writing desk to keep you company. It reminds you of when your father would leave for his patient visits, disappearing for days at a time and leaving you alone at home. Although it isn’t the same, those visits had the promise of return. Waiting for someone you knew would come back and waiting for the unknown are vastly different things.

As your reflections manifest into exasperated sighs, you barely notice the sound of approaching footsteps heading towards your room.

“There you are!” Taeil, the head of the Hwarang, exclaims once he catches sight of you. “I’ve been looking everywhere for you; I didn’t think you’d be in here!” He beams at you for a moment before stepping into the room with a tray in his hands.

“Oh, I’m… sorry?” you apologize as he sets down the tray onto the writing desk nestled into the corner of the room.

“Ah… wait… This is your room?” He questions as he straightens up, looking around at the interior for a moment.

“It is,” you nod, wondering what he’s thinking about.

“Then I just barged into a woman’s room without even announcing myself!” He looks flustered, his cheeks turning a tinge pink as he realizes his mistake and takes a few hurried steps out of the room.

“It’s alright,” you try to assure him, “After all, it’s not like there’s anything here that I wouldn’t want you to see.”

“Hmm,” he sighs, trying to compose himself, “I thought since we’d assigned you to be Kun’s page your room would be next to his…” It seems as if Kun had neglected to inform Taeil that you hadn’t been made a page. That isn’t in the least bit surprising with how coldly the commander had been treating you.

“I’m not fully equipped to entertain guests, but you’re welcome to come in if you’d like,” you offer, motioning for him to come back inside the room.

“You don’t need to worry,” he waves his hand as if to brush off the thought, “And, if I may, I’ll take you up on your offer.” Taeil then steps back into the room, and as if he notices your hesitant demeanor, he speaks up once more, “And please don’t feel nervous around me, as long as you’re here you’re a guest of the Hwarang.”

You offer him a small smile before looking down to the tray he’d carried in. A look of shock comes over your face as you realize what he’d brought, “This is—!”

Taeil chuckles lightly, “I take it you’re a fan of sweets then? Kun’s adoptive mother likes to send them to us occasionally, and hardly anyone touches them.” Several assorted hangwa lay on the dish, their colors vibrant against the gray gloom of the light shining in from outside, next to a steaming cup of tea. “Go ahead and have some, if you’d like.”

“Thank you very much,” you nod and make your way over to gingerly pick up one of the confections. You look at the pink treat for a moment before taking a bite out of it, savoring the sweetness of it before turning back to Taeil, “It’s delicious.” Snacks like this were only limited to holidays or festivals back home, it’s shocking to hear that Kun’s mother had sent such a thing on a whim.

“I’m glad you like them,” he smiles. Something about Taeil’s presence holds an aura of warmth, that makes you feel more relaxed than you had been with any other member of the Hwarang since your arrival. “Ah, I’ve also heard you haven’t been able to go outside?”

A nod, “That’s right. But if that’s what’s needed for me to stay here, I wouldn’t want to cause any unnecessary trouble by going out.”

He looks almost sympathetic as he parts his lips once more, “I see… I’m glad you understand. I know that Kun can seem a little intimidating at first but he’s a truly caring man.”

“I had no idea…” To see the man who’d kept you in relative solitude for a few weeks as a caring person didn’t seem fully right… But Taeil knows him much better than you do.

“He may be a little strict with you, but only because he’s trying to do what’s in your best interest.” Taeil sighs, a telling sign that maybe he hadn’t agreed with everything Kun had done before. “I’ll speak to him once he gets back, I know this must be hellish for you, but I can only ask you to hang in for a bit longer.”

“Alright,” you nod, “Thank you.” Even if Taeil’s visit hadn’t done much to change your living arrangement, it had lightened your mood ever so slightly.

After Taeil had departed and you’d been left to sulk in your room for a while, you notice that the sun was slowly sinking into the sky. The clouds of earlier in the day had parted to let the golden light shine onto the headquarters as the sun made its descent into the horizon. It feels as if time itself has stopped, the sun hanging in the same place for an unimaginably long time.

All this time in solitude is doing a number on both your mental and emotional state. Any hope of getting out of your isolation seems to slip with each passing moment you spend alone. You had come to the capital to find your father, not get swept up into a world where your life lay on the line should you slip up and say something you shouldn’t.

Even if they were showing you more hospitality than you could’ve asked for, you know that you can’t trust the Hwarang completely.

“They can’t all be that bad… right?” you mutter to yourself as you sit at the small drawing table, flipping through the letters you’d brought with you.

“Has anyone ever called you ‘gullible’, before?” A voice behind you causing you to jump and turn to see who’d spoken.

Your gaze hardens as you see Li Yongqin standing in your doorway, arms crossed with a small frown painted on his lips. “What are you doing here?” Asking as you push yourself to your feet, brushing off your pant legs before facing him fully.

“You didn’t notice me? It’s my turn to keep watch over you,” he sighs, “You talk to yourself a lot, don’t you?”

Had you really been thinking aloud earlier? You bite your lip and try to mentally remind yourself to never do that again as you’d never know who could be listening in on you here. Before you can retort, Yuta steps in from the hallway.

“I think that’s enough picking on her, Yongqin.” He frowns at the other.

“Did you hear me too?” You question, somewhat embarrassed about how this was playing out.

“I only just arrived,” he shakes his head in the negative. “I came to tell you that dinner is ready but,” Yuta’s eyes narrow ever so slightly at you, noticing how incrementally flustered you’re getting, “have I interrupted something?”

“Nothing at all!” You insist, trying to calm yourself.

“I was going to let the two of you continue to speak, but if I had left you two alone, I knew that he’d probably try and get you out of sorts again,” Yuta notes somewhat stoically, probably thinking to the times where he’d been in the exact same situation. His shoulders shrug before the sound of more approaching footsteps reaches you.

Jaemin rushes into the room with loud, heavy stomps. His eyes are somewhat frantic, his voice somewhat annoyed as he speaks, “Hey! It’s dinnertime and I’m absolutely starving.”

“Sorry about that, I’ll be there soon,” Yuta apologizes to the younger.

Jaemin then looks to you, “You too, hurry up or Yukhei’s gonna eat all of the food again.”

“Sorry Na, I’ll be there as soon as I can.” You say as he begins to turn on his heels to leave before stopping himself.

His lips purse together before he looks back at you, “Look… can you drop the ‘Na’ thing? Just call me Jaemin, everyone else here does.”

“Are you sure about that?” You question with an inquisitive tilt of your head.

“Why not? We’re practically the same age, aren’t we? And we don’t need honorifics either, I’m not one of those uptight nobles.” He frowns slightly.

“Alright then… Jaemin.”

“That’s more like it,” he grins, “Now let’s go.”

The walk to the dining area is more familiar than any other route you’d taken thus far during your stay with the Hwarang. Meals are the only time of day that you really can leave your room and have company, even if that company was the other captains of the Hwarang.

“You’re lateee,” a whine from Wong Yukhei as he sits in front of his meal, the lids still atop the dishes to not let the steam out. “Who’s responsible for this? My stomach’s crying and I think my soup’s already gone cold,” he frowns as everyone finishes filing into the hall.

“You mean ‘growling’, Xuxi,” Jaemin snickers as he moves to take his seat next to Yukhei, you moving to sit on the other side of Yukhei, next to Jaehyun. “Sometimes it’s really easy to tell that you’re not from here.”

“That doesn’t even matter, you should all apologize to my stomach,” the taller’s hands fly to his abdomen as the remaining captains take their seats, “it’s been desperate for food since this morning’s practice routines.”

A small ‘tch’ from Jaehyun as he rolls his eyes at the two, “A commoner correcting a noble, I never thought I’d see the day.” There’s a tinge of sarcasm to his voice as he speaks, the tone disappearing as he pipes up once more, “Alright, now that everyone’s here we can eat.”

There’s general chatter amongst the captains as they start to uncover their dishes and begin to dig into their meals. You sit and eat in relative silence until Yukhei’s voice begins to raise on your right.

“There’s hardly enough here to feed a kid, let alone a guy like me,” you turn your head and watch his gaze trail down to Jaemin’s tray to his right, “I guess I’ll have to take yours…” His now empty hands make a grab for the bowl of rice situated atop Jaemin’s tray. “Survival of the—”

“Survival of the fittest my ass, Yukhei,” the younger retorts, sticking out his elbow and hitting the other square in the chest. There’s a hollow thud reverberating around Wong’s ribcage, it sounds painful, but he doesn’t look phased at all. But it did stop him from trying to snatch Jaemin’s meal. “Why’re you always stealing my food?”

Yukhei laughs, you hear Jaehyun also let out a small chuckle to your left. “It’s because of the size difference, Jaem. I’ve got the bigger body; therefore, I need more food.”

“Yeah, but I’m still growing, I’ve gotta eat too!” Jaemin protests, his elbow still locked in place trying to hold the elder back.

“You’d think they’d be more civil around a woman,” Jaehyun, at the tail end of his laughter, notes about the two, “but they’re always like this.”

“I think I’ve gotten used to it by now,” you respond, setting down the cup of tea you’d been drinking before looking at Yuta, who’s gaze seems to have drifted across the room to the bickering pair.

“How we’ve managed so long without them killing one another is beyond me,” he says before eating a spoonful of the soup in front of him. “Are you not eating?” Yuta questions Yongqin, who sits next to him. The latter sits reclined back in his seat, seemingly watching the entertainment in front of him instead of touching his food.

“I’m alright. If I eat too much in one sitting, I get slow.” He nods, reaching for his cup.

“What do you mean ‘slow’?” Yukhei pokes, gaze shifting from Jaemin to Yongqin for a moment and then down to the food on the older’s plates. “But if you’re not going to eat…”

“Go for it,” Yongqin scoots the tray forward with his elbow, passing it over to Yukhei as his hand is still occupied with his cup. “As long as I’ve got makgeolli, I’m alright.”

“Sounds like I’m going with makgeolli too,” Jaehyun sighs and passes a few plates from his tray onto yours after noticing that most of your food was already eaten.

“You don’t have to—” you begin to protest before Yongqin speaks up again.

“Don’t worry about eating too much or being a freeloader,” he says, a weird bubbling of guilt arising in your stomach.

“I understand but I can’t help but feel a little bad…” You state as you look down to the newly acquired plates in front of you.

“If you’re going to let that get to you, you’re never going to get anything you want,” Yuta says pointedly, continuing to eat the mix of soup in front of him.

“A- alright,” you nod, picking up your utensils again and beginning to pick at the newfound food on your tray. Because you never had much contact with others during the daytime, it makes having dinner with the captains something of an entertaining and frightening experience every night. But it’s fun. A small smile curls onto your lips at the thought of some normalcy for a moment when you hear Jaehyun speak again.

“You know we’re not going to hurt you, right?” He’d seen your smile, probably seeing it as you begin to relax, and he seeks to soothe your anxieties about them even more so. His own lips have a soft smile of their own, an honesty brimming with it. Maybe they’d all been trying to put you at ease with their antics.

It was troublesome to navigate, you have conflicted feelings about staying with them and taking up their time and resources, but it isn’t as if you have much of a choice. They seemed to realize that too and instead of scorning you for it, were trying to make the best of it.

But before you could ponder on the notion for much longer, Park Jisung enters the room.

“Captains?” He asks somewhat quietly, but the noise of his arrival had turned all heads towards him. “Do you have a moment?” Voice soft as usual, his eyes teem with a quiet anxiety that you hadn’t ever seen during your brief acquaintance with him. The gaiety that had once erupted in the room comes to a fizz as he begins to speak once more, “I’ve just gotten a letter from Sabi, Taeyong’s been gravely injured during a skirmish.”

Your brows raise as Yongqin shouts out, “What the hell happened?!”

“A group of Baekje revivalists were laying siege to the chancellor’s home, Taeyong and Kun arrived in time to subdue them, however, Taeyong was injured at some point during the fight.”

“Is he going to be alright?” You ask, your hands clenching together, nails digging into the skin.

“According to Kun's letter he is gravely hurt, but the wound is on his left arm.” Jisung’s teeth gnaw at the insides of his cheek for a moment, “It will be hard for him to draw an arrow or wield a blade but it’s almost certain that he will survive this.”

“That’s good,” a sigh of relief leaving you, but the air lies tense from the other captains as they await more answers regarding their comrade’s status.

“Taeyong should be returning in a few days,” Jisung nods, a solemn tone to his voice, “I’ll go and talk with Moon some more regarding the situation, if anything else arises I’ll let you know.” He was already halfway out the door by the time he finished speaking, talking over his shoulder in a bated anxiety to rival that of the rest of the room.

“An injury so bad he can’t hold a bow or sword?” Yuta almost thinks aloud, “He may have severed an artery. He may never carry a blade again if that’s true…” You now begin to understand the severity of the situation, why the air grew heavy and the voices grew low. “If he were to fight one handed against an opponent of similar skill he would almost certainly lose.”

“... If push comes to shove, he’ll have to take it. Taeyong’s not just going to give up like that,” Yongqin frowns, the cup in his hand settling down onto the table in front of him with a small clink before his hands fall into his lap.

“Don’t say that, Li,” Yukhei’s face mirrors an equal grimace to that of the elder’s. “It’ll look bad if captains start joining the Furies.”

“... Who?” You question, trying to follow their conversation as best you could but finding yourself lost as they begin to speak of things unknown to you. “The Furies?”

“Furies,” Jaemin begins, “They come from something you drink where any injury can be cur—”

“Jaemin!” Before you know it, Jaehyun is on his feet and striding around you to the young captain. The elder captain’s hand reaches down and pulls up the younger by the front of his robes.

“Ah—” Jaemin’s voice catches in his throat, his eyes go wide as if he’s realized he’d said something that he shouldn’t have.

“You’re overreacting, Jeong.” Yukhei stands, trying to pry Jaehyun’s iron tight grasp away from Jaemin. “It’s my fault anyway, I said something first.” When Jaehyun relinquishes Jaemin’s green robes from his grip, Yukhei shoots the younger a sympathetic look, “Sorry.”

“I should’ve watched myself,” Jaemin sighs, his hands moving to straighten his now wrinkled garment.

Yukhei’s gaze then turns to you, his tone becoming sterner, “Everything you just heard is something you should never repeat. I know you’re probably curious, but we can’t say anything else about it, so don’t ask.” The cold weight hiding behind his eyes is enough to make you feel uneasy about what you’d just heard. You’re not even sure what they were talking about, but it seems important enough to stay a secret.

“Those Furies that Jaemin was talking about are pitiful men,” Yongqin states as he pushes himself to his feet. His voice held none of the snideness that it normally had, taking on a flatter and emotionless tone. A sate sort of melancholy coming over him, it’s clear he has something on his mind.

“It’s nothing you have to worry about,” Yukhei says to you as he breaks the silence, “So don’t try and get worked up about it.”

Seeing as you were only a guest of the Hwarang and not an actual member among their ranks, you can understand their secrets. But it doesn’t make you any less curious.

“Try your best to forget about it,” Yuta warns, not so much to you but to your circumstance, “The more involved you become with our affairs will only put you in more danger.”

The wall built up between you and the captains was almost tangible at this point, not an easy thing to scale or break through.

Dinner ended in relative silence, you excused yourself to your room and hurried back to collect your thoughts. You exhale a large sigh as you enter, your mind hopping from the fate of the Hwarang’s colonel to what the Furies were. It reminds you of the rakshasa from the Buddhist texts your father had made you read as a young girl. The phrases ‘something you drink’ and ‘becoming a Fury’ bounce around your skull before you stop yourself. Yuta had asked you to forget, but it feels as if him saying that only makes you want to remember.

For whatever reason, the Hwarang captains were keeping hush about whatever ordeal was occurring. Was it to protect you? Regardless, sticking your nose into their business would only be detrimental to your stay with them.

With that in mind you try to clear your head as best you can before you slip into bed and trying to drift off to sleep.

March 3rd, 661 – Shinson Temple, Kingdom of Silla It’s been a little over two months since you’d joined the Hwarang at the headquarters in Seorabeol. Kun and Taeyong had returned from their expedition to Sabi, but morale among the men was low. For a while after their return, due to Taeyong’s injury, a few operations within the organization became hectic due to his absence. The wounds he’d acquired were grim, draining most of the goodness in his nature before your very eyes. He’d spend days locked away in his room, the silence deafening to those who would venture in and try to speak to him.

On the rare occasion that he did leave his room, his temper lay short before he’d barricade himself away in his abode once more. The Hwarang had offered to let him return to his family for recovery’s sake, but he insisted that his duty remain with his compatriots, despite his abysmal attitude.

Even though you too were holed up away inside of your room, the ways in which the two of you coped with the ordeal were vastly different. Taeyong was trapped within himself, fallen from whatever pedestal he thought was his to a mere memory of what once was. You, on the other hand, were merely looking for ways to help your hosts.

In doing so, you now find yourself wandering the halls of the Hwarang’s main building looking for Qian Kun, who hopefully has an assignment for you to complete. Much in fashion for the commander, he was nowhere to be seen. You debate on whether it would be impolite to go to his room directly when an unknown soldier walks up to you.

Their face is unfamiliar to you and they aren’t wearing the blue robes associated with the Hwarang on patrol. There is a chance you’d never seen them before, but by the way they are looking at you, you can surmise that that isn’t the case.

“You… wouldn’t have happened to have seen Commander Qian… would you?” You ask as they approach, their gait long and almost prideful.

“And who are you?” They question, looking you over with scathing eyes as if to detect your character, “Mind telling me what you’re doing here?”

“Oh well… it’s a long story,” you mumble out, noticing their gaze sharpening on you.

“Don’t make me repeat myself!” Their voice raises, the sternness only growing, “Answer me!”

Fumbling out your words, you introduce yourself quickly.

“Hmm,” he ponders, gaze softening ever so slightly, “I heard that the Commander recently acquired an apprentice warrior as a new page, it must be you.”

“I am,” you respond with faux cocksureness, not realizing that the men had referred to you as an apprentice warrior under the Hwarang.

“Why don’t you enlighten me on how you came to know the Chief and Commander?” The man’s scrutinizing gaze continues as you straighten your posture, shifting your weight from foot to foot. “I heard you’re from Toehwa-hyeon, but how were you able to squeeze your way in here?”

“I didn’t ‘squeeze my way in here’,” you retort, not liking how this man was addressing you.

“Judging by how defensive you’re being, it sounds as if I’ve gotten it right.” He almost scoffs at you in disbelief, “This isn’t some place for a common boy without any worth in his duties or on the battlefield to walk in without earning it. I’ll ask you one last time: how did you come to know the Chief and Commander?”

You stay silent, unsure of how to address him or what answer would be the right one. Yet, before you can begin to formulate a response, he steps forward and grabs the sleeve of your robes, “I, Suh Kangjoon, am asking you a question.” With the way he states his own name, it’s as if he’s trying to signal himself as someone of importance, but you’d never heard the other captains speak of him before. “What makes you think you can ignore me?” Rather than have a calm air as he asked, his tone had almost shifted to that of a petulant child.

“What the hell do you think you’re doing?” A voice barks off to the side, coming from one of the hall’s entranceways. Both Kangjoon and you turn to see Kun standing in the doorway, an almost scowl painting his lips as he watches the scene before him. Once Kangjoon had realized it was him, his hand falls away from clutching at your robes and returns to his side.

“Very well, Commander,” he wets his lips as Kun approaches before clearing his throat and speaking once again. “I’m here on business with Gukseon Moon.”

“Is that right?” Kun’s voice is tipped with a poisonous edge, as if he didn’t fully trust the character in front of you. “He failed to mention that to me.”

“He wrote to me with special orders to aid him while Colonel Lee is out of commission,” he begins, “I have the letter if you’d like to read it.”

“That’s quite alright,” Kun waves him off, “but I think it’d be in your interest to know that Moon is out on training runs with Na’s squadron today.”

“Then I suppose I’ll have to come back at a later date,” the air of faux civility between the two was nearly palpable, Kun doing nothing to hide his distaste whereas Kangjoon only looked at him snidely. The newcomer begins to turn on his heels, heading for the exit before his pace slows and leaves the two of you with a few words, “Is it true that you’ve welcomed him as your page, Commander?”

“Yes,” Kun nods, glancing at you for a moment before returning to look at the other, “but it’s no concern to you.”

A flash of an uncaring smile, “Forgive me, then. I’ll try not to ask more as it seems to be out of my jurisdiction.” Another step before he stills, “I do, however, question your predisposition toward keeping those from higher ranks close to you,” his eyes widen in faux surprise, “Ah, it seems I’ve forgotten myself, please excuse me.”

Once the stranger had exited the building, only then do you feel a sigh of relief overcome you. But before you have the chance to dwell on it for too long, Kun speaks up.

“You shouldn’t be walking around the headquarters without my permission, you know.”

“I understand, Commander, I didn’t mean to cause any trouble,” you begin to apologize.

“Your presence here isn’t known by the other factions of the Hwarang, only those staying here at Shinson,” He explains, “be mindful of anyone that isn’t a Hwarang from this sect, understood?”

“Understood,” you nod. “But can I ask who that man was?”

“That man is a captain of the Hanseong Hwarang. His name is Suh Kangjoon.” Kun looks as if he’s wracking his brain for an adequate description of the man, “His archery and swordsmanship are decent, but he’s well read and has a knack for military tactics.” His voice lowers a bit for his next statement. “He’s cunning, so be careful.”

“Okay.”

“Regardless of that,” his voice back to a decent volume as his gaze hardens at you, “if you’re not attending to someone then I fully expect you to stay put in your room.” With that, you suppose, he meant to dismiss you back to your quarters as any strict commander should and would have done.

A wordless nod, understanding that asking any more of him would cause his mood to sour even more so after his meeting with Suh Kangjoon. Kun turns on his heels the same time as you, drifting away towards his room on the opposite end of the compound while you shuffle back to yours.

June 15th, 661 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla The air thick with humidity sweeping in from the coast, the entirety of the Kingdom of Silla lies in mourning after the death of the posthumously named King Taejong Muyeol. With the lauded last year's effort of him uniting both Silla and Baekje, the former kingdom to the west of Silla, hanging over the heads of every citizen, his death felt like a sharp blow to all. For the first few days of the month, the Hwarang had travelled to Banweolseong, the King’s palace, to pay their respects to the fallen monarch, leaving you alone with only Jisung as company.

Once the Hwarang had steadily returned to the compounds, an air of normalcy once again began to hang over the inhabitants and the buildings themselves. Yet, midway through the month, Emperor Gaozong of the Tang dynasty called in aid from Silla to attack the kingdom of Gogoryeo. The kingdom resides to the north, and the Tang emperor wished to pincer it from both sides so that it would fall under either Tang or Silla rule.

Whereas this may have been the wishes of Taejong Muyeol, the new king, Munmu, found issue in sending out an army so close to the prior monarch’s death. Yet, as an almost tributary state to the Tang, Silla was forced to comply by sending soldiers to the front. No members of the Hwarang were called, as they were to remain in their cities and keep patrol when the officers that normally stood guard could not.

It’s a cooler day of the beginning of summer, you’d just come back to your room with your laundry when Yuta appears at your door. He stands there for a moment, allowing you to put down the basket of clothes in your hands before speaking, “Commander Qian would like a word with you.”

A wordless nod and you begin to follow him. Yuta leads you to the main hall, only stopping at the entranceway and gesturing you inside, you step into the room and hear Yuta go in behind you, closing the door after he enters. Looking around, you spot Kun, Yongqin, Jaehyun, Yukhei and Jaemin standing around the hall. It seems as if only the captains and you had been summoned for this meeting.

“I know you’ve been waiting for this, but the time has come to finally let you out,” Kun says once everyone’s settled into a comfortable silence.

Your lips part and you can barely contain the gasp forming in the back of your throat, “Really?” Unable to contain your excitement, you try to compose yourself before speaking again. “So, there really was someone who saw my father in Hwango-dong?” You question, only hearing rumors of someone who’d seen a man with your father’s profile in one of the city’s districts.

“We’re not sure if it’s true or not,” Kun cedes as he nods his head, “It’s our intention to let you verify for us. Considering that you’d recognize him the best out of everyone here.”

“So, where is this man who said he saw him?”

“The initial report outlines Jeolin Inn in Hwango-dong, Yuta’s assigned to do a preliminary check.” Both your and his attention turn to the man Kun had named. Did this mean that you were to accompany him to check or were you to wait here until after he’d swept the area?

“That doesn’t mean that Heo is a guest of the inn though,” Jeong chimes in.

“Yeah,” Yukhei agrees, “Being sighted in Hwango-dong could just mean he was walking around Seorabeol.”

“Exactly,” Kun sighs, crossing his arms and looking at Jaemin, Yukhei and Jaehyun, “That’s why I’m asking the three of you to take her out on your rounds to assist her in her search.”

“All of us?” Jaemin’s head tilts in confusion, “We normally split up and go our separate ways on our rounds.”

Rather than entertaining Jaemin with a response, Kun looks back to you. It was a quiet way to say that they were still in charge of looking over you, needing to make sure you wouldn’t try and make a break for it should they take you out in search for your father.

“We get what you’re trying to say, Kun,” Yongqin notes, “but I don’t like that you’re making us do all of the babysitting. I thought you were planning on patrolling as well?” The teasing lilt to his voice returns, “So, for your benefit why don’t you show your adorable page the ropes by taking her out with you?”

“Aren’t you the one who pushed her onto me?” Kun scoffs, “I’m not taking any of your shit today, Li. She isn’t my page.”

“Maybe she is, maybe she isn’t, but a lot of the wang-do are beginning to believe it.” Yongqin notes, crossing his own arms. “There’s always a grain of truth in every lie, so why don’t you give her a job already?”

As the two continue their stalemating conversation, Jaehyun moves to your side and whispers something to you, “Seorabeol isn’t the safest place right now, as you know, so you don’t have to force yourself to leave. I mean we all know what your dad looks like, so it’s not just your risk alone to bear.”

It seems like you could either explore where your father had last been seen, patrol the surrounding area, accompany Kun as his page, or stay here, from what Jaehyun had suggested.

“I think I should stay behind today,” after a moment of thinking, you come to the conclusion. There was no assurance that your father is out on the streets of Seorabeol still, and the looming threat of danger still hangs over the city.

“What?!” Jaemin frowns, “But what about your father?”

“I have to understand my place here too, though… We don’t even know if he’s there anymore,” you give him a small smile and nod, “I’m sure more chances will come.”

“If you say so,” he sounds a bit jilted, “But if you’ve already made up your mind there’s no convincing you…”

After that, the men deliberate their plans before heading off to their respective destinations and you return to your room. The thought of not going eats away at you, maybe it would’ve been better to take the risk and venture out…

“If you’re going to regret it that much, you should’ve gone with them.”

The voice behind you startles you from your thoughts, you swivel on your heels to greet who’d interrupted your thinking, “Yongqin… I’m not regretting it.” Yet, you are, so much so that you can’t bear to look into his eyes. But he smiles wryly, putting a hand on your shoulder.

“Not at all?” He asks with a grin, “Not even if you knew Yuta and I went out of our way to convince Kun?”

“You what…?” The revelation sucks the air from your lungs, not expecting him to say that at all. Had you wasted their kindness? “I’m sorry! I didn’t realize—”

“Ah, well, it was actually Yuta that convinced him. I just stood behind him and nodded lightly.”

“Even so,” you say as you look to him, “I’m sorry… I’ll apologize to Yuta later— Should there be another opportunity, please give me another chance to join you.”

Yongqin hesitates for a moment before responding, his eyes focusing deeply on yours, “You may be able to accompany us, but you’d better keep that blade sheathed. We don’t need any recklessness holding us back.” His eyes are serious but his smile remains bright, “If there’s any sign of you becoming an issue, I won’t hesitate to put my blade through you.”

“I understand,” you say, nodding plaintively.

The Hwarang says nothing more as he removes his hand from you, turning on his heels and making his way out of the main hall.

July 7th, 661 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla Na Jaemin and Li Yongqin stand in the great hall as you enter. The past few weeks had given you no information on the whereabouts of your father, despite you going on patrolling rounds with the different Hwarang captains. You assume the information, or lack of, was the reason for your summoning today by Qian Kun. Although the presence of the other two Hwarang captains make you feel somewhat more relieved, you wouldn’t have to face the Demon commander alone.

“You asked to see me?” There was a sour look on Kun’s face as you ask, something clearly eating away at him.

“It’s about your father,” he begins, and you perk up for a moment. Kun’s frown stays on his face as he looks at you, a sinking feeling in your stomach as you can already tell you won’t like what he says. “I think it’s best we stop searching for him for the time being.”

“Why?” You can hardly stop yourself from blurting out the question. You’d only been able to search for him for what felt like a handful of weeks, if you were to stop now there was a major possibility you could lose any leads you have.

Kun remains collected, his arms crossing as he speaks again, “We have reports of activity from Baekje loyalists. It would be more than foolish to let you wander the streets in search of your father at a time like this.”

You recall your encounter a month ago with Kangjoon at the tea shop. He’d been in search of Baekje spies… was the issue really becoming that bad? It was surely one thing to lose one’s homeland, but Silla had been nothing but civil to the former kingdom’s people, or so you’d heard.

“Then, are you asking me to stay here until things are resolved with the loyalists?” You question with a tilt of your head, unable to hide the disappointment in your voice.

The commander nods before turning to Jaemin and Yongqin, “That being said, as for now she isn’t to accompany any captain on their rounds.”

“So that’s why you pulled us in here?” The question is more like a musing as it falls from Jaemin. It seems like he too hadn’t known why he was called here and it was now beginning to click. “You know, she’s never caused any issues when we took her on our rounds… I feel kind of bad now that she can’t tag along.”

“Mhm,” Yongqin nods, “even if something were to happen, as long as she’s not hopping into the fray it should be alright. Besides,” he smirks at you, “it’s not like she could outrun us if she tries to escape.”

“I won’t run,” you protest firmly, knowing that he was fully joking. Eyes lingering on Yongqin for a moment before you look back to Kun, “I made a promise when I agreed to stay here. I promised I’d look for my father, I can’t hold myself to that if you won’t let me.”

“Staying with us is putting yourself at risk,” Yongqin shrugs in your periphery, “if you don’t mind that, I don’t mind you joining us.” His gaze travels to Kun, his lips parting, “We’ve had witness reports, I don’t see why we should stop looking when we still have information coming in.”

“You might have a point, Li. But are witness reports a justifiable reason to put her in harm’s way?” The commander rebukes, his hands falling to his sides. “By taking her out with us, we’re placing an unnecessary burden on our shoulders.”

“If I lose the opportunity to search for my father,” fists clenching at your sides, your nails digging into the skin of your palms, “then any future chances of finding him will be nearly impossible.”

Kun looks at you, eyes searching yours, his gaze hardening. You think he’s about to refute you, before he starts speaking again. “You need to follow the orders of every captain you’re on patrol with. No sidetracking them. Am I clear?”

“Yes,” you nod, “of course.” Unsure of how to show your gratitude, you bow towards him.

“I’m not going to be the one ordering you to join them,” the commander huffs as you rise, “that’s up to your discretion.”

It feels like no time at all before you reach the city’s streets accompanying Yongqin on his rounds.

“It feels like there’s more people here than usual…” You note as you walk, having to move to the side several times to let flocks of people pass by as the street lay cramped.

“Mind yourself,” Yongqin notes, pulling you to the side, out of the way of a passing cart. “Try not to wander off or something. Remember that you’re here to keep me company on my rounds.”

“Sorry I was just distracted by everyone!” You say, brushing off the dust on your pants, “The city’s much livelier now.”

His eyes twinkle and he smiles voraciously; you can sense him relax. “Well, there’s a summer festival happening soon, things are busier, I’ll give you that.” His smile wanes just a bit, “Of course, some of those loyalists are acting pretty strange too. What I’m saying it, watch yourself, alright?”

As you walk down the street with his division, no one comes within a few yards of you; they step away as soon as their eyes catch sight of the blues. You’d noticed this phenomenon briefly when you’d first joined the Hwarang on their rounds, but it seems clear that the people of Seorabeol hold some sort of respect for these men.

You stop every so often to ask some of the less intimidated passerby’s if they’d seen your father. Yet, after a few hours of searching, you finally meet someone who claims to have seen a man matching your description.

“Oh, yeah… I think I might’ve seen that guy a while back, over at Joon’s.” As he speaks, he points toward a store selling inkstones and brushes.

“Thank you!” You say as Yongqin catches your eye, giving you a stern look. It almost looks as if he’s going to scold you when—

“You there! Are you of the Kang household?!” The cry comes from a Hwarang, and Yongqin turns from you, his lips tightening into a thin line. “Your household is currently under investigation by order of the Crown.”

“Well shit…” Yongqin sighs out, reaching for his sword as he looks at the men in question. “I guess they would choose the worst possible time to stir up trouble.”

Like leaves scattering in a storm, the townspeople move out of Yongqin’s way as he moves towards the commotion. For a moment you panic in the mass of fleeing citizens, but perhaps realize it’s best. If you stay too close, you may distract Yongqin from his duties.

You duck off into a nearby alley to watch, planning to return to the men once the tension simmers.

“Hey kid,” a gravelly voice of an elder shopkeeper cries out, “Come over here, you don’t want to get caught up in that.”

Time and time you’d been told to be wary of strangers while with the Hwarang, and you’re about to politely refuse his gesture when you realize that his shop is the one that the civilian had pointed out to you just moments earlier.

“Excuse me, but is this Joon’s?”

“Yes,” the man nods, “It is.”

“Great!” You cry out, only before being interrupted by another shop employee.

“Kang! This guy was just with the Hwarang!”

“What?!” The elder says, his eyebrows raising.

“Huh? I’m not a member of the Hwarang.” You push, but the elder already seems to be backing up into his shop, obviously disinterested in helping you now. “No—it’s not like that! I’m just looking for someone!” Even if you’d just been walking with them, their reaction seems a bit excessive.

A laugh behind you and you see Yongqin standing there with his arms crossed, “You really have the shittiest luck, don’t you? Still, I guess you could say the same about them, or me.” He gives a small, unconcerned shrug before reaching for his blade and barreling his way through the door of the shop.

Joon’s explodes with the clang of blades, men swearing and scrambling.

When you return to the Hwarang headquarters, Taeyong has a number of… less than pleasant words to say. Yongqin and you kneel for quite some time as the colonel berates you before the other speaks up.

“You don’t need to lose your head over it Taeyong,” Yongqin sighs, “After all, we arrested a couple of loyalists.”

After the fighting was finished, you’d discovered a massive arms cache, as well as plans for a new meeting for the loyalists. No one had bothered to explain to you what had been going on, however, and you’d been completely lost.

“Not something to lose my head over?” Taeyong frowns, “My head is right where it belongs. Perhaps you should inquire after yours. The man claiming to be Joon Hyunjin was, in truth, Moon Kwanghyeon, a loyalist spy. You were aware that the Hwarang were allowing him to operate in hopes of gathering enemy intel?”

“Yes,” Yongqin nods, rising to his feet as Jaehyun walks into the hall, “but we didn’t have a choice this time. I had to bring him in.”

“Well at least it wasn’t a total bust,” Jaehyun adds, “Like Yongqin said, they did arrest some guys.”

“But don’t you feel bad for Shotaro and Minhyung?” Jaemin asks, trailing in behind Jaehyun. Had they been outside the doors this whole time? “They were staking out the place to keep an eye on Kwanghyeon.”

The corners of Jaemin’s mouth twitch into a smile, but Shotaro interrupts him to continue. “We appreciate your concern, Jaemin, but nobody needs to lose any sleep on our account. We hadn’t been getting anywhere with him the last few days, Yongqin did us a favor.”

Minhyung nods in silent agreement. “His arrest is over and done, you won’t hear any complaints from us about it, though.”

“You’re the definition of stoic and reasonable,” Yukhei sighs out, crossing his arms, “Yongqin on the other hand…” It doesn’t seem as if he’s going to let Yongqin get away without rubbing his mistake in his face.

“It’s all my fault,” you speak up, “Some loyalists were causing trouble, so I tried to get out of the way… I was going to go back to Yongqin after it settled but the crowds pushed me too far away.”

“But who was tasked with looking after you?” Taeyong asks, his eyes glaring at you, expression hard and angry. “A captain of the Hwarang can’t even track a charge. Is this the best we can do?” When you’d first met Taeyong, he’d been nice, if anything a little quiet. After his injury, however… It was as if he’d become an entirely different person.

“I told her she could go.” Kun says as he walks into the hall, “They were only following orders.”

Taeyong’s eyes trail him as he moves to stand at the head of the room. He gives the commander a tight, wry smile, but only receives a peaceful, impartial glance in return.

“If you’re here, then that means you’re done interrogating Kwanghyeon, right?” Jaehyun asks expectantly.

“They’re going to wait for a day when the wind picks up, then set Seorabeol on fire and kidnap the King while everyone else is losing their shit.” Kun answers, “So they say, at least.” His voice is calm and measured, but you can all feel the import of his words.

“Burn down the city?” Yukhei scoffs, “Those loyalists are crazier than I thought.”

“Whatever their reasons, we cannot ignore them,” Yuta says plainly.

“They’re probably meeting tonight to scramble together a plan without Kwanghyeon in it.” Kun says, “We need to get ready to move out.”

“Understood,” Yuta nods.

“Finally,” Yukhei says as he stretches, several pops coming from his back, “I’m getting chills.”

Even though each man displays their professionalism differently, they are all clearly prepared. As they quiet down, Kun turns towards you, as if he’d only just noticed you’re standing there.

“We did get some information on Heo, apparently he visited Joon’s with some men from the west.”

“What?”

“So, the rumors that he was seen in Seorabeol were true, but that’s all there is to it.”

There are so many questions running through your head, that you want to ask but you know that no one here has an answer for them.

Preparations for the raid begin immediately after the captains are all gathered in the main hall. There was even more commotion by the time dinner rolled around. The halls now darkened save for the braziers and candles that light the entrances and walls. The tension is thick enough to cut with a knife.

It still affects you all the same. Your encounter at Joon’s created some of their current headache, and you hope to make up for it. Yet, any offer of assistance now is rebuked, it became quite clear that you have very little to offer when it comes to preparing for a raid. At the end of it, you stick to the wall, standing there quietly to avoid being a burden.

“Taeil has only twelve men ready to fight,” Yuta murmurs to Jaehyun.

“And Kun and I have twenty-four a piece, everyone’s sick!” Jaehyun says exasperatedly. There had been a swift food poisoning epidemic earlier in the week leaving many men bedridden. It’s like they’re now divided in half. Taeil would lead a group of a dozen men to Wonweol Inn and Kun would lead twenty-three to Jeolin Inn on opposite ends of the city. “Do you think we’ll bring ‘em along tonight?” Jaehyun asks, “It’d be perfect…”

Them?

“I heard they won’t see combat for a while. They’re having… difficulty adjusting.” Yuta frowns. “They stop listening to orders as soon as they see blood. It’s rather inconvenient.”

The topic confuses you, yet you feel as if you’d heard something similar a while ago. Both of the captains hadn’t realized that you’re listening to their conversation. But it’s crucial that you don’t speak up.

“They’ve gotta be spinning in their graves… Didn’t they choose to do this so they could fight?”

“Jae… You can only say that after someone’s actually dead.”

“I guess you’re right,” the younger of the two captains sighs out, “They aren’t really dead, are they? They’re actually harder to kill now…”

Now you really know you’re not supposed to be listening to this. To remove yourself from the area, you quickly begin to walk outside of the main hall, but as you open the door, you nearly run into another figure.

“Huh? What’re you doing in here?” Taeil says as he holds his arms out to steady you as you brake in front of him.

“Oh… I… I couldn’t just sit there…” You explain to him how you feel useless in this situation, that you’d left your room to try and help but found nothing you could do.

“Of course,” he smiles, trying to comfort you, “I know how you feel! The men are pretty excited, aren’t they?”

“Yes,” you nod, not knowing if excited was the best term for him to use. Bloodthirsty may have been better,

“Would you care to join us?” He asks simply.

“What?!” You sputter out, not expecting him to say that. “You mean go to a raid with you? I don’t think that I could—”

“You see, many of my men are out with food poisoning, so we’re a bit understaffed. We could certainly use a messenger, but if you’d rather not, there’s no need to feel obligated.”

“Well, alright,” you nod, remembering that Taeil’s group had lost the most men due to the sickness, “if I’ll just be a messenger, it should be okay.”

His face splits into a grin and you find yourself on the way to Wonweol Inn to accompany their raid.

After you arrived at Wonweol, you were sent off on several short errands nearby. When you return, you hear Yukhei talking to Yongqin.

“Looks like we’ve hit the jackpot on this one. Not sure if they’re brave, or stupid, for meeting right next to a government building.” Yukhei says, glancing to the building next to the Inn.

“I knew they’d be here,” Yongqin sighs, “After all, they’ve had a record of meeting at Wonweol.”

“Sure,” Yukhei says, crossing his arms, “but the night Kwanghyeon gets arrested? That just seems sloppy to me. Aren’t they afraid of looking suspicious?”

“Well obviously they’re somewhat less than normal,” Yongqin quips, “They are meeting at Wonweol, aren’t they?”

Their conversation is somewhat lighthearted, which doesn’t quite match the subject matter. As you approach, Jaemin notices you and jogs over.

“How’d it go?” He questions, “Did you see anyone from the Guard?”

You shake your head before answering, “To be honest, I didn’t really see anyone nearby.”

“So, they still haven’t made their move? We told them that we’d be here before dark…”

“Calm down, Jaem,” Yukhei says as he walks over, lightly slapping the younger on the back, “It won’t do us any good if they show up anyway. If this is gonna happen, we’ve gotta do it ourselves.”

“I guess… It’s just that running in on our own seems a little reckless?” Jaemin frowns, and Kangjoon, who’s on standby behind Jaemin, nods in agreement.

“It is reckless.” He asserts, “We should wait for the Guard’s reinforcements.”

“If you believe that’s the best course of action,” Taeil cedes, “Then why don’t we wait a little longer.”

Yet, no matter how long you wait, the officials still haven’t made it.

You find yourself looking up at the sky. The moon inching further across the scape the longer you stay in the recesses of Wonweol.

“It’s getting late…” Yukhei murmurs.

“What do you want to do, Chief?” Yongqin asks Taeil, “It’d be pretty shitty if we just sat here all night.”

Taeil had been quiet all this time, yet when Yongqin spoke to him, he stood up, ready to address his men.

“We can’t wait a moment longer. Yongqin, Yukhei, Jaemin: you all, follow me.”

Yongqin nods quietly but firmly as Kangjoon speaks up, “I will secure the front entrance so you guys can have at it.”

“Aren’t you coming?” Jaemin questions, surprised.

“It’s all good,” Yongqin quips, “I mean, we don’t want him in the dark and then mistakenly stabbing us you know? Oh, actually… We may mistakenly stab him.”

“What are you suggesting, Yongqin?” Kangjoon frowns as he shifts his weight from foot to foot.

“Now, now.” Yukhei intervenes, “If you want someone charging, we want someone reliable anyways. So, with that said, take care of the outside, Kangjoon.”

“Can you stay away from the Inn?” Taeil turns as he asks you, “Things are going to get dangerous. That place is full of rebel soldiers. We don’t intend to allow them to escape, but… better safe than sorry.”

“Alright,” you say as he smiles at you, motioning for the men to join him in rushing the inn.

The battle begins in earnest. The yells of men and the clang of swords fills the air soon after the Hwarang make their way inside, the sounds roll out of the doors and windows of the inn.

You can hear feet pounding up the stairs, the screams of men dying and the wet thud of bodies dropping to the floor.

“Damn it!” You hear Yukhei shout out, “There’s too many of them! We need backup! Is there anyone outside?!”

There had been moments prior, but all of the men who’d come with the captains had run around back and couldn’t hear Yukhei call out. Kangjoon, on the other hand, is stationed outside, arresting any man attempting to flee the building.

Is the only person left to help really you? Your thoughts interrupted when Taeil yells out—

“Yongqin! Are you alright?!”

“Damn it Jaemin! Don’t die on me!” Yukhei calls out from somewhere else inside the building.

You have no desire to enter a slaughterhouse, with men killing and maiming one another. Even if you do, you have no illusions about your skill with a blade. You’re sure to be killed before you even draw it.

Perhaps though, instead of fighting, you can rescue the wounded and pull them from the inn. This is how you find yourself drawn closer to the fray, only running inside when you hear Yukhei yell out once again.

Inside, it’s pitch black. The smell of blood hits your stomach like a fist. Black masses lay crumpled on the floor; the bodies of dead or dying men. Where are Yongqin and Jaemin?

Entering the building had seemed a good idea on the outside, but now that you look around the charnel house, you realize that there is no way you can carry two men outside.

With the fighting going on, and in the darkness too, you’d only be an impediment to the Hwarang should you choose to stumble around blindly in the dark— Looking around the inn, you cannot see a singular face thar you recognize. It’s not until an unfamiliar face shouts out at you and raises their blade, do you fully realize the severity of your situation.

Yet, before the blade meets your flesh, another sword juts out and parries it away from you.

“Hey, hey, hey!” Yukhei shouts out to the revivalist, “You’re fighting me!” The Hwarang swings again and ends up burying his sword deep into the man’s stomach.

Eyes trained on the blood pouring from the wound and now the man’s mouth, you can’t find it within yourself to look away.

“Would you mind checking upstairs?” Yukhei asks quickly, his eyes trained on a few more men stumbling into the main room, “No one’ll get past me. I promise!” With that, he pushes past you and heads towards the group of men, your eyes focusing on the bright crimson trailing down his hand from a cut he’d received earlier. “Get going!” He calls out as his blade crashes against another’s.

And so, you do, quickly slipping by the throng of fighting bodies as you travel quickly up the staircase, your feet thudding along the wood.

The scent of blood had travelled upstairs too, stinging your nose with its metallic tang as you look around the hall. Without another thought, you open the nearest door and run into the room. It seems like this darkened corner of the inn hasn’t been tainted with bloodshed yet, the interior clean and tidy.

“Pray tell, why are you here?” A voice calls out from the dark and you realize you aren’t alone. At the open window, someone stares off into the darkness, the breeze of the night carrying his voice to you.

He wears no uniform belonging to either the revivalists or the Hwarang, just pale-yellow robes embroidered with a flower you can’t make out in the dark.

Even as you stand shocked, you have a plethora of questions; Why is he here? What is he doing? Who is he?

It seems like he hasn’t partaken in the battle, only looking to the streets coated in moonlight as the fighting wages downstairs. He seems calm, almost serene in the way he stands and throws a look back to you.

“Who are you?” You find yourself asking as his reddened eyes pierce into yours.

“Are you the one asking questions now?” A small smile dances along his lips as he only replies with a question himself. “Worry about where you are more than you’re worried about me.”

His words snap you from the tranquility of the moment. Right, he’s an enemy, isn’t he? Instinctively, your hand reaches for the blade at your hip, his brow raising at your movement.

“Planning on joining the fight?” As his gaze lingers on the steel, his eyes widen, “Wait, is that—?” The man now stands facing you directly, taking a step towards you as his eyes remain fixated on the blade.

Just then, the door to the room flies open and a bloodied warrior saunters in, looking frantically to the stranger, “Hey, the Hwarang raided—” His report stops when he lays eyes on you, “Who the hell are you?!” Without hesitation, he reaches for his blade after not recognizing you as one of his own, and begins to swing at you. Although, before his blade can reach your head, a loud shout comes from the first man you’d encountered.

“Quiet!” Almost in a blink of an eye, he’d unsheathed his own sword and charged at the already bloodied man, felling him with a singular strike. Once the man falls to the floor, the now closer of the two looks to you, “Didn’t I tell you? You should be more concerned about yourself.”

“Why did you…” Your eyes still focused on the man who lays dead or dying at your feet, “Isn’t he your ally?”

“If he were an ally, I wouldn’t have cut him loose.” His self-possession quiets you as he sheathes his sword.

It’s obvious that he isn’t a member of the Hwarang. You don’t know his purpose here, too.

Above anything, his gaze captures yours, enamoring your senses as if he were the only thing that mattered right now. His eyes draw you into a lucid hypnosis, filling you with doubt about if he is a threat to you at all.

“…Thank you,” you’re able to say once you regain a bit of composure.

A smirk crawls to the corner of his mouth, “Looks like you have some manners despite staying by the Hwarang’s side.” He’s mocking the men that had taken you in, and yet, you can’t bring yourself to argue against what he’s saying.

“Why did you save me?” Questioning as his gaze falls to the blade at your hip.

“Does that belong to you?” Ignoring your question, he imposes his own. His eyes glimmer an almost burgundy from the silver light of the moon refracting into the room.

“It does…” your hand now hovers near the blade as he lets out a soft laugh.

“Then you can thank your blade.” Before you can ask him why, he turns but not before giving you a sly wink. “My business here is done. You can do whatever you want.” He takes his time walking towards the open window, jumping through it without any hesitation or final words.

Your feet carry you to the window, but there isn’t any sign of the stranger. No footprints, no up kick of dirt—nothing. He’d made it clear that he wasn’t aligned with either side here tonight, so then why had he been at the inn?

Standing there dumbfounded, you sense a presence entering the room behind you quietly. A prickle on the back of your neck and you slowly wrap your hand around your blade.

“Are you alright?” The voice of Lee Minhyung startles you and you spin on your feet. You look to him with a puzzled expression, hadn’t he gone to Jeolin with Kun? It’s then your shoulders let go of their tension for a moment, reinforcements had arrived.

August 2nd, 661 - Kingdom of Silla Ever since the raids on both Wonweol and Jeolin Inn, the Hwarang had become stricter on their rounds around Seorabeol, looking for and capturing any of the Baekje revivalists that had escaped that night. Rumors had begun to plague the streets, that the loyalists were looking for revenge on those who tried to stop their rebellion. On top of that, the Hwarang were under harsh scrutiny of their opposers in the Crown’s court, despite them having stopped a meeting that was calling for the kidnapping of Silla’s monarch.

Yet as the days creeped more lethargically into the summer, it seems as if the tensions that had arisen earlier in the season were dying down. Life was somewhat steady again. And due to your efforts during the battle, the Hwarang were growing more receptive and encouraging of your involvement with them. A small victory, for sure, but you were now allowed to complete chores in solitude now rather than being watched over by one of the captains. That’s where you find yourself now, sweeping away the dust that had accumulated in the overnight winds in front of the complex.

You’re humming to yourself, brushing the boom atop the agate stone of the entrance when you hear gentle footsteps walking up the stairs to the main gate.

“Excuse me,” a soft voice calls out to you, “Is this the Hwarang headquarters?”

You look up from your work, your lips parting in mild surprise at seeing a familiar face, “It is.”

“Ah, yes- hello,” the man smiles at you, the sunlight glimmering off of the purple silk of his robes, he then pauses, his eyes widening. “You’re…”

“Huh?”

As if he had telepathic means to tell if you’d strayed away from your task, the front entrance of the hall swings open, Kun standing in the doorway. He looks from you to the man and then back to you, pausing as if to let you speak.

“Commander,” eyebrows raising in surprise, “This is-”

Before you can finish speaking, the stranger almost gleefully runs to the commander.

“I knew it!” he says, an unhidden delight in his words as he smiles at Kun, “It’s me, Jungwoo, long time no see!”

“Y- Wait, Jungwoo?” Kun looks surprised as the other announces himself, “What are you doing here?!”

A laugh from Jungwoo, “Are you surprised? I’m visiting Seorabeol with the Crown’s orders.” He waves his hand, “But forget about that. I can’t believe it was you connected to the Hwarang! I couldn’t believe it until I saw it with my own eyes. Congratulations, you really followed your and Hoseok’s dream.”

The name lingers in the air heavily for a moment between the two, you’ve never heard of a Hoseok before. Looking at the two of them, it must’ve been at least an acquaintance of theirs.

Kun doesn’t let the weight last, breaking it with a small smile. “Come on, if I were to fully do that, I’d be a general by now. The Hwarang aren’t treated much better than the city guard at this point.”

“Still,” a somewhat nostalgic look in Jungwoo’s eye, “I’m sure he’d be happy either way. The Hwarang are famous in Seorabeol, and gaining even more notoriety in other cities. With the raids last month, you’ve gained even more popular support.”

Kun looks humble for a second, breaking his gaze with Jungwoo to look at the ground. “We’re still working on that,” he mumbles out as the other laughs at him.

It was an odd thing to see Kun flustered, you’d really only seen a mild variant of his embarrassment when Yongqin would really get under his skin. But you’ve never seen his cheeks go flush before. With Jungwoo’s teasing and knowledge of something that seemed to have happened years ago, it would suggest that they’ve known each other for a while. Are they good friends?

Once you sense their conversation coming to a lull, you speak up, “Commander, can I ask who this is?”

“Oh, yeah. You two haven’t met, I take it?” Kun muses and turns to look at you.

“Oh, I haven’t introduced myself yet.” Jungwoo nods, “My name is Kim Jungwoo. I’m a Naegeumwi.”

You introduce yourself quickly.

“It’s nice to meet you officially,” he smiles and gives you a short bow.

Kun then gazes to look to the cloudless, sunny sky for a moment, “We don’t need to talk outside like this, why don’t you come in?”

As the two make their way inside, you set the broom that was still in your hands next to the doorway and scurry off to the kitchen. You return to them some while later holding a tray of tea and assorted goods for them. After you’d set down the tray, Kun told you to stay, so you take a seat a little way away from where the two are conversing.

“You said you’re here on Crown orders? What are you here for?” Kun asks, his hand hovering over his steaming cup of tea.

“I’m currently working in one of the Sodang units.” Jungwoo explains. He goes on to say a few more things about his duties, but you’re unfamiliar with a majority of the lingo they use, so you try to follow along to the best of your ability.

Kun, glancing to you and seeing your viable confusion, speaks up, “He’s in the Naegeumwi, entrusted with protecting King Munmu and his family.”

“Oh wow,” you look at Jungwoo, “I’m honored to meet someone with such a high ranking.”

“Please,” it’s the same humbled tone he’d used at the tea shop, “I only acquired this position because of the connections my father has.”

“Why would someone with his rank need to visit the Hwarang?” You question Kun. While the Hwarang work under the Crown, there was no direct connection, whereas it seems as if Jungwoo works quite literally with the king.

“Are you asking why he’d know a bunch of washed-up nobles and commoners like us?” Kun asks, almost teasingly. You nod gently, as to not offend him. “You see, not only is Jungwoo a Naegeumwi, but his father’s father was Kim Alcheon.” Once again noting your confusion he clarifies, “A Sangdaedeung under Queen Jindeok some years ago. He opened a fairly prestigious school after his time in office, and now Jungwoo here is the heir to it. The school I attended socialized often with the Kim school and that’s how I came to meet him.”

“That’s right,” Jungwoo nods, “When I heard that I was heading to Seorabeol I knew that I had to find Kun.” His eyes shine with admiration towards Kun, but the commander just scoffs and rolls his eyes at him.

“Flattery won’t get you anywhere, Kim,” Kun sighs, “And remember: Seorabeol isn’t exactly a relaxing getaway.”

“I’ll keep that in mind… However, even if it is dangerous, it seems even a woman can join the Hwarang?” Jungwoo looks at you coyly before returning his gaze to the commander. He judges both the surprised look and glare from Kun for a moment before raising his hand to his mouth in surprise, “Was that supposed to be a secret?” He waits a moment, seeing as there’s no answer, he continues, “It’s not difficult to tell. I mean it’s not her fault.”

“I know,” Kun’s probably recalling the first he’d met you; he’d been one of the first to figure it out, “Only a fool couldn’t see.” He resigns himself into a sigh, “Her reasons for being here are somewhat complicated, so we’re having her dress as a man for now. Only a handful of men in the Hwarang know of her circumstance, so I’d prefer if you didn’t speak about it in front of anyone.”

“I understand,” the guard agrees.

The three of you talking must’ve drawn the attention of the captains, because as Jungwoo was about to begin teasing the commander some more, they slowly began to filter in.

“Jungwoo!” Yukhei says as he sees the guard, running over to him and throwing an arm around his shoulder, “I thought you’d said you’d visit sooner!”

“We thought we heard your voice somewhere, Wong thought he was hallucinating,” Jaehyun notes as he greets Jungwoo.

“Yukhei, Jaehyun,” a smile curling onto Jungwoo’s lips as Yukhei relinquishes him from his grasp, “And everyone else! Long time no see.”

“Can’t believe you’re in Seorabeol too now, are you here to train?” Yukhei asks.

“Don’t be stupid, Wong. I bet he’s here to protect something or someone important, right?” Jaemin questions as he looks to the guard.

A breathy chuckle from Jungwoo, “It’s… something like that.”

“If you’re in Seorabeol, then it must’ve been a good job offer.” Yuta notes, as he looks at Jungwoo.

Jungwoo nods silently to affirm him while Yongqin speaks up, “If that’s the case: be careful. Don’t be stupid and go off dying on us.”

“Thank you for the warning,” Jungwoo looks to the elder, “I’ll keep that in mind.”

“We should go drinking to celebrate someday, hell, we could go now if you want!” Yukhei shouts out, eager to get out of the headquarters for a bit.

The rest of the captains surround Jungwoo for a while, immersing themselves in conversation and banter with the guard as he, too, seems to get lost in it all. So, he really did know all of them.

“Despite him being in the Naegeumwi, and heir of his grandfather’s school…” Kun’s eyes hold a fond warmth as he looks onto the commotion happening in the room. “He doesn’t hold that over the heads of the ranks lower than him. No one can escape his amiable nature.” The commander then turns to you, “Whenever he visits, be sure to let him in.”

“Alright,” you nod, not bothered by that order at all. Jungwoo seemed to bring a warmth to the Hwarang men that you hadn’t seen too often, it was probably good for them.

The men spent an exorbitant amount of time regaling about memories and incidents that had happened with their friend, and before they or you knew it, evening descended upon the compound with the orange glow of the setting sun. Jungwoo notes this at one point and says he has to depart back to his duties.

“I’ll try to drop by again soon,” Jungwoo smiles, a twinkle in his eyes, before he turns on his heels and heads towards the city. You watch him as he leaves, his tall figure becoming smaller and smaller with every step before he eventually disappears down the pathway.

Even if he was an important person and a friend of the Hwarang, he was an enigma to you. Jungwoo was assuredly high amongst the bone-ranks, maybe even higher than the Hwarang’s commander, yet upheld himself with integrity and mindfulness to everyone he came across. You’d never been made aware of a noble that was like that before, most adhering to the rigid structure of the realm.

August 15th, 661 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla It’s hot. Blazingly so. The city is blanketed by a heat so unknown to you that you found yourself perspiring as you awoke that morning. You’d thought you’d been sick until you walked into the main hall and saw the other captains in a similar state to yourself. There was nothing to be done about it except for staying in the shade or perhaps cooling off by a river.

Yet, that’s not what was in store for you. Ever since your actions on the nights of the inn raids, Kun has been much more forgiving in his attitude, allowing you to resume your patrols with the captains. And seeing as Jeong Jaehyun was about to head out, you decided to tag along.

You regret that decision almost immediately when you step onto the city’s streets, the crowds not doing anything to damper the rays of sun beaming down onto you.

“Jaehyun?” You ask as the two of you walk down the street, “The Hwarang patrol both night and day, right?”

“They do,” he nods, wiping the sweat that had accumulated around the headband on his forehead, “Why?”

“Why is it that you do? Wouldn’t that be more of the city guard’s job?” You question as you pass by an armory, the heat of its fires only causing you to perspire more.

“Because most of the city guard’s been called to the front,” his shoulders shrug, “Emperor Gaozong called them to help his forces root out Goguryeo last month so they’ve had a decline in their numbers… I’m not sure when they’ll be back, I heard the King was leading generals to Siigok Garrison so I can only assume it’ll be a while.”

“So, you’ve become the city guard then?”

“I mean, in a way,” he thinks, “We arrest thieves, people who’re looking for fights and who don’t pay for their meals. And then there are those who think they’ll just mooch off of merchants...”

It wasn’t fully the answer you’d been expecting, maybe along the lines of it. The adoption of the guard’s role was something new, but you couldn’t fault them for it if the city needed their swords. Before you’re able to continue to question him, a few men in Hwarang blues down the road seem to be trying to wave Jaehyun down. Getting closer to the scene, you can make out Yukhei’s figure and a few more Hwarang men.

“Hey!” He smiles as the two of you stand before him, he looks to you before asking, “Find anything about your dad?”

“No,” a small shake of your head, “Nothing yet.”

“Ah, cheer up,” he says, gently hitting you on the arm as he sees your downtrodden frown, “There’s always tomorrow.”

“You’re right,” pepping up slightly at his words. Yukhei seems to be able to energize and lighten the mood whenever someone was feeling low, it was something you’d noticed over the course of getting to know him. It was almost as if his optimism was contagious.

“Did you find anything fun, Yukhei?” Jaehyun questions, probably wondering if there was any more reason for Yukhei flagging you down other than wanting to say hello.

“Nothing in particular…” Yukhei admits, “But, all of the people on this street are acting really busy.”

You think he’s being a little over dramatic, but a closer observation of the pedestrians and shopkeepers has you thinking a little more critically. There was almost a nervousness, an anxiety, threading itself through the air and in their movements.

“It looks like they’re… packing up?” You observe, eyeing one merchant in particular boxing away his things.

“You think they’re worried about the war with Goguryeo or the Baekje guys?” Jaehyun asks Yukhei, crossing his arms.

“I thought that the Baekje threat was resolved...?” You say, looking from Jaehyun to Yukhei, confusion seeped into your voice.

The taller rests his hand atop the hilt of his sword, “We didn’t tell you, did we? Those Baekje bastards have been showing up again, that’s why we’ve been having extra rounds.”

“Even if we did weaken them at Wonweol,” Jaehyun frowns, “I can’t really imagine them standing idly around when we’ve put some of their men in the ground. And now that the king’s absent… it’s a little trickier for us.”

“Were the loyalists planning on doing something?” You ask, the way Jaehyun had spoken leads you to believe something had been in the works.

“Not sure,” Yukhei says with a shake of his head, “Other than what we found out after the raids we haven’t gotten wind of anything else.”

“It doesn’t matter, though,” Jaehyun notes, “All we’ve got to do is do our jobs. The loyalists attack Seorabeol, we drive them out. It’s as simple as that.” The Hwarang just accept the cards they’re dealt and never seem to complain.

“If the loyalists continue their stunts, then we’re probably going to get orders from the king to do something whenever he gets back,” Yukhei sighs, not knowing how long the sovereign would be out of the capital.

“What do you think he’d decree?” A tilt of your head as you ask, unknowing what more he could make the Hwarang do.

“In the past the Hwarang have fought almost as their own regiment, he might do that.” Yukhei shrugs, his hand moving from his sword and down to his side.

“That doesn’t happen too often,” Jaehyun nods almost approvingly and then turns to you with a joking smile, “You should join us.”

You laugh at the sudden invitation, knowing full well the offer wasn’t real. Seeing as the female version of the Hwarang, the Wonhwa, had been thrown away since before the Hwarang themselves were even conceptualized, it was a long shot to think that you could march along their ranks. As much as you want to help these men, you’re not sure that they’d fully accept you into their ranks. But if you could aid them like you had on the night of the raids on the two inns, you wouldn’t mind doing something like that again.

“If you want me to go with you, I wouldn’t be opposed,” you shoot back to Jaehyun, cracking a small smile at him. “If you need me to help, I’ll do whatever I can.”

His smile deepens, the dimples on his cheeks beginning to show, “I’ll be sure to keep that in mind if the time comes.”

August 18th, 661 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla “Excuse me,” you say quietly as you make your way into the main hall, the wooden handle of the teapot in your grasp course on your palm. The heat of its contents rising up to try and weaken your grip on the vessel. “I brought you all some more tea.”

The Hwarang captains and men sit in various spots around the hall, you’re not sure why they’re convening, but they’d been in there for at least an hour discussing some matter at hand.

“Thanks!” Yukhei calls out and beckons you over, he takes the pot from your hands and begins to pour tea into his already halfway filled cup, “It’s almost like you’re our servant or something.”

More so a page, but you weren’t going to correct him quite yet. You take back the pot and look around for anyone who might need a refill. Spotting Jisung trying to catch your eye, you make your way over and fill his cup.

“Thank you,” he says once you’re finished, quickly bringing the cup to his lips and blowing on the warm contents.

“It’s no problem,” you smile, voice barely above a whisper as you try not to disrupt the main conversation flowing throughout the hall. As you’re about to move away, Yongqin swipes the pot from your grasp, pouring his own cup of tea and taking a drink of it. His face contorts for a moment and you question, “Does it not taste good?”

“It tastes fine, I guess,” his shoulders shrug as he leans back in his seat, “It could stand to be a little warmer though, maybe you’re just taking too long to pour it.”

“Oh,” you frown, taking the pot back from him, holding your free hand to the side of the vessel for a moment to test the warmth, “I’ll go and brew some more.”

“Don’t worry about it,” Jaemin butts in, motioning for you to hand him the pot, “I like it lukewarm because it’s easier to drink, right, Yuta?”

“Right,” the aforementioned captain nods, “It’s easier to drink on a hot day like this.”

It looks as if Jaemin’s about to speak again before Taeil barges into the hall, a stoic expression drawn onto his face.

“The Hwarang have received an official request from the Crown to head to Sabi. All available men must get ready to set out at once,” Taeil says, a sternness in his voice hinting at a notion of pride somewhere hidden away in its depths. There’s general excitement beginning to buzz among the Hwarang before he continues, “It seems as if they’ve noticed all of our hard work as of late.” It’s then he lets himself break out into a prideful smile; it was clear he was proud of the work the Hwarang had achieved in the past few weeks.

As you scan the faces of the room, there was one in particular that has a sour expression forming as Taeil finishes.

“We don’t have time to celebrate,” Kun says, rising to his feet, “We need to get moving now, so get off of your asses and go!” The captains and other men then begin to follow his lead and stand, “Those loyalists are already in Seorabeol, we need to cut the head off of this snake before it lays any more eggs.”

Once the men filter out and it’s only you and the captains, Kun speaks up, “Only when there’s somewhere else to go, they tell us to haul ass?” He shakes his head, “We may not be the Guard or the Watch, but it doesn’t mean we’re any less expendable.”

“Jaemin and Yongqin,” Taeyong says after Kun’s done mumbling to himself, “You’ll remain here. I know it’s not what you want, but your injuries from Wonweol are still preventing you from active duty.” You glance to his hand, knowing full well that the colonel would be staying behind as well.

“Speak for yourself,” Yongqin frowns, clearly perturbed by the orders, “It’s not like my injuries didn’t recover. But I’m not at peak performance, even I can realize that. So, if you want me to hang back, I guess I can…”

“That’s bullshit!” Adversely, Jaemin points to his forehead, the cut he’d received during the raids still an angry pink where the skin had been slashed. “This is just a scratch, Moon’s just being too careful.”

“Are you being serious?” Jaehyun scoffs at the younger, “I heard you in your room crying about how much it hurt still last night.”

“You bastard,” Jaemin pouts, “Don’t you want me out there with you guys?”

“Oh, believe me, I do, Na.” Jaehyun shakes his head, chuckling, “I just want you at your best. Not crying into your pillow because of a scratch. Even you heard him, right?” He looks to you for affirmation.

“HEY!” Jaemin whines, you think he’s going to clamp his hand over Jaehyun’s mouth but the older moves away before he can. “Don’t ask her! And can you try to keep your mouth shut for a little while?” Jaemin then gives you a sideways glance as if to ask if you really had heard him complaining yesterday.

“...Your injury still hasn’t healed, Jaemin.” You don’t explicitly admit that you heard his grumblings, even though you had. The band he normally wears with the Hwarang insignia hides the scar well, but without it, like he is now, it’s a stark reminder that he isn’t quite ready for the front lines again.

“Hm, you said you wanted to go with us if we ever got the orders, didn’t you?” Yukhei interrupts the lull in the room as he asks you a question. “Are you still up for that?”

Even if you said that you’d join Yukhei and Jaehyun when you were out with them the other day, you thought you’d been joking, or half-joking at least. It would be risky if you did join them.

“I don’t see any reason why you can’t tag along,” Taeil says with a nod of his head, “Opportunities for the Hwarang to move under Crown command alone are rare.” While he’s supposed to be the leader of the Hwarang, Moon Taeil was very easily swayed by his men’s words.

“What?” Jaemin says, almost confused as he looks from Yukhei to Jaehyun. “If she’s going with you, then maybe it isn’t such a bad idea for me to tag along too, right?”

“You’re still not where you need to be,” Yukhei says, nudging the other with his elbow gently, “Just stay here and heal up.”

“Are you sure it’s okay that I go with you?” You ask, still not fully convinced they want you tagging along with them.

The captain and colonel sigh at your reservations.

“We can’t promise that you won’t get injured, or worse.” Kun says, a distressed glint in his eyes as he speaks to you, “I think you should stay here.”

“Staying here would be an undue burden on the rest of us that stay,” Taeyong argues back, “We’re not here to be a source of entertainment for you.”

“Taeyong…” Yuta speaks up, “So, as long as she’s not being burdensome, she’s free to go with us?”

Is he standing up for you? It seems to be the case as Taeyong looks at him in surprise, his eyes widening at the captain.

“You’re really in favor of taking her along with you?” The colonel asks, his brow furrowing as he tries to understand the rationale.

“She was an asset to us as Wonweol,” Yuta’s shoulders shrug, “Taking that into consideration, I hardly believe that she can be considered a ‘burden’, when recalling that.”

“Great!” Taeil exclaims, relinquishing the two from their conversation as his hands clap together. “I’ll take full responsibility for your inclusion, that is, if you want to go with us.”

“Do whatever you want to do,” almost as if he can sense your hesitation, Yongqin speaks up. The two of you make eye contact, and a smaller version of the smirk he almost always has plastered on his face curls to his lips. “Just as long as you know that this is a battle you’re going to, not a party.”

Maybe you’d be able to help them out as you had on the night of the raids. It was a strong maybe, but you couldn’t let that hinder your decision making, could you?

“I’d like to participate,” you find the words falling from your lips before you have the thought of saying them in the first place. Perhaps it was your subconscious speaking for what you truly want.

August 24, 661 - Outside of Ongsan, Kingdom of Silla (former Baekje stronghold) Entering the territory of the former kingdom is more eye opening to you than you had ever thought it would be. Rather than the calmness that had been exemplified by the King’s announcements back in Silla, there is an anxious tension wrought in the villages and towns as the Hwarang sweep through. Even though they were only passing by the inhabitants would warily gaze upon you, the captains, and the rest of the men as if to gauge how hostile their new countrymen would be.

The main goal is to reach Ongsan, a former Baekje fortress that stands on the once border between the two Kingdoms. It seems as if the same group of loyalists from Seorabeol had taken over the now-emptied armament and claimed it as their headquarters. The Crown assigned the Hwarang the mission of expelling them, in a way of their gratitude for their performance on the night of the Wonweol and Jeolin Inn raids.

Judging from what the captains were saying this morning, it seems as if you’re not too far from your destination. You don’t know the layout of this land, the towns unfamiliar and the faces just as so.

For the most part, the men have been silent, only the odd gripe from one of the Hwarang. The absence of both Yongqin and Jaemin are notable, their voices seeming to fill in large gaps of silence when in attendance. It’s not until your troupe stops in front of a walled gate, presumably leading into a city, that Taeil speaks up. Before the group stands a few other soldiers, from Silla by the looks of their armor.

“My name is Moon Taeil, leader of the Seorabeol Hwarang. I am here on orders from Jeong Seokmin, an army general under His Majesty King Munmu.” He stands before an officer of the troupe that was already there.

Jeong Seokmin is one of the most influential members of the Crown’s court. The father of Jeong Jaehyun and former Hwarang himself, he acquired favor from the kingship due to his efforts in a handful of Baekje rebellions in the decades prior.

The officer looks confused, his brow furrowing, “You were told to report here? Did you not meet with the men from Unghyeon?”

“Unghyeon?” You mouth the word in the same confusion the officer was expressing. It’s a Silla fortress some distance away from where you all stand now; it hadn’t been brought up in any conversation the Hwarang had had on their trek.

“Several generals and their troops were sent there to convene before the attack,” Yuta leans over to you and whispers, “If we were meant to meet with them, it’s most likely the message to tell us to do so was intercepted.”

“Does that mean they know we’re coming?” You ask quietly, looking around to the other captains to try and gauge what they’re thinking.

“It’s likely they’ve put the pieces together,” Yuta nods solemnly, “But I can’t imagine they have the numbers to rival both us and the other group.”

“This could still get messy, though,” you sigh, hoping the break in communication wouldn’t be but so impactful to the mission.

“Regardless of that, our aid has been formally requested,” Taeil stands firm as he speaks to the officer, “If you could relay this to your commandi-”

“If that’s the case then I suggest you try and convene with the King’s garrison,” the officer states as he cuts off Taeil, “We can’t let you in here because we have no idea what’s waiting on the other side.”

“Our orders say to stay stationed here,” Taeil frowns, clearly frustrated with the lack of cooperation.

“There’s nothing we can do about this, Chief,” Yuta speaks up, stepping over to Taeil. “If they won’t allow us access here, maybe it would be in our best interest to try and find the others.” It looks as if Yuta was going to suggest something else before Kangjoon interrupts.

“Find the others?” He shakes his head almost angrily, “Jeong’s orders were to stay stationed here until we were signaled to enter the city. Why would we ignore a military command when we haven’t received anything to tell us to do otherwise? I think we should remain here on standby.”

“If this was a camp that we were stationed at, that might make sense, Suh.” Yuta states with a frown, “But this is, or very soon will be, the front lines of a battle.”

“Are you really trying to go against me?” Kangjoon nearly snarls back, the mere thought of someone going against his wishes enraging him, “Don’t forget that I’m the Hwarang’s War Counselor.”

“And I’m the leader,” Taeil interjects, “Yuta’s made a good point. We’ll look for the other group’s camp and hopefully get a better understanding of the strategy at play.”

And with his words, the Hwarang begin to walk along the narrow pathway surrounding the fortress in search of the other group of generals and soldiers that are on their way from Unghyeon. Your group eventually finds the ally camp to the eastern front of the fortress, wooden spikes that had been hastily made surrounding it. A few soldiers come out to greet a few members of the Hwarang as you enter, they might be friends or family members who haven't seen each other in quite some time.

Almost as soon as you’d entered the camp, Taeil is ushered into one of the tents to speak with a few generals. You’re not sure who’s in there, but with the pallid complexion of the Hwarang’s leader upon his exit, you can assume it had been higher ranks than he’d been expecting.

The orders are now to travel to the Southern Gate, the opposite end of where your original orders had been to go with a general and his troops.

“If these guys say anything, and I don’t think they will, just let me know, okay?” Yukhei says as everyone begins to leave the encampment. “Park Jeongsu’s not a friendly face around here.”

“What do you mean?” You ask, not noticing Jaehyun saddling up beside you.

“What he means is, his father’s an enemy of my father,” Jaehyun says, a gruffness to his voice as if he’s recalling something. “His father’s probably the one that sent the Watch out the night of the raids to try and take credit for what we did.”

“That and he’s a major prick,” Yukhei adds, “I can’t imagine his men are much better.”

“Come on you guys,” Taeil says as he slows his pace in front of you three, falling in line to your steps. “We can’t talk about them like that,” he contradicts his words by letting slip a sly smile for a few seconds before straightening his face and resuming his position at the front of the line.

By the time you all arrived and set up your small camp, night had fallen quickly, plunging the surrounding area into an inky black, save for the lights several fires dotted around the site provided. Taeil, Kun and the captains had gone off to speak with Park Jeongsu and his officers, leaving you and the rest of the Hwarang to sit around camp with little else to do.

They return what feels like hours later, their shoulders sagging and eyes looking tired as if they'd just run for that time instead of sitting in on a meeting. Jisung, who had accompanied them, walks over to you with a small and lethargic smile.

“For the most part they’re being cooperative,” he sighs, “The only reason Jeongsu was paired with us is because his father asked for it, though.”

“Why would he do that?” You ask a tilt of your head. Earlier, Jaehyun has said that his and Jeongsu’s families were something along the lines of enemies.

“I don’t know,” Jisung shakes his head, “Maybe to rile us up? Regardless of that though, we’re here to watch over the gate and make sure no one escapes.”

“Regardless of that, they’re treating us like reserve troops,” Yukhei’s voice is strained as he walks over, his arms high over his head as he stretches. Once he drops his arms down, he speaks up, “They’ve left smaller reserves around the South entrance because the biggest fight is going to happen at the North Gate.” He sounds a little disappointed, as if he were anticipating a big battle.

“We don’t know what they’ll do exactly,” Yuta says as he trails after him, “We may very well see battle.”

But that means waiting and seeing as the sun isn’t to rise for a long time, that means waiting overnight. As the crowds disperse and settle into their tents, you find that the Hwarang, at least, are sleeping in shifts so that if the call to arms were to come at night, there would be someone to rouse everyone else.

“You can rest your head on my shoulder if you need to,” Jaehyun says as the two of you sit down to keep watch, the flames in front of you seem like they’re trying to lull you to sleep.

“I’m alright,” trying to stifle a yawn behind your hand as you shake your head. You’d feel wrong trying to sleep when you know these men could get called to face death at any moment.

A nervous anxiousness coils around your stomach until you find yourself falling asleep later in the night, not awaking until the sun’s barely peeking over the horizon. When you sit up from the laid down position you’d slept in, you notice that the men had kept a silent vigil all through the night. Even as you were drifting in and out of consciousness, you noted that there were men posted around the camp, looking for anything or anyone suspicious.

A little while later a large boom reverberates through the surrounding forest. You first think it’s a crack of lightning, or maybe the subsequent boom of thunder that succeeds it, but the sky is clear today, not a cloud in sight. It had echoed like thunder, startling the birds in the nearby trees, and causing more people than just you to jump in shock.

“What was that?” You question Yuta as he walks past you, seeming to look for someone coming in from outside of the camp.

“It looks like the main army is beginning to siege the fortress,” he says, his eyes narrowing as scans the tree-line. The soldiers and Hwarang within the camp are moving by now,

“Let’s get a move on!” Kun shouts out from somewhere deeper in the camp, his voice nearing as he continues to speak, “They’re not going to pause the fight until we get there, so get moving!”

“We were told to stay here,” Park Jeongsu says as he emerges from his tent, probably stirred from the commotion outside. The general watches the scramble of men in the camp race for their weapons and armor for a moment before he turns to Kun, “You don’t command my men.”

“Our job is to siege the fortress, not sit on our asses and wait for this to pass by,” The commander bites back, he was almost yelling at the general. “We’re here to root out these loyalists, that won’t happen if we just stay here!”

“We haven’t even received orders to push!” Jeongsu quips, his brow furrowing at the Hwarang.

“If you have any pride in your position, forget the damn orders and move your men,” Kun huffs, straightening the band around his forehead, “They aren’t going to willingly surrender.” The commander and general stare harshly at one another for a moment, almost as if they’re testing each other in a battle of wills. Kun, seeing as it was useless to try to neg the other any further, spins on his heels and begins to stalk off.

“Where are we going?” You whisper to Yuta as Kun passes by, muttering something to himself.

“To face the enemy head on,” He says quietly, “Which, in our case, means the Southern Gate. The main fight is meant to happen at the Northern Gate so I wouldn’t be surprised if they try to divide our numbers to get more support up there.”

“I see,” You nod, the same nervousness invading your veins once again, it was now riddled with an adrenaline that was probably the only thing making you think clearly.

Kun’s rage at the general seems to have roused the reserve troops, who now, instead of loitering around the camp, seem to be mostly readied up. Led by both Park Jeongsu and Qian Kun, the army and the Hwarang march their way to the Southern Gate.

It was only a short trek to the destination, but the remains of skirmishes that seemed to have happened moments prior litter the ground. Soldiers, dead and dying, lay on the ground, chunks of wood from the gate lay in reddened splinters as arrows, both broken and intact, lay riddled where fragments of the gate’s doors once stood. The group that had come before you seem to have successfully made it into the city, but not without losses of their own. You can see both Baekje and Silla armor on the bodies of the fallen soldiers.

Even if you tried to mentally prepare yourself for what you might see, the reality of it all still shatters your heart.

Though the Baekje and Silla forces were nowhere to be seen, had your allies driven them further into the fortress? After a quick moment of assessment, Kun orders a few captains to investigate what happened, Taeil sighing as he does so.

“Had we known a group of Silla warriors were coming in beforehand we would’ve joined them and lost fewer lives.” He frowns as he looks over the scene, looking up once he sees Yuta returning from his survey of the area.

“It looks like our forces attacked the gate earlier this morning, were repelled briefly before the flank on the Northern Gate began,” the captain recounts, looking to Kun, “After their forces were divided the army at the Southern Gate was able to advance into the fortress.”

“Do you have any word on what’s happening at the Northern Gate?” Kun questions, obviously beginning to silently plan a course of action.

“They’re still fighting,” Yuta nods, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword as if he can tell what Kun’s thinking, “The King’s garrison has yet to advance into Ongsan.”

“Qian!” Jaehyun shouts out as he returns from his own survey of the area, running from the direction of the pass to reach the stronghold. “There’s supposedly Baekje reinforcements coming from the west as well, not many, but enough to make a dent in our numbers if we let them.”

Kun’s expression of confidence wavers momentarily as he listens to Jeong as he approaches, but before he can comment on it, Minhyung also races over to the group of captains from surveying inside of the fortress.

“Commander,” he starts off, a thin sheen of sweat coating his brow, glinting in the daylight now hanging overhead, “It’s believed that the men who led this are heading for the heart of the fortress to try and kill the loyalists trying to run for it.”

The commander thinks after listening to the cumulative reports, contemplating as to what the next move should be. Although Taeil is the recognized formal leader of the Hwarang, you’d come to learn the most major decisions were given to Kun to make. This was no exception, the crowd of captains anticipating his orders while Jeongsu was speaking with his own men of what to do next.

“It looks like we’ve got our work cut out for us,” Kun’s lips curve into a small smile after a moment of silence. “Jeong, take your men to the pass to deal with any incoming loyalists. Lee, Nakamoto,” he turns to Minhyung and Yuta, “follow the men into the fortress, but make sure to keep an ear out if Jeong needs any reinforcements at the pass.”

There’s nods and affirmations from the captains and officer before the commander turns to Taeil, “I’m sorry for giving you the hardest one, Chief. Can you speak with the higher ups back at the main camp about a punitive measure for the group that got here before us? As far as both Jeongsu and I were aware they weren’t supposed to do that, and I’ll bet they’re doing more in there than just routing out the loyalists. If we’re to do anything about that then we’ll need the higher ups permission.”

While an independently run body from the Crown’s army or guard, the Hwarang still need permission to act under that guise of pseudo-Crown rule and dole out their justice.

“I’m sure I can do something about it, and if not me, my father,” Taeil nods, a smile forming as he thinks it over. You’re not sure who Taeil’s father is, but if his son is the leader of the Hwarang, his position in the Crown’s council must be higher than anyone else’s father in the organization. It would still be tricky to gain that permission with all of the Hwarang naysayers and adversaries within the council.

“Jisung, can you go with him?” Kun asks and turns to their youngest member, “Someone has to keep an eye on him.”

“Of course,” He nods, “I’ll do my best.”

Kun smiles wryly at him before turning to the remaining Hwarang. “The rest of you are following me into the fortress and to the Northern Gate. As for you,” he looks directly at you, “You can’t go with Taeil, but other than that it’s up to you.”

You know he doesn’t know where to place you. It’s not as if you’re one of the Hwarang he could command to a role and set you there. Maybe having you decide your own fate was a way to take the burden off his shoulders.

“I’ll go with you, then,” you say after a moment of contemplation. Along with Kun, a group of Hwarang, and a group of regular soldiers, you’ll race into Ongsan and try to open the Northern Gate for the King’s garrison to make way into the fortress by suppressing the loyalists inside.

The groups disperse shortly after, Jaehyun and his men heading to the pass, Taeil and Jisung leaving for the main camp, Minhyung and Yuta leaving for the heart of the fortress, and then Kun and you making way to the Northern Gate from inside the fortress itself.

Kun, you and the group of soldiers accompanying you race through the fortress. Seeing it from the outside had hidden how expansive it is on the inside, large courtyards and twisting hallways have your mind running in circles as you slowly run out of breath. You come upon another seemingly empty courtyard before stopping in your tracks. There’s someone standing in the middle of it, someone wearing neither Silla nor Baekje armor. In fact, they are dressed more like a noble than a fighter.

The sun is shining so harshly onto the courtyard as you approach that it’s hard to get a good look at his face. It’s obscured in the sunlight and the light yellow of his robes and the glinting silver of a blade in his hand is doing little to help that. There’s a strange aura surrounding him, almost as if he's waiting for something to happen.

Kun, perceptive to that, motions for everyone to stop before encroaching on the character. The Hwarang stop in their tracks, save for one man too eager or arrogant to follow the commander’s orders and charges towards the figure with his sword out. The stranger seems to have only waved his arm once before the Hwarang falls to the ground, the dull sound of his body hitting the stone below echoing around the courtyard, the clangor of battle raging in the distance.

“What the hell?!” Yukhei shouts out, shoving his way through the throng of Hwarang and over to the fallen man. The man’s unresponsive, a thick pool of blood beginning to stain the ground under him. The rest of the men, first taken aback by the stranger, now glare at him for the loss of their comrade.

“Commander… He was at Wonweol!” You say, finally realizing where you’d seen this man before.

“You’re Hwarang, aren’t you?” The stranger speaks up, his blade tapping against the agate stone of the walkway, “I can tell because of those blue robes of yours.” He sighs out, “A bunch of pretty nobles playing soldier, aren’t you all old enough to know to stop playing pretend?”

The man’s words are enough to make the already on-edge men agitated. Egged on by the harsh ridicule of someone they’d only just come upon. Each Hwarang, either noble or not, had their reason for joining. Taking their choice into question was cruel and that was clearly painted on their faces now.

“First, you ruin my plans at Wonweol and now you’re trying to play hero,” They snicker, “You’re not even real soldiers, are you?” His gaze travels down to the fallen Hwarang momentarily before lazily and almost arrogantly meeting Kun’s eyes, “I’d turn back if I were you, unless you want to end up like your friend here.”

“You’re the swordsman who beat Yongqin at Wonweol?” Kun asks, the tension in the air thick and palpable as he speaks. “I heard you were quite good, but these are pretty big words coming from such a small man.” The smile on the commander’s face is anything but amicable.

“And I heard that you all were talented, for what you are, but this sorry display is telling me otherwise.” The now adversary snickers, once again glancing to the dying, or maybe he was already dead, Hwarang. “The man I fought at the inn; his name is Yongqin? It’s a bit of a stretch to call him a real swordsman.”

You know from watching the men train that Yongqin is skilled with a sword, but he had been injured by this man. Is his prowess with a blade more prolific than the Hwarang captain’s?

“Insult Li all you want,” Yukhei stands from the body of the crumpled soldier to face the stranger, his hand reaching for the sword at his hip. “But why did you kill this man?” The hiss of the steel leaving the sheath cries out as he tears it from the scabbard, the captain’s teeth baring. “If I don’t like your answer then I won’t hesitate to tear you down right here.”

“How prideful,” you can almost hear him roll his eyes, “The king says for you to ‘Jump’ and you say, ‘How high?’. Why are you chasing after men who’ve deserted their own movement? Or are you trying to let your own men in at the Northern Gate? Either way, your combatants are going to kill themselves before they’ll let you take this place by full force.”

You glance at Kun and the men around him, not even one looking as if the other’s words were outlandish. It seems as if the man in front of you had stopped your assault on the fortress to spare the pride of the Baekje loyalists. From the stranger’s point of view, you can understand what he was doing and why he feels right about it. But that gave him no right to slay one of the Hwarang.

“Is taking someone’s life for the sake of another’s pride just?” You speak up, distraught from this situation entirely, “The only one who can save your pride is you, not letting that responsibility fall into someone else’s hands.”

A grin splits onto the other’s face, “There’s some truth in that, I suppose. Are you saying that I should let the Hwarang demolish any pride these men have just to simply gain favor with the Crown?” Despite the curvature of his lips, his voice is not amused.

“That’s not what I…” The reddish-brown tint of his eyes scrutinizes you as you try to justify yourself, quickly falling away with the harshness of his demeanor.

“Here I was, thinking you were trying to say something intelligent,” Kun steps in once your voice trails off, “but you’re just acting like a child. This is war, not a council meeting debating ethics!”

“What did you just say?” Knuckles turning white with the newfound grip on his blade, the stranger questions accusingly at Kun.

“The loyalists started a fight knowing their kingdom had been defeated already, and now they’re running away in shame because they’re too cowardly to face the consequence of their actions,” Kun argues, a heated tone to his words, “They don’t deserve honor! They’re traitors to their new kingdom by trying to incite a rebellion, you think that deserves an honorable death?”

“You don’t seem like a coward,” Kun states, “So are you ready to accept the consequence of what happens when you kill one of my men?”

“Those are some big words,” The stranger says as he raises his sword from his lax position, the gore from the fallen Hwarang still clinging to the blade, “Do you really think you can defeat me?”

The answer isn’t verbal, but a ringing sound as their blades meet. They step back from one another, Kun’s grip tightening on his sword as he glares at the other. Now, the commander’s skill seems unrivaled but the thought that this stranger had beaten Yongqin, the Hwarang’s best swordsman, lingers in the back of your mind as you watch.

Next to you, you can see Yukhei reaching for his own sword. If he were to leap into the fight, it would most certainly help Kun gain the upper hand.

“You can’t,” you say and reach out, your hand falling onto his forearm before he turns to look at you. Meeting and fighting with this stranger aren’t why you and the Hwarang are here. The mission is to aid the forces at the Northern Gate. It isn’t any question whether this man was an enemy, a dangerous one, at that.

Even if Kun can’t defeat him, he would never let the Hwarang abandon their mission, especially after his speech.

Yukhei turns away from you and watches the two men clash for a moment more, gritting his teeth and finally pulling his hand away from his sword. “Qian, I’m going to take your men for a second if that’s okay with you!”

“Just go already, loudmouth!” Kun says as he once again falls away from the stranger, “They’re all yours!”

“Alright!” Yukhei calls out and turns to the men, “We’re heading for the Northern Gate, run straight there and don’t stop until those Baekje bastards have been put in their place!”

The soldiers roar with a renewed vigor and begin to follow the captain.

The stranger huffs something out as he watches the men run off, his hand clenching his sword as if he’s about to follow them.

“You’re not fighting them, so pay attention,” Kun calls out to pull the stranger’s focus back to him. “If you don’t, I’ll cut you down from behind instead.”

“Don’t get in my way!” The stranger shouts, bringing his sword down to meet Kun’s, the swing causing Kun to reel back once receiving it.

Now that there was more of a distance between the two, the stranger’s gaze once again travels to Yukhei and the running Hwarang. You think for a moment to stop running with the men and try to stand your ground with Kun, but relent after a bit, continuing to go further on with the rest of the troops.

“Keep running!” Kun calls out, closing the distance between himself and the stranger, positioning his sword upwards once more.

“You don’t even know your limit,” The stranger scoffs.

You stop for a moment, finding yourself unable to keep up with the men and draw your blade instinctively. Knees locking together, your swordsmanship wouldn’t be useful in battle but maybe, just maybe, you can buy the other men some time.

The next thing you know, a high pitch screech of metal rings out and you’re on the ground. The stranger’s hit had blindsided you, and when your eyes refocus, you see his blade pointing down at you as a trickle of blood runs down your face.

“That blade…” The stranger murmurs, looking to the steel that had fallen out of your grasp and lay only a foot or two away, “A familiar sight indeed.” Their eyes lock onto yours, “Hey, do you even realize what’s happening? The wound on your face is already starting to heal.”

Your hand flies to your cheek, fingers brushing over where the cut should have been, but it had already healed. The pain had stopped and the blood had staunched itself. The stranger’s crimson eyes widen.

“Who would’ve thought I’d meet another one of us here. And a female Demon, no less…” His gaze is scrutinizing, “What is your name? And how did you come across this?”

Before you can answer, a dull clang of metal cries out above you as Kun swings his sword from behind while the stranger parries it in front.

“Get away!” Kun shouts out angrily, holding his sword, ready to strike again.

“Bastard, stay out of my way!”

“I’m the one you’re fighting!” Kun reiterates, “Or do you only prey on the weak? I didn’t take you for a bully.”

“How dare you, you monarchist dog,” The stranger near growls out as Kun looks to you.

“Go on ahead!” He says and suddenly, energy jolts through you.

You scramble off of the ground, urgency picking up your feet as you begin to dash away. Even if Kun had been there, you don’t think he’d seen your cut heal, at least you hope he hadn’t.

Demon. One of us.

The words of the stranger reverberate around your head as you run, but you can’t dwell on it now as you run to catch up with Yukhei and the other men.

By the time you and the rest of the Hwarang make it to the Northern Gates, it seems as if the King’s garrison had broken through already. There’re skirmishes happening all around the entrance but are soon quelled by the introduction of the Hwarang into the fight. Kun hadn’t arrived as the battles wane to a close and the sun begins to sink down into the sky. Several higher ups order a few of the captains to look for any remaining loyalists in the compound, leaving you to stand and wait for a sign of the commander or a returning captain.

“I’m sure they’ll be back soon,” a voice says to your right. You’re met with the face of Officer Osaki, or Shotaro as you’ve come to learn. Like Minhyung, he acts as a spy for the Hwarang but typically deals with Yamato forces, but he had accompanied the men to Ongsan this time, only showing how much more this mission meant to the Hwarang. “I know they will.”

You can only nod your head in response and scan the area, looking for one of the faces you hope on seeing return. Every passing moment feels like an eternity, slowly inching by as the sun sinks lower and lower into the sky.

It’s dusk when you see a figure emerge from the depths of the fortress, the darkening sky obscuring most of their features, but as they near the now lit courtyard you stand in, you can see that it’s a familiar face.

“Commander!” You shout out and race over to him, relief flooding your system.

“I’m glad to see you’re alright,” Shotaro says, following closely behind you as you stop in front of Kun. “It doesn't even look like you’ve been hurt.”

In the light of the fires, you can see that the Hwarang hadn’t been injured, but he wears a dark expression over his face.

“I hoped we would have a real fight, but it looks like it was over almost as soon as you all arrived,” he frowns, “held up by a Hwarang opposer, no less.”

“Who was he?” Shotaro asks, tilting his head slightly.

“His name is Lee Donghyuck. I don’t know if his father’s a part of the council or if he’s just a lackey under one of them, but he’s clearly very anti-us.”

“But if he’s still working under Silla rule, why did he try to stop us from going after Baekje?” You question, confused by the swordsman’s actions, weren’t both sides there to stop the loyalists? Something about this isn’t settling right with you. “Does that mean he was betraying Silla?”

“I don’t know about that, but I do think he was trying to stop us from getting here,” Kun sighs out, closing his eyes as if to recall the situation, “The soldiers who broke us up were also confused by whatever game he was trying to play. But they didn’t try to command him to do anything after we’d stopped fighting, so he must mean something to them.”

“He must have some notoriety in their ranks, then,” Shotaro muses.

“He’s a lazy piece of shit who uses his rank or his money to do whatever he wants, more like,” Kun says with a bitter edge to his voice. “If he flaunts that around he has no right to try and teach me what his definition of pride is.”

Before Kun can ramble and rant about Donghyuck, Yukhei and the detachment of men he’d left with returns to the battle site. Yukhei stops for a moment upon seeing the commander before breaking out into a large grin. The smile doesn’t last long though as he approaches, the curvature of his grin turning downwards.

“We found a few runaways, but they were already dying or dead by the time we got there.” At Yukhei’s words you feel your heart drop. It’s not that you were sad that the loyalists were dead or that the Hwarang hadn’t been able to capture any one of them, only that more lives had been lost in the conflict.

“Honorable suicide, then?” Kun nods, not sounding angry at the result. “Good for them.”

“Good?” You ask without thinking, how is that ‘good’? Only hours prior the commander was trying to stop the loyalists from succeeding in that mission, but now that it’s been done he’s lauding them.

“You don’t understand,” the commander says and looks towards you. “As Hwarang, this isn’t good for us. We failed and let them kill themselves. They’re dead, what good would it be for me to ignore what they’ve done? It doesn’t matter if they’re an enemy or my friend, a man who dies with his honor intact deserves at least some respect.”

“I guess that makes some sense…” You mutter, not fully understanding the reasoning or what he was trying to convey.

His expression softens slightly, “The longer you stay with us, the more you’re likely to understand our mindset.”

Now that this group has come back together, you make your way to the campsite to meet with the rest of the Hwarang you’d parted ways with that morning.

The event of the loyalist takeover of Ongsan and their eventual expulsion from the fortress comes to be known as the Ongsan Rebellion to the citizens of Silla. And while the Hwarang had been called to action, their efforts were stymied with unforeseen circumstances and were able to find little in the way of gaining major approval with the Crown. Communication with the King’s garrison and the army alongside him had been poor and much of the Hwarang’s time had been spent waiting for battle with the rest of the reserve troops.

And even when they were called to arms, the Hwarang found a strange opponent at every turn:

Lee Donghyuck, who had defeated Yongqin at Wonweol, had claimed to be a member of the pro-Watch camp of the council during his encounter with Kun. It still isn’t determined who his family is and why his stance is so firmly against the Hwarang.

Xiao Dejun, the man who had injured Jaemin at Wonweol was also in attendance at the battle. While little more is known about him, he had claimed to be in allegiance with Lee Donghyuck.

And then there was Dong Sicheng, who also fought along with the prior two men with little mention of his full allegiance.

Whoever these men are, it’s clear to see that they’re no allies of the Hwarang. In fact, it seems as if they’re set to become one of their greatest enemies.

The battle claimed the lives of thousands of men, the king ordering his garrison to behead any survivors they found. Even then, some Baekje loyalists were able to escape westward, further into the territory that used to be their homeland. With the end of the Ongsan Rebellion, the king passes an edict labelling any man that fought alongside the Baekje loyalists to be branded a traitor in the eyes of the Crown and an enemy of the court.

September 8th, 661 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla With the events of the raid on Wonweol Inn and the Ongsan Rebellion taking place within only a few short weeks of one another, it was causing a certain unrest to take hold within citizens of Silla. The Hwarang are doing their best to double up on their work to make citizens feel protected, but with the return of most of the Guard and Watch, it’s difficult for them to receive missions as big as the raids and rebellion had been. And even if they are assigned a task, the Crown overworks them, seemingly wanting to bleed them dry.

The Crown’s approval of any of their missions spreads them thin, even with the newer recruits they’d received from Podang and Gochang, it isn’t enough to keep an appropriate amount of people to instill peace. After many long and arduous meetings, it’s decided that Jaemin, to slowly introduce him back into his role after his injury, will travel to Hanseong, one of Silla’s northernmost cities, to do preliminary scouting for future recruits.

The burning sun hits your face as Taeil and you see Jaemin off, a bag slung around his shoulder having been packed the night prior.

“I’ll be on my way now,” The Hwarang nods at the two of you, “Make sure no one gets in trouble while I’m away!”

“I’ll try my best,” you smile at him. His presence would be missed at the headquarters, even if the other men didn’t want to acknowledge it.

“Find us a solid list of men, it doesn’t matter if they’re nobles or not,” Taeil notes, putting his hand under his chin for a moment. “But seeing as it’s Gochang, you might encounter more nobles there than usual. I’ll join you there next month to see who you’ve recruited.”

“Isn’t there someone who you’re looking for?” You turn to Taeil, “I remember you mentioning someone once.”

“Oh, did we not tell you?” Taeil sounds a tad miffed, “His name is Kim Gongmyung. Classically trained and the rumor is that he’s very well versed in strategy.”

“To be honest, I haven’t met him but only once or twice,” Jaemin relents, “But at the least I’m sure he’ll let me speak to him.”

“That’s all we need,” Taeil nods with a small smile, “His father’s on our side in the king’s council, and if we approach him kindly, I’m sure it’ll be within his interest to help us.” The leader seems confident just by his facial expression, but there’s an air of unsureness coming from the younger Hwarang.

“Alright, I’m going!” He lets that discontentment fall from his features seconds later, nodding his head before speaking. Jaemin then turns to you, “I’ll do my best to find any information on Heo while I’m there, so just hang on until I get back!”

“Be careful!” You call out to him as he turns on his heels, bounding out from the main hall and towards the exit. As you watch him leave, and the smaller he seems to get the further he is from you and Taeil, the melancholier you feel. Taeil looks different though, a small smile residing on his face as he watches the Hwarang set out. “You look excited, are you thinking of all the new members you’re getting?”

“Of course, seeing out numbers increase is great. Even more so if they’re strong and able,” he says as Jaemin finally disappears outside of the main entrance.

September 27th, 661 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla Time passes quickly after Jaemin’s departure. So fast, that the date of Taeil’s departure for Hanseong arrives with little resistance. The morning before he’s meant to depart, you find him standing in one of the compound’s courtyards, quietly watching the wind pass through the leaves overhead.

“Is everything alright?” You ask as you approach him quietly, not wanting to startle him.

“Hm, oh, hello,” he looks at you with a small smile, “I’m alright, are you doing okay?”

“I am,” you nod, “I’m just thinking about how you’re leaving tomorrow.”

“I see,” he says with a short chuckle, “I can’t leave Jaemin alone for too long, can I? Who knows what sort of trouble he’s already found himself in?”

“I’m sure your absence here is going to affect the men like Jaemin’s is,” you sigh out, already knowing the feeling of having such a pivotal character of the captains gone for nearly a month now. Taeil is the Hwarang’s leader. If anything, this will be a larger blow than Jaemin’s departure.

“It’s only a month,” he tries to reassure you, “I’ve been gone for longer before. And besides, Kun will make sure everything runs smoothly while I’m away.” Taeil probably isn’t aware that his kindness and Jaemin’s strange but bright personality were things that kept you mentally intact day after day here. With both absent from the headquarters, you’re not sure what kind of emotional blow it’ll have on you.

Your discontentment with the situation must have placated itself on your face because Taeil looks at you now with a sad, small smile.

“Is there anything you want me to bring back for you?” He questions in hopes that it might make you feel better, “I’m going to stop in Toehwa-hyeon on my way back, did you want a memento from your hometown?”

“Oh no,” you shake your head, grateful for his offer, “You don’t have to worry about me.”

“Are you sure?” Taeil pushes a little more, “If there’s anything I can do for you, and as long as it’s within my power, I will.” You don’t want to ask any more of him, he’s so accommodating already that you’d just feel wrong in asking him to bring you something.

“There is one thing…” You pause for a moment, “Could you train me?”

“Are you-?” Taeil’s brow furrows as he thinks of your statement, “Are you talking about fighting?”

“I am,” you nod quickly.

“Oh no… I think that would be a bad idea,” he sounds cautious, tentative, “I get really aggressive when I teach, if I ended up injuring you, I don’t think I’d be able to forgive myself.”

“I see…” You probably sound defeated, your shoulders shrugging downwards at his words.

“But that statement came out of nowhere… Did you have a reason for asking?”

“If I’m going to help watch over Shinson while you’re gone, I want to be able to instead of hiding while everyone else puts in the effort.”

Taeil chuckles nervously at that sentiment, “But you’re not one of the warriors, so I doubt you’d ever have to raise your sword to an enemy.”

“You’re right, but I still want to be able to protect myself if something were to happen,” you insist gently, trying to sound as reasonable as possible.

Taeil mulls it over for a moment before perking up into a smile, “Well, if that’s the case, I’d love to teach you a few things.”

The leader runs around for a moment, returning to you with a pair of practice swords and two cords so you can tie up your sleeves without getting hindered by them. Rather than use the traditional wooden practice swords of the Hwarang, Taeil’s opted for the lighter bamboo variant as to not accidentally injure you with the splintery cousin.

“Let’s start,” he says as he stands beside you, his own bamboo sword raised outwards. “I’ll warn you though, the style we teach at the Moon school and the Hwarang are a little… arduous.”

“I’m ready,” you state firmly and raise your own bamboo sword out to the open space in front of you.

“Then let’s begin with your stance,” he says, looking towards your feet with a scrutinizing gaze, “You mentioned you’d trained before, right?”

“It was mostly for self-defense, but I was taught how to use the blade I have with me,” you say as you look down to your feet, trying to position them correctly.

“Then I won’t have to worry about teaching you a new form,” he notes, “Just get into the stance you’re most comfortable with.”

With the smooth grip of the practice sword in hand, you fall back into the stance you have memorized from all your practice sessions. Your hold on the hilt of the weapon tightens as you await instruction.

“Too weak!” Taeil shouts out, different from the calm tone his voice typically carries. “If someone’s coming from your front to attack you, the first thing they’ll reach is your sword and your arm. Tighten your grip more or they’ll knock the sword right out of your hand, be wary of that.”

“Okay!” You nod and try to hold onto the sword even tighter, the knuckles on your hand beginning to ache with the strain. It was somewhat endearing to know that he isn’t treating you any differently because you’re a girl.

“Now you’re holding on too tight,” he notices the tremble from the overworked muscles of your hand, watching the fake blade quiver in the air. “Because you’ll be a bit weaker than most you’ll ever fight against, you should try your best to avoid someone attacking you from the front. To do that you’ll need to dodge or redirect the blow from their sword, but since you’re holding onto it so tightly…”

You’re not sure how much time has passed since Taeil had begun his instruction, but the sun is hanging low in the sky now as you try and retain everything, he’s been teaching you.

“It’s getting late.” He muses after you finish swinging the sword for what feels like the thousandth time. It’s cause enough for you to look up at the reds, oranges and purples that are beginning to saturate the sky. And almost as if you’re pulled from your training, fatigue sets into your bones and causes you to collapse to your knees. Your limbs shake with exhaustion, clothes dampened with sweat, your breath hollow as you try to suck in more air than your lungs allow you.

Taeil looks over to you as you collapse, his stern expression from training you softening to one of concern. “I’m sorry!” He says, a panicked tone overtaking him, “I got so into it that I pushed you way too hard!”

“I’m fine,” you breathe out, offering him a weak smile, “You ended up teaching me like that even though I’m not your student, thank you.”

“I see,” he doesn’t sound fully convinced, but the worried edge to his voice subsides a bit, “If that’s how you feel then I’m glad I could help.” His face holds a mixture of guilt and hesitation, though, “I am sorry, I haven’t fully trained someone in years, and I suppose I went a little overboard.”

“You mean before you became the Hwarang’s leader?” You ask as you shakily rise to your feet.

“Right,” he nods with a nostalgic smile, “Kun, Yongqin, and Jisung all attended my family’s school. Taeyong, Jaemin, Yukhei and Jaehyun joined us afterwards, Yuta never fully joined but would stop by often. We don’t have time for it now, but we used to test our skills out against each other nearly every day.”

The topic of the ‘old days’ often came up when the captains were tipsy or drunk on their alcohol. Taeil’s father had been high up in the Crown’s council when he was alive, but later left to start up his own fighting school, much like Kim Alcheon had done.

“All of that training must’ve been tough,” you wonder aloud.

“It was,” Taeil nods in agreement, “But it was fulfilling, in a different way than what our work is now.” He gazes off into nothing as he reminisces, causing a pang of envy to invade you for a moment.

“Earlier you said you weren’t my student,” Taeil speaks up, looking at you, “Since I am technically a master of my family’s school, and I spent today training you… I think that more or less makes you a disciple of the style as well. That would make you a student like a few of the captains.”

His words cause a smile to break out on your face, “Thank you.” Obviously, it isn’t an official method, and it was hardly a full day’s worth of instruction, but it made an unbridled happiness bubble within you. “I’m so grateful for what you’ve taught me today.”

February 6th, 662 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla The new year sweeps in not unexpectedly, but with a gust of cold that chills you to your core. Seorabeol sits under a blanket of snow, much like it had when you first arrived a little over a year ago now.

You finish eating breakfast with the captains a little earlier than they do, you excuse yourself to make them some tea before their morning briefing. Thankfully, the halls remain warm, so you don’t need to worry about the winter chill as you make your way back to the main hall, the smattering of captains sitting around.

“Thank you,” Jisung says as you set down a cup by him, a smile on his lips as he wraps his cold fingers around the steaming cup. You make your way around the hall to give the captains their drinks, most giving you a curt but appreciative nod as you do so.

“The monks at this temple have been nice enough to let us stay here this long,” Kun calls out, disrupting your thoughts as he speaks to the captains, “but Shinson is getting crowded.”

“Especially with all of the new guys coming in,” Jaehyun agrees, nodding his head.

“If we could get a bigger space, that’d be good,” Yukhei adds, a tinge to his voice as if he’s thinking about how little room there is to move around these days. “Even in the overflow buildings it’s stuffy.”

“Most of these kids are nobles too, not accustomed to living like this,” Jaehyun sighs, not vouching for them, just knowing it would take some time to acquaint themselves with their newfound home.

“If we can find somewhere bigger to host us,” Yongqin speaks up, “I’m sure the newbies would be more appreciative.”

“What about Bulguksa Temple?” The man sitting next to Taeil speaks up, glancing over to the map hanging in the front of the room.

“Bulguksa?” Suh Kangjoon frowns, looking towards the map, “Isn’t that a bit far?”

“Maybe,” the man shrugs, “But it’s one of the only places big enough to accommodate the Seorabeol Hwarang. And its position would allow a tactical advantage in times of panic, it’s a relatively easy place to fortify.”

After he’s done speaking, the man leans back in his chair to see what the others have to say. Kim Gongmyung had joined the Hwarang on Jaemin’s excursion to Hanseong in early autumn of last year. His family’s school is quite popular there and his academics gained him notoriety with the nobles of the area. “Besides, it’s closer to the border so if there’s a need to intercept or fend off any Baekje loyalists looking for trouble, it’d put us in the best spot to do so.”

“Those are good points,” Taeil nods enthusiastically, “An exceptional amount of detail as always, Gongmyung.”

Even if the chief thought it to be a good idea, a few voices rose in opposition.

“Isn’t it a bit… presumptive to do something like that?” Taeyong frowns at Gongmyung, his hands atop the table, fingers tapping along the wooden grains.

Gongmyung’s smile flickers as he turns to the colonel, “Then would it be better to be negligent of the possibility, the high possibility, that the loyalists are up to something again?” His question leaves little room for the colonel to answer before he begins speaking again, “It’s a lovely thought, thinking that we’re safe now, but we all know it’s not true.” His deflection of Taeyong’s statement leaves a bitter taste in everyone’s mouth.

“I agree that the loyalists need to be stopped, but to place our personal interest there instead of being directed to do so by the Crown or the council is…” Taeyong trails off, clearly thinking more inwardly than he was expressing outwardly.

“So, then, what should we do?” Another voice piques up, questioning Taeyong. “Wait until the bastards are knocking at our door to actually do something about it? Or maybe wait until they’ve actually captured Munmu and have burned the palace to the gro-”

“Doyoung,” Gongmyung interjects, “Watch your mouth.”

“My mistake,” Doyoung scoffs after a moment of staring at his brother for interrupting him, “Couldn’t stop myself.”

Kim Doyoung is the younger brother of Kim Gongmyung by blood, and only by the same father. Doyoung had joined the Hwarang with Gongmyung in autumn and had accompanied him to Seorabeol with both Jaemin and Kun.

“He still has the tendency to run his mouth like a child, still,” Gongmyung explains, “I apologize.” His attention then turns back to Taeyong and away from his brother, “So, don’t take it too personally, please. I’m sure someone like you is needed to make the Hwarang successful. Even if your arm is unusable in a fight, your smarts and tactical abilities will prove all the more useful.”

You see Taeyong biting back a retort towards Gongmyung’s sour wording, the tension between the two only cut by another voice.

“I don’t think I heard you correctly, Gongmyung.” It’s Kun, his voice low as if he’s trying to stabilize the tone so as to not sound angry. “Taeyong is smart, as you said. He is not useless and not replaceable, make sure you don’t forget that.” The commander only speaks when there’s something important to be said, having spoken up now means that Gongmyung’s words must’ve gotten to him.

“My arm, though…” Taeyong mutters out, seemingly unable to finish the thought. Kun’s words remind him of what he once was, causing him to frown at the reality of it all.

“I didn’t mean to cause such a disturbance,” Gongmyung sighs out with false sympathy, “I’ll be sure to keep my thoughts to myself next time. Taeyong is quite a beloved member, I see, it’s nice to see such a tight knit group. I can only hope the new members share that sentiment.”

Kun’s eyes seethe with anger as he glares at Gongmyung, but before he’s able to snip back, Taeil steps in and tries to calm the air.

“For now,” He begins, looking at each member of the opposing parties, “Let’s just keep matters on finding a new headquarter location. Gongmyung, would you mind coming with me? I’d love to continue our earlier conversation.”

“Of course, Chief.” Gongmyung says and rises to his feet at the same time Taeil does, the two begin to leave the room, quickly followed out by Kangjoon.

“May I join you as well?” The latter asks before the two step out of the hall.

“Of course,” Taeil accepts, “I’d like you to hear what Gongmyung has to say, it may help you with strategy points.”

“Thank you,” Kangjoon says with an appreciative smile as the three exits, shortly followed by Doyoung who scoffs at the encounter before slinking out after them.

“Who’s the asshole that invited them to join us?” Yongqin frowns once the sound of their footsteps fell out of earshot.

“That asshole’s still in Hanseong,” Yukhei huffs, “When Jaemin gets back I might just wring his neck.”

“The Kim’s father is friends with a few pro-military councilmen,” Jaehyun muses, “Interesting to see that they’d join us if they share in those same beliefs.”

“They’re probably playing at some sort of superiority game,” Kun says, his arms crossing over his chest. “Just listen to the bullshit that Doyoung spouts off, and it looks like it’s rubbing off on Taeil. And that’s definitely not good.”

“Taeil’s always been like that,” Yongqin adds, “Easily deceived by those who act nice and appear virtuous but are just vipers waiting for the right time to strike.”

“And Gongmyung’s the deputy commander with Doyoung in a captain’s position,” Jaehyun shakes his head, “They’ve rooted themselves deep.”

Kun’s gaze travels to Taeyong, who’s been staring at the patterns in the wood since his conversation with Gongmyung. “Don’t listen to him,” the commander says to him in hopes of cheering him up.

“Gongmyung is a skilled orator with a proficient education to back it,” Taeyong laughs dryly, “And not only that, but he’s also skilled with a sword and bow. With a gifted Deputy Commander, the Hwarang have little need for a colonel now.”

“Taeyong-” Kun begins to protest as the colonel rises to his feet and starts to head for the exit. The commander’s voice trails after Taeyong as he leaves quietly, no one daring to stop him.

“Of all people…” Jaehyun sighs out, crossing his arms as he leans back in his chair, “Even the wang-do are avoiding him now.”

“Why?” You question and turn to the captain, “It’s not like he’s done anything wrong.”

“It’s his attitude,” Yukhei responds in the elder’s stead, “It doesn't matter what you say to him, he takes it the wrong way regardless.”

“Not to mention the smartass tone he’s been taking up,” a twisted frown settles onto Jaehyun’s face, “it’s no wonder the men are scared shitless of him.”

Their words confuse you, even though you haven’t been here as long as the other captains, Taeyong was well liked among everyone in the Hwarang. After he’d received his injury, it seems as if that demeanor has taken a turn for the worse.

“Can’t you come up with an excuse to get Gongmyung the hell out of here?” Yongqin asks, turning towards Kun. “There’s barely been a moment of civility since he got here.”

“You know I can’t do that,” Kun’s expression turns sour, “Taeil’s all over the guy. Besides, he brought in a bunch of warriors from Hanseong, their allegiance doesn’t solely lie with us yet. They’ll pack up and leave the second we tell him to get lost.”

“Fuck him though!” Yongqin does little to quell the irateness of his voice, “You’re the goddamn demon commander, make the impossible happen!”

Kun barks out a snarkish laugh, “Fine, Li. How about I make you commander so you can kick Gongmyung and his thugs out?”

“Hell no,” Yongqin snickers, “That’s too much work.”

It eventually comes to fruition that Gongmyung isn’t to be trusted, having no other captains speak out on his behalf.

You’re going around once more to distribute tea to the men when you stop by Yuta, who’d been quiet for most of, if not all, of the prior conversation. He looks up at you, as if he had felt your thoughts wander over to him.

“What are your thoughts on Gongmyung joining?” You ask as he sets down his teacup onto the tabletop.

Yuta sighs as you begin topping off the cup, “As any group begins to grow in numbers, it’ll have more and more people with differing opinions.” You pull the pot away from his cup, staunching the flow of the liquid, “Although, if one intends to be the catalyst for change instead of it occurring naturally, the group will begin to kill itself from the inside out.” His words hang heavy as you stand next to him, unsure of what to say next.

Gongmyung’s acceptance into the Hwarang, from your perspective, wasn’t to tear them apart, but maybe to cause dissension among the members. You’re not fond of him, but his treatment towards Taeyong and the colonel’s receptiveness to the critiques is what worries you the most. It’s not as if his arm would work again overnight, it would take a miracle to happen, and Taeyong doesn’t seem like the type to frequent shamans.

Sometime later you find yourself wandering back to your room, the meeting dissipating with little to be done with the newest arrivals. Although cold outside, the setting sun gives off little warmth as you trapeze yourself through one of the gardens. The reddish-maroon of the sinking star unsettling you.

You still have Taeyong in mind as you pause for a moment, staring up at the shifting hues of the heavens. A conversation you’d heard in as the news of Taeyong’s injury had spurred the conversation of the Furies as well as a serum. By the way they’d spoken of it, it made it seem as if the item was only used in dire circumstances, and it was highly secretive. You weren’t even supposed to know about it in the first place, but Jaemin had let slip some information on it and now you can’t help but think on it.

If you were to try and learn of it yourself, it’s no doubt that you’d find yourself in a world of trouble. Yet, you are the daughter of a physician, surely you have more medical knowledge than them?

Falling onto your better judgement, you return to your quarters. Even if you’re worried about Taeyong, you’re not sure that there’s much you can even do for him at this point.

When the sun finally drops below the horizon, it seems as if Shinson Temple bursts to life with activity. But the sounds aren’t boisterous, not the gaiety induced ones of the captains rough-housing, these were more ominous. You hear footsteps charge past your room, never seeming to cease as the men run off to an unknown location.

Despite trying your best to keep out of it, your curiosity overtakes you, amalgamating in you slowly creeping out into the hall and following the sound of the commotion. The sounds take you to the main hall, the door left ajar so you quietly make your way inside.

“To think that Taeyong would’ve…” You can hear Taeil’s voice, a seriousness in it as he comes into view. Kun and the other captains stand around him, each looking to be in a different stage of shock or disbelief.

“What the hell were you all doing?!” Kun shouts out towards the other captains, his grief seeming to take shape in the form of unbridled anger, “I told you to watch out for Taeyong! Was there some fucking part of that that you didn’t understand?”

“You can’t blame us for this,” Yukhei retorts defensively, “Who would’ve thought that he’d drink that shit? He was also in charge of that stuff so how were we supposed to know he had it?”

“If he’d hidden it in a vial we wouldn’t have known,” Jaehyun adds, glancing from Yukhei to Kun, “And suppose that it does treat his arm… Everyone who took it went crazy. It didn’t work.”

The serum… is that what the captains are referring to? You don’t have enough context on the situation to understand fully, but had Taeyong taken whatever it is?

“Taeyong had been trying to improve it,” Yuta interjects, “He’d hoped his arm would heal before it deteriorated too much… Maybe he felt as if there wasn’t any other way. Regardless of that, when he realized his failure, he ignored Yongqin and tried to kill himself.”

“Kill himself?” You gasp aloud, momentarily forgetting that you aren’t supposed to be here. Slowly, all eyes shift to you, Kun’s gaze quickly meeting yours.

“What are you doing here?” He asks and suddenly you’re unable to speak. His gaze holds an iciness that causes your throat to clam up, restricting any words that are trying to form. It’s the same way you felt upon entering Shinson the first time, a mixture of anxiousness, suspicion and animosity.

“Kun,” Taeil speaks out, his hand moving to rest on the commander’s forearm, “I think it’s time you tell her what’s going on. She is Heo’s daughter, after all.”

Your eyes grow wide at the mention of your father’s name. Why is he being brought up all of a sudden?

“I’m going to make this clear,” the commander stares at Taeil with a grimace, looking back to you after a moment and sighing out lengthily, “The Hwarang don’t need you. There’s a chance that you’ll help us find Heo, but even without you, we’ll find him one way or another. Do anything strange and we’ll have you killed.” Your limbs feel frozen in place as he speaks, you’re able to stutter out an ‘Okay’ before he continues. “I’m going to tell you what’s happening here, but keep in mind that if you tell anyone else about it other than those that are in this room: it’s your own head.”

“Are you… going to kill me?”

“Not yet, but don’t think that means you’re free to run off.”

“We never told you why your father was here in the first place,” Taeil steps in, allowing you to break your gaze with Kun. “He was developing a… treatment of sorts.”

“Like the one Taeyong took?” Words forming on your lips, testing out how shocked you sound.

The leader of the Hwarang nods solemnly, breathing in deeply before responding, “We first learned of it when one of the Crown’s men brought it to us. They told us it was obtained through trades with merchants in Tang.”

The curiosity of it all, as dreadful it may be, swirls inside of you. Culminating into something you’re not sure you have the words to describe.

“A foreign drug said to augment a man’s healing and bolster their strength,” Yuta sighs out, “Anyone who drank their fill would, supposedly, be able to fight off a guhin with no issue.” His voice serious, despite having alluded to a mythical beast, “Any of their injuries would heal almost immediately, unless they were decapitated or pierced through the heart.

This all sounds like something your father would’ve told you as a child to fuel your imagination, not something that was feasible now.

“Yet, that power comes at a price. It spirals whoever drinks it into an unreturnable madness, they seek out human blood to satisfy their hunger instead of food or drink.” Yuta continues, looking at you with a wary gaze, Heo took it upon himself to try it out on some of the Hwarang so that an attempt to perfect the serum could be worked on.

“My father?” You’re not sure how surprised you sound, something within you twinges but it’s probably the knowledge somewhere deep inside that you knew your father is connected to all of this. Yet knowing that he was using his skills to try and work on this… serum, makes a pit begin to form in your stomach. “So that night where you all found me...”

“We keep the men who’ve taken it to a temple just outside of Seorabeol, if they were kept here people would’ve become suspicious,” The explanation doesn’t tell you how you’d come to find them, but you can infer that they’d probably escaped. “As long as they don’t get any blood that stay relatively quiet.” With the way Yuta relays the information, it makes it seem as this is just a nonchalant topic for him, and it may have very well been. But to you, it’s alien but helps you put together a few things you’d been wondering since your arrival here.

“Are you okay?” Jaehyun asks, a tinge of concern to his voice, “You don’t look great.” He stops himself, scoffing inwardly before continuing, “Of course you’re not, this information would sicken anyone.”

“I think we’ve told her enough,” Kun interjects before Jaehyun can continue, “We need to think about what to do with Taeyong.”

“I guess…” Yukhei frowns, crossing his arms, “But he was practically dead when Jisung took him out of here.”

“This was a new draught of that shit, though,” Kun sounds as if he’s trying to contain himself, to keep his hopefulness on the floor, “we don’t know if the effects are any different from the last batch. And if it’s supposed to do what its meant to then that cut isn’t going to kill him.” His eyes flicker to the leader, “Taeil, can you watch over him? I know Jisung’s taking care of him but he’s just a kid and I don’t think that-” A pause as he catches himself fretting, he gives himself a second to straighten up, “Tonight will tell us if he’s meant to live or die, and whether he’ll be sane or not by the end of it.”

“Of course, isn’t Yongqin with him as well?” Taeil asks before he turns on his heels and heads towards the door.

“He’s guarding the room,” A curt response from Kun before Taeil nods and exits the main hall, the sound of his footsteps dying down after a moment.

“I want you to keep everyone away from the captain’s wing,” Kun looks towards Jaehyun, a frown dancing on his lips, “Especially Gongmyung’s men.”

“I know,” Jaehyun huffs looking to where Taeil had exited.

“Yukhei, go and check on Hwangnyongsa.”

Another order from Kun, Yukhei nods wordlessly and begins to head towards the main exit of the headquarters. As he passes, you see a glint of the same hostility he’d held towards you on the night of your first arrival. It’s tense and suspicious of you, an itch of gooseflesh overcoming you as he walks out into the night.

“Yuta, go to the inner courtyard, if the Kim brothers or their men show up, keep them busy,” And before Yuta’s even left the room, Kun’s gaze settles on you. “I want you to stay with one of the captains.” His concern stems not for the care of your well-being, that much is evident in his gaze, but more to the fact that tonight isn’t a good night to be wandering around alone.

“I’d stay away from Hwangnyongsa, they get rowdy at night,” Jaehyun notes, his teeth biting at his cheek.

You nod, thankful for the suggestion, but even with his warning, you’d be limited in where you could go.

“I think I’ll stay here,” you assert to the remaining men, nodding to yourself that this is probably the safest place you could remain within the compound.

It doesn’t take long for Yuta and Jaehyun to take their leave, heading for their respective locations around the headquarters before you’re left alone with the commander.

The main hall feels suffocating, mostly from Kun’s quietness and the thoughts of what had transpired here merely an hour beforehand. Your gaze shifts from looking out of the main entrance to the commander, his brow furrowing and eyes looking sullen. It’s easy to see that the events of tonight are eating away at him, his concern for his second-in-command utterly gnawing at his very being. His eyes close and he lets out a quiet sigh before speaking again,

“You might think you know who Taeyong is, but this… It’s not really who he is. He’s an intelligent man who is more than just a sword. The colonel sees the full picture rather than what lies duly in front of him.” Another sigh as if he’s reminiscing, “His guidance helped me through a lot more than I’d like to credit, but his words were always more commandeering than his blade. In a way he was more powerful than me, without him, the Hwarang would’ve regressed to the likes of the Wonhwa.” A subtle smile curling on his lips, “He was like my big brother.” Hands balling into fists atop the table, there is a sincerity that drips from his words bitterly.

“He must mean a lot to you,” you say softly, your own hands falling into your lap, your back hitting the back of the chair as you lean.

“It sounds a little childlike when you say it aloud,” the absinthian smile still clinging to him. He sits, probably thinking the worst outcome for his longtime friend, reminiscing on their past and contemplating what it may mean for the future. Kun’s position leaves him unable to divulge this with most others, yet by sharing them with you, he can hold off on the truth for a while longer.

“The only reason we didn’t get rid of that serum is because we thought we could heal his arm with it somehow… Because I thought we could heal him,” the smile fades away, replaced with a grimace. “I should’ve seen this coming.” His own hands fall away from the tabletop and to his sides, a relent in the tension building in his shoulders, “We need Taeyong. We can’t lose him.”

Anguish coming over him due to morality of his friend. It’s hard to watch, and you’re nowhere near close enough to him to offer him substantial comfort or advice.

“Let’s have faith,” quiet words leaving you as you straighten up in your chair, his gaze flickering over to you, “In both his spirit and strength.”

“Yeah… You’re right. All we have now is our faith.”

February 7, 662 – Shinson Temple, Kingdom of Silla The night breaks into dawn long after you’d retired to your room. A clattering of noise and the rise of voices rouse you from slumber and pull you back to the main hall. Upon entering, you find that the captains have gathered, each in conversation with one another. This scene isn’t interrupted until Jisung enters.

“It seems as if the hardest part for him is over,” The youngest nods, a collective ball of tension in the room dissipating instantly.

“How is he?” Jaehyun asks, looking to Jisung.

“Still asleep,” he nods, “he was in and out of consciousness the entire night, but he looks peaceful now.”

“Has he gone crazy like the others?” Yukhei’s question blunt as he blurts it out into the space.

Jisung shakes his head in the negative, “Not seemingly. But we won’t know until he wakes up. But as for now, he looks as he always has.”

Before another captain is able to ask Jisung of Taeyong’s status, the doors open and Gongmyung strides into the room.

“Good morning, everyone,” A cheap smile painted on his face, “How are you?”

You can hear Yukhei let out a soft, “Fuck,” at the sight of him.

Gongmyung scans the faces of the captains after their muffled hellos, “You all look… gloomy.”

“Isn’t it obvious that it’s because we’ve got to see your beautiful face every morning?” Yukhei bites with a snicker.

“What a… cute response,” Gongmyung’s quick to brush away the insult as he turns to the other captains. “Is the reason you all look so down because of what happened last night?”

“Ah, actually,” Taeil begins, fumbling over his words. His gaze hops from captain to captain, looking for someone to relieve him of trying to offer an excuse to Gongmyung.

“Jae,” Yukhei’s elbow finds the older’s side as he whispers, “make something up!”

“You see,” Jaehyun speaks up after a moment, he too, stumbling over his words, “Well… Uh, yesterday…”

“Didn’t you say you used to act for the nobles in your village?” Yongqin scoffs at him quietly, “Be quiet and let someone else do the talking.” You think he’s talking about himself, but instead of speaking up, Yongqin looks to Yuta, who begins speaking almost immediately.

“As you may have heard, an incident occurred last night at the headquarters,” voice plain as he speaks to the Deputy Commander, “We have yet to gain fully knowledge on the situation. If we were to make a statement now, it is a risk of polluting fact with falsities. Later this afternoon I’m sure we’ll be able to provide a much more detailed report.”

“Hmm,” Gongmyung mulls over Yuta’s statement for a moment, “I’ll look forward to hearing all about what happened later this evening, then. For now, I’ll return to my men.” He waves everyone on his way out, a strange smile cutting across his face before he exits.

“That was easier than it should’ve been” Yongqin huffs, watching the door close with a soft slam.

“What do you mean?” You ask, attention turning from the door and to Yongqin.

“Gongmyung isn’t stupid, unfortunately,” Kun frowns and looks to you, “We shouldn’t have let him in here. The only person missing from our ranks is Taeyong, it’s not going to take him long to realize that something’s happened to him.”

The Deputy Commander had most likely suspected what had occurred but decided to not press the issue. Before you can think on it for too long, the door opens once more and Lee Taeyong shuffles in.

A small laugh as he looks to them, his voice sounding a little weak, “Come on, it’s not like I’m some kind of monster.”

Jisung rushes to him, offering assistance to stance but is waved away by the Colonel, “You should be resting, are you okay being up like this?”

“I’m tired… sore… but I suppose that’s a side effect of my new condition,” Taeyong’s brow furrows slightly as he looks down to his hand, “Those who’ve taken the serum have found it difficult to do work in the daylight.” His face is a bit pallid, but with the way he stands and moves, it doesn’t seem like he’s hindered all too much. “I’m no longer human,” the words echoing around the room with a chilling effect. Each and every captain falling silent to them.

“Who cares about what you are?” Taeil speaks up after a moment and steps towards Taeyong with a bright smile, trying to lighten the mood, “All that matters is that you’re alive.”

“How’s your arm? Healed?” Yongqin questions, looking down to the colonel’s once bandaged limb.

“I don’t think I’ve fully recovered yet,” Taeyong notes, flexing his fingers at his side, “It seems to have healed for the most part.”

Despite the disturbance and subsequent chaos of the night prior, it seems like Taeyong’s wish to use his arm again had come true.

“You can’t go out in the sunlight though, right?” Jaehyun asks, voice concerned, and his brow furrowed, “Will you still be able to fight with us?”

Taeyong nods, slowly moving his head as if he’s mulling over a thought he’d been holding in for some time. “I think you should tell everyone I died.”

“What!?” Yukhei shouts out, unable to hold in the burst of confusion. “The fuck are you on about?”

“I should serve in the Corps from now on. It’ll show them, and even more so, us, that success isn’t some far off dream.” Taeyong says, looking to the frazzled captain.

“Have you lost your goddamn mind Taeyong?” Yukhei’s voice shakes with every word, “Do you know what you’re saying?”

“Of course, I do,” Taeyong frowns, “The Crown has ordered us to keep the serum a secret, and if I,” a small hum as he postulates his next word, “die, that secret remains so. Researching in secret will give me more ability to track side effects and even give me the potential to remove them. What reason do we have for me not to if we’re going to use it?”

The movements of the captains easily show that they’re against Taeyong’s idea, although no one but Yukhei has said anything against it. None of them wish to banish their friend to a life of hiding and secrecy.

“We were given this task by the late King himself, carried on by his son…” Taeil trails off, “This may be our only choice.”

“This is what you asked for, isn’t it Taeyong?” Yongqin shoots him a look, “You’ve always been the type to take things into your own hands so I can’t fault you for that.”

“Sometimes I think you know me too well,” the colonel chuckles.

Kun, who’s stayed silent for a majority of the conversation, scoffs at the remark. “This means moving the Hwarang to a new location can’t wait any longer. If we’re going to hide Taeyong from Gongmyung and his crowd, Shinson wouldn’t allow us to do that easily.”

“You’re right,” Yuta affirms, “If the Colonel intends to begin researching again, then we’ll have to expedite our move.”

A nod from the commander as he turns to face the captains in full, “Even though none of you slept well, we need to get to work.” He looks to you, “You should get some rest, I know you didn’t sleep well either.”

You want to stay and help them, but with how fatigued you are from staying up so late you can only nod your head at him before quickly shuffling back to your room.

The same thoughts that had plagued you last night as you tried to fall asleep plague you as you now lie on your bedding. Your father’s work… Are you safe under their pretext of safety still? Thoughts still buzzing around your head as you eventually find yourself drifting off into a dreamless slumber.

June 4th, 662 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla Bulguksa Temple has proven a better headquarters than that of Shinson Temple, you’d come to this conclusion in the subsequent weeks of your arrival in March of this year. There’s much more room for the men to freely roam and train, and the view was even more astonishing than the last. The only downfall is the longer trek to the city of Seorabeol itself. On some days you still find yourself lost on the winding paths to the temple, but for the most part you can guide yourself around with little assistance from the monks who reside there.

On this particular day, you find yourself wandering the seemingly endless grounds for the Hwarang’s colonel. When you think you spot him standing in one of the shaded courtyards of the temple’s grounds you shout out to him.

“There you are, Taeyong,” You call out, a tray held tightly in your grasp. The sun hangs in the sky above you, a slight burn beginning to burgeon on your clothed shoulders as you approach. “I’ve brought you your lunch.”

“Oh, hello,” he turns to you with a smile and beckons you closer, “Thank you.” A bird chirps in the branches of the tree above him, you look up to find the small creature before returning your gaze to him. You offer him a smile before extending out the tray to him.

“It’s really gotten warm lately, hasn’t it?” You note, stepping into the shade once he’d taken the tray. Fingers rising to your shoulders to feel the heat of the sun that had soaked into the fabric.

“It has,” he nods, moving to set the tray down on a stump beside him, “Although the increased sunshine has been more disagreeable than the warmth.”

“Ah, is it?” The sun doesn’t feel but so harsh on you, but the heat that swells around the compound has been making you sweat since the sun broke over the horizon. Yet, to Taeyong his disposition probably found the light unbearable from his days in the shadows.

Sometimes it feels unreal to call Taeyong dead, the night where he’d taken that serum to transform him into a creature lustful for blood feeling more so like a dream whenever you recall it. As he stands before you now, you can hardly imagine it.

A light breeze wafts through the greenery around you, parting enough leaves in the tree from a few beams of sunlight to fall onto Taeyong. For a moment, his hair turns a silvery white and his eyes seem to turn a deep crimson.

Your eyes widen and you take a step back, unsure if it were a trick of the light or your own imagination.

“Is something wrong?” He asks, his hair now normal and his eyes once again brown. “You look like you’ve seen a ghost, and I know I’m not at that point yet.” Maybe you had imagined it.

June 6th, 662 – Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla Jaemin had asked you to accompany him on his rounds this morning with an excitedness in his voice that would’ve been hard to turn down. So, now you find yourself briskly walking with him through the crowded streets, the blues of his robes shining brilliantly in the midday sky.

“It’s been a while since you’ve asked me to come on patrol with you,” You note as you pass a vendor selling sickeningly sweet treats.

“I know, right? Hanseong kept me pretty busy.” He sighs out, having only just returned from his trip to the northern city just a few weeks ago. “Yukhei and Jaehyun didn’t mess with you when I was gone, did they? How was it when I was away?”

“Everything was fine, and they didn’t bother me,” You assure him with a small smile.

“That’s good,” He returns the smile as you continue to walk. “Any updates on Heo though? Did you find any leads?”

“No,” the smile from your lips quickly leaving.

“I see…” His own smile quickly disappearing as he watches you, “I stopped by his place with the information you gave me but… It didn’t seem as if anyone had returned.” The somberness of the male begins to transfer to you, a feeling of hopelessness beginning to overtake you momentarily.

“Thank you for taking the time to check for me, I know Toehwa-hyeon isn’t on the direct path back.”

“Don’t thank me for that,” He waves you off, “The fact that you can’t freely come and go as you please is completely the Hwarang’s faul—”

“Jaemin?” You question as he’d stopped himself mid-sentence. He’d looked glum ever since his return from Hanseong. “How about you, though? I know it’s been a while since you’ve been back in Seorabeol.”

“I do feel like the city’s changed, the people too,” he muses, glancing to the faces that pass by. There’s a solemness to his tone that wasn’t typically there in conversations you’d had with him prior, had something happened in Hanseong? Before you can question him on it, his head jerks to look above the crowd, standing on his toes and waving to someone across the way.

“Find anything over there, Yongqin?!” He shouts out above the clamor of the street.

“Nope,” the older replies as he saunters over, “Nothing out of order here.” Yongqin is out for patrol too, but his route takes him through a different path through the city. “Normal for now, at least. Things will change once the king comes back from his family villa. Rumor has it that he’s going to address the Hwarang.”

“Is he really?” You question, brow raising in surprise.

“Yep, it’s got Taeil all flustered,” Yongqin chuckles, “Our dear leader really respects the Crown, as well all have to, I guess.”

“I see,” you nod, “I hope it actually happens, then, right, Jaemin?”

Jaemin looks lost in thought before he hears his name, stumbling out his words as he responds, “Ah, yeah, right.”

You look to Yongqin to see if he’s caught on to the younger’s oddness. But he’s stifling his mouth with his hand, coughing into it.

“Are you alright?” You question him as his hand falls away from his mouth.

“I’m okay,” he waves you off, “I probably just caught a cold from patrolling late one night or something.”

“Well, try to take care of yourself,” a sigh leaving you. As strong and intelligent as the men were, they hardly ever took care of their basic needs, “I have some cold medicine back at the headquarters, I’ll give you some.”

“Thanks,” Yongqin smiles, “I guess it is good to have you around at times.” Something catches his attention, and he breaks his gaze away from you and into the crowds of the street.

“Is something wrong?”

“What do you mean ‘no’?” A voice rings out and you follow it to see a man holding the wrist of a woman trying to get away from him.

“Let go of me!” She cries out, trying to pull herself away from his grip.

“We’re soldiers of this great kingdom, fighting hard every day to kick these loyalists’ asses! You owe us some drinks, and maybe even a little company.” The man says, and it’s then you realize it isn’t just him, but two other presumed soldiers are harassing this woman.

“Are you guys seeing this?” You question to the two captains.

“Yeah,” Jaemin frowns, “Stay here.”

Yet, before Jaemin could step forward, Yongqin seems to be several steps ahead, reaching the group already.

“Soldiers don’t seem to be what they used to,” he tuts, “throwing that rank aloud doesn’t mean you’re owed anything.” The crowds coming to watch the scene shuffle away from Yongqin as he hovers his hand on his blade, glaring at the men. As the harassers catch the blues of the Hwarang’s robes they seem to stiffen.

“You’re a Hwarang, aren’t you?” One of them asks, furrowing their brow.

“And you must be the smartest one out of these men,” Yongqin’s tone is condescending as his hand now rests on the hilt of his sword. “Now, what’s it going to be?” A snide, predatory smile as he grips the hilt, no happiness deriving from the grin as the soldier’s faces pale.

“Why don’t you leave us alone? This doesn’t involve you.” The one presumed to be their ringleader remarks.

“If you really want to get out of here unscathed, you should probably follow your own advice,” Jaemin scoffs, now saddling up beside Yongqin.

The sight of two Hwarang seems enough to deter the men from their endeavor. Their faces draining of color before they scamper off like scolded dogs.

“If they’re just gonna run off like that when they see us, they shouldn’t have tried to start anything in the first place,” Jaemin sighs, watching them disappear into the crowds.

“Aren’t you going to go after them?” You ask, looking to them as you walk over.

“And charge them with what?” Yongqin questions, retracting his hand away from his blade and crossing his arms, “Didn’t think you were the iron fist kind of person.”

Before you can protest that that’s not what you meant, the woman whom the two Hwarang had intervened for speaks up, “Thank you for saving me.” She gives both Yongqin and Jaemin a bow, more grace in her movements than you could ever hope to have. Even if you dressed like a girl, you’re not sure you’d even come close.

Yongqin’s hand lands on your shoulder before you’re able to feel any sorrier for yourself. “Yongqin?” You question as he pulls you forward to stand next to the girl.

“Just go with it,” he says and steps away from the two of you, his hand under his chin as he looks over both of you. You smile softly at the girl, embarrassed as to what the Hwarang is making you do. She returns the smile, beautiful on the outside but there is something almost… strange about it.

“Just as I thought,” Yongqin nods, “They look just like each other.”

And then it hits you, the girl standing before you looks just as you do whenever you catch a glimpse of yourself in the mirrors dotting the headquarters.

“Really?” Jaemin questions, tilting his head at the two of you, “I don’t think they look alike at all, Li.”

“Dress ‘em up like a girl and you wouldn’t be able to tell the difference,” Yongqin insists.

“Captain Li…” The woman says, looking to you, “She seems troubled.”

She? Had the woman caught on to you so soon? Stuck in your thoughts she smiles at you once more, “I want to thank all of your properly, but I’m afraid that I’m in the middle of something important. My name is Hak Ahro, I hope I’ll be able to repay you soon, Captain Li.”

And with that she too disappears like a wisp into the crowds of Seorabeol, the strangeness of her presence lingering long after she’s left.

“It looks like she likes you, Yongqin!” Jaemin nudges the elder with his elbow.

“Is that really what you think, Jaemin?” The older laughs, “You’ve got a long way to go before you’re at Yukhei’s prowess levels.”

“What’s that supposed to mean!?” Jaemin shouts at the other, clearly offended by the remark.

Their bickering fades away as you look to a puddle on the ground left from the rain the night prior. Looking into it now, you see the resemblance that you and that woman had had. “Ahro…” You hum as a gust of wind causes the water to ripple and distort your figure.

“Let’s get going!” Jaemin calls, now further down the street as he’d begun walking back to Bulguksa.

“Coming!” You shout out to him as you look up from the puddle and begin to chase after him.

June 11th, 662 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla The main hall of this temple is open enough so that most, if not all, of the Seorabeol Hwarang can fit inside of it with ample room to spare. It’s a little strange to see all of these face in one place, seeing as at Shinson, only the captains and a few other members took priority of occupying the main hall. Yet, as Moon Taeil stands proudly in front of his men, any thoughts of the prior location escape your mind.

“By now it’s probably not our best kept secret, but King Munmu has asked us to act as his guard as he returns from his family’s villa to Banweolseong.” Taeil beams excitedly as the hall begins to erupt in chatter.

“Guard him?” Yukhei looks shocked as he turns towards Jaehyun, “What’s that about?”

“I don’t know,” the elder shakes his head in disbelief, “I thought we were just going to get the usual ‘Keep up the good work’ spiel.”

“Our work at Wonweol and Ongsan must’ve gotten through to them,” Kun nods, a hidden smile pulling at his lips.

“The leadership of Silla resting on us,” Yongqin muses almost gleefully, “That’s big.”

“Exactly right,” Kun agrees, “We’ve got to do beyond our best for this.”

On the opposite end of the hall, you can hear Suh Kangjoon speak up, “Guarding the king… That’s quite the promotion for us.”

“It truly is,” Gongmyung notes with a sigh, “If only Taeyong were alive to see it. He would’ve been overjoyed.” Another lamenting breath tiptoeing on faux sympathy, “To have lost such an ally…”

Kim Gongmyung and all of his followers had been told of the colonel’s passing. Actually, the incident surrounding Taeyong’s transformation had been hidden, only a few of the Hwarang knowing the reality of the situation.

“I think doing our best to serve and protect the king is what Taeyong would’ve wanted,” Taeil interjects himself into their conversation.

“Yes,” Gongmyung nods, “Of course. This is an excellent opportunity for us to gain favor with the masses.”

“We ought to assign roles at this point. I’d like Kun, Yongqin, and myself to—” Taeil begins before being cut off my Kun.

“Sorry Moon, but do you think Li can sit this one out?” The commander’s arms cross over his chest as he glances towards the third party.

“Why’s that?” Taeil questions, confusion sweeping his features.

“His cold hasn’t recovered fully. And despite me telling him to take care of himself, he neglects to do so,” He sighs out, looking back towards Taeil.

“Is this true, Yongqin?” Taeil looks to the swordsman, “Are you alright?”

“Qian’s just babying me again,” Yongqin says with a dismissive gesture, “I think I’m alright.”

“Don’t give me that shit,” Kun frowns, “You nearly coughed up a lung earlier.”

“Are you trying to sell me medicine?” He scoffs, crossing his arms with a frown, “There’s no way in hell I’m taking what your mother’s doctor prescribed anymore. It tastes like persimmons.”

“That’s not what I’m trying to—” a frustrated grunt from the commander, “Just do what I say, for once.”

You recall giving Yongqin medicine some time ago after he’d been coughing while out on patrol, had it not helped him? It could be dust particles in the air, you know that the buildup of dust in the temple caused you to sneeze incessantly some mornings.

From the corner of your periphery, you see someone raise their hand.

“Is something wrong, Jaemin?” Taeil asks, having seen the younger calling for attention.

“I’m uh, I’m not feeling so great either,” Jaemin frowns, his eyes looking panicked.

“You too?” Taeil hums in defeat, “You should try and take care of yourself. I was hoping we could all go and guard the king.”

“I’m sorry,” Jaemin bows his head in apology.

“No, no, don’t worry about it. Your health comes first, always!” Taeil tries to brighten his tone to detract from the now somber mood. “I’m sure we’ll have another chance to do something great together!”

Kun and Taeil continue discussing the precession that’s to take place, when suddenly, the commander turns to you.

“What’re you going to do?” Kun asks, an eyebrow raised as he poses the question.

“What do you mean?” You say as you look to him, “Are you asking if I want to go with you?”

“I am,” He nods and after a moment of silence asks, “Are you?”

“Is that really, okay?”

“Of course, it is!” Taeil smiles, “We won’t mind. Besides, you’re practically one of us, I’d love for you to accompany us.”

Another moment of hesitation before Yongqin laughs aloud, “Why don’t you go? It seems a lot safer than what happened at Wonweol and Ongsan.”

“Yeah,” Jaemin nods, “I can’t imagine any loyalists would try to do anything when the king will be so heavily guarded.”

“I’ll go, then,” you nod firmly towards the commander.

“Alright,” Kun nods back with a small smile, “I thought we’d give you the job of running messages when needed. It’s not going to be the easiest job but I figure you can do it.”

Later that day you and the able captains and Hwarang left Seorabeol. Traveling about an hour or two outside of the city as you wait for the king’s caravan to greet you in a small village that you can’t remember the name of. You never actually saw the king, but you follow the Hwarang back to Seorabeol, arriving at the gates of the city just as the sun dips below the horizon. The walk through the city is brisk, and in no time the caravan disbands and you and a few other Hwarang stand outside the palace gates. By now, Taeil, Yukhei and Gongmyung are probably greeting officials and other important members of the king’s retinue.

You shift on your feet for a moment, the sole aching slightly from the trek earlier, but you have a job to do. Kun had tasked you to tell the Hwarang when to change their shift and to carry any important messages when needed. It’s something of a glorified page position, but it’s not an entirely useless role… probably.

“You’re the messenger?” A voice says as you approach them, “This isn’t a vacation, you know.”

“I’m not here to relax, Doyoung,” you sigh as you stand before him.

“Is that right? Then why did we take someone here who can’t even use a sword?” Doyoung scoffs, the light from a nearby brazier flickering across the sneer on his face.

“I’m here to do what I can,” You state firmly before beginning to relay your message. “The Chief is currently paying his respects to members of the court, everyone else should continue guarding.”

“Message understood,” he says flippantly, causing you to look confused with how he didn’t retort on it. “What? Surprised I actually listened to you?”

“Oh no—I just—”

“It’s a job,” He frowns, “It’s not personal. Now you’ve delivered your message, get going.”

You don’t ever speak much to Doyoung, mostly on account of his brother being Gongmyung, but maybe he’s more responsible than you thought him to be.

After he shoos you away, you continue to make your rounds, delivering messages to the Hwarang stationed around the castle. They’re easy to spot, wearing their white robes instead of their normal blues. They seem laxer now, maybe because the loyalists had been driven out of the capital for the most part, the Baekje revivalists fleeing back to the territory of the old kingdom.

As you think that, and begin to approach another member of the Hwarang some distance away, your blood runs cold. A prick of gooseflesh running along your spine as your heartbeat reaches your ears. You can taste the blood in the air, looking around the trees encasing the palace and finding nothing. It’s not until you look at the castle walls and the walkway situated on top of it, does your stomach sink. Three figures jump down from the wall, landing on the dirt ground with a cloud of gritty dust.

“You’ve found us, then,” A familiar voice sighs out as they turn to you, stating your name somewhat coolly. The figure, flanked by two others, is haloed in the moonlight as you squint your eyes to try and get a better look at his face. “Not too slow.” Their piercing gaze fires into you, the name ‘Lee Donghyuck’ battering through your mind as you remember the distinctive voice and way he carries himself. The last you’d seen him had been at Ongsan, and you face him now with much more dread than you’d had that day.

The two figures beside him must be Xiao Dejun and Dong Sicheng, the people whom other Hwarang had encountered during the battle at the fortress. You know they have ties with the inner court and had tried to stop the Hwarang’s efforts during the battle at Wonweol and Ongsan.

“Why are you here?” You question, trying to keep your voice steady.

“You mean ‘how’ did we get here, don’t you?” the one on Donghyuck’s left, questions. “Man made obstacles are meaningless to a Demon.”

“We’re here for only one reason: you.” The other speaks up, crossing his arms.

“Me?” You take a step back, the pounding of your heart unrelenting as you stare at them. “I don’t understand.” How do they know your name? “What do you mean by Demon? Is this some kind of joke?”

Donghyuck scoffs, “You of all people are asking that? Maybe you’re the one who’s joking.” He steps forward, toward you, the shadows seeming to cling to his robes as he walks.

When the man you now presume to be Dejun speaks, it’s soft, almost caring in a way, “When you’re injured, do you heal quickly?” Your breath catches in your throat as he continues, “You heal faster than anyone around you, right?”

This knowledge about you is unknown to almost everyone except for you and your father… how do they know this? You think to the last time that you saw Donghyuck, he’d made a similar note on the cut he’d given you on your cheek.

You’re about to try and pull yourself together to defend yourself from the accusations when the other man, Sicheng speaks up. “Wouldn’t it be better to just give her a demonstration?” His hand begins to reach for the quiver on his back before Donghyuck speaks up.

“Sicheng, do you really think I’d let you hurt a female Demon?” His voice slightly agitated as he glances to the other.

“Don’t tell me what to do, Lee.” He scoffs, “She’s being stubborn, what do you suggest we do?”

Donghyuck breaks his glare, only for his eyes to settle on the blade at your hip. “Her family’s name is a Demon’s; she carries the Demon of Taebaeksan’s right blade. Isn’t that enough evidence?”

“My… name?” What’s wrong with ‘Heo’? His narrative, largely unknown to you, is cause enough for you to continue to panic.

“Then again, it’s not like we need your permission to kidnap you,” Donghyuck muses, looking at you with a frown, “Come with us or we’ll have to take you instead.” His hand outstretches towards you like a lure trying to bait in a fish. You step back, away from him, when you feel two figures brush past you.

“Woah there,” Jaehyun says as he stops, feet hitting the ground as his hand reaches for and pulls out his sword, “This really isn’t the place to try and pick up a woman.”

“You again?” Donghyuck asks as he steps back, a sneer on his lips, “For a noble you really do like to keep it simple.”

“The same could be said to you,” Yuta says to him, also reaching for his blade. He looks back to you, “When we heard you hadn’t given your messages out on time, we came to look for you.”

You nod and step back once more, your legs becoming unsteady as if the adrenaline that had been coursing through you suddenly left you at once. A hand catches you before you fall, pulling you further away from the skirmish.

“Stay back here,” Kun says sternly, looking towards the trio of assailants. His hand guides you to his side before he lets go of you, reaching for his blade. “I thought you’d be here for the king,” He says to Donghyuck, “What do you want with her?”

“I don’t have any interest in you or this kingdom right now,” Donghyuck says, looking past the commander and at you, “This matter only concerns us Demons.”

“Demons?” Kun scoffs, narrowing his eyes at the foe. He seems confused by the statement, perhaps hoping there’d be a more coherent and understandable reason for Donghyuck’s presence.

“Haven’t seen you since Ongsan,” Sicheng notes, looking over to Jaehyun and Yuta.

“Looks like it’s fate,” Jaehyun huffs out, “not that I’m particularly happy about it.”

“I don’t feel great about this reunion either,” Yuta sighs and pulls out his sword, Jaehyun following suit.

The tension lays thick in the air, settling into your throat so that you find it hard to speak or breathe. With the slightest movement that could set them off, you reflexively reach for the blade at your hip so that should anything arise, you’ll be ready.

“Don’t worry about them,” A voice from behind you speaks up. Cloaked in the shadows from the nearby forest, Minhyuck slowly approaches you. “Kun’s asked me to escort you back to headquarters.”

“Are you telling me to run?” You ask, gaze shifting from Minhyuck to Kun, who’s still locked eyes with Donghyuck.

“I am,” Minhyuck nods, reaching out so that you might take his hand, “Even if you stay there’s little you can do.”

You shake your head, his hand falling away back to his side, “I’m going to stay.”

“What do you think you’ll be able to do here?” Minhyung doesn’t sound condescending, just confused as to why you’d wish to stay and endanger yourself further.

You think to what the three intruders had said to you prior, the want to know more about what they’d called you sought itself out with more priority than your own safety at the moment.

“You have a reason, I see.” The Hwarang shakes his head, not waiting for a response as he sees the conviction already dead-set in your gaze. “I can admire that. But I do have my orders. You may want to stay because you want to do what you believe is right, but I have to do the same.” His hand outstretches towards you once more, a pleading look in his eye as he quietly asks for you to go with him.

Before his fingers are able to brush against the linen of your robes, an arrow whizzes by, buzzing before it lands with a solid ‘thunk’ in a tree behind Minhyung. Gaze travelling back to where it had been fired, you find Sicheng lowering his bow, his hand still hovering over his quiver should he need to take another shot.

“She said she wanted to stay,” Sicheng sighs grabbing another arrow before loosely notching it, “You have to learn to respect a woman’s wishes.”

Jaehyun lurches forward with his sword in retaliation for the attack on his fellow Hwarang, hoping to land a blow somewhere on Sicheng’s abdomen. The strike though, is easily dodged by the bowman, who merely steps aside and watches as Jaehyun’s feet falter as he moves to sling his bow over his shoulder and reach for the sword at his hip.

“Sicheng’s temper is going to get him in trouble one day,” you hear Dejun note with a frown as he witnesses the event.

“Evidently so,” Yuta agrees, sword still clenched in his fist, “You don’t seem like you’re going to stop him, though.” He then moves to strike the unarmed foe, swinging his sword in a downward motion to try and disrupt the lax stance Dejun was in.

“And here I was,” a clanging of metal as Dejun seems to unsheathe his sword in a blink of an eye and move it upwards to counter Yuta’s blow, “thinking we could just talk this through!”

“Who the hell are these guys?” Kun says through grit teeth as you hover your hand over your blade once more.

You reach for the blade at your hip, wrapping your fingers around the hilt as you look to Donghyuck. Both Dejun and Sicheng had displayed superhuman levels of skills; something that still leaves you a bit awestruck. Your swordsmanship can’t be of much hep to your friends, but you need to distract the enemy even for a fraction of a second to let them have their chance.

As he hears you draw your blade, Kun shouts, “Get out of here, you idiot! He’ll tear you apart!” His scream makes you second guess yourself and you sheathe your sword, “Minhyung, keep her out of this! Don’t let her get any closer!”

“You mistake me for the shit I scrape from my shoes,” Donghyuck interrupts, “I give you the honor of fighting me, and you talk… Very well.” The man raises his blade to Kun once more, “I’ll show you who truly is in control, so you can shut your mouth for good.”

“Keep telling yourself that,” Kun huffs as he looks back to Donghyuck. “I still owe you one for taking out my men at Ongsan.”

“Hmph, I don’t keep track of each and every insect I squash.”

The rivalry sparks between them, a fire igniting in their gazes before Kun takes the first step. They run towards each other, their swords clanging together and ringing out through the nighttime sky. Blades screaming against one another as they’re pulled apart by the respective opponent, Kun seeks to swing again only to be parried by Donghyuck with ease.

“What the hell are you?” Kun asks as the two part once more, his breathing heaving as it seems as if he’d thrown his all into his last strike.

“Haven’t I already said what I was? A Demon,” Donghyuck frowns, barely looking scathed by the short skirmish, “but not just me, or them, but her too.” His gaze flickers over to you for a moment before looking back to Kun. “We’ve come to relinquish you of watching over her.”

“Sounds like bullshit to me,” Kun snorts before tightening his grip on his blade. This time, it’s Donghyuck who strikes out first, their blades greeting each other with a shuddered clangor. They exchange a few more blows, a strand of Donghyuck’s hair edging too close to Kun’s blade and quickly getting cut away. The cut strands flutter to the ground and settle by his feet. Instead of looking scared at how close a blade had come to his body, Donghyuck shows what seems to be the tiniest bit of respect before lowering his sword.

Kun, seeing his opposition falter, lowers his blade as well, taking a step back. Around them, you see that Yuta, Dejun, Jaehyun and Sicheng have stopped fighting as well.

“Fighting like this is going to get us nowhere,” Dejun frowns and looks over to Donghyuck, “We’ll only attract more people.”

“I can’t help but feel that that’s targeted at him,” Sicheng bites, “I know when to stop, the only one here who’s got an issue with that is—” His gaze trails towards Donghyuck as he speaks, biting back a retort.

A deep, almost exasperated sigh from Donghyuck, “We don’t have to stay. We’ve only come to verify that the lead was correct.”

“Do you think we’ll just let you walk away?” Yuta questions, his sword still raised towards the trio.

“You three might survive,” Donghyuck nods, moving to sheath his sword, “but how many of your men will we have to kill before we escape? Are their lives that expendable?” Kun, Yuta and Jaehyun remain angrily silent, knowing full well they can’t accept that risk. Donghyuck smiles at them, he and the two others beginning to make their way to the forest’s edge, but before they disappear completely, their leader turns and says one last thing to you.

“I will be back for you.” Not wanting to meet his gaze your eyes travel to the embroidered yellow azaleas on his robes before they vanish in the denseness of the forest.

The words whip through you like an icy chill, curling around your stomach with a fear you haven’t felt since you were a child.

“Are you okay?” Jaehyun asks after he’s sheathed his sword and takes a few steps towards you.

“I’m… alright,” you nod weakly, clenching your fists so they won’t shake.

“You’re bad at lying,” he laughs lightly, just wait here for a bit, we’ll have some other men take a few rounds and make sure those three don’t come back.”

“Thank you,” trying to sound as appreciative as you can, you look from Jaehyun to Kun, who continues to stare into the darkness of the woods as if to try and spot the three figures.

“Do you have any idea why they came after you?” He questions after a moment, locking eyes with you as if to probe your mind.

“I’m not sure…” you relent, not knowing whether Donghyuck’s words were accurate or not. Were you really what he said, a Demon?

June 20th, 662 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla The incident on the night of the eleventh never comes to the attention of any other members of the Hwarang, save for the commander’s most trusted captains. In lieu of that, life at Bulguksa remains relatively unchanged, the usual grumblings from Gongmyung and his crowd continue as usual and the captain’s antics remain unbothered.

On this balmy morning, you walk through the halls, coming upon a line of Hwarang gaily chatting among themselves as they wait. Suddenly a door opens from the beginning of the line and Gongmyung comes racing out towards your direction.

“Never have I felt so violated,” He huffs exasperatedly, coming towards you. “This is absolutely horrendous!”

“Is something wrong, Gongmyung?” You ask with a tilt of your head, wondering what has the Deputy Commander in such a tizzy.

“Everything!” He pants out, a thin line of panicked sweat trailing down the side of his face, “Why am I meant to disrobe in that room of utter brutes!?”

His sentence making you furrow your brow, what exactly is going on?

“Someone who calls themself a physician who Taeil met while conversing with the King’s council arrived today,” the Deputy Commander does his best to straighten his robes and adjust his long strands of hair that had gone askew. “He’s holding physical examinations.” With a frown he nods his head towards the door he’d raced out of moments prior, “That monster said I should take my clothes off in front of near strangers! When I refused, he tried to take them off of me himself! And the other captains just stood there! Without doing anything!”

Seeing as your particular… situation might not be the best for physical examination in a group full of men, you think about returning to your room before you ask, “What’s the doctor’s name?”

“I think it was Namekawa Yasuo, some man from Yamato,” Gongmyung huffs indignantly.

“Doctor Namekawa!” You nearly jump at the familiar name.

The other takes a step back in surprise, “Do you know him or something?”

When you’d arrived in Seorabeol with your father’s letter and a few fragments of some from your father’s collection, his name had been among the signatures. It was your intention upon arrival to seek him out, your father had always called him a trustworthy man. Once in Seorabeol, you found that he’d been away on some patient’s request, and after that you’d quickly gotten swept up into the world of the Hwarang.

“I’ve got to go!” You brush away his question and barrel past him towards the door he’d exited from.

“You’re going in there willingly?” Gongmyung calls out from behind you, shaking his head in disgust.

Almost immediately when you open the door you wish you hadn’t.

“Alright, next,” the man you presume to be Dr. Namekawa calls out, motioning forward a Hwarang. A nearly fully disrobed Hwarang.

“My turn!” Yukhei shouts and steps forward, only wearing the pants worn underneath of his Hwarang robes. “You’re looking at years of training right here,” he laughs almost comically as he approaches the doctor’s station.

“I think you’re fine, Wong,” Jaemin scoffs, in a similar state of undress as Yukhei, “it’s your head he should be looking at.”

“Are you asking me to beat the shit out of you?” Yukhei turns to look at the younger, a grin split across his face.

Dr. Namekawa rolls his eyes at him before speaking, “Wong Yukhei, you’re fine. Next!”

“Hold on!” Yukhei says, taking a step closer to the doctor and flexing his arm, “You’ve gotta make sure I’m in prime condition!”

“As healthy as a horse,” Namekawa reels, sitting back in his seat, “I’ve seen more than enough, thank you.”

“You’re holding up the line, Wong,” Jaehyun calls out, and you spot Yuta standing next to him, both with unamused expressions on their face. “For the love of— please get moving.”

“I just don’t think he’s had enough time to fully make sure I’m okay!” Yukhei complains, “I’m trying to make sure I can bulk up more!”

“This is supposed to be about finding medical issues, not boasting,” Yuta sighs, his arms crossed over his chest, “Move.”

Your mouth hangs open in shock, it’s now easy to see why Gongmyung had made such a haste retreat. Shaking your head, you pull yourself from the room and back into the hallway, feeling a creeping heat of embarrassment rise up your neck.

“What are you doing here?” The Hwarang who’s first in line questions, “Is something wrong?”

“Oh!” Turning, you see Minhyung gazing at you perplexedly. “Hi, I heard Doctor Namekawa was here.”

“Ah, so you want to speak to him?” A tilt of his head. “I’ve been briefed on your situation, so I understand what you’re trying to do… But I’m not sure that this is the way to go about it. I’m sure he can speak to you once the physicals are complete.”

You nod, “I just think they might take a while, some of the captains…”

“I’m aware,” he laughs, “if you want me to, I can try to get things moving a little faster.”

“Would you?” Eyes widening, “I’d be thankful if you could.”

“Of course,” the smile still lingering on his lips, “Just leave it to me.” With that he walks into the room and towards the doctor, “Excuse me, Doctor Namekawa? Please let me look after those whose symptoms are minor, I’m sure you could use a break?”

You stand in the doorway, unable to hear his response, so you step back into the hallway and wait for the doctor to exit. Namekawa Yasuo leaves the room a few moments later, his attention turning to you when you call out to him.

Namekawa’s eyes narrow as he looks at you, inspecting you as if you were one of his patients. “I need to fetch some medicine from my things, would you mind giving me a hand?” He questions, his gaze softening once you nod your head.

On the way towards his things, the two of you walk through one of the courtyards and come across Moon Taeil walking towards you. He nods at the doctor before glancing to you, “I see you’ve found her already.”

“Thanks to you,” Namekawa nods with a smile at the leader.

Your brow furrows as you search both of their expressions before the doctor speaks up once more, “I came to Bulguksa to see you. Taeil told me that Heo’s daughter was staying with the Hwarang.”

“I see,” you realize, your eyes widening as you look towards Taeil.

“I knew that Namekawa and Heo know each other,” Taeil smiles softly, “So I thought that maybe the doctor knew of his friend’s whereabouts.”

Even if the Hwarang wanted to find your father for reasons other than yours, this slight clue was still causation enough for you to feel happy.

“Thank you,” a bow to Taeil and one to Namekawa, “both of you.”

Namekawa then goes on to say how you’d left just before he arrived at your father’s clinic in Toehwa-hyeon when you’d gone off to Seorabeol. He’d received the letter you sent but once arriving had no idea of where you’d gone or how to find you.

“I apologize for not seeking you out sooner,” he sounds remorseful, “It must’ve been difficult. If there’s anything I can do for you, please let me know.”

“About my father…” the words leave you and Namekawa’s face turns grim, you already feel as if you know the answer.

“Unfortunately,” he says once your words have trailed off, “I do not know where your father is residing.”

“Oh,” utter defeat lamenting in your voice as you speak the singular word. You almost feel bad now for feeling so hopeful that Namekawa would have some earth-shattering news about the whereabouts of your father.

“I hear, though,” Namekawa coughs into his hand to clear his throat, “that you’ve become involved with the treatment… You do know what I’m referring to, right?”

“Are you able to explain it anymore?” You’d learned of the serum, seen what it had done to those who’d taken it. But why, why is your father involved with it? “I want to know what my father was experimenting for.”

“Heo was working under Crown orders with the Hwarang to create what are called ‘Furies’,” Namekawa’s voice is low as he speaks, gravelly with a seriousness that permeates into you. “Furies are humans with near supernatural strength and speed. They heal incredibly quickly as well.”

“Furies?” The word lingers familiarly on your tongue, it takes a moment, but you realize you’d heard the word before. Jaemin had tried to explain to you what they are on the night that Taeyong had been injured last year.

“The contents of the serum are called pimul,” Namekawa crosses his arm, tone still low, “in Tang they call it ‘al iksir’ and in Yamato it’s ‘ochimizu’. It’s meant to grant immortality.”

These words sound like some sort of fantastical fairytale than what’s meant to be real life. Yet, the seriousness of the doctor assures you that it isn’t a sick joke.

“I’ve heard of its healing and strength giving properties,” you nod, “but doesn’t it cause the drinker to go mad?” Recalling the night you had stumbled into Seorabeol and the nobles who’d been attacked by the rouge Hwarang furies causes you to shudder. “And even if that doesn’t drive you insane, the smell of blood can set you off too…”

A heaving sigh as Namekawa nods solemnly, moving then to pinch the bridge of his nose with his thumb and forefinger, “So you’re aware of that as well…”

“Why was my father doing this?” You plead more than ask, trying to search the depths of your mind to reason with yourself and come to a believable situation that would’ve caused Heo Jinsang to work with such a vile creation.

“That may have been why he left,” Namekawa suggests softly, “His morals would no longer allow him to work on such a thing.”

“And yet we were given the pimul by the Crown to help strengthen the Hwarang…” Taeil frowns and looks towards the sidewalk.

“It was an experiment,” Namekawa shakes his head, “and it failed. It’s probably best to leave it behind, I’m sure the Crown has abandoned its ambition with it as well.”

The leader looks up and frowns at the doctor, probably unhappy to hear that Namekawa would question the Crown’s once official decision.

“You’ve seen what it’s done to your men,” Namekawa insists, “It’s inhumane and you know it better than I do.”

Taeil lets out a huff of air and then falls silent. You know that he knows how detrimental it is to his men, painfully so. Yet, the pimul was given to him on official orders and a secret request from the former King.

“I understand that you’re one of the King’s doctors, yet…” A voice from behind after a moment of silence. Your eyes widen at the sight of Taeyong in the daylight, knowing that the sun’s rays have an adverse effect on him. “You’re not a member of the Hwarang, you have no right to object to our methods.” His face paling in the light, lost of all color, almost as if he were a walking corpse.

“Are you okay walking around like this?” You ask him quietly, your voice teetering on worry and a whisper.

“You look pale, Taeyong,” Taeil frowns at the colonel, “You should be resting.”

“Don’t mind me,” Taeyong shakes his head and then turns to the doctor. “We use the serum effectively and at our own discretion.” His gaze hardens when they lock eyes, his voice becoming gravely serious, almost as if he’s been offended.

“It’s far too dangerous to—” Namekawa begins before being interrupted by Taeyong.

“We have and will continue to work on Heo’s research.” His voice, behind the veneer of quiet anger, sounds weakened. “I am living proof of its effectiveness.”

“You may be right,” Namekawa cedes before raising another point, “But that doesn’t mean you’re not forcing your body in ways unseen with the eye.”

“I’m perfectly healthy,” Taeyong insists, “With continued research and alterations to the serum, we’ll have less casualties and more success.”

“And are you planning on sacrificing your men for your success?” Namekawa frowns, “These men aren’t just common folk, many are the sons of nobles, aristocrats! Sons who will be missed should they just disappear.”

“It’s not as if we’re force feeding them pimul.” Taeyong’s agitated at the doctor, you don’t know the last he was able to see his own family since becoming a Fury. “The men who devote and give their lives to the Hwarang are the foundation of my work, they did not and will not die in vain.”

“But—”

“I think that’s enough,” Taeil steps in before the doctor can say anything else, “from either of you. Let’s discuss this at another time.”

To you it seems that neither Taeyong or Namekawa would ever come to a civil agreement on the ethics of the serum’s usage. But that was an opinion you feel is best not said at this moment.

The anger in Taeyong’s face subsides, and the corner of his mouth turns up into a smile before he bows and leaves the three of you wordlessly.

“So…” Taeil says as Taeyong recedes back into the headquarters inner buildings, “How did exams go?”

“About that,” Namekawa begins, “It’s a bit troubling.”

“Troubling?” Taeil asks, confused, “What do you mean by that?”

“What do you mean ‘What do you mean’?” Namekawa frowns, “The amount of injured and ill men you have is nearly a quarter of your forces!”

“That’s—” Taeil’s voice catches in his throat, “Are you sure?”

“I am not only sure, but it is the definite truth,” A disparaging shake of his head, “What have you been doing to these men? Cuts, lacerations, bowel pains… Need I mention the lice?”

“I’m embarrassed to hear that, I really am,” Taeil looks as such, his ears pink as he droops his shoulders. “What can I do?”

“Set aside a space for the ill and those needing medical attention, for starters. I can send some Pyrethrum powder for the lice,” Namekawa lists off and you can see Taeil mentally making a list, “Second, this place needs to be cleaned. I can’t help you otherwise.”

“Of course,” Taeil nods, the tinge of embarrassment still riding his tone, “I’ll have everything seen to immediately.”

And so, the Hwarang are ordered to clean. Those who are able-bodied enough to hold a broom or a rag are sent to the main hall, Taeil quickly barking out cleaning orders and sending them all over Bulguksa to thoroughly scrub the temple down.

“Why the hell are we doing this?” Yukhei grumbles as he sits on his knees, scrubbing at the wooden floors. “I can think of nothing less I would want to be doing right now.”

“Stop complaining so much,” Jaehyun sighs and calls him over, “Help me lift up this cabinet, it’s a great way to show off your muscles from earlier.”

You’re walking into the main hall with a bucket of water when you hear Jaemin cry out, causing you to jump and spill some of the liquid onto the floor and your shoes.

“A RAT!” He nearly screeches, hopping behind Yuta when he spots the gray creature dart out from a bookcase.

“Calm down Jaemin,” Yuta looks as if he’s holding back a smile, trying to keep the reserved demeanor he usually has, “It’s not that bad. It actually looks like it’s eating that—is that dried up tteok?”

“Yeah!” Jaemin says, leaning forward to get a look at the rat’s snack, “Who the hell hides their sweets back here?!”

A grumble from the other side of the room, you look over to see Kangjoon holding a boom, “Why are we bothering ourselves with work a servant should be doing? I’m a strategist, not a cleaner.”

“Why don’t you show us your school’s technique, then?” Jaehyun scoffs, “You said it’s prized knowledge, maybe it can help us here.”

“Shut it!” Kangjoon says angrily, “The Pohang style wasn’t designed to help with housework!”

“You’re a little bit of a bully, huh, Jaehyun?” Doyoung snickers as he peeks out from behind one of the various shelves, “Those old-timey tactics of his wouldn’t even allow him to hold a broomstick, let alone make a dent in this mess.”

Kangjoon’s stare hardens at Doyoung, “You should watch your mouth… Compared to the techniques from Tang it may be outdated, but I can assure you it still holds up.”

“Oh,” Jaehyun looks past Kangjoon and out one of the doorways, “Taeil’s coming.”

“Chief!” Kangjoon spins on his heels towards the door, “Look at this, the room was so filthy you couldn’t even walk properly, and with my guidance it’s—” He stops once he realizes there’s no one standing in the doorway, “Where’s Moon?” HH

“You’re an idiot,” Jaehyun rolls his eyes.

“Damn you, Jeong,” Kangjoon spits venomously, “You tricked me!”

“An idiot and a kiss ass,” Jaehyun hums, “Quite the multitasker. Don’t you ever get tired being such a two-faced asshole, not knowing which mask to wear?”

Kangjoon fumes and angrily stomps down towards the other end of the hall. You see this as an opportunity to proclaim your findings.

“I brought you all some fresh rags and water to help you clean the floor with,” you announce, holding out the bucket and handful of cloth to the captains.

“Thanks!” Jaemin says as he bounds over, swiftly taking the items from your grasp and heading back to his work station.

June 21st, 662 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla “This looks to be adequate enough,” Namekawa Yasuo had arrived early the next morning to check the cleanliness of the headquarters. He now stands in the main hall, a look of approval on his features as he notes the sheen of the floorboards.

“Right?” Yukhei beams, “See? The doc can acknowledge my hard work.”

Kangjoon lets out something of a guffaw at the statement, “Compared to the nuances of strategy, it’s not like tidying up is a magnificent feat or anything.”

“All you did was complain,” Yukhei frowns.

“Yeah,” Jaemin nods, “And Yongqin got to rest all day! Sounds like he was getting special treatment while we worked our asses off.”

“Not my fault,” Yongqin raises his hands to show he’s innocent from that decision, “Kun’s the one being overprotective.”

“It is your fault,” Kun snaps at him, arms crossing over his chest, “You’re not taking care of yourself, that’s why you’re coughing up a lung.”

“I will admit,” Yuta say, looking around the space, “It is nice seeing the headquarters put together.”

“It does look different,” Kun nods, also taking a moment to admire the cleanliness of the main hall, “I hope to keep it this way.”

“Then we should clean every day,” Jaehyun laughs aloud.

“Great idea! Make sure you scrub the baseboards, Jaem,” Yukhei jokes along with the other while Jaemin’s eyes go wide.

“But you’ve got the most energy and the biggest muscles, Yukhei! Don’t think I’m letting you slide on this,” the younger argues to the two others.

“I’ll help you,” you offer with a smile, knowing that he’d need it.

“Really?” He perks up, “Yeah, we don’t need them anyway, you and me against the world!”

“Hold on,” Yukhei interrupts, “I didn’t say that I wasn’t going to help…”

Kun lets out a laugh, “Wong, there’s some trash over there, mind taking it out?”

“Hooold on, we’re not starting until tomorrow, right, Jaem?” Yukhei looks to him for help.

“If you keep flailing your arms like that, you’re only going to stir up more dust,” Yuta sighs as he watches Yukhei scramble to big up the assorted pieces of garbage.

You laugh at the scene until something catches your eye, you spot both Namekawa and Yongqin duck out of the room and head outside. Brow furrowing for a moment, you think to follow after them but stop yourself as it isn’t any of your concern.

After the ruckus in the main hall dies down, you grab a broom and head outside to sweep away fallen debris from the walkway leading to the main hall. You’ve just started to sweep the broom across the agate stone when a figure appears before you.

Head turning up from looking down at the azalea embroidered robes, all you can spurt out is a “You!” before taking a step back.

“You’ve got ancient blood running through your veins and yet you clean up after these humans?” Donghyuck sounds saddened on the verge of disgust as he looks to you.

“What are you doing here?” You question, the grip you have on the broom handle tightening as he chuckles at you.

“Don’t tell me you’re going to fight me with that?” He shakes his head, biting back a laugh, “Was your family not blessed with brains?”

You don’t respond, instead look around for anything or anyone who could help you. Of course, the entrance lies empty, all of the captains still squabbling somewhere deep in the compound.

“Calm down,” Donghyuck sighs, his laugher ceasing, “I’m not here to fight today. I only want to know what, if anything, you have to do with Heo Jinsang.”

Stunned by his statement, your lips part in shock, “My father?”

“…Father?” Donghyuck looks surprised by your answer, “Heo Jinsang is your father?”

“Yes,” you nod, “he is.”

The man seems shocked at first, then that emotion melts away as it looks as if he’s putting the pieces of a puzzle together. He opens his mouth to say something else but a voice behind you stops him.

“Sneaking into your enemy’s base alone?” Kun’s voice rings out as his footsteps approach, the sound of dirt underfoot crunching growing nearer and nearer. “I thought you’d be smarter than that.”

A few other pairs of footsteps and you turn and see him flanked by both Jaehyun and Jaemin.

“In broad daylight too,” Jaehyun shakes his head at the intruder, “Figures.”

“Get away from her!” Jaemin’s a little more adamant, his hand already hovering over his sword.

“The Hwarang only come in bushels, huh?” Donghyuck says, seemingly wanting to egg the men on.

“Watch it,” Kun says sternly, the tension between the two becoming more palpable by the second.

Surprisingly, it’s Donghyuck who tries to sate it. “If you want to fight, then I’ll be happy to do so… But I’m here for other reasons, more specifically, to issue a warning.” His eyes grow dark and his tone more serious at his next statement, “Stop trying to turn humans into Demons.”

“You don’t know what you’re talking about,” Kun frowns as he watches the other carefully.

“What makes you think that we’re going to listen to you?” Jaehyun pokes at Donghyuck.

“You’re all idiots,” Donghyuck shakes his head warily, “Can’t you see that I’m trying to help you?” He rolls his eyes, “Forget it, it was useless trying to say anything to you.”

“This is our base,” Jaemin raises his voice, “You should shut up before we decide to do something about you being here.”

Donghyuck ignores the captain’s words and turns to you, a coldness in his eyes as he speaks, “Heo is with us now, don’t you understand what that means?” He searches your eyes for a spark of recognition, but it doesn’t seem to click so he elaborates further, “Your father has abandoned the Crown.”

“What…?” You say, still puzzled by what he means.

“Why are you here?” A cold smile to match his gaze creeps onto his lips, “I think you should ponder on that. Carefully.�� With that final statement he turns on his heels and seems to disappear into the shadows. You’re not sure if he just did, your mind too caught up in what he just said.

What or who were the Demons? Your father is with them? You thought Lee Donghyuck’s family to be just opposing the opposite side of the court that favored the Hwarang, was it a ruse and he’s actually some sort of revivalist? Does this mean that your father is working with them?

Who are these people that call themselves “Demons”? And what do they want with you?

Donghyuck had said that you have the blood of a Demon…

“Why’s he after you anyway?” Jaemin asks one the dust settles.

“You know the answer as much as I do,” Jaehyun huffs, “There’s only one reason a guy would go through so much trouble over a girl.”

“What?” Jaemin questions, “What is it?”

“I’ll bet you anything that he’s in love with her.”

“What?!” You nearly squeak out. Jaehyun’s response is… surprising to say the least, and it seems to have come from nowhere.

“Why’re you so surprised?” Jaehyun nearly laughs, “Sure, you dress like a boy, but you really think a smart guy can’t figure out the truth? That guy’s a bastard, but he’s sharp.”

“No way, he can’t be—” You vehemently shake your head, “That’s not the reason!”

“You might be the only person that feels that way, you know.”

“Why d’you have to bring in your dirty thoughts into every conversation you have,” Jaemin whines. “Don’t you think now isn’t the best time to be talking about this kinda stuff with her?”

“I’m not bringing my dirty mind into anything. I’m just calling it as I see it.”

You’re unsure of what to say, but your face does feel unbearably hot.

“Knock it off,” Kun orders, “Back to work, you two.” His voice lowers, “Also, stop talking about her identity when other warriors are around to hear it.”

April 1st, 663 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla The sound of the broom sweeping against the stone entrance of the temple sounds rhythmic to your ears. As you reflect on being here for a little over a year now, you realize what a settled routine everyone’s come to, you’ve even been allowed more freedom to move around the compounds. Perhaps this freedom is what allows your guard to be down as a figure approaches you.

You see him in your periphery as you go to glance at the new buds on some nearby flowering trees, you face him, needing to squint as he nears. It’s obvious that he isn’t a part of the temple’s staff…

And there stands Lee Donghyuck. The man who had affiliated himself with Baekje, who’d outed himself as an enemy to the Hwarang. Your grip around the broom handle tightens as a nervous energy courses through you.

Almost as if he can sense your anxiousness, he looks to you and speaks with a warm tone, “I’m not here to take you away.” His eyes travel to the trees you’d been doting on before returning his gaze to you, “It’s been a while since I last stepped foot in Seorabeol… and I just happened to visit Bulguksa.”

“Did you think I’d believe that?” You ask, conviction raiding your tone.

“Well,” he sighs out, “If I’m being honest, I’ve come to check up on you, but my moods can be fickle. So, I decided to admire this temple instead.”

Your natural reaction should be to run and alert everyone that he’s here, but you doubt he’d let you get that far.

“Just to let you know,” Donghyuck’s voice lowers for a moment, “If I’d come to take you away, then I would’ve already done so.”

Once again, he looks to the surroundings, not having a care in the world that he lay in a viper’s nest. A small smile graces his lips as he looks to the temple itself.

“Shrines, temples, palaces, the city… If humans can do one thing right, it’s building beautiful monuments.”

“Huh?” Dumbfounded by his demeanor, you can only just stand there.

“If you’re done trying to interrogate me, look up and try to admire what’s around you.”

Your brow furrows at his words, but you’re inexplicably drawn to do what he says. Normally, you’re so occupied with helping out around the temple, you never take the time to sit and marvel at the scenery. Yet now you look and you can sense life teeming from the trees that surround every corner of the compound. The soft, setting sun of spring accentuates the lighter details of the temple. It’s refreshing to sit back and watch spring dance around you, almost as if you’re seeing it for the first time.

“It’s beautiful…” You say as your eyes catch sight of a bird flying up to its roost in one of the temple’s support beams.

“Don’t you find it strange? Humans are capable of producing such beautiful things.” Donghyuck sighs, “Yet, they think nothing of it when their wars reduce such beauty into ash, dust and fire. They’re all fools. And despite being of the same species, clan or family, they’ll find any reason to kill one another. They don’t even blink when it comes to deceiving their fellow man, lying their way to the top, and if they want something, they’ll steal it.”

He then looks to you, “What do you say? Wouldn’t you say humans are foolish?”

“There might be some people like that…” You shake your head, “That doesn’t apply to everyone.”

“Are you talking about those men?”

“Yes. Even though the Hwarang pride themselves for being warriors, they do it to protect the people of Seorabeol and the Crown.” You stand firmly on your hill, “It’s never for personal gain.”

What Donghyuck had described is true, that there are many people in the world capable of evil, but you know that isn’t true of the Hwarang. You’ve spent enough time with them to realize that.

“Not too far from this temple lies another. A temple beside a temple. Have you ever thought about how odd that is?” Donghyuck asks, “Long ago, before Silla was a mere conception, these two temples were part of a much more powerful temple. During a period of war, the forces of the western temple were successful in holding back the powers of the Jinhan for ten years. Do you think Hyeokgeose would allow this errant faction to be left as they were?”

“Well, I suppose not,” you answer and Donghyuck nods at your answer.

“So, the King operated behind-the-scenes, establishing this temple, isolating the original one.” Donghyuck’s hand runs along one of the agate stones on the wall, “They manipulated the two entities, fanning the flames until the two sides eventually broke out into a fight. Essentially, they split the temple’s forces and funding in half, which exhausted all of their men and made long term war unfeasible.”

“Neither side knew that they were being manipulated, battling their former friends, allies and comrades, for hundreds of years. So, don’t you think this sounds familiar?”

“Are you talking about the Hwarang?”

He doesn’t answer you, only looking coldly out to the courtyard. “These men, in whom you’ve foolishly placed your faith, are only pawns of the King. They won’t realize they’re pawns until it’s too late, and they will forever be Silla’s bitches, swinging their swords to put food on the table.” The man shifts, his arms crossing, “They have no sense of the bigger picture, nor do they show any regard for others. All they care about is advancing their self-interests.” Eyes shifting to you, “You’re telling me that your faith in humans is because of men like them?”

“Even then, I’d have faith in them.” You say, unwavering, “I’ve lived with them for the past few years and seen them closely. I know. Everyone struggles, and they’ve put forth so much effort to achieving what they believe is right. So… I don’t think they are like the people you think they are.”

“So, you think the Hwarang are just, and you don’t care if they kill one another, or participate in their needless wars?”

“That—No, it wouldn’t be alright,” his question stops you for a moment.

Donghyuck smiles and lets out a soft laugh, “Aren’t you a selfish one? But I do commend your desire to keep loyalty for those you have faith in, even if it’s futile.”

“What do you mean?” You question, furrowing your brow.

“Well,” he sighs out, “it seems like I’ve overstayed my welcome.” He straightens himself nonchalantly, brushing his shoulder.

You look at him, wondering if he really had just come to sightsee.

“Do you want me to abduct you or something?” He smirks, noticing your expression. His countenance then wavers, becoming serious as he’s thought of something, “Let me tell you something… These men that you’re so fond of, they’re just a bunch of dumb nobles who’ve convinced themselves that they’re warriors just because they own a sword. They draw their swords when they’re told and they kill their own men without batting an eyelash. I wouldn’t trust such people.”

“But everyone—”

“When the time comes, I will come for you.” Donghyuck says, “Think hard on what I said until then.”

“Come for me—” You begin, reaching out for him, but a gust of wind blows between your fingertips and just like that, he’s gone.

April 5th, 663 – Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla In the late months of 662, King Munmu had purged several members of his council for being either directly connected to or sympathetic towards the efforts of the Baekje revivalists. Now not only the revivalists themselves, but anyone who the Crown deems compassionate towards the cause, will be branded a traitor and an enemy of the Kingdom.

The loyalists laid low for a time, yet as the days, weeks and months progressed, more and more outrage began to grow in the hearts of those who feel as if Silla has done them wrong. Rumors of an insurgency began to spread throughout the peninsula, with the Baekje revivalists calling for the return of Buyeo Pung, the son of the last Baekje king. Not knowing how baseless these rumors were, the Crown asked Moon Taeil to head an expedition to the former capital of Sabi to investigate the claims.

It comes to pass that the expedition proves to be a fruitless venture, Taeil writes as much in a letter received at Bulguksa this morning. He writes that he is to return immediately, the cost and expenditure of the venture far too much for the little information recovered.

Riding on the coattails of nothing, you set out with Nakamoto Yuta this morning to accompany him on his rounds. An uneasy feeling fueling you with what may come in the weeks and months to pass.

“I’m glad winter’s finally over,” you note as you walk with him, thankfully that you no longer have to wear a thick coat when you go out on rounds.

“As am I,” he replies, his answer short and simple. His gaze flickers to a nearby shop before he looks to the men behind him, “We can start here and begin our rounds.” Yuta then turns to you, “You can wait outside if you’d like, I’m sure there’s nothing in here that would interest you.”

“Alright,” you nod before he and the handful of men make their way inside of the store, leaving you alone outside. His voice muffled from the interior, but you can hear him questioning the owner of the shop over a few accusations that had arisen recently. A few more minutes pass as you idly stand outside before you notice a commotion a bit further down the street.

A bawdy group of soldiers make their way through the crowd, pushing, shoving and spewing less than pleasant profanities as they laugh amongst one another. For members of the kingdom’s army, they never seem to have respect towards the people they protect. You’d come across some before, never able to do much about their behavior. And now the Hwarang aren’t here, still holed up in the shop behind you with their investigation.

One soldier knocks a child down as they pass, you’re not sure if it’s intentional but your instincts kick in and you race over to help the kid to their feet. You’re about to shout something at them, the anger towards their attitudes bubbling within you rapidly, but before you can, someone else calls them out.

“Stop right there!” It comes from a woman, an angered expression on her face as she marches over to them.

“Are you trying to tell us what to do?” A solider laughs at her, “We’re here to keep you safe, miss.”

“Is pushing around people keeping them safe?” She bites, a venom to her words, “It’s a little pathetic to act all big and strong to people who can’t even fight back.”

The soldier’s temper lit, he makes a grab for her and misses entirely. It looks as if he’s trying to move for her once more before you spring to your feet and jump between them.

“WAIT!” You shout out, trying to make your voice sound deeper than it is. It’s then you realize what you’ve done, your arm outstretched to keep the soldier from coming any closer to the woman.

“This your girlfriend or something,” the soldier snickers at you, “Who are you?”

“I don’t know her,” you shake your head, “but I can’t just stand by while you try to hurt her.”

“Why don’t you keep your nose out of my goddamn business you bastard,” The soldier says through grit teeth, flecks of spittle flying out of his mouth with each word.

“If you’re a true soldier of the kingdom, then why are you abusing your power over children and women?” You argue back, unsure of where you’re getting the strength to sound so authoritative when your knees feel wobbly, “A soldier is meant to protect the people, not take advantage of them!”

“The fuck did you just say?” You’re sure if there wasn’t an audience watching this happen, the solider would’ve ripped into you with the blade at his hip.

From somewhere in the crowd, a man shouts out, condemning the action of the soldier. A few more voices rise out in agreement, your speech must’ve encouraged the people to call out the soldier’s behavior.

“You son of a bitch,” the familiar sound of a blade being unsheathed rings in your ears as you watch the soldier take out his sword.

Eyes widening, you at first think to move to dodge the attack, but that would leave the woman you’re trying to protect vulnerable. So, you move to reach for your own blade before the soldier lets out a groan and falls face first onto the ground in front of you. Looking up, you see Yuta standing there, his hands holding his still sheathed blade.

“I used the hilt,” he notes, looking down to the solider before looking back up to you, “He should be out for quite a while.” Yuta then looks to the Hwarang accompanying him before giving them an order, “Take him and his men back to Bulguksa, they may have information on the loyalists.”

The Hwarang quickly get to work tying up and escorting the men away, leaving just you, the woman and Yuta alone on the street. Yuta now looks at you, trying to figure out what had happened.

“That was reckless,” he sighs out, “I was just inside, you could’ve asked me to help. What would you have done if they injured you?”

“I couldn’t stop myself,” you shake your head, “What if she were to get injured?”

“He’s right though,” the woman speaks up from behind you, stepping forward so she’s in line with you, “I feel like I was handling the situation well enough.”

“I’m sorry I made you worry,” you look a bit shocked, fully expecting the scolding from Yuta, but not from the woman. After giving her a short bow, her eyes widen as if she’s remembering something.

“You did save me though, didn’t you?” She now bows towards you, “Thank you! I forgot myself for a second.”

“I really didn’t do anything,” you chuckle nervously, “It was Captain Nakamoto here and his men that did the work.”

“Even still,” she insists, “it’s way more respectable than just watching it all go down. Young ladies have to watch out for one another, you know?”

Yuta’s gaze travels from her to you, an expression crossing his features that you can’t quite name. “…You can’t expect to fool everyone you meet.” He says after a moment, letting you know that your jig is up.

“Were you trying to pretend to be a boy?” She sounds incredulous, the soft pinks of her shirts shimmering brightly in the sunlight, “Maybe I shouldn’t have mentioned it…”

You’re not sure how to respond to her, in it of itself your whole situation is precarious at best. Seemingly sensing your confusion, she moves on swiftly, “I haven’t even asked your name! It seems like I’ve forgotten my manners. I think we could become very good friends, but it’s a bit difficult to befriend the nameless, can I as your name?”

“Oh well,” you look to Yuta, “this is—”

“I know him, of course. Captain Nakamoto, right?” She says and looks to the man, “The Hwarang are famous enough in the city. But I’m asking who you are.”

You give her your name and blow slightly, “It’s nice to meet you.”

Her eyes grow wide, almost as if your name shocked her. She stares at you for a moment, “Heo? Your family name is Heo? Were you born near the coast?”

A slow nod, “I was. I lived in Toehwa-hyeon, but I had to come to Seorabeol for several reasons.”

She’s quiet for a moment, looking intently at you before she breaks into a smile. “I’m sorry,” a hand to wave off her prior concern, “it’s the same last name as an acquaintance of mine. It’s a lovely name.”

“You think so?”

“I do,” another smile before she introduces herself, “It’s a pleasure to meet you. You can call me Sooyoung, by the way.”

“It’s nice to meet you, Ms. Sooyoung,” judging by her attire, she’s probably the daughter of a high-ranking noble.

“Don’t be so formal!” She insists, “You look like you’re around my age, there’s no reason for us to not speak as equals.”

“So, just Sooyoung?” You question hesitantly.

“Just Sooyoung,” she smiles, “We have to meet again sometime, I feel like you’d be great company to keep.” Her hands out stretch to hold yours for a moment, giving them a gentle squeeze before she turns and leaves.

Your encounter was over before you had the chance to fully comprehend what had happened, so you stand partially stunned as you watch her walk off.

Yuta watches her disappear into the crowds as well before he turns to you, “She seemed to be interested in your last name.”

“She said it was the same as someone she knows…” You hum and look to him, “It’s not an uncommon last name.”

It seems like he’s concerned with her reaction, deep in thought as he nods his head. “We’re running late on our patrol schedule… We should get going.”

And so, the two of you continue on the patrol, basking in the pre summer warmth that descends on the kingdom.

April 25th, 663 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla The heat intensifies as the month continues, dredging the compound in humidity only seen in the later summer months as the days go by. You’re sitting in the main hall with a small fan to cool yourself down with when you hear the sound of approaching footsteps.

“Excuse me, Heo?” You turn and see Lee Jeno standing in the doorway with a tray of tea in his hands, “Is this batch good enough?”

“Hm,” you stand and walk to him, gingerly placing your fingers to the pot before recoiling away with a small wince from the heat, “It might be best to make tea lukewarm on days like this.”

Jeno had joined the Hwarang just after Taeil had returned from his expedition to Sabi, while there he invited the new member to join the organization. He’s now working as Taeil’s page, and seemingly struggling with the transition from military life to that at the headquarters. The new member does seem fond of the Hwarang, very focused on honing his skills when he’s not running errands for the leader.

“Do you think we can water it down?” A voice questions as they round the corner and saddle up to Jeno, a tray of tea in his hands as well.

“Ah, Sungchan, if you do that then you’ll lose the tea’s flavor,” you note, somewhat scarred by that suggestion.

“Really?” His eyes widen as he turns to his friend, “What do you think we’re supposed to do, Jeno?”

“Maybe if we put the teapot in well water?” Jeno suggests, humming out the question.

“That might work!” Sungchan nods enthusiastically, “Let’s do it!”

Jeong Sungchan joined the Hwarang around the same time that Jeno had, and because of their similar rank and age, they grew quite close to one another. Not to mention, Sungchan also became Taeil’s page-in-training. Because of that, it was up to you to make sure the two became acquainted with the Hwarang and all of their pagely duties, a task more difficult than you previously imagined.

“The tea doesn’t need to be exactly room temperature,” you say quickly, “Just a bit cooler to balance it against the warm weather. So, instead of boiling water, just make it warmer and then brew it. Then it won’t affect the tea’s flavor.”

“Ohhh,” Sungchan muses, “You really do know a lot about this.”

“It’s very helpful,” Jeno smiles at you appreciatively.

“As for the tea,” you look to the pots, “I’ll serve it to them so you two can—”

“What do you need?” Sungchan asks, saddling over to you, the cups and pot on his tray clinking together as he does so. “We’re up for it!”

“You’re going to do some sword training with me!” Yukhei, who’d been sitting at the other end of the table, fiddling around with some trinket, exclaims as he rises to his feet. The two pages go quiet, knowing full well that Yukhei’s training regime would probably leave them battered and bruised come tomorrow morning. “What?” The captain asks at their silent, “You don’t want to train?”

“Of course not!” Jeno shakes his head, “I’d love to train.”

“Um…” Sungchan sighs out, “I still have a few errands to do…”

“Don’t get shy on me new kid,” Yukhei laughs at him.

“It’ll only help us become better warriors,” Jeno mentions to Sungchan hurriedly.

“It’s not training it’s hazing,” Sungchan frowns and mutters quietly.

Yukhei laughs again and puts his arms around the two, looking over at you with a wink, “I’ll take them off your hands for a bit.”

Jeno smiles weakly as he sets down his tray, Sungchan looking as if he’s ready to cry as he sets down his own before Yukhei throws his arms around the two and drags them off towards the training yard.

May 13th, 663 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla “Is it really true that Buyeo Pung returned from Yamato?” Your voice quiet as you set down a cup of tea by the Hwarang’s leader. Taeil had been sitting out in one of the temple’s gardens after briefing the captains on what news had just emerged from the former kingdom of Baekje when you found him. On his expedition a few months prior, the Crown had concluded that the rumors of the former prince’s return weren’t anything to be afraid of, yet now it seems as if the attitude has shifted and a causation for worry has arisen.

“It seems that way,” Taeil nods and reaches for the cup, bringing it to his lips and taking a long drink from it. “His forces attacked Yongmyo Gate out west and a monk from the temple they’ve been holed up in has instated him as Baekje’s new king.” The leader looks tired as he sets the cup back down.

“Does that mean there’s going to be a war?” You ask quietly, wondering what this means for the rest of the kingdom. It doesn’t seem as if the news of Pung’s return is widespread yet, as the city still seems to be at peace.

“War? Hmm,” Taeil hums, “I’m not sure. They’ve allied with Yamato, gotten Gwisil Boksin back as their general and are trying to claim territory quickly so we can’t stop them.” That seems scary enough just listening to their conquest, but Taeil adds a bit more to ease you, “King Munmu has asked Emperor Gaozong for aid, supposedly they’re sending in Lui Jengui.”

You don’t know who that is, but with the assuredness in Taeil’s tone, it makes you feel a bit better. “Will the Hwarang have to fight?”

“I’m not sure,” he shakes his head, “We could be delegated to keeping watch over Seorabeol or be put into the ranks depending on what’s needed.” His arms cross over his chest as he remains deep in thought.

You’re not sure what to say, on one hand, fighting for the kingdom is what the Hwarang are meant to do, but in doing so, there would be inevitable loss among his men. A heaving sigh escapes you before Taeil speaks up once more.

“Doctor Namekawa is examining Yongqin right now.” You look to him, wondering why he’d said that. The captain had seemingly been in a sickly state for a while now, had it gotten worse? “He hasn’t said anything but I hope it’s nothing serious,” a frown on the leader’s lips as he says that, “if something happened to him, I’m not sure I could face her…”

“Her?” You question, “He’s not married, is he?”

Taeil chuckles lightly and shakes his head, “His sister. He left her in Gochang when he joined us.”

“I didn’t know that he has a sister,” you say, somewhat surprised at the revelation.

“He does,” Taeil nods, “Both of their parents passed in Tang before they came to Silla. Yongqin was like a parental figure to her as they were growing up.”

“Is sounds like Yongqin has been through a lot…”

“He’s too honest to admit it, but yes, he has,” Taeil agrees.

“You’d be the only man in Silla to call him honest, Moon,” Kun laughs, having arrived in the garden at some point when you and Taeil had been talking.

“Kun,” Taeil smiles to him and motions him over, “Would you like some tea?”

“No thank you,” the commander shakes his head, his demeanor becoming more serious, “Have you heard about the notice board by the river?”

“The one that calls for the arrest of Baekje loyalists?” Taeil asks before answering himself, “I have.”

“Some assholes tore it down and threw it into the water,” Kun relays, crossing his arms.

“I heard about that as well,” the leader nods, “Didn’t they fix it the next day?”

“Yes, but then it happened again,” Kun huffs, “I have a feeling we’re going to be asked to keep an eye on it sooner or later.”

“It was torn down at night, wasn’t it?” Taeil muses, “What about using Taeyong’s Fury Corps?” With the way Kun looks after Taeil’s suggestion, it’s easy to see it doesn’t sit right with the commander.

“They work hard enough but they get… excited once the sun goes down.” Kun uncrosses his arms, “Whenever we give them something to do, they end up slaughtering instead of arresting. They desecrate the corpses until they’re unrecognizable. I don’t know if it’s to hide out involvement or what, but they’ve been going too far.” He shakes his head as if to rid himself of the thought, “Despite me telling them to stop, they won’t. If they keep it up then they’ll be no better than the average murderer.”

You still can recall the night you’d first encountered the Furies, their bloodlust and the utter lack of regard for human life.

“… I have other ideas of what we can do.” Kun says, looking towards Taeil.

“I’ll leave it to you then,” the leader nods with a sigh. “Have you heard of the reforms that Cha Sohwan is trying to initialize with the crown?”

Before long, the two of them delve further into political jargon and names that you’d never heard of before, so you excuse yourself and walk back to the inner buildings. There’s much on your mind, but the Furies are and what they’re meant to do is what really confuse you.

May 17th, 663 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla Kun seems to have been right about the notice board, a few days later the order arrived telling the Hwarang that they’re to guard the board and apprehend anyone who seeks to destroy it. Any captains and their division not on active patrol are to be positioned there to guard it. The first few days proved to be calm, with most of the men rolling in in the morning looking dead tired.

Yukhei is a great example of this, you notice it when you walk into the great hall and he’s slumped over in his chair, his cheek pressed against the tabletop as he yawns. “Morning,” a lazy wave towards you, “I’m beat.”

“I’d have thought you were better at pulling all-nighters,” Jaehyun mutters next to him, leaning back in his chair.

“Pulling all-nighters in Noseo-dong is different than standing guard for a goddamn sign,” Yukhei groans, pushing himself off the tabletop. “It’s not like I want the posting to be vandalized, I just wish something would happen. You’re in charge of it tonight, aren’t you Jae?”

“Yeah,” the other nods, “And I will uphold my position with my sense of duty, honor and enthusiasm.” It’s obviously sarcasm that leeches from his voice, but you can’t fault him but so much, it does sound awfully boring.

“Good morning, Captain Kim, Doyoung,” You nod as the two brush past you and head further into the hall.

“Hello, you three,” Gongmyung greets with a tired sigh, “Did I interrupt something here?” As he speaks a few of his men filter into the room, taking up a rather large portion of the space.

“Are you up to something here?” Jaehyun asks as he watches the men file in, “What’s with all your men?”

“Me?” Gongmyung looks to him and smiles, “I was planning on holding a debate with my men on the topic of the potential Baekje threat. Would you like to join us?”

“You’re such a jackass,” Doyoung says quietly and rolls his eyes at his brother. “I’m sure Jaehyun’s read the Four Books and Five Classics but I doubt the other two even know what those are.”

“Don’t be impolite, Doyoung,” his brother scolds without any real scorn behind it. He looks to you and Yukhei, “Excuse him, I’m not sure what’s been affecting my dear brother as of late. But as it looks as if the hall’s in use, I’ll just take my men elsewhere.” With that, Gongmyung beckons his followers to follow him out of the hall, heading for another building in the compound.

As soon as they were out of sight, a look of disgust comes over Yukhei, “Him and his groupies are just a bunch of pompous nobles.”

“Gathering his men and having secret meetings,” Jaehyun frowns, “Who knows what they’re actually “debating”.” His head shakes with confusion, “I still don’t see why both Moon and Jaemin saw him as a valuable asset.”

Gongmyung isn’t just disliked by Yukhei and Jaehyun, more Hwarang than you can count had expressed distaste in him since he’d joined. There’s no way the captain hadn’t picked up on that by now, but he seems less than concerned of what everyone else thinks of him.

“Have any of you seen Captain Kim go by?” A new voice appearing in the doorway, it’s Suh Kangjoon, looking a little frazzled.

“He just left to go to another building,” you say quickly, “I think he’s going to have some kind of debate.”

A frustrated sigh, “I told him to tell me when he’d have his next meeting…” With that, Kangjoon storms off, probably going to find the captain.

“What was that about?” Yukhei mutters as he watches Kangjoon stomp away.

“My guess is that he tried to join Gongmyung’s little posse but he’s not giving Kangjoon the time of day,” Jaehyun shrugs. “It seems like he doesn’t really have a place for himself these days.” Another glance outside and Jaehyun sighs, standing from his chair and stretching a bit, “I guess I should head out now.”

“Oh, actually—” You begin, and he turns to look at you. “Can I go with you?”

Jaehyun seems to think on it for a moment before shaking his head, “I’m not sure that’s a good idea. Those Demons are still out there and these revivalists aren’t much better if we come across them.”

“I guess you’re right,” you frown, the sedentary nighttime at the compound is just bugging you, you suppose. “Be careful, I know things are getting more hectic these days.”

“Will do,” he nods before spinning on his heels and bounding out the door.

October 30th, 663 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla After the siege by Silla on Buyeo Pung’s fortress at Imjeon, the newly crowned Baekje king and his people fled further into their homeland, taking residence at the former capital of Sabi. Shortly after, Buyeo Pung has his lead general, Gwisil Boksin beheaded for fears of insurgency in the newly reformed kingdom, subsequently calling for aid from their allies in Yamato to try and suppress both Tang and Silla forces on the peninsula.

The tensions between Silla and the Baekje revivalists culminate in early October, when, on the fourth, Yamato forces arrive on the costal front of Sabi. Intent on invading the capital in the name of their Baekje allies through navigating the Baekgang River, they soon found themselves interlocked in battle with the Tang army stationed nearby.

Emperor Gaozong merely requested supplies from Silla at first, until the next day they call for standing troops. This means that several Hwarang were sent to fight the front lines, among them, Jeong Jaehyun, Nakamoto Yuta and Wong Yukhei had taken their men to fight amongst the Baekje-Yamato forces. On the seventh, the Baekje-Yamato and Silla-Tang forces engage in battle once more, with the Yamato forces reeling with heavy casualties as the Silla warriors were able to break through their lines.

What comes to be known as the Battle of Baekgang ends on the thirteenth of October, 663. With little to no way of defeating the Silla forces on land or the Tang forces at sea, Buyeo Pung is forced to retreat. Neither the Silla nor Tang forces can capture him before he escapes into Goguryeo. Yet, the absence of a king quells the thoughts of a Baekje revival for some time after.

In lieu of waiting for the three captains return, you find yourself sweeping the entranceway of the temple’s grounds, the autumnal air setting into your bones as the minutes pass. There isn’t a great much you can do as you anticipate their arrival, merely picking up things out of place and making sure no one’s snuck around and gone through their things while they were gone.

“You’re certainly hard at work,” Taeil notes as he’s come outside to see what you’ve been up to. “The captains should be returning any day now.”

“I know,” You smile, expectant on their return, “Everything’s been hectic these last few months.”

“You can say that again,” the leader sighs out. It’s been especially taxing to both him and Kun, who’d been called nearly every other day to the palace to discuss further plans on the fate of the remaining Baekje loyalists. “Oh,” Taeil says as he spots a figure nearing him around a corner you can’t see behind, “Over here, Kun!”

The Hwarang’s commander comes into view seconds later, a tired edge to his voice, “There you are, I was wondering if you’d had enough and escaped yet.”

Taeil laughs, “Almost to that point, I’m afraid. I’ve been looking for you too, it seems as if Lui Jengui’s been chosen to front the effort to extract Buyeo Pung from Goguryeo.”

“Him?” Kun nods slowly, “I guess it makes sense, he did just secure Sabi for Silla. The captains will have to tell us more about him once they get back.”

April 13th, 664 – Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla “Look Yongqin!” You call out to the captain some feet in front of you, “The trees bloomed.”

Li Yongqin stops in his tracks, the blues of his robes shifting as he turns to face you and then looks across the river the pair of you’d been walking by on your patrol to spot the blossoms.

The gentle introduction of spring is most certainly needed in Seorabeol now. After last autumn’s attempt at quashing the Baekje forces, Silla thought themselves to be rid of the threat, but now more rumors have been arising from the north that Buyeo Pung and his men are on the move once again.

“You’re right,” he nods and looks back to you, a smirk on his lips as he does so, “Even then, I’d try to act sedater about it.”

Eyes widening as you look at a few townsmen who pass, their gazes dubious over your excitement towards the changing season. Maybe too forgetful of your attire with the dawn of a new spring, you find yourself quieting down as you catch up to Yongqin.

“Yongqin?” You question after a moment more of walking, your eyes watching a few petals float atop the river, “Why didn’t we go after those men who ran off after seeing you?”

“Them?” Yongqin scoffs as you look back to him, “They’re not revivalists, that’s for sure. If they were, they wouldn’t have run off like a dog with its tail between its legs. More than anything they’re probably common thieves.” A nod of his head as his shoes kicks up a small cloud of dust, “To be honest, I doubt there are any revivalists in Seorabeol willing to start anything and oust themselves at this point.”

“The Hwarang have really made a name for themselves, haven’t they?” You muse, watching the street ahead of you. “It seems like everyone knows your blues.”

In recent memory, the question of changing the Hwarang uniform has been placed on the table more than once, stemming from the fact that it both catches people’s attention as well as wards troublemakers off. As well as a lack of fashionable sense, Gongmyung had so graciously advised.

“Has the Deputy Commander returned from Ungjin yet?” You question, knowing that Gongmyung had left some time ago to oversee some things at a newer installment of Hwarang in the area.

“Think so,” Yongqin frowns, “Can’t say I wanted him back so soon, if ever, though.”

“He said he was going to recruit people too, right?”

“Mhm, but I have to wonder if Ungjin is the only place he went.” The Hwarang mutters.

“Isn’t that a good sign though? That he’s trying to get more numbers?”

“Is that what you think that’s about?” An eyebrow piqued at you.

“Am I wrong to assume that?” You furrow your brow, brushing your hand on the front of your robes to try and get rid of some lingering dust.

“Not at all,” with the way Yongqin says it, you know he’s being sarcastic. “Moon’s too nice to him, he should’ve been kicked out a long time ago.”

Ever since the Kim brothers had arrived to join the Hwarang, there had been a strong dislike for Gongmyung. You certainly can see why but hearing the absolute vocalized protest against him is jarring to hear.

You break away from looking at the road ahead and catch a glimpse of a figure quickly turning and racing down a side alley. At first you think it to be more men afraid of getting caught from the Hwarang on patrol, but the bright pink of their skits catching you off guard as they slip around the corner.

“Wait a minute…” Catching their eye, you’re stricken with a familiarity almost as you were looking at your own face. You aren’t given much time to look at her, though, because one you’ve realized who she is, she’s gone. “Ahro!” You call out, only to be pulled back by Yongqin.

“Where do you think you’re going?” He asks, only for you to shrug him off and barrel down the road towards where you’d last spotted your doppelgänger.

“Just hold on!” You call out behind you, knowing that a stunt like this is going to get you into trouble. The backstreets are denser than you originally though, a thicket of people causing you to weave your way through the crowds as you race after the girl. It isn’t until you trail her to a back alley deep in the depths of Seorabeol does she stop.

“Is something wrong?” Ahro asks as she spins on her heels as she turns to face you, “You seem to have exerted yourself quite a bit.”

“It looks like I surprised you earlier,” you huff, trying your best not to double over as your lungs take in more oxygen than they can process. “Do you remember who I am?”

“Of course,” she nods, “You were with the Hwarang that day.”

“Can I ask you something?” Thoughts flooding to what Jaehyun had said that night at Noseo-dong, of the girl he mentioned who looked exactly like you. “One of the men said they saw a girl who looked like me at the bulletin board by the bridge some months ago… Was that you by any chance?”

“I’m not sure,” a frown holds her lips as her pink skirts flutter in the wind with a gentle breeze, “I don’t find myself traveling there very often. But if he had seen me, would that be an issue?” Embarrassment takes hold over you; you’re almost accusing a stranger for something that you don’t even know the full story to. “Perhaps what you wanted to ask me was if I’ve been there at night?”

Eyes widening at her statement, maybe she is more perceptive than you thought.

“It happened in late spring, someone who looked like me disrupted what the Hwarang were guarding,” you pick your words carefully, trying not to be but so accusatory at the moment.

“If it was you,” a voice, more accusatory, calls out from behind you and directed towards Ahro, “Then we need to talk, it may or may not end with your imprisonment depending on the answers you give me.”

“Yongqin,” you mutter, surprise overtaking you as he walks to stand by your side. You’re not sure when he’d caught up with you.

“Captain Li,” she notes with a small smile, “Thank you for helping me back then.”

Her gratitude falls on deaf ears, Yongqin’s frown not budging with her words. “Are you going to answer her?” He asks, gaze narrowing, the taught smirk reappearing as his body tenses, anticipating something, “Were you at the board that night?”

“Many people walk by that board during the day,” Ahro’s brow furrows, “But I don’t go near it at night because of the attacks. Are you accusing me simply because I look like someone else?” She looks almost downcast at her own words, her gaze dropping to the ground as she hangs her head.

“Of course not,” you step in, “It’s rude of us to assume without any proper evidence.”

“You’re still gullible,” Yongqin scoffs, shaking his head, “After a few sorry words you’re just going to believe her? Even if she is the culprit, do you think she’d just tell you that?”

Yongqin and you lock eyes, an immense feeling of guilt washing over you. You’re not one to place the blame with little to no evidence, but she was the closest thing to a lead you and he had seen since Jaehyun had divulged what he’d seen that night.

“If there’s no reason for you to keep me here… I should be getting on my way, I have errands to run,” Ahro sighs out and turns on her heels, beginning to walk towards the main street.

You think to pursue her once more, but a fit of coughing coming from the captain interrupts that thought.

“Are you alright?” A worried look to Yongqin, who’s nearly doubled over, coughing into his hand. You find yourself stepping forward, wanting to offer assistance but not sure on how to so do.

His head shoots up to look at you as he hears you approach, his free hand raising to stop you, “Stay back.” Another bout of coughing before he speaks again, “I’m fine just… just give me a second.” It is the intensity of his demeanor that halts you, not only his words. The captain coughs for a few moments more, only standing straight when the bouts reside. His face looks pallid, sweat crawling down the sides of his face as he looks back to you.

“Are you still sick?” You question him carefully as he wipes his hand on his sleeve. “You look tired.”

“I’m fine,” he answers shortly, a small smile finding its way to his lips as if to assure you. It doesn’t. “You did make me run after you; you know.”

“But…” you begin before he stops you.

“But nothing, we’re in the middle of our rounds, we can’t get sidetracked anymore.” With that, he begins to walk, pace a little more slow than usual. You catch up to him and he starts to scold you, “I agree that asking Ahro about the incident was important, but you can’t just run off like that alone. If she had been an enemy or had accomplices waiting for you, what would you have done?” He watches your brow furrow and shakes his head, “You didn’t even think about that, did you?”

Even if Ahro hadn’t done anything nefarious, Yongqin’s right. You’d chased after your doppelganger without a second thought, which could have been bad if it had been someone else.

“Just,” he sighs, “try to be more careful, okay? I can’t be around you all of the time to make sure you don’t run off and get yourself kidnapped or killed.”

With Yongqin’s words still lingering in your head, you finish your rounds and head back to the temple grounds. They still continue to float around even after you’d eaten dinner and resigned yourself back to your room, the bright light of the moon creeping in through the sole window of your quarters.

You like to think yourself useful, on more than one occasion you had helped the Hwarang with their ventures and around the headquarters. Yet, today had shown you that there is much more to learn, and maybe that your perception isn’t where it should be.

The more you think about it, the stronger your resolve to change it becomes, you’ll work on becoming more aware and less dependent on this. It’s high time you do something about it.

Just when you think that to yourself, a loud boom reverberates around your room, up against your door as if someone’s thrown themselves against it. It causes you to startle, quickly bolting up from your bedding as your heart begins to pound in your chest. It happens once more and the door bursts open, splinters of wood falling to the ground from where the hinges once attached to frame, revealing a wang-do standing in the dimly lit hall.

“Is… everything alright?” You question after they make no move to speak, continuing to stand there ominously. “Do you need something?” Every muscle in your body feels taught, anticipating the culminating worry building in your gut.

The wang-do mutters something, nearly inaudible as you strain your ears to listen to him.

“What did you say?”

“… Blood,” the word chills you as he takes a step across the threshold of your room, now as he comes into focus you can see that his hair is stark white. “I need… blood.” In his hand is a sword, dragging along the ground as he takes another step, the sound of the metal carving into the wood of the floor echoing around the space. It hits you then, your stomach dropping as you realize that he’s one of the Furies.

You part your lips, wanting to call out for one of the captains, but find yourself unable to muster a singular syllable before the Fury lunges at you with a cackle. The blade hisses as he raises it and brings it down toward you, you roll from your bed and onto the floor but not before you feel the cool metal of the blade burn and sink into the flesh of your arm.

A cry escapes you as you hit the floor, trying to scramble away from the intruder, but as the Fury catches sight of the crimson of your blood, he seems to only become more enthralled. Hand finding the wound on your arm, you try to apply pressure to it, your back hitting the wall behind you as the Fury looms in front of you.

“Someone help!” The words finally escape you as the Fury reaches up to smear the droplets of your blood that had his hit cheek, he laughs again before raising his sword once more, probably intending to end your life. His eyes show no remorse, no semblance of humanity as he laughs and laughs. Feet kicking off of the floor, he begins to barrel towards you, your limbs frozen in place as you can only watch.

The sound of a pair of footsteps racing into your room nearly pulls your attention away from the man running at you, yet it doesn’t, but when the new figure tells you to duck and look away, you comply almost immediately, tucking into yourself and trying to move away.

The Fury that had been chasing you stops at the intrusion, looking surprised to see the commander standing in the front of your room, his sword raised. Angered at the arrival, the Fury turns from you and takes a sloppy swing at Kun, the commander’s blade meeting the wang-do as he turns.

A cry resounds around the room as the Fury is struck, writhing for a moment before his wound begins to heal before your very eyes. Kun realizes this and looks over to you, “Get over here, now,” his voice stern before he looks back to the wang-do. Wordlessly, you do, still holding onto your arm as you make your way to him, the Fury’s attention still rapt upon Kun. As you fall behind the captain, more footsteps race towards you room, several of the captains arrive at your doorway seconds later, their brows furrowed.

“You alright?” Yukhei asks as he looks to survey the situation.

“That’s,” Jaehyun frowns before you can respond, his eyes settled on the wang-do, “the kid who had to drink the pimul after that shop raid… He’s too far gone now to bring him back.” The sadness in Jeong’s tone in palpable, knowing that they’d have to kill the turned wang-do in the very near future. As if the words were an unspoken signal, the trio release their blades from their scabbards. They fan out, circling the wang-do carefully, watching for any signs of erratic movement. In an instant, the captains attack and fell the soldier, who crumples to the ground with a shriek of pain.

For a few seconds, the room is quiet, only then to be interrupted by more footsteps approaching. Perhaps the captains hadn’t been the only ones to hear your plea for help.

“I thought we’d talked about sparring after the sun’s set…” Gongmyung’s voice sounds from around the corner, rubbing his eyes as he turns into the room, freezing when he sees the scene before him. “What’s happened?”

Brow furrowing as he looks to the fallen Hwarang, “Wasn’t he sentenced to death a few days ago for breaking our code?” Looking from the bloodied corpse to the bloodied blades held by the captains, “Are you all responsible for this?”

Kun mutters some profanity under his breath as Jaemin begins to ramble, “You don’t understand, we’ve just-”

“A captain cutting down his own man?” Gongmyung continues, an amalgamation of confusion and anger culminating on his expression, “This is unheard of.”

“This is my fault, I suppose,” another voice rings out from behind Gongmyung and your hair stands on end immediately. Taeyong looks forlornly at the wang-do’s corpse, “My lack of leadership caused this to happen.”

At the sound of his voice, Gongmyung jumps and at the sight of him, Gongmyung pales. “W- What are you doing here, Colonel? You’re supposed to be dead…?”

The room falls silent once more, until Kun breaks it.

“I suppose we can’t keep it a secret for any longer.” Arms crossing over his chest, he looks to you as you push yourself from the floor, “You should leave, you can use my room for the night.”

You want to stay, want to make sure that they can explain everything properly so that Gongmyung doesn’t get any more frantic. Yet, Kun’s expression tells you enough that he’ll handle it.

April 14th, 664 – Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla The sound of birds chirping stirs you from slumber, and as soon as your eyes open you bolt up, looking at the unfamiliar space around you. This is the commander’s private quarters; you remember this as you recall the events of the night prior. Your arm, now wrapped in bandages, had healed quickly, yet you keep the guise of injury for the time being. The last you’d checked it had faded into a light scar, in a few days there would be no trace of it at all.

Your feet eventually find the floor, standing and stretching before you open the door and quickly make your way to the main hall to see what the events of last night had wrought upon the Hwarang. Before you get into the hall, you come across the Kim brothers, Gongmyung calling out to you.

“You…” The Deputy Commander says before two more figures come into view.

“Jaemin… Yuta… Where are you all going this early?” You ask, tilting your head in confusion.

“Due to last night’s… disturbance, I’m sure no one got a good night’s sleep,” Gongmyung answers for them, “You were injured, right? How’s your arm doing?”

“It isn’t as bad as I first thought,” you nod, hand moving to ghost over the injury.

“I’m glad to hear that,” he says with an uncharacteristic smile. Rather than the manic state he was in last night, he seems to be chipper.

“Did something happen?” You ask, wondering about the mood shift.

“I suppose you could say that, right, Nakamoto, Na?” Gongmyung looks to them, as do you. When you catch Jaemin’s eye he quickly breaks away, diverting his gaze away from you.

“I guess so,” the younger mumbles out.

“It isn’t information we can give out right now,” Yuta frowns, his attention rapt on you, unlike Jaemin’s.

“Even for you, Nakamoto, that’s a cold goodbye,” Doyoung speaks up, “Or did you want to get out of here as fast as you could?”

“Are you… leaving?” You question, looking back to the brothers before Gongmyung hushes his sibling.

“We’ll be on our way,” he nods at you, “I hope your injury heals well.”

“Goodbye,” Yuta says as he passes you, a small nod in your direction before Jaemin brushes past with a ‘See you’.

And then just like that, they’re gone, leaving you standing at the entrance of the main hall to try and understand what had just happened. Before long, you pull yourself from your thoughts and make your way into the hall, met with a few other captains.

“Are you sure you should be up already?” Jisung calls out to you as you enter, a worried expression on his face as he notices your bandaged arm. He’s standing next to Shotaro, presumably having been in a conversation with him before your arrival.

“I’m alright,” you try to assure him with a small smile, “It wasn’t as bad as it looked.”

“That’s good news,” Shotaro smiles, “I’m sorry to hear that it happened though.”

“It’ll be alright…” Trying to sate their worry, you bring up another thought plaguing you. “I saw the Deputy Commander on my way here, he was acting strange.”

The two look at each other before Jisung lets out a sigh, “You saw them?”

“Jaemin and Yuta were acting strange as well,” feeling concerned for the captains, you look to the two in front of you for answers.

After a moment of silence, Shotaro speaks up hesitantly, “Well… They’re leaving.”

Eyes widening as Jisung adds on, “They’re going to form a new group different from the Hwarang. We had a meeting with the chief and Commander Qian about it this morning.”

“So Jaemin and Yuta…” A frown beginning to curve your lips as you realize why they had been so downcast.

“They are leaving with him, yes,” Jisung sighs out, “I think I’m as shocked as you are. I understand that coming from Jaemin, since he’s known him for longer… But Yuta’s surprised me the most.”

“Don’t worry,” Taeil’s voice calls out, probably having witnessed your conversation from the head of the room. “We promised to keep things calm between our two organizations.”

Even if his words are meant to calm, with Gongmyung leaving with several pivotal members of the Hwarang, you only think he’s meaning to split and factionalize the rifts forming in the Hwarang’s ranks.

“He still won’t be able to associate with the Guard though, right?” Shotaro questions.

“Like hell I’d let him,” Kun speaks up now, a bitter bite to his voice, “He can leave, but I’m not letting him walk all over us so he can get what he wants.”

From there, the Hwarang begin to speak amongst themselves of names and other organizations that you aren’t too familiar with, slowly leading you to drift away from the conversation. Despite your feelings towards the captains leaving, you know nothing you say now could change anything, they’ve already left. So, you quietly excuse yourself and leave the main hall. As you walk towards your room, you look to the sky, wondering what the impact of leaving would have on the remaining Hwarang. Surely a blow like this hurt not only their pride but the relationships they have with those who left.

The door to the main hall opens and you turn to see Kun leaving, he catches you looking at him and strides over.

“Shouldn’t you be resting?” He questions, eyes lingering on your bandaged arm, “I remember the cut being deep.”

“I feel better,” you say quickly, trying to brush off his concern.

“Just because your father’s a doctor and you know a few things doesn’t make you invulnerable,” an almost concerned tone wavering in his voice, “Go and get some rest before you hurt yourself more.”

“I will,” you nod, mentally berating yourself. It’s hard to recall the severity of one’s injury when it heals so quickly. “Before I go, though… can I ask you something?”

“What is it?”

“It’s about the new group… How do you feel about all of them leaving?”

“What do you mean?” He questions, crossing his arms.

“You’re losing some of your men,” you aren’t sure how careful you should be with your wording, “Doesn’t that make you upset?”

“If they were my allies yesterday and things change that makes them my enemies tomorrow, so be it.” He shakes his head, “That’s just life.”

“Even Jaemin and Yuta?” The two captains had been by his side since he’d started commanding the Hwarang, surely, he couldn’t turn on them so easily.

“They’ll be missed,” Kun frowns, “But if they’re leaving it means they had an issue with the Hwarang, it’s best they leave now than when their discontent grows even more.”

The commander’s harsh and analytical take towards his men leaving has you somewhat stupefied. On one hand, you can see how indifferent he’d be towards Gongmyung and his lackeys leaving, but the two captains should have him more in a state. But if they all found themselves incompatible with the Hwarang, maybe it was for the best.

In the days following the departure of Gongmyung, Doyoung, Yuta, Jaemin and the rest of the Kim’s followers, you notice the compound feeling much emptier and lonelier. Around that time, Suh Kangjoon departed the Hwarang and his role as War Counselor. Even if it’s the inevitable change of things, you can’t help but see several different paths beginning to veer off the main one, unsure of where each one leads.

July 11th, 664 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla Three months have passed since the departure of Kim Gongmyung and his men to form the Guardians of the Royal Tomb. More so, it has been three months since Yuta and Jaemin left. Their presence, or absence of, remains blazingly obvious at times during the days that have since passed. These thoughts of them, and their reasoning for abandoning the Hwarang plague you still, as they do today as you look for a chore to do.

“Do you have a moment,” the voice of Moon Taeil calls out, pulling you from your thoughts.

“Oh!” You say, “Of course, sorry, I was daydreaming a bit…”

“Don’t worry,” he laughs, “You look tired, I only meant to say hello.” The leader’s expression grows concerned as he notes your solemn demeanor, “You do seem in poor spirits, though. Is everything alright?”

“Ah—Yes, I’m fine.”

“I see…” You can tell by his expression he doesn’t believe you. “Do you think you could do me a favor?”

“Of course,” you nod quickly, “I’d be happy to.”

“Great,” he replaces his stoicism for a grin, “There’s a store nearby called Kwangya, I hear their hangwa is to die for. What do you think? Would you be willing to go and buy me some?”

“Of course, but… I don’t think it’s appropriate for me to leave the compounds on my own…”

“Ah—” He catches himself, “I forgot…” Taeil then glances around, his face lighting up when just the man he had likely been looking for appears from just around the corner. “Kun! Do you have a moment?”

“Hm?” The commander says as he walks over, “What is it? I’m a bit busy now, can it wait?”

“This won’t take long,” the chief shakes his head, “I was hoping to send her on a short errand. Are any of the men available to chaperone her?”

“Hmm… Yukhei’s training the men, Jaemin’s… not around… Ah,” he thinks of someone, “Minhyung’s off duty right now. Ask him.”

As it turns out, getting approval to go out is surprisingly easy.

Before long, Minhyung and you are on your way into the city.

“Sorry for the trouble,” you say to him as you walk.

“It’s no problem,” he insists, “I had nothing else to do, and no reason not to do what the commander asked. So… we’re here to get hangwa?”

“Yes,” you note as you step over a rather large puddle, “Taeil says this place makes some that’s really good. Although apparently it’s really popular so they run out quickly.”

You appreciate Taeil’s effort, but even you can see that sending someone other than you would have been far easier. It looks as though you’re not as adept at hiding your feelings as you’d hoped.

Almost an hour later you walk out of Kwangya, the warmth of the freshly made jeonggwa emanating through the small box in your hands. You’re sure Taeil would be happy with what you picked out. Thinking of his reaction, you let a small smile slip across your mouth.

“…Is something wrong?” Minhyung questions, “If you’re finished, we should probably head back.”

“Right!”

The sun inches toward the horizon with what feels like every step you take, pushing your shadows further and further behind you.

“The sun is strangely red today…” You note, glancing up at the angry looking orb. The two of you continue to walk looking up until Minhyung looks at the path in front of you, stopping you by reaching out and pulling on your sleeve.

“What’s wrong?” You ask, looking to him and then to where he’s looking.

Then you see him, walking down the street toward you, the hustle and bustle of the street fading away into the background.

“You!” You cry out, not expecting to see Lee Donghyuck roaming the streets of Seorabeol.

“Hm,” his eyebrow raises at the sight of the two of you, “How unexpected.”

“Lee Donghyuck!” Minhyung nearly shouts, “What are you doing here?”

“Couldn’t I ask you the same thing?” The demon questions with a tilt of his head, “Then again, the King’s dogs do have to mark their territory from time to time.” He then looks to you, “Nonetheless, I’m surprised to see you let the bird out of her cage. Tell me, why is she here?”

Minhyung grimaces and slips a hand into his pocket, Donghyuck grins at this.

“Really?” He almost laughs aloud at the motion, “Surely you don’t think you have something hidden in there that might allow you to defeat me?”

“…Would you like to find out?”

“Minhyung wait,” you say quickly, “There are too many people here!”

Around you, you can see several families on the street, children flocking around their parents as they shop and sell their wares. Minhyung’s eyes flick back and forth, taking everything in. When he speaks, it’s in a voice so low that only you can hear.

“You need to run. I’ll deal with him.”

“But—!”

Donghyuck isn’t just another angry soldier—he had fought the entire Hwarang to a standstill, and then walked away. Minhyung is skilled, but the odds aren’t in his favor.

“Why are you here?” You turn, looking to the Demon. Is it really only coincidence? Without knowing his intentions, it seems premature to decide whether to fight or flee.

“You think a polite question is enough to wring secrets from me?” He laughs, his words harsh but his tone makes it sound as if he’s enjoying himself. “You clearly consider me an enemy, and yet you question me and expect an answer? I can’t decide if you’re brave or insane.”

“Stop messing around.” Minhyung moves to stand further in front of you, “Either tell us your purpose here or don’t.”

“Ah, my purpose?”

“I don’t think you’re just out for a walk. Tell us why you’re here or else…”

“’Or else…?’” Donghyuck sighs, “I suppose when all you have is a hammer, every problem looks like a nail. Have you considered that I am here merely by coincidence?”

“Are you, really?” You ask.

“I imagine that may be hard for you to believe. Then again, I care very little whether you believe me or not.”

“Then where are you going?”

“Gokaju.” He says simply, noting your confused expression. “I was bored so I came into the city to have a drink… Is that enough, or shall I elaborate on my gokaju preferences?”

“Uh…” You can’t find a retort to his explanation.

Donghyuck laughs, “Is something wrong? Is it so hard for you to believe that I drink? Do you think that I’m a monster who subsists entirely on human blood?”

“Well, no.” You’d only ever seen him on the battlefield before. In your mind, he’s inextricably connected to the din of battle and the stench of blood. To think a creature like that is going to sit down at a bar with normal humans to have a drink… It’s quite impossible to imagine.

“You’re welcome to follow and observe, if you don’t believe me.” His voice teasing, “I might even allow you to pour me a drink.”

“I don’t think I will.” You say quickly.

“Hmph, siding with this filth again?” He shakes his head, “I fail to see the appeal. Why would you choose to associate with such crude animals?”

“They’re not crude and they’re not animals.” You feel your hands tightening into fists, “They’re warriors and take pride in what they do.”

“Pride,” Donghyuck says in a breath of laughter, “Did you say ‘pride’? So, they turn themselves into fakes to cover their own inadequacies and call that ‘pride’?”

It’s a somewhat roundabout way to refer to the Furies, but it’s easy to see his point. Pimul grants a great deal of power, but in exchange it drives those who use it mad with bloodlust. You don’t have a decent rebuttal to him.

“Don’t let him get to you,” Minhyung urges, “He just enjoys shaking you up.” He then turns his attention to Donghyuck, “We have nothing more to say to you. If you’re really just here to drink, why don’t you just move along? I can’t imagine stirring up trouble here would benefit you any more than us.”

“Oh? Do you now?” His gaze narrows, “You think that concern for this human rabble would play even a miniscule part in my decision?”

Minhyung shakes his head, “I heard you sided with the loyalists. No doubt you’d slaughter all these people without a second thought, but the leaders of the ‘insurrection’ may not approve so that sort of thing, am I right?”

“You think you’re pretty clever,” Donghyuck’s eyes flash at Minhyung, “Don’t you?” For a long, nervous moment they stare at one another. Eventually though, it’s Donghyuck who backs away.

“Fine,” he sighs out, “This was only happenstance to begin with. If I wanted to attack the Hwarang, I wouldn’t be wandering the streets hoping to find you. You may go about your business. This time.” With a cold smile, he turns to walk away.

“Where are you going?” You ask and he sighs once more.

“Were you even listening? I am on my way to have a drink.” His head shakes, “We Demons eat, drink, sleep and all the other things. As do you. If you were to join us, you would understand that.” And with that, he’s lost to the crowd. You stand there, his words echoing through your head.

Once you’re back at the compound, Minhyung turns to you, “I need to tell the commander about what happened. You should get back to your room. Don’t leave unless someone’s with you.”

“Okay,” you nod, “Thank you.” After he’s fled off towards Kun’s room, you make your way to Taeil’s. The jeonggwa is cold by the time you get there.

Even after returning to your own room, Donghyuck’s words ring around in your ears. Are Demons really not that different from humans? He looks no different… Did he go back to a home of his own? What does he do there? Is it a pleasant life? A peaceful one? It has to be more peaceful than the life that the Hwarang lead. Although you still wouldn’t trade your position, doing so would leave friends that you’d come to love and you’d have to accept that you are a Demon yourself. That prospect terrifies you.

It isn’t coming any time soon, your muscles ache from your work earlier in the day, and you’d woken up early this morning to aid with an upcoming captain’s meeting… why aren’t you tired? You should be, right?

Eyes shutting for the umpteenth time, trying to force yourself to sleep, you hear a voice call out to you from behind your door, a gentle knock accompanying it. “Are you awake?” The voice of the Hwarang’s commander causes you to scramble to your feet, inching closer to the door.

“Is something wrong?” You ask as you approach the door.

“You have a visitor,” voice muffled behind the wood, you can hear him shift on his feet, “Once you’re dressed, come to the main hall.”

“A visitor?” You muse as Kun’s footsteps lead away from your room to give you some privacy. The visitor in question confuses you, who could possibly be calling for you at this late at night? Regardless of their identity, you quickly dress yourself and head to the main hall.

The figure standing there as you enter surprises you, before you’re able to question their appearance, Taeil speaks.

“I’m sorry for disturbing your sleep,” A small smile of apology as he glances towards the newcomer.

“You look like you just rolled out of bed,” Yongqin says snidely, a grin on his lips, “Didn’t even brush your hair?”

You begin to move your hand towards your scalp as you frown at him, but before you can touch your hair, Kun cuts him off. Glancing to the commander, you can see Taeyong, Yukhei, and Jaehyun in the room as well.

“This isn’t the time, Li,” Kun huffs and looks to you, “You look fine.”

You nod quickly at the commander before turning back to look at your guest in full, once she lays her eyes on you, she breaks out into a small smile.

“It’s good to see you again.” With all of the elegance that you had upon your first meeting, Sooyoung commandeers the room with her charisma, “I hope you’ve been well? I’m sorry for visiting so late.”

“Sooyoung?” The name falls from your lips as you stare at her, confused. It’s then you realize that another woman stands beside her, her face seeming familiar as well.

Sooyoung seems to catch this, turning to her and telling you, “She’s my bodyguard, of sorts.”

“Your bodyguard?” The woman in question is almost as striking as an actress, not what you’d expect a guard to look like.

Even more confused, you look to Kun, who sighs out, “…She said that it was imperative to talk to you.”

It’s obvious that he isn’t stepping into your own matters unless you allow him to, so you hum to yourself and look back to your visitor. “Why are you here, Sooyoung?” A tilt of your head as you ask, “Is something wrong?”

“I’ll get straight to the point then,” her smile fades away and her expression becomes stern, turning to face you fully, “I’m here to take you away.”

“Take me away…?” Brow furrowing, your foot moves instinctively to take a step back, “Why?”

A hum as she thinks, “It’s a long story that I’m not sure how to begin.”

“There isn’t any time to discuss this,” the woman who’s beside her, says hurriedly, “We need to leave immediately if we’re to get here out of here safely.”

“Hold on,” you interrupt the pair, “Why should I go with you two?”

“That’s a good question!” You hear Yukhei speak up from behind you, “You barge in here, ask to talk to her, and demand that she leaves with you?”

“You’re not related to her, are you?” Jaehyun adds questioningly, “She looks about as confused as we do.”

“Sooyoung, could you explain what’s happening a little more?” You pose, not trying to get the captains upset if there’s an actual reason for you to be worried.

“Our intrusion would perplex anyone, I suppose,” she nods in understanding and then motions to one of the tables in the room, “This might take a while, so it’s best to be comfortable in the meantime.”

“Would you like us to stay outside?” Taeil asks, glancing towards the open doorway into one of the temple’s courtyards.

“No,” Sooyoung says as you move to take a seat at the table she’d motioned to. “I’d like you to stay, this involves the Hwarang as well.” She takes her own seat, followed by the captains, Taeil and Kun, who she observes quietly before beginning to speak.

“I’m aware that you all have met Lee Donghyuck before, right?” As she states the question a few of the Hwarang look taken aback. “You’ve fought him once or twice.”

“How do you know that?” Kun’s gaze hardens on the woman.

“I know most things that go on in Seorabeol,” her gaze returns the hardness of his, “Eventually.”

“You’re like him and his cronies, aren’t you?” Arms crossing over his chest as he comes to the realization.

“I’d prefer not to be associated with him, Sicheng or Dejun, but yes, in a sense I am.” A nod of affirmation as Kun’s expression softens slightly.

“… You were talking about Donghyuck, then.”

“We fought him at Wonweol, Ongsan and Banweolseong,” Jaehyun interjects, brow furrowed, “What are his ties with the loyalists?”

“It seemed like he was there for his own reasons, though,” Yongqin points out, countering the other. “Not any sort of politics.”

“Regardless, he’s an enemy of us,” Kun frowns, adjusting the way he’s seated.

“Then you’re also aware that he’s pursuing her?” Sooyoung’s eyes flicker to you, the captain’s stares following suit.

The unraveling of this truth is a story you don’t want to hear the end of. Your stomach churns uneasily as each captain looks at you, some confused, some unsure of what to do or say. Taeil eventually breaks the silence,

“We’re well aware of that.” He coughs to clear his throat before continuing, “We also know he has comrades he calls Demons; not that we believe that, of course.”

“I’m not sure that that claim is unfounded, Chief,” Taeyong speaks up from the swarm of captains looking at you, “They all possessed strength incomparable to any of our men. Any of our... living men, at least. Despite that, it seems as if no one really knows they exist.”

The captains shift, murmuring things too quietly for you to hear before you look back to Sooyoung, anxious for her to continue.

“So, then you do know that they’re Demons,” a nod as she hums somewhat contently, “That will make things a little easier to explain.” Her hands fold atop one another as she places them on the table, “I’m not human either, I’m a Demon too.”

Your eyes widen, lips parting in surprise, “You are?”

“I’m actually rather high ranking,” eyes locked with yours, “something akin to a princess.”

“My family has been guarding hers for generations,” the other woman adds, moving a bit to stand closer to Sooyoung’s chair, not having sat when everyone else did.

“I suppose that makes more sense,” Kun muses, despite you still looking confusedly between the three. “I was wondering why you were so friendly that night, you were getting intel on the Hwarang, weren’t you?”

A sly smile as the guard brushes a few strands of hair from her face, tucking them behind her ear, “I’m not quite sure what you mean.”

“You know her?” Yukhei sounds shocked as he looks to Kun.

“Move your eyes up six inches, Yukhei,” Jaehyun snorts, “That’s Seulgi. Dressed a little differently than she was in Noseo-dong, but that’s definitely her.”

“Holy shi-” Yukhei nearly chokes, baffled at his inability to have recognized her from before.

“Us Demons have lived on this land since before the kingdoms were even mere conceptions,” Sooyoung captures the conversation once more, “The top officials in Silla, Goguryeo, and what was once Baekje, already know of our existence. Most Demons have no interest in human affairs, preferring to be left alone. However, humans in positions of power sought to use us to benefit their own means.”

“Did the Demons comply, then?” You question softly, seeing the look of disgruntlement on Sooyoung’s face.

“Most didn’t. Human ambition has never been strong enough to pull a Demon to get involved,” an almost angered sigh leaves her, “Yet, when the Demons refused to help, the humans were furious and sent out armies to destroy our homes and our villages. We scattered, across the land and are now divided by the different kingdoms. We seldom leave our domains and remain in hiding.”

“That’s awful,” a somberness coating your words as she speaks, the lorness in her expression unsettling.

“Many Demons went on to have children with humans, there are few of us now who can claim a pure bloodline.”

“I assume Donghyuck is one of them?” Taeil questions softly, trying to not upset Sooyoung further.

“The largest pureblood family are the Lees, you’ve already met the head, Donghyuck.” A small nod as she looks to you, “In the north, the largest clan is the Heo family. That would be yours. I heard the Demons of your family were destroyed by humans, but it seems like you’re the lone survivor.”

“Me?” You resist the urge to point at yourself, utterly taken aback by what Sooyoung had just divulged. “That’s impossible… I-”

“I had Seulgi look into your family history to the best of her ability,” she insists with a firm shake of her head.

“It seems hard to believe,” Seulgi offers you a sympathetic smile, “but you are very much a Demon. The blood that runs in your veins is strong, we sense great power from you.”

At a loss for words, you stare at the two women. It’s borderline insane that this is what they’re telling you, but at the same time it would explain a few things. Why Donghyuck is after you, why you heal so quickly…

“If you really are the descendent of a pureblood Demon, it’s quite clear why Donghyuck is after you,” Sooyoung doesn’t finish the rest of her statement, the answer being quite clear. “If two pureblood Demons were to have a child, it would be stronger than both of its parents combined.”

“He intends to marry her,” Taeil huffs, glancing to you and your wide-eyed expression.

“It seems so,” the woman agrees, biting her cheek, “So far it seems as if he’s only been testing the water, I’m unsure of when he’ll become more confident in his approach. If he were to use his full strength, I don’t know how you would fare in protecting her. Even the Hwarang can’t stand against the true power of a Demon.”

“Wait a minute- aren’t you going a bit too far?” Yukhei asks, sounding hurt by the latter statement.

“I don’t think you’re giving us enough credit,” Jaehyun frowns, “We’re not just some foot soldiers.”

“The only reason you’re alive is because Donghyuck wants you to be,” Sooyoung points out, “If he and his accomplices were to use their full strength, I’m not sure what would happen.”

“Then let them,” Taeyong’s voice rises through the unsettled quiet, “I would like to see the power of a real Demon.”

Donghyuck, Dejun and Sicheng had all shown incredible strength in the prior meetings you had with them; even the Hwarang captains had trouble keeping up. If that hadn’t been the full extent of their power, you’re unsure that you want to see it.

“Yukhei and Jaehyun are right,” Kun says, “Even if they’re stronger than the average warrior, you’re still discrediting us. The power difference wasn’t so great that they bested us easily.”

“That’s right,” Yongqin nods and smirks at the Kun, “Besides, we’ve got the Demon commander himself in charge.”

“This isn’t the time for jokes, Li,” Kun sighs and shakes his head.

“You must realize that these men are unlike any you’ve faced before,” there’s an almost pleading edge to Sooyoung’s voice. “Your job is to protect Seorabeol, not her. That’s why I’m asking you to leave her in our care, with us her chances of surviving one of Donghyuck’s attacks will be much higher.”

“Give us a break,” Yukhei says, rising to his feet and planting his palms on the table, “You’re making it sound like we can’t protect her.”

“I’m not trying to sound rude but,” Yongqin’s head tilts at the two women, “you think that the two of you could protect her better than us? Neither of you are a part of the Hwarang, I’m not sure why you’re going around and sticking your nose in our business.”

Sooyoung and Seulgi seem to be taken aback by the captain’s reaction.

“What do you think, Commander Qian?” Seulgi looks towards Kun, her gaze narrowing, “You’ve acknowledged Donghyuck’s strength, are you not at least considering Sooyoung’s offer? I think it’s in your best interest to leave her in our care.”

“That’s different,” Kun looks to Seulgi, leaning back in his chair slightly, “We made a promise to her, to protect her, we’re not going to back out just because they’re Demons. And I understand that you call yourselves Demons too—but that gives us no ground to trust you.”

“Do you realize who you’re speaking to? Sooyoung is a descendant of—”

“Seulgi,” Sooyoung stops the other with a raise of her hand, her tone calm but stern, leaving no room for more argument, “That’s not necessary.”

“I agree with Qian,” Taeyong affirms, yet doesn’t look your way, “if she possesses blood of a different species… I’m sure her aid will come to use with our internal purposes in the very near future.”

Seulgi glares at the colonel, not speaking as to not anger Sooyoung.

“This is a problem, then,” Sooyoung notes solemnly, “Is there no way to convince you to allow her to go with us?”

“Hold on,” Taeil interjects, “We didn’t even confirm what she has to say about all of this.” His gaze travels to you, sympathetic in nature and looking in your eyes as if you already have an answer.

But you don’t know what to say. It’s not that you doubt the concerns of Sooyoung and Seulgi, yet there’s just more and more to take in.

Taeil sees your furrowed brow, eyes teeming with indecisiveness, and nods with a small smile, “It must be difficult to discuss in front of so many people. You should speak to Sooyoung privately.”

“What the hell—!” Kun begins to protest, but Taeil is unwavering in his stance.

“We’ve been ignoring her feelings for this entire conversation,” Taeil states, “if she wishes to leave of her own accord, for her own safety, we ought to let her, no?”

“You’re too soft on people,” Kun scoffs, but makes no move to stop him.

“You won’t steal her away the moment we leave you alone, will you?” Taeyong asks as the captains rise to their feet.

“Of course not,” Sooyoung says as she remains seated, “Once Demons make a promise, we’re bound to keep it.”

A few moments later, once the captains, commander, chief and colonel had filed out of the main hall, you lead Sooyoung to your room nestled in the compound. Seulgi had opted to stay outside, just far enough away so she wouldn’t encroach on your private conversation.

“I apologize for giving you a terribly large number of things to think about,” Sooyoung starts off, “Normally, I would never do something like this.”

“It’s alright,” you try to reassure her with a small smile, “I’m sorry for them as well, I know they can be a little… brusque at times.”

“That’s to be expected,” she waves it off, “I know I was asking a lot of them. Not many humans would accept the existence of us so easily. But enough of that, what do you say to my offer? Do you have any thoughts on it?”

Of course, you do. If it had been Sooyoung to come across you on your first night in Seorabeol, you very may well have taken her up on her hospitality. Yet now…

As if she can see the wavering of your options, Sooyoung speaks, “The Hwarang seem to believe they can protect you from everything out to get you. I don’t doubt their dedication, I do, however, doubt their ability.”

You stay silent, aware that what she just said may be true. The Hwarang are powerful, skilled in both the sword and bow. You’d seen them overcome overwhelming odds, but those odds had always been nothing but human-made. From what Sooyoung had said, the strength of a single Demon would be enough to wipe them out should they so choose. A few of you have been able to see that firsthand, and the losses associated with it. To think that that same fate could arise to a captain of the Hwarang fills you with undeniable dread.

“With Buyeo Pung seeking aid in Goguryeo, things will only get more hectic here in the capital,” Sooyoung says to fill the silence, “If Donghyuck were to strike in the hysteria, what do you think would happen? You should leave the Hwarang, let them fight without worry.”

“Sooyoung…” The concern for you seems real, frantic, almost.

“Is there,” her expression softening as she searches yours, coming to a subtle conclusion, “a reason you want to stay?”

“…There is.” You answer without thinking it through, the words falling from you so quickly you can barely catch them.

“One of those men, perhaps?” Innocent in nature, her question still catches you off-guard.

“No… It’s not that.,” you shake your head, “It’s just… I’m confused. All this time, I thought I was a human.” Your ability to heal quickly was surely strange, perhaps, but you’d never thought it was indicative that you weren’t even human. Or maybe you’d never allowed yourself to think otherwise.

To try and hide your condition made you lonely enough.

“I understand,” she says, “but now isn’t the time for that sort of angst. You are a Demon, and that is a fact that neither you nor I can change.”

“But none of this makes any sense…” Your brow furrows, “Not only am I a Demon, but I’m the last survivor of some big Demon clan? It’s all just…”

“Is see…” Sooyoung’s voice softens, for a moment she looks lonely. “Well, if you do not wish to go, I cannot force you.”

“It’s not that I don’t trust you or anything—” You murmur, “Could you just give me some time? To think.” You want to find your father and ask him if what she said is the truth. Maybe then you could accept your fate as a Demon.

Sooyoung and you make your way back to the main hall, the captains loiter around the space, some look anxious upon your arrival.

“Have you come to a decision?” Taeil asks once you’ve fully stepped into the room, giving you little time to compose yourself.

“For the time being we’ve decided to leave things as they are,” Sooyoung states, Seulgi looking at her worriedly.

“Are you sure?”

“Quite.” Sooyoung nods to her, “I believe prioritizing what she wishes is what’s most important for now.”

“Very well,” Taeil finds it hard to mask the smile growing on his lips, “The Hwarang accept responsibility for her well-being.”

“Just relax and leave it all to me!” Yukhei bursts out, eager to show his worth.

“I’m sure Wong’ll give you much more to worry about,” Jaehyun laughs and looks to you, “It’ll be nice to still have you around.”

“What kind of girl wants to stay here?” Yongqin chuckles, “I can’t tell if you’re brave or if you’ve had a strong lapse in judgement.”

“This doesn’t change anything,” Kun points out, “You’ll still be treated like you always were.”

“Of course,” you nod, “Thank you all for letting me stay.”

Sooyoung then moves to you, her hand finding yours as she looks into your eyes, “Please be careful, and remember, I’m on your side.”

“Thank you, Sooyoung,” you smile at her gratefully as she relinquishes the hold on your hand. She gives you one last beaming smile before her and Seulgi are off into the dark of night.

July 19th, 664 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla In the days since Sooyoung’s visit, you find it much more difficult to drift off into a dreamless slumber. When you do dream, you find that your mind often travels to your heritage and what it means for you now and in the future, something of which you don’t want to think about.

You had decided to stay with the Hwarang, but was that really the best choice for you, for them? Of course, you wanted to stay but would you being here cause them unneeded harm?

A sudden clang from outside causes you to jump, to leave your thoughts for a moment as your heart begins to pound. Eyes cautiously looking towards your bedroom door, your hands clench your blankets in taught anticipation.

Several short bangs from your door cause you to rise to your feet, the voice of Osaki Shotaro calling out to you, “I’m sorry for bothering you, but there’s an emergency!”

“What’s wrong?” You ask, voice wrought with anxiousness as you walk towards the door, opening it to allow him inside.

His body tense as he enters, continuously looking over his shoulder to make sure the hallway is clear, “The Demons have attacked us.”

“What?!” Icy dread seeps through your veins at his words.

“They’re after you, which means you need to stay here.”

“But—” You begin to protest his assertion, wanting to help in some way as the only reason the Demons are here is because of you. “Shotaro, I have to find the others.”

“I can’t let you,” he shakes his head, a worried look in his eye as if he knows he can’t reason with you, “The Commander asked that I make sure you don’t leave.”

“They’re here for me, though. If anyone gets hurt…” You wave away the thought, “Maybe I can try and reason with them? What if I can get them to leave peacefully?”

Shotaro’s lips purse, and after a moment, he shakes his head in defeat, “If you’re going to be that insistent, I don’t think I can stop you. I was told to protect you though, so if you’re going, I’m going.”

The two of you leave your room, barreling down the hallway until you’ve reached one of the inner courtyards. You stand there momentarily, unsure of where to go, until Shotaro speaks up.

“It’s this way,” he says before something darts in front of you, pushing the officer to the ground. His body seems to fly for a few yards, hitting the ground with a thud as Shotaro groans out in pain. As you try to run up to him, the same blur passes in front of you and you feel an arm wrap around yours.

“Where do you think you’re going?” The voice of Lee Donghyuck asks you simply as you struggle to get out of his grip. His grip is like steel, unmoving and snakelike, “I heard the Park clan visited a few days ago, I’m sure you know why I’m here, then.”

He sighs, looking at the surrounding buildings, “You’re a Demon, a noble Demon… There isn’t any reason for you to hole yourself up with fakes.” Donghyuck’s grip tightens on your arm slightly, “Come with me.”

It’s obvious who he’s talking about when he mentioned the fakes. With the way your body tenses, Donghyuck can sense your anger.

“Do you really think staying here and helping their own self-interest and agenda to create those… things is really what you should be doing?”

You find it hard to respond. For obvious reasons, you aren’t a fan of the existence of the Furies, but there were times when it was needed for a Hwarang to survive. Could you fault a man for wanting to live? Besides, your father was one of the people who created the serum, you can’t help but feel partially responsible.

“My father was handling the experimentation,” you thrash in his grip, trying to lessen his hold on you. “As his daughter, I can’t ignore that.”

“Ah, that’s an admirable attitude.” He notes, “But that doesn’t mean I’d look the other way.” His eyes look up from you as the sound of racing footsteps approach.

You break your gaze away from him to see Jaehyun and Kun running towards you, sour expressions on both of their faces.

“Breaking in again?” Kun frowns as he locks eyes with Donghyuck, “I don’t know if you’re brave or stupid. This isn’t a gathering place for Demons, you know.”

“Barging in here to find yourself a wife,” Jaehyun snickers at the Demon, “You’d think you’d have gotten the message by now.”

The sight of the two Hwarang puts you at ease a bit, even more so when you can see Minhyung and a handful of other wang-do behind them. There are a few missing faces among them, you wonder if they’d gotten injured in the earlier skirmishes.

“You have no idea how important she is,” Donghyuck frowns, his grip on you unrelenting still.

“So, taking her against her will just because you’re too scared of rejection is the way you’re going around this?” Jaehyun nearly shouts at him, “That’s just pathetic.”

“Even if you take her as a hostage, we’ll kill you without hesitation,” Kun affirms, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword.

“I wouldn’t need to use her as leverage with the likes of you,” there’s arrogance in his words as the Hwarang begin to encircle him. The tension pulls like a taught rope, beginning to fray as it reaches its breaking point.

You’d long ago decided that you would trust the Hwarang. The men have far more experience and skill than yourself. So, you decide that the safest thing for you to do is to leave the situation to them.

Your eyes meet Jaehyun’s. They’re calm, confident and warm. Even as you lay quite literally in the grip of the enemy, his gaze makes you feel reassured.

“The men at the gate are taken care of,” the voice of Xiao Dejun calls out.

“This was way too easy,” Dong Sicheng joins him, “I guess they are humans at the end of the day. Hey—” He notices that you’re in Donghyuck’s grasp, “You got her. Let’s go.”

“The longer we remain, the more likely the situation will escalate out of our control.” Dejun adds, crossing his arms.

“You’re right,” Donghyuck sighs.

“I have to say, I was expecting more from the Hwarang.” Sicheng begins to laugh, but it’s cut short by Jaehyun lunging out at him with his blade. He’d barely dodged it and was beginning to speak again when another flurry of strikes lashes out at him.

“Care to repeat that?” Jaehyun smirks.

“Oh, hello Jaehyun,” Sicheng says with a grin of his own.

This time, Jaehyun lashes out towards Donghyuck.

“You thought you could defeat me like this?” The Demon chuckles as he evades it easily.

“I’m your opponent,” Kun shouts, “I said before that I wouldn’t hesitate to strike you from behind!”

Kun’s attack had abated Donghyuck’s attention towards the commander long enough to allow him a chance to strike. Kun’s sword drawn from his scabbard, he arcs his blade towards Donghyuck’s head. The Demon moves quickly, but with a nonchalant nature in his movements as the blade passes centimeters from his throat.

His grasp loosens and you fall to the ground, you keep low as the swords clash overhead.

“Filth,” Donghyuck sneers at Kun, brushing aside a blow from the commander and a strike from Jaehyun.

“You bleed when you’re cut, right?” Kun smirks, “So if I chop off your head, I figure you’ll die too.”

“Care to test that?”

“Yeah, I think I do.” The sound of steel-on-steel rings out across the compound, you’re surprised that none of their blades break.

“Humans are so strange,” Dejun frowns as he unsheathes his own blade, “Why fight when you know you cannot win?” As he speaks, he begins to move towards Donghyuck, but finds Yukhei standing in his path.

“Ah ah ah,” he says, “You’ve already got a date with me tonight, pretty boy.”

“I’d rather not,” Dejun frowns, raising his blade, “But you give me no choice, it seems.”

Yukhei swings his sword as if backed by his entire body, Dejun deflects it easily.

“You’re the guy who hurt Jaemin, right?” Yukhei shouts, ready to strike again, “I’m not gonna let you go until I get in at least one good hit for him!”

Donghyuck and Kun are still locked in battle, but in a moment of rest, Kun laughs, “What’s the matter? You seem a little tired compared to earlier.”

“I was going easy on you since you’re barely worth my time,” Donghyuck sneers, locking Kun into another gale of blows. The two only stop when Dejun speaks up.

“Donghyuck, our enemy has regrouped,” his eyes flicker towards a group of Hwarang making their way over to the fray, “What are you going to do?”

“Then we’ve had enough for one night.” He sighs, stepping back form the fight and sheathing his sword. “We can take her any time we’d like.” With that, the duo break past the lines of Hwarang faster than any of the men could keep up with, disappearing into the darkness outside of the compound.

“You bastards—!” Kun calls out after them after they’ve already disappeared.

“Demons my ass,” Yukhei snorts, his arms hanging at his sides, the tip of his sword nearly touching the ground. “All bark and no bite.”

“Don’t push yourself,” Jaehyun teases, “You’re short of breath.”

“You idiot,” Yukhei huffs, “I’m just playing it up to make the enemies lower their guard! But forget that—”

Yukhei glares at the last remaining Demon in the compound, Dong Sicheng.

“You’re funny, Jeong.” Sicheng says with a short laugh, “Looks like we’ll have to settle this at a later date. Hopefully we’ll actually be able to finish next time. I want to fight until one of us dies.” And with that, he’s gone into the night.

The demons disappear and the compound falls silent. Is it over? You brought yourself to your feet but your body goes limp once again.

“Are you alright?” Jaehyun asks as he steps over to you, “You did good.”

You look up to see Jaehyun crouched down next to you, a smile adorning his lips.

“Jaehyun…” If you say anything more, you’re afraid you’ll burst into tears, so instead you give him a shaky smile. With a grin, he tousles your hair and offers his hand out to you.

“Let’s get you back to your room, I’ll walk you there,” he offers, beginning to lead the way.

July 20th, 664 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla Mid-morning, after a tumultuous night and subsequent sleep, you trudge your way to the main hall to find the captains in some kind of meeting. Upon your entry, Jisung turns to you and offers a small wave.

“Good morning,” he smiles and beckons you over to sit down next to him, you take him up on his offer and he speaks again, “Did you sleep well?”

“As best I could,” you respond sheepishly.

“You don’t need to lie,” Jisung notes, “We can tell you barely slept at all.”

“Do I really look that bad?” You mutter, your fingers moving to trace the circles under your eye. A shake of your head as you turn to Minhyung, who sits on your other side, “How’s Shotaro doing?”

“The fall knocked him out cold, but aside from some minor bruises he looks like he’ll be fine,” the officer reassures you. “He wants to apologize for not doing a better job of protecting you.”

“I should be the one apologizing to him!” You claim almost exasperatedly as the door to the main hall opens and a figure strides in.

“Is something wrong, Chief?” Jisung questions Taeil, who looks far from the chipper mood he typically has. “I think you’re scaring her.”

“I’m sorry if I am,” he apologizes to you, “Forgive me.” The smile he gives you is fleeting, returning to the grimace that seems deep rooted into him now.

“What happened?” You question, and he lets out a sigh.

“The monks here don’t want us staying at Bulguksa any longer.” He says as calmly as he can, a look of defeat in his eyes.

“You mean to say they’re telling us to leave?” Minhyung asks, a troubled expression overcoming him.

“More or less, yes,” The leader frowns.

“I had a feeling this would happen…” Jisung sighs out and looks to Taeil, “What should we do?”

The monks at Bulguksa seemed to have shifted to a pro-Guard stance since the outburst of attacks in the recent months against the Hwarang. It’s no surprise they want the Hwarang gone, but this place was just beginning to feel like home.

“Do you think last night’s incident was the last straw?” Minhyung poses to Taeil, who nods in agreement.

“I don’t think, I know.” He huffs out a large amount of air, “They don’t want actual fighting on their grounds, I’m sure some councilman also had his hand in this as well.”

“This is all my fault,” you realize as he says that, the Demon’s wouldn’t have shown up if you weren’t here.

“That isn’t true,” Taeil tries to reassure you, “We forced ourselves in here with unreasonable demands.”

“If we need to move, we should start looking at new locations,” Minhyung says quickly to change the topic.

“The monks here have already provided another temple for us to stay in,” Taeil says, his brow furrowing.

“That’s very… nice of them,” Jisung states, trepidation in his voice. “They must really want us gone.”

“Yes, to both,” Taeil nods, “which is why I accepted their offer. We’re going to get busy around here soon.”

The donors to Bulguksa Temple bought a piece of land some ways away from the original site to build a new compound for the Hwarang. It lay outside of the city, further than Bulguksa or Shoshin had been, called Shoji. The new grounds have ample enough space for a bathhouse, new training buildings, and even more rooms for the Hwarang members. The members are clearly excited about it. By the time the end of the summer came around, the Hwarang had fully moved from their residence at Bulguksa to their new home in Shoji.

November 11th, 664 – Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla It’s windy today, you noticed it first when you awoke, the hiss of air swarming in through unsealed cracks and pockets of air where the doors don’t meet their frames. You notice it still when the last of the leaves are stripped from their branches as you and Jaehyun walk to the city center. And you’re noticing it now, the slice of the cold cutting through your clothes and chilling you to the bone.

“It is almost winter, isn’t it?” Jaehyun muses as he catches you shivering involuntarily, “The wind coming in from the coast isn’t helping. If this is what it’s like during the day, I kind of feel bad for the guys who patrol at night.”

Your hands clench as he huffs out a laugh that turns into clouded vapors, “Are your hands cold? Want me to hold them for you?”

You know he’s joking by the way you get flustered and tell him no, him laughing again as you continue to walk down the street. Looking up from your embarrassed haze, you spot someone walking towards you.

“Isn’t today great?” Yukhei asks as he approaches, his arms outstretching as if to embrace the chilled air.

“Unfortunately, not all of us can act like human torches,” Jaehyun shakes his head, “I still don’t know how you’re not affected by the cold.”

“Look at who’s talking Mr. I’ll-Break-Code-and-Wear-My-Summer-Clothes,” Yukhei scoffs. Now that he mentions it, Jaehyun is wearing his Hwarang blues, but the white cloth of his sleeves doesn’t look to be the thick linen typically worn during the colder months.

Even if Yukhei was meaning to scold him, you know he means it in the friendliest way possible. Their friendship is wrought with things like this: what seems to be an argument but is really them caring for one another. You can’t help but chuckle at the two.

“Why’re you smiling like that?” Yukhei asks when he catches your expression.

“She probably thinks your face is funny, you should really do something about that…” Jaehyun pokes, a teasing cadence to his voice.

“It’s not that,” you shake your head, “I was just remembering the last time we met each other on your rounds, I was with Yongqin and Jaemin then.” The latter name brings a bitterness to your tongue, still unsure of how to feel about Jaemin and Yuta leaving the Hwarang on such short notice. The two men’s faces turn sour at the mention of their friend.

“I just meant that with everything going on… it makes me a little nostalgic,” you say, trying to shake off the thought.

“The Hwarang’s changed,” Jaehyun nods with a sigh, “Hell, so has everything else. Taeil’s been promoted and all.”

Taeil’s promotion didn’t mean he left the Hwarang entirely, but it meant he traveled often to speak with other generals to speak of the threat of another Baekje plot. Rumors of Buyeo Pung raising an army in Goguryeo had been circulating recently, putting everyone on edge once again. You thought Taeil’s promotion to be a good thing for the Hwarang, yet with Yukhei and Jaehyun’s reaction, they seem less than thrilled.

“We didn’t join to be the Crown’s guard dogs,” Yukhei shakes his head. While the Hwarang had been surface level related to the Crown, only receiving orders when necessary, they now take orders directly.

“How is this going to change for everyone going forward?” You ask the pair, trying to focus on them and not the whirlwinds of conversations happening along the busy street.

“Well, if we really do need to fight against another one of Buyeo Pung’s rebellions, we won’t just be killing off the tail end of his followers. We’ll probably be put on the front lines.” Jaehyun frowns, not too certain what to think of that idea.

“Supposedly, it was Suh Youngho. He’s been making ties to get Baekje back on its feet,” Yukhei’s shoulders shrug, “Because of that I heard some factions of the revivalists are pissed at him because they were trying to win Pung’s favor.”

“He already had a target on his back within the Silla government for being a Baekje revivalist, he’s hated by most of the kingdoms now.” Jaehyun muses, looking up to the sky for a moment. “Until something happens though, I suppose things are going to stay as they are.”

“And they will, it’s not like they can do anything about what the kings want to do,” Yukhei nods. “They’ll only get involved once the king starts asking them to ration their food again to send it off to war.”

As you look around the street, you want to think that he’s right. The city kept thriving even under the threat of another invasion or war… Life continues regardless of what the higher powers of the kingdoms are plotting. You look up to Yukhei, words falling out of you before you can catch them,

“I never realized you were so interested in politics.”

“Didn’t realize?” He looks slightly taken aback, his arms cross over his chest, “What exactly did you think of me?”

“Uhm…” You cough into your hand, looking away from him, “Let’s continue our rounds. It’s nearly winter which means the sun’s going to start setting earlier...”

November 7th, 664 – Shoji Temple, Kingdom of Silla The name Suh Youngho had only been said once before, that you can recall. He seemed to be an instigator for a few of the Baekje-Silla skirmishes as of late and the kingdoms were desperate to find him. Yet, after a few negotiations with Tang and Silla leadership, it seems as if he had betrayed his loyalty to the Silla powers and had begun to help the two allies. You don’t know much about the logistics of it, but when Jisung brings him up, you’re a bit startled by what he says.

“Suh Youngho has been assassinated.” Jisung states the news in the main hall, among the collection of captains who linger there after their morning practice.

“Are you serious?” Jaehyun questions, “Do they know who did it?”

“Could have been someone from Silla or it could’ve been someone from the loyalists,” Yukhei shrugs, “Hell, it could’ve been personal. If it was, I bet it was that Huang guy.”

“If he was going to get killed, I wish I could’ve done it myself,” Yongqin sighs, crossing his arms.

“That’s not very funny, coming from you,” Yukhei frowns as he looks at the other captain. “Weren’t we told to leave him alone?”

You’d never met Youngho, in fact, you barely know who he was or what he did. Yet somehow you feel that his death means something important to the kingdom, as if the already rising unease has skyrocketed.

“You all know the orders to leave him alone came from the Crown,” Jisung nods gravely, “The rest of the kingdom isn’t going to see it that way. A scabbard belonging to a member of the Hwarang was left at the scene of his death. An official investigation by the Guard has been launched.”

“Is a scabbard really enough evidence?” You ask, feeling worry begin to claw its way down your spine.

“If it’s not I’m sure they’ll ‘find’ some more when it comes time,” Jaehyun huffs as he looks back to Jisung, “Who are they saying it belongs to?”

“They actually say it’s yours, Jaehyun.” Jisung frowns as the elder’s eyes widen.

“Really Jeong?” Yongqin sounds somewhat amused, “I wish you’d taken me along.”

“Cut it, Li.” Jaehyun’s voice is sharp as he motions to his waist, “My scabbard’s right here. If they’re going to make shit up, they should at least do it better.”

“I don’t suspect you,” Jisung points out and gestures to the others in the room, “I’m sure no one else here does either. Unfortunately, I’m not sure that the rest of the kingdom won’t try to pin the blame on you… I’m sure they’re having trouble finding the real culprit. Those who don’t think it’s you are looking at Huang Renjun, they say that he hired us to kill Suh.” Was that the Huang that Yukhei had mentioned earlier?

“I’m sure most of the king’s chamber are eager to pin this on us though,” Yukhei shakes his head, “Ever since the rumors of Baekje started again, the king only appointed staunchly pro-Royal Guardian and Guard nobles. Unless someone lied though, there’s no way this murder was done by one of us.”

“Unless Taeyong decided to go and do it off the record,” Yongqin notes, a slight smirk on his lips.

“How… is he these days?” Jaehyun asks, a worried expression on his face. The last few times you’d come across him, he seemed to be acting stranger and stranger. Even if you didn’t want to believe it, something like this wasn’t far out of his realm of possibility. Whenever you pass him in the halls, it looks as if he’s hungry, thirsty for blood.

“We’ll have to be careful,” Yukhei says, a hand running through his hair, “If we let people know about the Furies…”

“About that,” Kun interjects as he walks into the room, followed by Taeil. It looks as if he’s going to say something else but the third figure that walks in takes everyone by surprise that whatever the commander is trying to say gets drowned out.

“Yuta?” Yukhei nearly gasps out, “What the hell are you doing here?!”

For a moment, you question whether you’re asleep or not. The man who had just entered the hall was the same man who’d left months ago with Gongmyung and his men, Nakamoto Yuta.

“Yuta,” Jisung says, a smile overcoming him, “What happened with Gongmyung’s organization?”

“Why are you so nonchalant about this?” You ask him as you look to Yuta. “There’s no way the commander would allow someone from Gongmyung’s group here, we’re not even supposed to be talking to them—”

“Just,” Kun sighs out, trying to get the energy in the room to settle, “Let me talk. Starting today, Nakamoto’s returned to the Hwarang.”

“What?” Jaehyun sounds surprised, his once crossed arms falling to his sides. “Hold on, Qian, we’re glad he’s back but… What happened with Gongmyung?”

“You’re mistaken, but understandably so,” Yuta speaks, and you feel a sense of calm wash over you. It’s been too long since you’d heard him last. “I was never one of his supporters.”

“In fact, he joined Gongmyung under Kun’s direct orders,” Taeil says with a coy smile, “As a spy, of sorts.” With the leader’s words, everything begins to make sense.

“I can’t believe you went off and had fun without me,” Yongqin faux pouts at Yuta.

“I’m sorry we had to keep this from you,” Taeil’s head bows down in apology. It’s a surprise for sure, but nonetheless a welcome one.

You give Yuta a small smile but he only sighs and shakes his head, “I’m afraid it’s a bit early to feel relieved.” His gaze turns to Kun, “The last six months have made Gongmyung’s intentions clear. Gongmyung plans to uproot the Hwarang institution in favor of his ideal one.”

“What do you mean by uproot?” Jisung asks with a frown.

“Gongmyung is going to expose the Furies to force the king’s favor,” Kun bites the inside of his cheek as he holds in a scathing retort.

“There’s more,” Yuta adds and glances to Taeil, “They plan to assassinate the Leader of the Hwarang.”

Taeil’s face is tense, gaze hardening as he looks to Kun and waits for him to speak. You feel your stomach drop, not realizing the extent to which Gongmyung hated the Hwarang.

“The Guardians are moving to destroy us,” The commander says and looks to Jaehyun, “You heard about Suh?”

“That they’re trying to pin it on me?” A nod, “Yeah.”

“They’re using it to pin blame on us and to discredit your father,” Kun crosses his arms, “They’ve been spreading the rumor across Seorabeol, even if Huang says that he wasn’t the one who ‘hired’ us, there’s still going to be people who believe it was our doing.” His gaze travels to Yuta, “So, Nakamoto’s going to be guarding Huang for the time being. If it looks like he left and then came back, it won’t be hard for Gongmyung to figure us out.”

A subtle nod from the captain, “Of course.”

The room stays quiet, so quiet that one can hear the wind whistling in from outside. A tension remains taught in the room, anticipatory for what’s to come and the outcome of what it brings.

“Kim Gongmyung…” The name leaves Kun in a hushed murmur, “It’s not enough for him to expose the Fury Corps, but to try and kill Taeil too?” It’s almost as if he’s having a quiet conversation with his former comrade. He shakes his head, drawing his gaze from the floor and looks to the captains, “It’s too bad that it has to end this way, but we have no other choice. Gongmyung dies.”

“It can’t really be helped, can it?” Taeil exhales, nodding solemnly as if to seal the former Deputy Commander’s fate.

“We’ll invite Gongmyung to Taeil’s residence in Seorabeol, I’ll be there too,” Kun begins, his voice low, commanding, “Once he’s dead we’ll use his corpse to lure the rest of his Guardians there and kill them.” He looks to Jaehyun and Yukhei, “I’m assigning both of you and your divisions to this, take care of it.

“Who do you want me to kill?” Yongqin asks, his hand resting atop the hilt of his sword.

“No one, you’re staying here.” When he sees the other beginning to protest, the commander speaks again, “You’ve still got that cough, right? You’re sick. Yuta can keep you company for a few days.”

“So, you’re telling me I can’t participate in the assassination of a person who’s trying to kill our leader?” Yongqin sounds agitated, a bitterness coating his words as he glares at Kun, “You’re a real asshole.”

You don’t realize that you’ve been watching the scene unfold in silent shock until you feel a gentle tap on your shoulder. Turning, you see Yuta standing there, he seems to take in a breath before speaking.

“The Guardians of the Royal Tomb are going to be destroyed after this… If we want Jaemin to return, this is our only chance of getting him back.”

Eyes widening at what he says, he’s right. If the Hwarang mean to kill the Guardians, that includes Na Jaemin.

Sucking in a breath, you look to Kun, “Commander? What are we going to do about Jaemin? He’s a part of the Guardians…”

“Don’t be silly,” Yukhei says easily, “Of course we’ll save hi—”

“If he fights us, he dies.” Kun interrupts, cutting off the captain.

“You can’t mean that—” Heart beginning to pound in your chest, your mind going blank. Is Kun serious? “You’ve known Jaemin for so long, surely you don’t mean that?”

Kun looks as if he wants to push you away, turning on his heels and exiting the main hall swiftly.

“You’re actually going to order them to kill Jaemin?!” You cry out after him, finding yourself following his footsteps, “Just because he left the Hwarang means you don’t care if he lives or dies?!” Before you’re actually able to leave the main hall, a hand grabs the back of your robes and pulls you into the room.

“I know that he wants to save him too,” Taeil’s voice says softly as you turn to face him, his hand letting go of your clothes. “There’s no way he could possibly live with giving the command to kill a friend who was part of our family for years.” His hands clench at his side, so much so his knuckles turn white and you fear his nails have pierced his skin.

In this moment you realize how much each of the Hwarang are suffering with this.

“I’m sorry for saying that,” you bow your head to him after your realization.

“There’s no need,” Taeil sighs, “You’re angry. We all are. It makes me happy though, I’m glad people care about Jaemin.” He lets out a heaving sigh before turning toward Jaehyun and Yukhei, “I’m not asking this as your Leader, but as Moon Taeil… Let Jaemin live, if you can. Try and convince him to rejoin the Hwarang.”

“… Got it,” Yukhei says quickly as Jaehyun takes a moment more to think.

“His life in our hands?” He shakes his head, “That’s a big responsibility.”

“I trust everything’s clear, then?” Taeil asks, scanning the faces of the captains, “If you have questions, now is the best time to ask.”

“…Wait,” you speak up, unable to stop yourself. The leader looks to you as you brace yourself, “I haven’t been given any orders. I want to help.”

“This is an… unseemly job.” Taeil looks at you, brow contorted, “Nothing like Wonweol or Ongsan. You shouldn’t be involved.”

He’s right. This isn’t a mandated order from a higher official, this was the Hwarang’s business alone, a covert and self-righteous one at that. They aren’t meant to guard or patrol; they’re set on murder.

“… I understand.” You speak. Would you be of any use in that scenario? Would you see your former allies die before you? The more you think about it, the more you can’t stand the thought of going along.

After seeing the men off, you stand in the courtyard, eyes watching the blue moon. Your mind worried with thoughts of Jaemin and the others, you find yourself about to turn back inside before you hear footsteps running towards you.

“Minhyung?” You ask as you turn to look at the newcomer.

“What are you doing out here?” He shakes his head, “Never mind that, we don’t have time. I need to get everyone into the main hall. Can you help me round them all up?”

The main hall is noisy, even though most of the Hwarang are elsewhere.

“Yongqin is resting, so I decided to leave him be. Is that alright?” Jisung asks.

“That’s fine,” he says, noticing that some faces are missing, “I can’t wait any longer, we’ll have to start without them.”

“Has something happened?” You ask, having never seen Minhyung this impatient before.

“Did Gongmyung’s assassination not go as planned?” Jisung questions.

“No, it was a success.” He shakes his head, “We were able to lure the Guard and surround them.”

So, few words to mark the death of a man. But Minhyung presses forward, “Unfortunately, we were interrupted by a third party just as we were about to deal with the Guard.”

“Is everyone alright?!” You ask quickly.

“Our men are outnumbered, but we have the upper hand in skill. Still, I’m unsure how long they’ll be able to hold off such an overwhelming force…”

“Then we need to send reinforcements,” Jisung says, “Shotaro and I can go—” Just as he moves to leave, an explosion of noise bursts from outside. Shocked glances are exchanged before Osaki Shotaro bursts through the door, distress plain on his face.

“We’re under attack!” He shouts, “It’s a demon!”

“What? Why now?” You question as Jisung frowns.

“I doubt this is a coincidence.” His hand grips the hilt of his blade, “Is it just a single demon? Two? Three?”

“Just one,” Shotaro confirms, “The one with yellow robes.”

“Yellow…” Minhyung mutters, “It must be Donghyuck.”

The three of you run outside, coming to a sudden halt by the scene lain out before you. There are bodies everywhere, the air thick with the copper tinge of blood. The scent is so strong that one need not be a Fury to be driven mad by it.

“These are men from the Fury Corps… Did he kill them all?” Minhyung muses, looking to the dead men. “If this is the Fury Corps, then Taeyong must be nearby as well.”

“He’s over there,” Shotaro points.

The two men, Taeyong and Donghyuck, seem to be at the tail end of a duel. It’s obvious that Taeyong’s struggling by the way his blade sags in his hands after the two parts from their spar.

“This is all a pretender could do,” Donghyuck grins, “Pathetic imitation. Die like the dog you are!”

A Fury who’d been combatting alongside Taeyong falls to the ground with a groan.

“Damn you!” Taeyong shouts out.

“You’re better than this filth,” the Demon quips, “But you’re still nothing more than a pale reflection of true power.”

Of all the Furies, Taeyong is the only one who can even begin to stand before Donghyuck’s onslaught… But even he’s no match for him.

Donghyuck kicks out almost casually at a charging Fury, throwing him across the yard, and continues his slow walk forward.

“Stay back,” Jisung says to you, “We’ll take care of him.”

“But—”

“He’s dangerous, but he isn’t the only enemy here. You never know when his comrades could show up. Besides, the Furies could go rogue at any moment and there’s a high chance they could threaten us.”

The two eventually nod at one another and run off, swords in hand.

“Please stay inside,” Shotaro says, “We’ll go after him.”

Now he runs off to back up the other two. You’re unsure of why Donghyuck chose this time to attack.

“I’ll find Yuta!” You call out to him, racing off into the compound. If Jisung and the others are here, and Yongqin is bedridden, there may be one more man unaccounted for who might be able to help.

You only run some distance before you collide with someone.

“Yuta!” You cry out, only realizing once you step away that it’s a Fury. “No—you’re—” His eyes are red, mad with bloodlust.

Scrambling back, you hear a voice call out to you, “Get out of the way!”

Stepping to the side, you nearly miss the blade that slashes out, cutting down the Fury where it stands. As you turn to look at Yuta, it occurs to you how ironic it is to have been saved by the man you’d gone out to find.

“They’ve lost control, then?” He looks to the fallen Fury, his mouth a thin line. “Unfortunate.”

“Donghyuck’s here! Jisung’s fighting him with some of the other men, but…” You begin before Yuta shakes his head at you, understanding the situation.

“Where are they?”

“O- Outside,” you say, meaning to lead him there but find that your legs are too shaky to move.

“Don’t worry,” Yuta says with a small smile, “So long as I have orders to protect you, I will. Regardless of circumstance.”

The Hwarang is a man of few words, yet when he does speak it’s never unnecessarily. But now he’d taken the time to comfort you.

“…Thank you.”

“There’s no time,” he urges, “We must go.”

When you return to the battle, you find that Donghyuck is still engaged.

“Stay in position, Osaki!” Minhyung shouts out, “If even one of us is killed, the formation is ruined!” Sweat shines on their brows in the moonlight, their chests heave as each of them struggle for breath.

Donghyuck looks almost completely unfazed. He’s killed countless Furies, fought the stand-still and not suffered a single scratch.

“You brought Yuta,” Jisung almost sighs in relief, “Good.”

“If anyone is hurt, tell them to pull back,” Yuta orders, “I’ll handle this.”

“Interesting,” Donghyuck smirks, “These weaklings were beginning to bore me, but now that you’re here, it’s time to play.”

“Yes, I am.” Yuta’s eyes scry the ground for a moment, “I’ve come to check your rampage… Or at least to try.” His body lowers into a crouch and he reaches for his sword.

Instead of entering a stance of his own, Donghyuck looks at Yuta for a moment, then sheathes his own sword and slowly backs away.

“You’re running?” The Hwarang questions.

“Unfortunately, I’m here today only to buy time for another,” Donghyuck sighs, “I’m not here on personal business, and I never intended to stay long.” His gaze slides to you, motioning to the dead on the ground, “Remember that this is the fate of a false Demon. Blood drives them to madness, and for what? Even en masse they cannot defeat a true Demon. Do you really wish to live surrounded by such filth?”

“I won’t go with you,” you say angrily, but all he does is flash you a grin before melting into the darkness.

“Are you okay?” Yuta asks as he sheathes his blade and walks over to you.

“Yes,” you nod, “Thank you…”

You once again cannot shake Donghyuck’s words. As you look across the brutally slain remains of the Furies, you can feel your stomach drop.

“Some of the Furies got past and into the compound,” Minhyung reports, “They were killed almost immediately, though.”

“By who?” Yuta questions, “There’s no one inside that could’ve done that.”

“By… Yongqin.” Minhyung says, “When I went to his room, the floor was covered in dead Furies.”

“But isn’t he too sick to fight?” You question.

“That’s why we need to get Doctor Namekawa immediately.” He says and you quickly make your way to him.

“Then I’m coming with you!”

The assassination of Kim Gongmyung and the dissolvement of the Guardians of the Royal Tomb comes to be known as the Samsil Incident. Both the Guardians and the Hwarang were surprised by the sudden appearance of the Royal Guard and the Demons who accompanied them. Both parties had fallen for the trap and the fight was thrown into a mass disarray.

As the battle of Samsil was taking place, the headquarters of the Hwarang came under attack from Lee Donghyuck. Causing the already ill Yongqin to further injure himself fending off the rogue Furies.

The serum that your father brought to the Hwarang seems to only be a cause for worry. Slowly devouring the organization piece by piece. How long until the serum swallows them whole?

December 2nd, 664 – Shoji Temple, Kingdom of Silla It’s been barely a month since Gongmyung’s murder, since the Samsil Incident and the return of Jaemin and Yuta, but the Hwarang feels nothing like it once was. A looming, dark atmosphere hangs over the headquarters. Many men had lost their lives or had been injured due to Donghyuck’s attack, even more had been wounded in the fight of Samsil, Jaemin being one of them. Several of the wang-do had seen him almost succumb to the injuries he’d sustained during the battle, due to this, he was pronounced dead but joined the Fury Corps shortly after. Yuta hadn’t been wounded, but many of the Hwarang began to call him a coward.

To them, his betrayal of leaving the Hwarang still runs deep, worsened as they saw him leaving the Guardians to change his fate. You see no reason why he shouldn’t correct them: he’d left to help the Hwarang, not deceive them. He claims that he’ll keep quiet on the matter, as to not tarnish both Taeil and Kun’s names, who had ordered him to join Gongmyung. Due to this, it has been decided that Yuta will leave Shoji for the time being, until the hot-headed tempers of some of the Hwarang recede. He’s been sent to protect Huang Renjun, a Tang noble residing in the northern part of the kingdom.

The Samsil Incident was in no small terms a turning point for the Hwarang. For the men who knew only the surface level details, it seems as if it were just a battle between the Hwarang and their former comrades. Those better informed know that it is the causation due to a culminating fear of another Baekje rebellion. Suh Youngho’s death solidified that as truth. And further still: the Hwarang are the only ones who know of the Demons, and Jaemin’s transformation into a Fury. They’re the only ones who know Yongqin’s illness has gotten worse.

Such an event riled the compound, a moment of silence scarce in the days following the battle. Feeling as you would only be in the way during this time, you keep to your room.

You’re sitting cross-legged at your desk, wondering if writing your thoughts down may help you try and conceptualize this all, when your door opens without a knock.

“Thank goodness you’re here,” Taeyong says as he steps into your room. “If you’d left, I wouldn’t have been able to search for you.”

“Taeyong?” You look up to him, confused at his appearance. “It’s daytime, are you okay?”

“Yes, yes,” Taeyong nods his head, his voice sounding a little frantic. “I just had a revelation and had to share it with you immediately.” His eyes glitter with… a dangerous curiosity and you feel spindly cold fingers of dread scratch down your back.

“Why me?” Questioning carefully, “Wouldn’t you want to tell the Chief or Commander first?”

“…Well, it has to be you.” A small frown pulling at his lips, “Won’t you listen to me?” Although in the form of a question, the way he asserts himself lets you know you have no choice. “Sooyoung claimed you are from a Demon family, right?” He doesn’t allow you to respond before he begins to speak. “And as a Demon, you’re stronger, faster and more resilient than a human. Their superiority over humans was clearly displayed during their most recent attack.”

“I understand that,” you nod slowly, “But what are you trying to say?”

“A Demon possesses more power than the average human, it follows that the blood of a Demon possesses that power as well,” His deductions begin to unsettle you, despite that, he continues, “Perhaps even potent enough to counteract the madness of the Furies.”

You’re unsure how the pimul works, but Taeyong’s explanation seems logical, even if he’s somewhat frenetic about it.

“Since before I became a Fury, I’ve been researching on how the serum works, I know more about it than anyone here.” Taeyong pauses and shakes his head, “Yet, I still have yet to discover the exact composition of it. I hypothesize, however, that a core ingredient is fresh blood… And I’m assuming not from a human. Perhaps there are Demons or Demon-like beings roaming throughout the other kingdoms.”

“So…” You trail off, still not able to follow him completely.

Taeyong takes a step closer to you, falling to his knees as you continue to sit at your desk, “Your very existence could save the Fury Corps… No,” He shakes his head, “The entirety of the Hwarang.” His eyes turn sharp, piercing, even, as he looks at you. The barest trace of mania in his voice as he confesses his thoughts. His hand reaches for the sword at his hip, calmly and carefully drawing it from the scabbard.

There seems to be no madness or bloodlust in his movements, but that only serves to terrify you even more.

“I’m not going to kill you,” He tries to reassure you, but your heart’s beating too quickly and your limbs feel too heavy to move away from him, “I just want a sample of your blood…” Taeyong begins to rise to his feet, that’s when you find yourself mirroring him, taking a step or two backwards to distance yourself from him.

The blade glimmers in the sunlight as he raises it, raising it towards you before you hear a shout from the hallway.

“Taeyong what the hell are you doing?!” Kun bursts into the room, quickly looking from the colonel to you as if to gauge the situation. “What’s going on here? Of all people, you should know not to draw your sword on someone in the compound, have you lost it?”

“Kun,” Taeyong smiles when he sees him, “Please, give me a hand here. Convince her to cooperate with us.”

With an assertive quiet, Kun steps between you and Taeyong. “Personal conflicts are forbidden, the O Gye apply to even us captains.”

The colonel stares at Kun for a moment, and then another before begrudgingly sheathing his sword.

“Did she do something to upset you?” Kun asks one it seems as if Taeyong’s cooled down.

“I’m searching for a way to treat the madness caused by becoming a Fury, for the good of us all,” Taeyong says simply, his hand still resting on the hilt of his sword.

“And that means you have to cut her?”

“It’s not like I’m going to kill her,” Taeyong frowns and shakes his head, “I only need a little of her blood. We lost so many Furies during the attacks, many of our human wang-do as well. If we are to effectively use the men we have left— We need to find a way to temper their madness. Surely you understand this, Kun.”

“The code says we’re to trust one another,” His gaze hardens at the colonel, “It doesn’t look like she’s very trusting of you right now. No matter your reasoning, I cannot condone this if either party is unwilling, or coerced into submitting.”

“It’s not as if she’s one of the Hwarang,” Taeyong points out.

“Maybe not, but she’s been here long enough to might as well be one.” The two continue to stare at each other for a while, their stubbornness present at the matter.

Taeyong eventually sighs, “It isn’t like you to be this soft. I’ll leave for now. But if we don’t find a way to suppress the side effects of the pimul… Even Jaemin will suffer like the rest.” He leaves on that note, you don’t exhale until you hear his footsteps wane away into nothing.

Kun hums, looking at the door and then turning to you, “Are you okay?”

“Oh, yes,” You nod, “Thank you…”

“Nothing to thank me for,” He bows his head, “I was making sure he was adhering to our code.” His gaze returns to the door, “In the past, he wouldn’t have challenged me like that.”

A slow nod as your eyes finds the door, lingering there for a moment. It’s true, Taeyong had been acting more and more strange lately. He would never have drawn his sword aggressively, or demanded things from you without consulting the other Hwarang first. “… I’m sorry.”

“Is something wrong with you?” Kun questions, his attention turning rapt to you, “There isn’t anything to be apologetic for.”

“The reason he was acting like that…” You frown, “Because Donghyuck destroyed the Fury Corps.”

Kun seems to reflect on this for a moment before responding, “I think you’re confused.”

“Lee Donghyuck has allied himself with our enemies, be it in the court or Baekje. If an enemy attacks us, it’s known that we’re going to put our lives on the line to stop them.” There’s conviction in his voice yet you cannot help the guilt that invades you.

“It isn’t your sole duty to protect me, though.”

“What are you trying to say?” His arms cross as he tilts his head, “Want us to hand you over to the Demons in the hopes they’ll spare our lives? Just because they’re more powerful than us? That isn’t how we work.” Kun’s confident in his claim, and you feel no way to object to it. Even if he won’t say it, having you leave the compound would make their live exponentially less dangerous, it would be a violation of the values they pride themselves in upholding.

“I’m sorry if what I said was out of line,” apologizing once more, you bow your head.

“I already told you to stop apologizing, don’t make me repeat myself,” He murmurs under his breath, timidly looking in your direction. “The next time something like this happens, tell me. Don’t keep it to yourself.”

“I understand,” you look to him and nod. Kun then turns to leave, but there’s one thing left you have to say. “Commander…”

He stops and looks back to you, “Is there something else?”

“…Nothing.” You shake your head, “I’m sorry for stopping you.”

As much as you want to be helpful around the compound, you know that you can’t. Your very existence here puts them in more danger than they ought to be in. Perhaps it’s best if you lay low.

December 11th, 664 – Jeong Seokmin’s Residence, Kingdom of Silla Baekje is trying to restore itself once more. News from Goguryeo solidifies King Munmu’s fears a few days into December, after a skirmish breaks out on the Silla-Goguryeo front. At first it was thought to be Goguryeo troops, but with Buyeo Pung leading the charge himself, it’s quickly realized that the kingdom is once again trying to establish itself.

More and more soldiers begin to flock to Seorabeol in anticipation of the oncoming onslaught, purges of Baekje loyalists once again resume and a tension lies in the air as if a cord is about to snap and set everything loose. With each passing day, news comes from the north of the collecting armies, as well as from the east, where former Baekje citizens have begun to rebel against the Silla leadership. As the Crown draws in its allies, seeking out aid from Tang once more, they call upon the Hwarang to aid in the upcoming battle.

The Hwarang reside at Jeong Seokmin’s residence, Jaehyun’s father’s home a little way outside of the city. While his father remains locked in the capital as plans are drawn, the residence is being used as a base of operations for the Hwarang, and not just those from Seorabeol.

“Everyone!” A voice shouts from the outer courtyard of the home, a wang-do bursting into the main room, sweat dotting their brow and his eyes looking frantic. “The Chief’s been shot!”

There were no witnessed, and the culprit escaped unnoticed. The motives unsure.

“What the hell?” Yukhei frowns, “What asshole uses a bow in the city?” The captain leaves the residence shortly after collecting a group of men to survey the scene of where Taeil had been attacked.

The arrow pierced the leader’s right shoulder, the head lodging into bone and shattering it. It requires more treatment than you can provide.

The sun had gone down when the door to the main room opens again, Taeyong striding in the room, looking surprised to see you. “You’re still awake?”

“Colonel Lee…” You note, “If you need to use this room I’ll leave.”

“I don’t mind,” he shakes his head, “Rather, I think it’s best that you stay here.” His words confusing, anxiousness rising in your stomach as you recall the last time you’d been alone with him.

Just as he finishes speaking, the captains of the Hwarang file into the room, somber expressions dotting their faces. Your anxiousness only continues to heighten.

“… Looks like everyone’s here,” Kun muses as the door is closed to allow you all a bit of privacy.

“Where’s Yongqin?” Taeyong asks, scanning the faces for the missing captain.

“He shouldn’t hear this,” Kun shakes his head, “If he learns about Moon, he wouldn’t think twice about his safety and run off to find vengeance.”

“But if that’s what he wants, why wouldn’t you let him?” Taeyong points out, “Again, being too kind, Kun.”

“What did you want from us?” Jaehyun’s voice rises, directed towards the colonel. “We don’t know when the fighting’s going to start, for all of us to be here right now… Don’t tell me—”

“It’s exactly that.” Taeyong nods. “I asked you to come with the intention of giving you something.” In his hands, you now see, is a bundle of cloth that he slowly unwraps before you all. What you see makes you take in a sharp breath of air.

“Pimul?” Yuta frowns, eyeing the vials of red liquid in the colonel’s hands.

“As captains of the Hwarang, we took on the risks of researching this,” a slow nod, “In doing so, it’s necessary for us to take responsibility for this experiment. Especially if any of you become injured and unable to fight. Or in the worst case, there’s a possibility that you may lose your own life.” Moving the vials to one hand, he picks up one in his other and examines it in the lanternlight of the room, “I know for certain that this serum will be of use to you.”

“Colonel…” Yukhei says slowly, “Are you trying to experiment on us too?”

“I know your hesitation,” Taeyong snips, dropping the vial back into the pile with an audible clink, “But under our current circumstances, we cannot afford to lose any more of our captains.”

“Fuck that,” Yukhei frowns, “I don’t want to depend on that shit to survive.” With that, he storms past the group of captains with heavy footfalls, swinging open the door before leaving.

“Maybe this would be something of a good luck charm…” Jisung suggests, his eyes warily looking over the vials. “I hope it never comes to the point where we use the serum.” Taeyong extends the pile to the captains.

“I don’t think I’ll use it,” Jaehyun murmurs as both he and Yuta pick up a vial, “but I’ll keep it just in case…”

Until this moment, Kun had remained silent, listening to Taeyong’s speech.

“Take responsibility, huh?” Eyes looking troubled, the commander reaches for a vial and pockets it, almost as if he doesn’t want to acknowledge its presence, “Maybe you’re onto something.”

“I believe that’s all I have to say for tonight.” Taeyong nods as he folds the now empty cloth, “I hope this courtesy doesn’t go to waste.” After he finishes, the captains slowly file out, leaving you alone with Taeyong once more.

“I’m sure you’re aware of this,” He sighs and looks to you, “But don’t let any word of this reach the other Hwarang, do I make myself clear?”

Nodding your head timidly, the colonel stays for another moment before leaving.

The serum that your father created now lies in the hands of the Hwarang captains. The serum that had entrenched them into the world of Demons and a life they should never have had to think about.

December 16th, 664 – Jeong Seokmin’s Residence, Kingdom of Silla “We still haven’t figured out who shot the Chief?”

“I bet you anything it was some of those Guardian bastards!”

“No way, it was probably the Baekje loyalists—”

Ever since the attack on Moon Taeil, the atmosphere at Jeong Seokmin’s residence had been wrought with speculation and tension. This tension ever more present as you step into the main room with a tray of tea for the captains.

“Thanks,” Jaehyun says as you enter, “Can you just leave it here?”

A nod as you set down the tray, it seems as if you’d walked in on an important discussion.

“What’s the plan, then?” Yukhei questions whomever he’d been speaking to. “Gaozong wants power in exchange for helping us, but they’re also hoping not to get as involved as they were at Baekgang. They know a war’s coming and they’re trying to extort Munmu for all he’s worth.”

“I’m not saying that you’re wrong,” Kun sighs out from the head of the table. “There’s nothing you or I could do about that though. We follow the Crown and not Gaozong.”

“In regard to sending our men to the front line…” Shotaro speaks up, “Colonel Lee’s been pushing to implement the Furies.”

“I disagree with that,” Jaehyun frowns, “This is war, not a massacre. There’s going to be both enemies and allies on the field, we won’t be able to control them. It’s not that they’re not powerful, it’s just too risky.”

“Agreed,” Yukhei nods, crossing his arms as he leans back in his seat, “And inhumane too.”

“Then what do you suggest?” Yuta questions, looking to the captain. “If you’re so vehemently against it, you should offer an alternative.”

“We’re working on that.” Yukhei grumbles, his voice raising, “If it were so easy do you think we’d be in this mess?”

“Commander,” Shotaro looks to Kun, “What do you think?”

“… Let me think.” A deep exhale from Kun as he straightens himself in his seat, “We need to know the movements of Baekje before anything else, as well as prioritize what the Crown wants and, inadvertently, what Tang wants as well.” With the war inching closer and Taeil’s injury, everyone in the Hwarang had been and is still on edge.

You leave the meeting sometime after then, never finding out what solution the men had come to. Later in the day, as the sunk sinks over the horizon, you find yourself at Yongqin’s door, anxious to check on his condition.

“Captain Li?” You ask, gently opening the door and stepping inside, “How are you—huh?” Upon entering, you find that Jaemin had come along to keep the captain company as well.

“What are you doing up so late?” Jaemin asks as he looks to you.

“What do you mean?”

“Well, um… people may get the wrong idea if a girl visits a man’s room at night…” The young captain trails off, obviously flustered.

“You know that Yongqin and I aren’t…”

Jaemin laughs, “Yeah, yeah… That’s not really your kind of thing, is it?”

“What do you mean?”

“What do you mean ‘what do you mean?’?” Jaemin snickers, “Come on…”

“Why are you here?” Yongqin, not seeming to be in a playful mood, cuts into the conversation, “I assume you have a reason for visiting me?”

“Oh, yes, well… I came to check up on you.” Returning to the reason you’d come in the first place, you look to the captain, “Are you feeling okay? Is there anything I can get you?”

“Of course not,” his expression bitter, “Look at what’s going on.” After a moment of silence, he speaks to you, “Is that all? You can go now.” His aggression taking you by surprise, you falter for another moment before coming to your senses to bring up what had been bothering you.

“Do you all know?” Another pause, “That Colonel Lee wants to… use the Furies.”

“Of course…” The grin that was adorning Jaemin’s face drops.

“If you were him,” Yongqin sighs, “Wouldn’t you want to do the same? They need numbers or they’ll never make a name for themselves. I mean, it’s a given once they can’t function anymore, they’ll need to be cut off.”

“Cut off…”

“We’re not all good-doers,” the captain shakes his head, “we can’t go around giving food to everyone we see who needs it. I mean, yeah, you mooched off of us for years, but that was entirely your good luck. Don’t forget that.”

“I guess you have a point…”

“Yongqin you’re being a bit of a jackass,” Jaemin frowns at the other captain. “It was our fault she was brought to the Hwarang.”

Yongqin sneers at the statement, clearly unmoved, he continues his grievances. “And what the hell is Kun doing? He should be kicking himself in the ass for not apprehending the men that hurt Moon.” A frustrated sigh, “If I weren’t—If I weren’t like this, I’d go out and do it myself.”

His bedrest is clearly getting to him. He’d known Taeil, long before either of them had joined the Hwarang.

“What do you think, Jaemin?” A glance towards the other as you ask.

“Me? I, uhm, well…” He hums, “I did drink the serum but… I was worried about what would happen to me. Taeyong wants more men in the Fury Corps, says we’ll never win otherwise. But I don’t like the idea of forcing the Hwarang to join us, even if they’ve broken our code.” The demeanor he has is unlike the one you remember from when you’d first met him, it’s cold and stern. Recalling how he used to be, a sadness overcomes you.

“No matter what Taeyong says, it’s Kun that makes the call.” Yongqin says, crossing his arms.

“You’re right.” Jaemin says, a frown pulling at him, “But the Corps already exists, it’s not like we can pretend it doesn’t.”

“Then maybe we should use them, then.” Yongqin mumbles, “They can hold a sword, at least.”

The power of the Furies is something that would ultimately be beneficial to the Hwarang, should they need to utilize their power for the war effort. Yet, once the war was over… You struggle to think of what would be done with them after. Fearing the answer, you don��t press the matter further.

January 3rd, 665 – Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla Just before the year ends, it’s decided that Yongqin’s condition had worsened and he’d contracted both what your father had once called phthisis. The disease isn’t uncommon, but it is uncurable. You’d had suspicions that he had contracted phthisis when he’d first begun to lose strength, but never wanted to admit to such a devastating thing. The entirety of the Hwarang is shaken by the news.

It’s decided that he and Taeil are to be sent to Daegaya, where Namekawa Yasuo can look over them as they receive treatment.

Despite them leaving, Seorabeol is still on high alert. The Hwarang remain on standby at Jeong Seokmin’s residence as the year begins to shift to the next. Your hope that the thoughts of war would wane fades lasts only three days into the new year.

“So, we’re moving soldiers to prepare for battle?” You ask as Yukhei and Jaehyun walk outside of the residence, towards the improvised training site.

“Nah,” Jaehyun shakes his head, “I think they’re just trying to scare off Baekje with all of the soldiers at their disposal. Best case scenario is that they get too freaked out by all of our men so they run away with their tails tucked before we even see them.”

“With common sense, they’d already be leaving,” Yukhei adds, “We outnumber their men by a pretty big margin.”

“That sounds great and all, but we’re dealing with some stubborn fuckers,” Kun shakes his head as he joins you, Yuta following close behind.

“It’s simple math though, isn’t it?” Yukhei frowns.

“Did you forget Ongsan?” Yuta sighs.

“We won that, though.”

“Barely.” Yuta shakes his head and crosses his arms, “If they have already put forth this much effort, I’m certain that they’re prepared for our men.”

“Yeah, yeah, I’ll start preparing for the worst then,” Yukhei says bitterly, it looks like Yuta’s words have gotten to him.

January 5th, 665 – Jeong Seokmin’s Residence, Kingdom of Silla The Hwarang remain on standby at Jeong Seokmin’s residence as the year begin the shift to the next. Your hope that the thoughts of war would wane fades only five days into the new year.

A coalition of soldiers claiming to be from Baekje invaded a town on the western front of where the Baekje-Silla border once was. Violence broke out and suddenly, the war had begun. Groups of these revivalists began to spring up in the kingdom as well, the closest having come to try and instigate fights with the Hwarang on the outside of the city.

You find yourself caring to the wounded Hwarang along with Lee Jeno, him running errands for you as you tend to those who require the most attention. Most of the men you tend to aren’t suffering from life-threatening injuries, it’s one small thing you can take solace in.

The fighting had begun on the third, and now on the fifth, it doesn’t seem to relent at all. You hear disparaging news every day and it only worsens when Kun walks into the common room one evening.

“We’re leaving.” Kun announces abruptly, “We’ll reconvene in Daegaya and use that as our new base of operation. Yuta, gather the injured. Jaehyun, Yukhei—round up everyone who can still move and secure an escape route. Jisung?”

“Yes?” The younger responds.

“Get rid of any unnecessary weapons that we can’t take with us.”

“Consider it done.”

Everyone nods once the orders are received, and Kun looks to leave the room quickly.

“Commander?” You call out.

“What?” He asks, “Is there something else?”

“Um, who should I go with?”

“…Right…” He sighs, “Jisung, take her with you, will you?”

“Very well,” Jisung nods and looks to you, “Let’s go now.”

January 6th, 665 – Outside the Southern Entrance of Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla Your feet slap the road as you race down the wooded path only pausing to catch your breath as your partner stops beside you.

“Are you alright?” Jisung asks, sounding almost as out of breath as you, “We can stop if we need to.”

“We can’t afford to do that,” you shake your head at him, gently pressing your hand to the fabric of the knapsack on your back to ensure that the documents are still there “I’ll be alright.” Wiping the sweat from your brow, you take a deep breath and urge your aching feet to move once more.

“As the sun sets, it’ll be harder for us to be seen in the dark,” Jisung notes, looking up to the amber sky. The sound of rustling leaves in the forest disturbs the two of you as you walk, the captain takes a hold of your wrist and pulls you into the nearby shrubbery as a pair of footsteps begins to tread on the path.

“You!” An unfamiliar voice shouts, “Come out!”

Seeing no other alternative, Jisung and you leave your hidden path, your hand on your blade as you step out in front of a group of soldiers. You sigh in relief upon the sight of them, as their uniforms don’t seem to be from either Goguryeo or Baekje. However, they do seem to be regarding the two of you with suspicion.

“Sorry about that… We’re from the Hwarang.” You say and the main soldier cocks his head to the side.

“The Hwarang?”

“Yes, we’re on our way to Daegaya—” You begin but a hand on your forearm causes you to stop speaking.

“Wait…” Jisung says cautiously.

Before you can question him, the soldier shouts out to the troop, “We’ve got some enemies from the Hwarang!”

“What—” the air ripped from your lungs as Jisung’s grip tightens as he pulls you from the path, racing into the brush to try and get away from your newfound enemies.

“What’s going on, aren’t they on our side?!” You ask, out of breath as you continue to run, stumble and trip in the foliage.

“It…” Jisung says as you come upon an open clearing, pausing to catch his breath, “It might be more accurate to say were.”

Perhaps sensing that maybe Silla could lose, some men had decided to betray the kingdom…

“Stay behind me,” Jisung murmurs as several of the pursuing soldiers begin to climb their way out of the brush. His voice curt, your attention is drawn from the soldiers momentarily as Jisung reaches for something in his pocket.

“Is that—” You don’t say the word as you answer yourself when the tiny vial of red liquid is produced from his pocket.

“It will be necessary if I hope to protect you from them,” he says. Before he’s able to take the lid off, the whistle of an arrow through the air halts conversation. Jisung lets out a strangled grunt as a dull thunk resounds and he falls to his knees. The vial falls from his grasp, shattering on the forest floor.

“Jisung!” You cry out, falling to your knees next to him as his hands lay wrapped around the arrow that had sunk into his chest. Blood blossoms from the wound, you know that you don’t have the tools out here to save him but if you could just get to Daegaya— “Hang in there!”

“Leave me,” cognizant enough to pull himself from his grim realization, Jisung ushers you to stand, “Save yourself!” He falls to his side then his hand still grasping the arrow embedded within him, your heart drops to your stomach as you realize that he isn’t long for the world.

You rise to your feet, angrily looking towards the men who’d effectively just killed your friend. Grasping the blade by your side, you unsheathe it, ready to fight the soldiers.

“You betrayed the Kingdom, didn’t you?”

“We decide where out allegiances lie,” one of the soldiers spits out.

“You vowed to protect the kingdom and yet you run at the first sign of trouble. Aren’t you at all ashamed to call yourself a soldier?” For someone like yourself, who’d witnessed first-hand from the Hwarang what honor really means… These warriors had committed and unforgivable sin. Honor isn’t something they think highly of.

Then, you notice several of their archers pointing their bows in your direction. In an instant, a shooting pain skins across your arm. One of their arrows had slashed a gnarly cut near your shoulder, causing a bolt of white-hot pain to sear through you. However, the Demon blood within you heals that wound, sealing close the cut within seconds.

Another arrow embeds itself into your side, and while staggering, you don’t fall to your knees. Instead, with shaky hands, you pull it from your side and it too closes momentarily.

“What the hell— they hit her, she should be dying right now,” One of the soldiers closer to you says, taken aback. “Is that a monster?!”

Hearing them call you a monster makes your heart hurt, you grimace at them as you speak, “I’m not a human, but it’s you who are the monsters. Turning your backs on your allies… That’s more monstrous than I’ll ever be!”

“Kill it!” They seem immune to your words, panicked frenzy overtaking them as the archers move to notch more arrows. “Shoot at it until it’s dead!”

Yet another wave of arrows soars at you, some striking, a majority missing. You pull those that hit your leg, stomach and shoulder out, feeling the flesh torn by the blows slowly healing itself. Your body feels weary.

“You despicable pieces of shit.” A voice says, calmly, but loud enough to be heard from across the clearing. “Abandoning the Kingdom is one thing, but attempting to harm such a noble Demon with your disgusting, clumsy weapons…” Just then, you feel an arm wrap around you and pull you to your feet.

The soldiers’ eyes go wide at the sight of the man pulling you to his chest, his free hand holding his sword lashing out and slaying the two closest soldiers to you.

“Donghyuck…?” The serious blood loss causes your vision to blur, however, you can recognize his tone anywhere.

“…Save your strength,” he says quietly, “You may be a Demon, but you took a battering back there. It’ll be a moment before you fully heal.” Compared to the handful of other times you had met him; his words now are gentle and comforting.

This man, who time and time again took pleasure out of attacking the Hwarang… Why is he helping you?

The archers watch him carefully, close to being ready to launch another volley of arrows at the two of you.

“Who the hell are you?!” Their leader cries out, “Are you with that monster?!”

“So, what if I am?” Donghyuck questions, his tone flat.

“Then we’ll kill you!” The soldier says, “My men and I will shoot you to death!”

“Shoot me? To death?” You feel his chest move as he huffs out several short puffs of air, “Don’t make me laugh. I didn’t think it was possible to meet someone so unbelievably pathetic and ludicrous.”

He laughs now, not jovially, but almost taunting to the soldiers standing opposite to him. A sigh leaves him as he lets go of you, letting you step behind him as he faces the archers.

“This will only take a moment,” he murmurs to you softly, only then to turn to face the now even more panicked warriors. “Let’s make this quick, shall we?” With a fluid motion, he holds up his sword, “If you want to attack me, you’d better give it your all. It’ll be the last thing you ever do.”

All of the archers aimed their bows to shoot-- and then Donghyuck vanishes like smoke before your very eyes. It’s only seconds later when you hear the sounds of flesh being sliced apart.

“You’re a monster too?!” One of the soldiers screams out. The hiss of arrows leaving notches dances along with the sound of slaughtered men in the encroaching nighttime. Yet, Donghyuck dodges each arrow with ease, killing the men easily with quick slashes.

There’s an elegance to the way Donghyuck moves, and as horrific as his actions are, you’re entranced by it all.

“Slaughtering you bastards is child’s play,” Donghyuck frowns as the last man falls. He flicks his sword, ridding it of most of the viscera attached to it, before sheathing the weapon, “You’re not worth my time.”

“Are you feeling any better?” He asks as he walks back over to you, “You should have healed enough to walk by now…”

You nod, now able to stand without limping, “But… why did you help me?”

Donghyuck doesn’t have time to speak before the sound of rustling in the underbrush pulls both of your attention to a shadowy figure emerging from the woods.

“Oh,” They say, sounding relieved, “I’m so glad you’re alive. I was so worried that those stupid humans would have tried to kill you.”

“Huh…?” Who is this person? They aren’t dressed for any particular side in the conflict, and you can’t put a voice to a name.

“Ah,” They seem to tune in to your confusion, “Are you having trouble recognizing me because I’m dressed like this—? We met before, in the city.”

“Oh!” You say, now looking closely at their features, the mirror somewhat coming into place, “Hak Ahro?”

“You do remember me,” a smile graces their lips, “That makes me very happy.”

“You look… different than what I remember though.”

“I can explain,” they say, gaze travelling off to the tree line, “but when we first met, I couldn’t really tell you that I was actually a man.”

“The Hak clan of Mahan.” Donghyuck’s brow raises, “So, you must be one of the Demons from the west.”

“I am,” he nods, “I have you to thank, Lee Donghyuck. Thank you for protecting my sister from those wretched humans.”

“Sister…?” You can’t help but wonder aloud, not sure what’s even happening.

“There’s someone I’d like you to meet,” Ahro smiles as another figure exits the forest.

You squint to get a better look, when they come into view your mouth opens and you yell out, “Father!”

“It’s been some time,” he says softly, “How have you been, my child?” For a moment it feels as if you’re back home, yet if you were unaware of all that he has been accused of by the Hwarang, you may have welcomed him with a tight embrace… However, you take a step back as he comes closer.

“What’s the matter?” He asks with a concerned expression.

“Is it…” You don’t want to ask him this but you want to confirm your suspicions, “Is it true the you were performing research that turned humans into monsters with the Hwarang…?” Didn’t you become a doctor because you wanted to save people’s lives?”

“Let me explain,” Ahro says, “sister.”

“Am I really your sister…?”

“Yes! And I’m your twin brother,” Ahro says with a smile, “After the Heo village was destroyed, I was adopted by the Hak clan. “This is proof alone of our relationship.” He motions down to the sword at his side, a near exact copy of yours. “It’s the left partner sword to yours. It’s a family heirloom that has been passed down through generations of our family.”

“Father,” you look to Jinsang, “Is what he says true?”

He nods solemnly, “Yes, we were hoping to speak with you about these matters eventually.”

When Sooyoung had visited you at the Hwarang compounds a while ago, she told you that you possess the blood of a Demon. It hasn’t quite sunk in yet, that you have a twin brother who’s standing right in front of you to confirm that, either…

“You are the heir to the Heo legacy, meaning you are destined to lead out clan to greatness,” Jinsang smiles, “Finally, you’ve come to accept it. Nothing could make me happier.”

Questions that had lied in the recesses of your mind that you’d had about yourself for years are finally getting answered. All of the things Sooyoung and Donghyuck had said… You are a Demon.

“So, what the hell are you creating fakes for?” You’d almost forgot that Donghyuck’s here as well, until he speaks towards your father. “What you’re doing is disgraceful, sullying the nobility of our Demon heritage.”

“Don’t you see?” Ahro frowns at him, “It’s to restore the Heo clan.”

“With the aid of the Hak clan, I have finally perfected the pimul.” Jinsang says sternly, “With this, we can successfully overthrow Silla and take credit for its success. If that were to happen, the powers in this kingdom can no longer control us!”

“It’s time for us to reclaim what’s rightfully ours and seek vengeance against the humans who destroyed our village,” Ahro adds, looking to your dour expression. “Are you not excited to lead the Heo clan? We can now create a life of peace, where no one would dare threaten us ever again.”

There is much to take in, you remain speechless after everything Ahro and your father say. Do they really think that pimul can defeat Silla and restore your people?

“…This sickens me.” Donghyuck says with a sigh, “You want credit for destroying a kingdom? All you’re doing is interrupting the petty squabble of human affairs. Such an endeavor is beneath us.”

“Sure, look down your nose at us,” Ahro grimaces, “But weren’t you working with the loyalists as well, Lee? What makes you think you’re any better than us?”

Donghyuck seethes with contempt. His eyes glowing with hatred towards Ahro. To what extent he’s been involved with the loyalists, you’re unsure. At least, though, you know it isn’t for something as selfish as trying to gain notoriety for toppling a monarch.

Instead of answering your brother right away, he fixes his gaze on you and speaks calmly, “Mind if I kill all of them, right here and now?”

“No,” you shake your head, “I’ll speak to them. I am the descendent of the head of the Heo clan.”

He smiles at this, “Hah, seems like yesterday that you didn’t even know you were a Demon.”

You take in a deep breath before addressing your brother, “I have seen many men in the Hwarang become Furies… If you think that serum is our solution, then I think we have no need to restore our clan.”

His eyes widen, “You mean to say— You think we should just grit our teeth and accept the death of our clan, our family? Our real parents were murdered, and you don’t want revenge? You’re so naïve.” Ahro tries to calm himself. “Besides, with or without the Furies or the pimul, humans will continue to engage in pointless conflicts until the extinction of their species. With all of the corruption plaguing the future of this kingdom… Drastic steps need to be taken, to prevent what happened from ever happening again.”

“Ahro…”

“This is going nowhere,” Donghyuck sighs, “But it’s to be expected.” With an air of composure, he unsheathes his blade and stands in front of you.

“I believe killing another Demon is a punishable act that makes the offender a ‘Stray Demon’, does it not?” Jinsang questions pointedly.

“However, the crime of creating fake Demons, to me, makes you even lower than that.” Donghyuck’s voice is stoic, bordering on anger, “Besides, as a Demon lord, it is my duty to crush those who have strayed from the path of righteousness.”

“I see,” Jinsang nods, “However, it’s a little unfair to expect me to cross swords with a Demon lord.” He puts two fingers to his lips, whistling loudly. Then— From the line of trees in the nearby darkness, pairs of red eyes begin to flash. What appears to be red-eyed, white-haired Furies begin to emerge, birthed from the foliage. It’s not only one or two, either. But nearly two dozen of them appear in front of you.

“You’ve sure been busy creating all of these Furies, haven’t you?” Donghyuck sneers, “Jinsang, I could kill you over a thousand times and it still wouldn’t be enough.”

“The human world is about to enter a new era…” Heo laughs, “We, Demons, need to rid ourselves of these archaic customs and adapt to survive.” Attention turned to the Furies, “Kill this man and feast on his blood.”

Once again, he whistles and the Furies gather around Donghyuck and you, their bloodlust rampant in their eyes.

“You think you can kill me and feast on my blood?” Donghyuck chuckles, raising his sword, “What a joke. Do you really think any of you weaklings stand a chance against me?!” He storms forth, slashing with grace at every Fury that stands in his path. However, striking anywhere other than a vital organ on a Fury means they can still heal… Furthermore, these Furies look to be a huge improvement over the ones the Hwarang have.

Just as that thought comes to mind—

“We’ll come back for you. Next time, I hope you give us a good answer,” Ahro says and you begin to run after the two, but before you can even get close to them, both vanish like smoke.

“I lost them…” Donghyuck huffs, turning around and slaughtering every remaining Fury after seeing the two disappear. He looks irate as he quickly sheathes his sword. After a moment, he turns to face you, “Why are you out here in the first place? Where are the Hwarang?”

You’re unsure if you want to share or not, Donghyuck’s been working with the loyalists, however… No matter how extreme he may take things, he had just saved you.

“I was on my way to Daegaya.”

“Got it,” he nods, “They abandoned their post and run with tucked tails away… Those pitiful dogs wouldn’t stop barking about protecting you. Why are you here alone?”

Heart heavy at the thought of Jisung’s death, you can’t find it within yourself to put it into words. Perhaps your silence tells him all he needs to hear, and he slowly turns away.

“… How ironic. Turns out the only one capable of keeping you safe when you needed them the most was me—not them” His words are strangely playful, and he smiles smugly without any real malice. Although your doubts about his character haven’t faded completely… It is true, he had kept you safe.

“What do you plan to do now?” He asks.

“I… will head to Daegaya.” You state, “I have to rejoin the other warriors as soon as possible.”

“Return to the Hwarang?” He frowns, “Don’t do that.”

“Why not?”

You know that he isn’t fond of the Hwarang in any way, so you wonder if this is just another insult to them. Normally, you feel as if he has no right to tell you how to live your life, however – just for today – you don’t stop him from explaining.

“All of those areas have been taken over by the loyalists,” he says grimly, “But, if your idea of a good time is seeing the rotting corpses of your friends, be my guest.”

“Well…” Thinking back to all that has been going on as you fled the Jeong residence, his words make sense. And if Donghyuck had never stumbled upon you, you likely would have been brutally murdered as well. Even if you do head to Daegaya, you have no idea if it would do yourself any good.

“Let me let you in on a little secret—the road to Daegaya is already being heavily monitored by Baekje infantry.” You stare at him in disbelief, how had they managed to surround the kingdom so quickly?

“That can’t be…”

“They won’t make it out of the capital,” He says plainly, “It’s only a matter of time until the Hwarang run out of allies and they’re forced to give up. If you go now, you’ll just be a burden for them. Don’t go.”

A dull pain resonates throughout your chest. “Is that… true?”

“What good would lying to you do to me? The kingdom’s done for.”

As much as it hurts, you think Donghyuck may be telling the truth. His crimson eyes stare at you solemnly

“… Isn’t that more reason for me to reunite with them? If I can tell them the road’s blocked, then maybe I can prevent them from walking into a trap.”

“Darling,” he sighs, closing his eyes, “You’ve got a real thick skull.” Donghyuck then turns from you, beginning to walk towards the darkness. You watch him become engulfed by the thick trees and you’re unsure if you should follow him or not.

It takes you a moment, and it doesn’t seem as if he’s manipulating you in any way, so you trust your instincts and run after him into the forest.

Donghyuck, you find, is hiking up, away from the main path. It seems as if he’s aiming for higher ground.

“The court sent a message to every domain in the vicinity of Seorabeol,” He says as you walk behind him, “’The Tang are meant to aid us, should recovery attempts fail, burn all that you have.’”

“What are you trying to say…?”

“That when push comes to shove, people care about themselves more than a higher power, humans are selfish creatures.” Donghyuck stops to turn and look at you, “You wonder why families turn their backs on the King? It’s because he asks them to do errant things.”

From the ledge you stand on, you have a clear overlook of Seorabeol, of the flames licking buildings and the catastrophic nature of war. You watch with bated breath as the city crumbles bit by bit.

“Like it or not, this war has been decided.” Donghyuck frowns, “When things fall apart like this, no matter how much you or your friends fight, it won’t change… Look, you and I are Demons, everything here, including the Hwarang, is a footnote, really.”

You feel powerless as Donghyuck says that. No matter how much you believe the situation itself is unfair, it won’t change anything.

“But… it’s still not over yet.” Maybe you want Donghyuck to acknowledge that there could still be a chance for the Hwarang, for the kingdom. You don’t fully trust him yet, but you trust him enough to think that he respects you enough to be truthful with you.

“We still have the Tang reinforcements, like you said—”

“Do I have to spell it out for you? They’re done!” He says, “Who in their right mind would willingly join a losing side? Face it, it’s over.”

“But—!” You want to offer one last rebuttal, but a sudden loud roar comes from the city. It looks as if the loyalists have breached the walls.

You fall quiet, and the two of you share a heavy silence. He’s waiting for you to speak first. However, you don’t have much to say. Bur for the sake of breaking tension, you ask him a question.

“What will become of the loyalists now, then?”

“They’ll rip Silla to shreds.” He states, “Anything that can be taken will be taken—their land, their ranks, their armies. Everything.”

“But, why?”

“Same bullshit reason as for anything else,” he shrugs, “Money, political clout, power, and honor. Humans would give up their own family members if it meant gaining any one of these things.” The directness of his answer surprises you. You thought that he’d keep all concerning the loyalists form you. Yet, his indictment on humans annoys you.

“So, you think the only reason people fight is for money?”

“Humans don’t fight with honor. It’s all just glorified robbery sprinkled with bullshit platitudes. All they care about is their false honor and money.”

You shake your head, “There may have been many wars that have been fought over the reasons you describe, but… Not everyone fights for money or political nobility.”

“Humans are all the same.” Donghyuck insists, “The pursuit for power and money is only matched by the lengths they will go to protect it. All these weaklings can do is drag people down in their desperate attempts to survive. Or have you already forgotten the poor souls who tried to attack you earlier… Muggers, thieves, two-bit warriors, all the same.”

“Even then, my father and brother were working to benefit their own people by overthrowing the King and making their name from doing so…” You say pointedly, “How’s that any better than humans who act on their selfishness?” Donghyuck’s silence pushes you to continue, “Besides, there are plenty of people who aren’t fighting for themselves, but rather to protect the people they care about.”

“You must be talking about the Hwarang.” Donghyuck’s shoulders fall as he breathes out a lengthy huff of air, “I guess I can understand what you’re trying to get at…”

“Huh?” You can’t help but say aloud, not expecting him to meet you halfway at all. The Hwarang don’t follow the same, cynical blueprint he attributes to the rest of mankind…

“Yeah,” he nods, “and they just happened to pick the losing side. Shit happens.”

The losing side… You glance to the burning city; can this really not be changed at all?

“If they lose this, Daegaya will be next…” Donghyuck notes, just as a gust of wind blows past you.

“Ah,” a voice calls out, “We’ve found you two.”

That voice…!

“You’re safe!” Sooyoung cries out, flanked by Seulgi. “I worried myself sick, thinking that you may have been caught in the crossfire.”

“What- What are you two doing here?” You ask incredulously.

“I was looking for you,” Sooyoung says, “I have an urgent message for you.”

“What is it?” Your head tilts as you ask.

“It’s about your father…” She hums, “This will take some time. Do you mind joining us?”

“But I need to find the Hwarang…” You state.

“… They are still trapped within the city, or at least the outskirts of it,” Seulgi frowns, “It would be dangerous to try and return you to them at this time.”

Your heart sinks, hoping there was a different way to go about things.

“… Let’s go,” Donghyuck says to you quietly, “All of your so-called errands you have to do for the Hwarang can be handled by other people. However, the only person who can stop Jinsang is you, the heir of the Heo clan.” The resolve within his voice drains whatever hesitation lay inside your head.

“Okay,” you nod and turn to Sooyoung, “Can you tell me what’s going on?”

“Of course, right this way.”

You follow Sooyoung to a village situated in a mountain pass near Seorabeol. There’s a serene aura that permeates from the air of the village, setting it apart from any other place you’ve ever visited. For some reason, a strange nostalgia washes over you. So, this is a Demon village—

“It’s this building,” Sooyoung says as she motions to an ornately decorated building straying off of the main street, “The others have already gathered, so let’s make our way inside.”

As you step inside, you see both Xiao Dejun and Dong Sicheng standing there.

“Took you long enough,” Dejun says as he crosses his arms, “You were with her, weren’t you, Donghyuck?”

“What a way to start the new year, huh?” Sicheng notes with a shrug of his shoulders, “Well, I saw it coming though.

“In a good mood, are we Sicheng?” Donghyuck asks.

“Well, for the Baekje peoples, this war’s been everything we wished for and then some,” he responds, “Kinda sucks that they needed Goguryeo to help them out, though.”

“So, a senseless conflict fought over absolutely nothing is something they wished for?”

“Well, maybe the humans are dealing with more than we think.” Sicheng frowns, “They have priorities other than defending their clans, unlike us.”

“Hmph,” Donghyuck notions, “You’re starting to sound like one of them.”

“Let’s leave it there, shall we?” Sooyoung interrupts, “Let’s get started.” She looks to you, “This may be a little difficult for you to listen to…”

“Don’t worry,” Donghyuck says, “She’s a little tougher than you give her credit for… She and I just fought Jinsang, and his pathetic band of Furies.”

“With Hak Ahro as well?” Her eyes widen, “So, can I assume that means you understand a good amount of what’s going on now?”

“…Yes,” you nod.

“For them to sustain the number of Furies they have… They will need many lives to feast upon.” Her lips curve down, “So, currently, they’re heading to—”

“They’re going west, aren’t they?” Donghyuck states, obviously not a question.

“Exactly.”

“Then we’ve heard enough,” he sighs, “We’re going to head there immediately and wipe out every single one of those Furies.” His gaze travels toward the exit, getting ready to leave.

“Wait!” You cry out, reaching for his sleeve, “I’ll go with you!”

“…With me?” He asks, almost taken aback, “Are you serious? Or does the fact that I’ve kicked your friends’ asses over and over again not mean anything to you?”

True, he seems to have loved antagonizing over the Hwarang… Even so, there’s a peculiar way he’s made you feel recently. He may not understand much about the human world, but you’re learning to see him as someone who holds his principles to a higher standard than others.

“Please, let me go with you.” You urge, “In the past, you may have been an enemy of the Hwarang, but… even I can agree that the Furies and pimul need to be destroyed.” If your father and his army are eventually going to cross swords with the Hwarang, then it’s obvious that serious blood would be shed. The thought of losing more friends, like you had Jisung, is something you can’t handle.

“Are you sure…?” Sooyoung seems surprised as well to see you behaving this way towards Donghyuck, her eyes widen as she looks at you. Eventually she speaks again, “I’m going to make this request of you as well, Lee. Please, allow her to join you.”

“…What?” Donghyuck asks.

“With you by her side, I am certain you have what it takes to keep her safe.” Sooyoung states.

“Are you serious?” Sicheng exclaims, “It’s like throwing a rabbit into a wolf’s den.”

“I want to honor her mission from stopping her brood from committing any more egregious sins against our people,” She states, “With Donghyuck by her side, then I have faith that she will live to see that through.”

“So,” a sly smile erupts on Donghyuck’s lips, “Everyone’s finally caught on to what I’ve been saying all along— that I can protect her.”

“What?!” Sooyoung shouts, “How dare you make this about yourself?!”

After the room’s cooled down, you find yourself at the entrance of the village, a goodbye party awaiting your departure.

“Please stay safe on your journey,” Sooyoung says, “If anything happens, I’ll have Seulgi act as a messenger on my behalf.”

“Thank you so much, Sooyoung,” you say gratefully as she turns to your companion.

“Donghyuck, be sure to watch out for her?” She says firmly, “If you let any harm come her way, then you know what punishment will await you.”

“Who the hell do you think you’re speaking to?” He laughs, “You think I’d hurt my future wife?”

“What is with your obsession of marrying her?!” Sooyoung shouts, “You’re simply acting as her bodyguard!”

“Oh,” Seulgi pulls you aside, “There’s something I wanted to tell you.”

“Huh?”

January 14th, 665 – The Northwestern Pass, Kingdom of Silla Afterwards, Donghyuck and you find yourself back on the road. Seulgi had stated that the men of the Hwarang that made it to Daegaya are now heading west as well. You wonder how all of them are doing right now… Your heart clenches heavily in your chest at how much you miss them.

“The road ahead of them is going to be a long, bloody one.”

Donghyuck had been proven wrong, you find, as to the outcome of the battle for Silla. In the final moments, when all had seemed lost to the Baekje loyalists, a barrage of Tang soldiers were able to capture them by surprise, securing the city with the aid of their general, Li Chi.

While Silla suffered tremendous loss, they would live to see another day. And now that they can steadily rise to their feet with Baekje defeated, they look to their northern neighbors, Goguryeo, for vengeance in the role they played in securing Buyeo Pung’s rally for aid.

The Hwarang, loyal to their Kingdom, have followed King Munmu to Ungjin as he convenes with Tang forces to plan for the upcoming war with Goguryeo.

“And it’s inevitable that some of them will die, if not flee at the first sign of danger. However, your life is no longer on that path. All that you can do now is hope that whatever bad news gets to you in time… Are you ready for that?”

“Yeah…” You nod slowly, “I made up my mind a long time ago.” If the Hwarang can keep their resolve to fight even when things seem bleak, then you can keep up yours as well.

You must complete your mission. You must defeat your father and brother. In your own way, it’s almost as if you’re helping the Hwarang from afar…

“Let’s get going,” Donghyuck says quickly, “Time is wasting.”

You glance to the road behind you one last time, and then to the path in front of you, the uncertain future awaiting you.

For the trip, Donghyuck had secured a horse to make the travel time less. He pulls himself onto the creature, plopping himself down on the horse’s back, and then reaches a hand out to you. You stare at his coarse hand for a moment, taking a few moments to place your hand in his. He grabs you tightly and pulls you up to sit behind him.

“Hold on tight,” he says, gently nudging the horse to tell it to go, “If you don’t, you’ll fall right off.”

“Okay,” you nod, but uncertainty resides in your voice. You’d actually never ridden a horse before. You have no idea where you should place your center of balance, or where to put your hands or feet… So, if you don’t want to fall off, you have to grab tightly onto Donghyuck.

“You aren’t holding on tight enough,” he says, noticing your loose grip.

“But I am…” You say quietly. Now that you think of it, you’ve never been this close to a man before, either. Just thinking about it makes you feel sheepish, and you become a little quieter as you retreat into yourself.

“As soon as we hit Hanseong, we’re going straight for Heo.” He states firmly, watching the path ahead, “If I’m right, they’re probably going to meet with local leaders to plan out attacks on Silla forces. In fact, they’ve probably already met with some of those bastards already.”

“Right…” You nod solemnly. In order to rebuild your home, your father and Ahro said they needed to gain power by helping overthrow Silla. In order to gain power, however, Donghyuck said that great sacrifices need to be made. So, you have to do whatever you can to stop them.

Holding onto this newfound resolve, you tightly embrace Donghyuck as you gallop towards the west.

#haechan x reader #haechan angst #nct imagines #nct scenarios #nct angst #nct 127 angst #nct 127 fluff #nct dream angst #nct dream imagines #nct dream fluff #hi it's 8:24 and i've been awake since one editing this lol

110 notes · View notes